Extension of Warkworth Coal Mine Environmental Impact Statement

Extension of Warkworth Coal Mine Extension of Warkworth environmental impact statement

Extension of Warkworth Coal Mine environmental impact statement

1 August 2002 Extension of Warkworth Coal Mine Prepared by Environmental Resources Management Australia Pty Ltd Building C, 33 Saunders Street, Pyrmont Environmental Impact Statement New South Wales 2009 Australia for Locked Bag 24 Broadway New South Wales 2007 Australia Coal & Allied on behalf of Warkworth Mining Limited

Telephone 02 8584 8888 Facsimile 02 8584 8800 Web www.erm.com August 2002

ISBN 1-875673-03-2 1 Prepared by: Karl Rosen Extension of Warkworth Coal Mine Position: Project Coordinator Signed:

Date: 30 August, 2002 Coal & Allied on Behalf of Warkworth Mining Limited Prepared by: Brett McLennan Position: Project Manager Signed: August 2002

Date: 30 August, 2002 Approved by: David Snashall Position: Project Director Signed:

Date: 30 August, 2002 Environmental Resources Management Australia Pty Ltd Quality System 8020044RP1

This report was prepared in accordance with the scope of services set out in the contract between Environmental Resources Management Australia Pty Ltd ABN 12 002 773 248 (ERM) and the Client. To the best of our knowledge, the proposal presented herein accurately reflects the Client’s intentions when the report was printed. However, the application of conditions of approval or impacts of unanticipated future events could modify the outcomes described in this document. In preparing the report, ERM used data, surveys, analyses, designs, plans and other information provided by the individuals and organisations referenced herein. While checks were undertaken to ensure that such materials were the correct and current versions of the materials provided, except as otherwise stated, ERM did not independently verify the accuracy or completeness of these information sources CONTENTS

EXECUTIVE SUMMARY i

1 INTRODUCTION 1

1.1 BACKGROUND 1 1.2 APPROVALS REQUIRED 2 1.3 THE SITE AND SURROUNDS 4 1.4 HISTORY OF WARKWORTH MINE 5 1.5 COMPANY PROFILE 5 1.6 OBJECTIVES OF THE PROPOSAL 7 1.6.1 PRODUCTION AND OPERATIONAL OBJECTIVES 7 1.6.2 ENVIRONMENTAL OBJECTIVES 8 1.6.3 SOCIOECONOMIC OBJECTIVES 8 1.7 EIS STRUCTURE 9

2 EXISTING OPERATIONS 11

2.1 MINING OPERATIONS AND FACILITIES 11 2.1.1 EXISTING OPERATIONS 11 2.1.2 SITE INFRASTRUCTURE 12 2.1.3 COAL PREPARATION AND HANDLING 12 2.1.4 SITE SERVICES 15 2.1.5 EMPLOYMENT STATUS AND OPERATING HOURS 16 2.1.6 ACCESS 16 2.2 WATER MANAGEMENT 16 2.2.1 OVERVIEW 16 2.2.2 WATER SUPPLY AND USE 17 2.2.3 MINE WATER MANAGEMENT 19 2.3 ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT AND MONITORING 20 2.3.1 OVERVIEW OF EMS 20 2.3.2 METEOROLOGICAL MONITORING 20 2.3.3 SURFACE AND GROUNDWATER 20 2.3.4 EROSION AND SEDIMENT MANAGEMENT 21 2.3.5 AIR QUALITY MANAGEMENT 21 2.3.6 NOISE MANAGEMENT 22 2.3.7 VIBRATION AND AIRBLAST 22 2.3.8 COMMUNITY RELATIONS 22 2.3.9 REPORTING PROCEDURES 23

3 PROPOSAL DESCRIPTION 25

3.1 OVERVIEW OF PROPOSED MODIFICATIONS TO MINING OPERATIONS 25 3.2 MINING PLANNING 25 3.2.1 MINE DESIGN 25 3.2.2 MINING METHOD 27 CONTENTS

3.3 SCHEDULE AND QUANTITIES 30 3.4 MINING EQUIPMENT 30 3.5 MINE INFRASTRUCTURE 32 3.5.1 GENERAL 32 3.5.2 BRIDGES OVER THE PUTTY ROAD 32 3.5.3 BY-PASS ROAD 33 3.5.4 CONVEYOR 34 3.5.5 UPGRADE OF OFFICE AND MAINTENANCE FACILITIES 34 3.6 COAL PREPARATION, HANDLING AND REJECTS DISPOSAL 35 3.7 WATER MANAGEMENT SYSTEM 35 3.8 WORKFORCE AND OPERATING HOURS 37 3.9 REHABILITATION 38 3.9.1 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS 38 3.9.2 REHABILITATION PLANNING 39 3.9.3 LANDFORM DESIGN 40 3.9.4 REVEGETATION 40 3.9.5 REHABILITATION TECHNIQUES 41 3.9.6 FINAL LAND USE 43 3.10 GREEN OFFSET STRATEGY 43 3.10.1 NON DISTURBANCE AREAS 44 3.10.2 HABITAT MANAGEMENT AREAS 45 3.10.3 MANAGEMENT MEASURES 45 3.11 CONTRIBUTION TO RESEARCH 46 3.12 MONITORING AND REPORTING 46 3.12.1 NON DISTURBANCE AREAS 47 3.12.2 HABITAT MANAGEMENT AREAS 47 3.13 EXTINGUISHMENT OF EXISTING CONSENT 47

4 PLANNING AND REGULATORY FRAMEWORK 49

4.1 GENERAL 49 4.2 COMMONWEALTH LEGISLATION 49 4.3 NEW SOUTH WALES LEGISLATION 50 4.3.1 GENERAL 50 4.3.2 REQUIREMENT FOR DEVELOPMENT CONSENT 50 4.3.3 STATE SIGNIFICANT DEVELOPMENT 50 4.3.4 DESIGNATED DEVELOPMENT 51 4.3.5 REQUIREMENT TO PREPARE AN EIS 52 4.3.6 REQUIREMENT TO PREPARE A SIS 52 4.3.7 INTEGRATED DEVELOPMENT 53 4.4 HERITAGE ACT, 1977 55 4.5 PLANNING INSTRUMENTS 56 4.5.1 GENERAL 56 4.5.2 SINGLETON LEP 56 4.5.3 HUNTER REP 57 4.5.4 HUNTER HERITAGE REP 62 4.5.5 SEPP 11 – TRAFFIC GENERATING DEVELOPMENTS 62 CONTENTS

4.5.6 SEPP 26 – LITTORAL RAINFORESTS 63 4.5.7 SEPP 34 – MAJOR EMPLOYMENT-GENERATING INDUSTRIAL DEVELOPMENT 63 4.5.8 SEPP 44 – KOALA HABITAT PROTECTION 64 4.5.9 UPPER HUNTER CUMULATIVE IMPACT STUDY 64

5 ISSUES IDENTIFICATION 65

5.1 ISSUES IDENTIFICATION PROCESS 65 5.2 GOVERNMENT CONSULTATION 65 5.2.1 GENERAL 65 5.2.2 PLANNING FOCUS MEETING 65 5.2.3 STATE GOVERNMENT AGENCY CONSULTATION 66 5.2.4 ABORIGINAL GROUPS 67 5.2.5 SINGLETON SHIRE COUNCIL 70 5.2.6 COMMONWEALTH LIAISON 70 5.3 COMMUNITY CONSULTATION 71 5.3.1 OVERVIEW OF STRATEGY 71 5.3.2 WARKWORTH MINE EMPLOYEES 72 5.3.3 NEAREST NEIGHBOURS 72 5.3.4 NEWSLETTERS 72 5.3.5 INFORMATION DAYS 73 5.3.6 WARKWORTH COMMUNITY CONSULTATIVE COMMITTEE 74 5.3.7 CONSULTATION WITH SURROUNDING MINES 74 5.3.8 KEY COMMUNITY ISSUES 74 5.4 EIS EXHIBITION 74 5.4.1 GUIDELINES FOR MAKING A SUBMISSION 76 5.5 ISSUES SUMMARY 77

6 SOCIOECONOMICS 79

6.1 INTRODUCTION 79 6.2 METHODOLOGY 80 6.3 SOCIOECONOMIC PROFILE 81 6.3.1 HUNTER VALLEY REGION 81 6.3.2 SINGLETON LGA 82 6.4 VALUE OF THE COAL INDUSTRY 85 6.5 CONTRIBUTION OF CNA AND WARKWORTH MINE TO SINGLETON LGA AND THE HUNTER REGION 86 6.5.1 CNA CONSULTATION WITH THE COMMUNITY 86 6.5.2 CONTRIBUTION TO THE LOCAL COMMUNITY 87 6.5.3 ASSISTING WARKWORTH MINE EMPLOYEES 88 6.5.4 COMPLAINT HANDLING PROCEDURES 88 6.6 POTENTIAL IMPACTS AND IMPACT ASSESSMENT 88 6.6.1 OUTCOME 189 6.6.2 OUTCOME 292 6.6.3 CUMULATIVE IMPACTS 96 CONTENTS

6.7 MITIGATION 97 6.8 CONCLUSION 98

7 PHYSICAL ENVIRONMENT 101

7.1 GEOLOGY AND COAL RESOURCE 101 7.1.1 REGIONAL GEOLOGY 101 7.1.2 GEOLOGY OF CCL 753 AND MINING LEASE 1412 101 7.1.3 STRUCTURE 103 7.1.4 RESOURCES AND RESERVES 103 7.2 TOPOGRAPHY 104 7.2.1 REGIONAL TOPOGRAPHY 104 7.2.2 LOCAL TOPOGRAPHY 105 7.3 LAND USE 105 7.3.1 REGIONAL LAND USE PATTERNS 105 7.3.2 LOCAL SETTING 105 7.3.3 LAND OWNERSHIP AND LOCAL SETTING 106 7.4 SOILS AND LAND CAPABILITY 108 7.4.1 INTRODUCTION 108 7.4.2 SURVEY AND METHODOLOGY 108 7.4.3 SITE SOILS 109 7.4.4 SOIL SUITABILITY FOR REHABILITATION 111 7.4.5 LAND CAPABILITY 111 7.5 CLIMATE 112 7.5.1 GENERAL 112 7.5.2 TEMPERATURE 112 7.5.3 RAINFALL 112 7.5.4 WIND 113 7.6 LAND MANAGEMENT 114 7.6.1 WEED CONTROL 114 7.6.2 FERAL ANIMAL CONTROL 114 7.6.3 BUSHFIRE MANAGEMENT 114

8 ECOLOGY 115

8.1 INTRODUCTION 115 8.2 BACKGROUND 115 8.3 METHODOLOGY 116 8.4 RESULTS 117 8.4.1 THE LOCALITY, STUDY AREA AND SUBJECT SITE 117 8.4.2 VEGETATION COMMUNITIES 118 8.4.3 FAUNA 121 8.4.4 REGIONALLY SIGNIFICANT FLORA AND FAUNA 122 8.4.5 SEPP 44 122 8.4.6 MATTERS OF NES 123 8.4.7 THREATENED SPECIES 123 8.5 IMPACTS 124 CONTENTS

8.5.1 GENERAL 124 8.5.2 VEGETATION CLEARANCE AND HABITAT LOSS 125 8.5.3 HABITAT FRAGMENTATION AND REGIONAL CONNECTIVITY 125 8.5.4 REGIONAL CONNECTIVITY 126 8.5.5 OTHER INDIRECT IMPACTS 126 8.5.6 KEY THREATENING PROCESSES 127 8.5.7 REGIONALLY SIGNIFICANT FLORA AND FAUNA 128 8.5.8 THREATENED SPECIES 128 8.6 GREEN OFFSETS AND AMELIORATION MEASURES 131 8.7 CONCLUSIONS 134

9 WATER RESOURCES 137

9.1 INTRODUCTION 137 9.2 SURFACE WATER HYDROLOGY 137 9.3 GROUNDWATER HYDROLOGY 138 9.3.1 INTRODUCTION 138 9.3.2 EXISTING BORES AND WELLS 139 9.3.3 OBSERVATION PIEZOMETERS 139 9.3.4 REGIONAL PIEZOMETRIC SURFACE 140 9.3.5 COAL MEASURES HYDRAULIC PROPERTIES 140 9.3.6 COAL MEASURES WATER QUALITY 141 9.4 GROUNDWATER IMPACTS 142 9.4.1 GENERAL 142 9.4.2 OPEN CUT DEPRESSURISATION 142 9.4.3 RECOVERY OF AQUIFER PRESSURES POST MINING 143 9.4.4 FINAL VOID GROUNDWATER QUALITY 143 9.5 MINE WATER MANAGEMENT 144 9.5.1 INTRODUCTION 144 9.6 MINE SITE WATER BALANCE 145 9.6.1 GENERAL 145 9.7 ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACTS 147 9.7.1 INTRODUCTION 147 9.7.2 LOSS OF COAL MEASURE AQUIFER PRESSURES 147 9.7.3 CHANGE IN GROUNDWATER QUALITY 148 9.7.4 LEAKAGE FROM THE ALLUVIAL LANDS 148 9.7.5 LOSS OF CATCHMENT RUNOFF 148 9.7.6 CHANGE IN RUNOFF WATER QUALITY 149 9.7.7 FINAL VOID 149 9.8 CONCLUSION 149

10 AIR QUALITY 151

10.1 INTRODUCTION 151 10.2 AIR QUALITY ASSESSMENT CRITERIA AND METHODS 151 10.3 DISPERSION METEOROLOGY 152 10.4 EXISTING AIR QUALITY 153 CONTENTS

10.4.1 MONITORING NETWORKS 153 10.4.2 CONCENTRATION 153 10.4.3 DEPOSITION 154 10.4.4 ASSESSMENT CRITERIA 154 10.5 ESTIMATED EMISSIONS 154 10.5.1 PRE-AMBLE 154 10.5.2 CONTROLS 155 10.5.3 ESTIMATED EMISSIONS FROM WARKWORTH MINE 156 10.5.4 ESTIMATED EMISSIONS FROM OTHER LOCAL MINES 156 10.6 ASSESSMENT OF IMPACTS DUE TO DUST EMISSION 157 10.6.1 PREAMBLE 157

10.6.2 WORST-CASE 24 HOUR PM10 CONCENTRATIONS (EPISODIC DUST) 157 10.7 GREENHOUSE ISSUES 158 10.8 MITIGATION MEASURES 160 10.9 CONCLUSION 161

11 NOISE AND VIBRATION 163

11.1 INTRODUCTION 163 11.2 EXISTING BACKGROUND NOISE 163 11.3 NOISE CRITERIA 164 11.3.1 OPERATIONAL NOISE 164 11.3.2 CUMULATIVE NOISE 165 11.3.3 SLEEP DISTURBANCE 165 11.3.4 BLASTING 166 11.4 OPERATIONAL NOISE MODELLING 166 11.4.1 CALCULATION PROCEDURES 166 11.4.2 NOISE SOURCES 167 11.4.3 NOISE MODEL VALIDATION 167 11.4.4 ASSESSABLE WEATHER CONDITIONS 167 11.4.5 MITIGATION 168 11.4.6 RESULTS 168 11.5 BLASTING NOISE AND VIBRATION 172 11.6 OTHER NOISE EMISSIONS 173 11.6.1 CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITIES 173 11.6.2 ROAD TRAFFIC NOISE 174 11.6.3 RAIL TRAFFIC NOISE 174 11.7 NOISE MONITORING AND MANAGEMENT 174 11.8 CONCLUSION 175

12 ABORIGINAL HERITAGE 177

12.1 INTRODUCTION 177 12.2 AIMS OF THE STUDY 177 12.3 ABORIGINAL CONSULTATION 178 CONTENTS

12.4 PREVIOUS ARCHAEOLOGICAL INVESTIGATIONS AT WARKWORTH MINE 178 12.5 METHODOLOGY 179 12.5.1 SURFACE SURVEY 179 12.5.2 TEST EXCAVATION 180 12.6 RESULTS 182 12.7 SIGNIFICANCE ASSESSMENT 186 12.7.1 ABORIGINAL CULTURAL/SOCIAL SIGNIFICANCE 186 12.7.2 ARCHAEOLOGICAL SIGNIFICANCE 187 12.8 IMPACT ASSESSMENT 189 12.8.1 POTENTIAL IMPACTS 189 12.9 SECTION 90 CONSENT REQUIRED 190 12.10 RECOMMENDATIONS 190 12.11 CONCLUSION 191

13 VISUAL ASSESSMENT 193

13.1 INTRODUCTION 193 13.2 STUDY METHODOLOGY 193 13.3 EXISTING VISUAL CHARACTER 194 13.3.1 REGIONAL CONTEXT 194 13.3.2 LOCAL SETTING 194 13.4 SITE VISIBILITY 195 13.4.1 OVERVIEW 195 13.4.2 WESTERN VIEWER LOCATIONS 196 13.4.3 EASTERN AND NORTHERN VIEWER LOCATIONS 199 13.4.4 ROAD USERS 200 13.4.5 SITE LIGHTING 202 13.5 VISUAL ABSORPTION CAPACITY 203 13.5.1 OVERVIEW 203 13.5.2 WESTERN VIEWER LOCATIONS 203 13.5.3 EASTERN AND NORTHERN VIEWER LOCATIONS 204 13.5.4 ROAD USERS 204 13.6 VISUAL SENSITIVITY 204 13.6.1 WESTERN VIEWER LOCATIONS 205 13.6.2 EASTERN AND NORTHERN VIEWER LOCATIONS 205 13.6.3 ROAD USERS 206 13.7 MINE PLANNING AND MITIGATION 206 13.8 SUMMARY OF IMPACTS 207

14 TRANSPORT AND TRAFFIC 209

14.1 EXISTING PUBLIC ROAD NETWORK 209 14.1.1 ROAD NETWORK 209 14.1.2 EXISTING TRAFFIC VOLUMES 211 14.1.3 FUTURE ROAD NETWORK CHANGES 212 14.1.4 ROAD SAFETY 212 CONTENTS

14.2 INTERNAL HAUL ROADS 213 14.3 CONSTRUCTION PHASE TRAFFIC GENERATION 213 14.3.1 OVERVIEW 213 14.3.2 CONSTRUCTION WORKFORCE 214 14.3.3 CONSTRUCTION VEHICLE MOVEMENTS 214 14.4 CONSTRUCTION IMPACTS AND MITIGATION MEASURES 217 14.4.1 CONSTRUCTION TRAFFIC 217 14.4.2 ROAD CLOSURES 218 14.4.3 MITIGATION MEASURES 218 14.5 MINE OPERATION PHASE TRAFFIC GENERATION AND IMPACTS 219 14.5.1 EMPLOYEE TRAFFIC GENERATION 219 14.5.2 MINE OPERATIONS AND SERVICE VEHICLES 221 14.5.3 IMPACTS ON INTERSECTIONS 222 14.5.4 EQUIPMENT TRANSFER 223 14.5.5 BLASTING 224 14.5.6 MITIGATION MEASURES 224 14.6 CONCLUSION 224

15 CUMULATIVE IMPACTS 227

15.1 CUMULATIVE IMPACT SETTING 227 15.2 NOISE 227 15.3 AIR QUALITY 229 15.4 VISUAL ENVIRONMENT 231 15.5 TRAFFIC AND TRANSPORT 232 15.6 WATER RESOURCES 232 15.7 ECOLOGY 233

16 ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT AND MONITORING 235

16.1 ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT SYSTEM 235 16.2 OUTLINE OF THE CONSTRUCTION EMP 236 16.2.1 INTRODUCTION 236 16.2.2 CONSTRUCTION SITES 236 16.2.3 CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITIES 237 16.2.4 ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT PROCEDURES 237 16.3 OUTLINE OF THE OPERATIONAL EMP 237 16.3.1 INTRODUCTION 237 16.3.2 OPERATIONAL SITES 238 16.3.3 OPERATIONAL ACTIVITIES 238 16.3.4 ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT 238 16.4 SUMMARY OF MITIGATION MEASURES 239 16.4.1 GENERAL 239 16.4.2 SOCIOECONOMIC 239 16.4.3 LAND MANAGEMENT 239 CONTENTS

16.4.4 REHABILITATION AND REGENERATION 240 16.4.5 FLORA AND FAUNA 241 16.4.6 WATER RESOURCES 243 16.4.7 AIR QUALITY 245 16.4.8 NOISE 247 16.4.9 VIBRATION 248 16.4.10 ABORIGINAL HERITAGE 249 16.4.11 VISUAL 251 16.4.12 TRAFFIC AND TRANSPORT 252 16.5 MONITORING PROGRAM 253 16.6 COMMUNITY CONSULTATION 253 16.7 REPORTING REQUIREMENTS 254

17 PROJECT ALTERNATIVES AND JUSTIFICATION 255

17.1 INTRODUCTION 255 17.2 PROJECT ALTERNATIVES 255 17.2.1 OVERVIEW OF PROJECT ALTERNATIVES 255 17.2.2 PROJECT ALTERNATIVE 1 256 17.2.3 PROJECT ALTERNATIVE 2 257 17.2.4 PROJECT ALTERNATIVE 3 257 17.2.5 PROJECT ALTERNATIVE 4 258 17.2.6 PROJECT ALTERNATIVE 5 259 17.2.7 OVERVIEW OF IMPACTS OF PROJECT ALTERNATIVES 260 17.3 ECOLOGICALLY SUSTAINABLE DEVELOPMENT 260 17.3.1 INTRODUCTION 260 17.3.2 PRECAUTIONARY PRINCIPLE 261 17.3.3 SOCIAL EQUITY INCLUDING INTERGENERATIONAL EQUITY 262 17.3.4 CONSERVATION OF BIOLOGICAL DIVERSITY AND MAINTENANCE OF ECOLOGICAL INTEGRITY 263 17.3.5 IMPROVED VALUATION AND PRICING OF ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES 264 17.4 FINDINGS OF EIS 265 17.4.1 INTRODUCTION 265 17.4.2 BIOPHYSICAL CONSIDERATIONS 265 17.4.3 SOCIAL CONSIDERATIONS 266 17.4.4 ECONOMIC CONSIDERATIONS 269 17.5 CONSEQUENCES OF NOT PROCEEDING WITH THE PROPOSED EXTENSION 269 17.6 CONCLUSION 270 CONTENTS

REFERENCES 273

LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS 285

GLOSSARY 291

ANNEX ADIRECTOR-GENERAL REQUIREMENTS ANNEX BEIS STUDY TEAM ANNEX CCOMMUNITY NEWSLETTERS ANNEX DEIS CERTIFICATE

LIST OF TABLES

TABLE 1.1 SPECIALIST COMPANIES INVOLVED IN PREPARATION OF EIS 3

TABLE 1.2 HISTORY OF WARKWORTH MINE 5

TABLE 1.3 JOINT VENTURE PARTNERS IN WML 6

TABLE 1.4 CNA’S INTERESTS IN UPPER HUNTER VALLEY 6

TABLE 2.1 SUPPLY HISTORY TO WARKWORTH MINE FROM THE MTWSS 17

TABLE 2.2 SUMMARY OF WATER MANAGEMENT SYSTEM’S MAIN STORAGES 19

TABLE 3.1 SCHEDULE OF OVERBURDEN AND INTERBURDEN MOVED 30

TABLE 3.2 SCHEDULE OF COAL PRODUCTION AT WARKWORTH MINE 30

TABLE 3.3 PROPOSED TYPICAL EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE 31

TABLE 3.4 NUMBER OF FULL TIME EMPLOYEE EQUIVALENTS STARTING AT WARKWORTH MINE AND MOUNT THORLEY OPERATIONS 38

TABLE 3.5 PASTURE SPECIES AT WARKWORTH MINE 41 TABLE 5.1 SUMMARY OF AGENCY ISSUES 68

TABLE 5.2 KEY COMMUNITY ISSUES 75

TABLE 6.1 FUTURE SCENARIOS AND THEIR IMPLICATIONS FOR WARKWORTH MINE 80

TABLE 6.2 POPULATION GROWTH OF THE SINGLETON LGA COMPARED TO HUNTER SD AND NSW 1991 TO 2001 83

TABLE 6.3 AGE DISTRIBUTION FOR SINGLETON LGA 2001 84

TABLE 6.4 TENURE TYPE FOR SINGLETON LGA 2001 84

TABLE 6.5 WEEKLY INDIVIDUAL INCOME FOR THE SINGLETON LGA 2001 85

TABLE 6.6 RESIDENTIAL LOCATION OF THE WARKWORTH MINE WORKFORCE 91

TABLE 6.7 WARKWORTH MINE AND MOUNT THORLEY OPERATIONS WORKFORCE OVER THE LIFE OF PROPOSAL 94

TABLE 6.8 ECONOMIC CONTRIBUTION OF WARKWORTH MINE 95

TABLE 7.1 COAL SEAM CHARACTERISTICS 104

TABLE 7.2 LAND USE IN THE UPPER HUNTER 106

TABLE 7.3 DETAILS ON OWNERSHIP OF PRIVATE PROPERTIES SURROUNDING WARKWORTH MINE 107

TABLE 7.4 SOIL ANALYTICAL RESULTS 110

TABLE 7.5 TOPDRESSING AVAILABILITY 111

TABLE 7.6 AVERAGE MONTHLY TEMPERATURE 113

TABLE 7.7 AVERAGE RAINFALL 113

TABLE 7.8 WEED SPECIES KNOWN TO OCCUR AT WARKWORTH MINE 114

TABLE 8.1 VEGETATION COMMUNITIES IN THE STUDY AREA 119

TABLE 8.2 AFFECTED SPECIES 124

TABLE 8.3 POTENTIAL IMPACTS ON AFFECTED SPECIES 130

TABLE 8.4 OFFSET MEASURES FOR AFFECTED SPECIES 132

TABLE 8.5 OFFSET MEASURES FOR VEGETATION COMMUNITIES (APPROXIMATE HECTARES) 133 TABLE 9.1 IMPACT OF PROPOSED EXTENSION ON SURFACE DRAINAGES (NOT INCLUDING REHABILITATION) 138

TABLE 9.2 `COAL MEASURES PERMEABILITY ESTIMATES 141

TABLE 9.3 GENERALISED WATER QUALITY CRITERIA AND COMPARISON WITH LOCAL WATER 141

TABLE 9.4 SUMMARY OF CURRENT AND FUTURE MINE WATER USAGE RATES 145

TABLE 10.1 IMPACT ASSESSMENT CRITERIA FOR POLLUTANTS 151

TABLE 10.2 IMPACT ASSESSMENT CRITERIA FOR DUST FALLOUT 152

TABLE 10.3 SUMMARY OF ESTIMATED TSP DUST EMISSION FROM WARKWORTH MINE (KG/Y) 156

TABLE 10.4 COMPARISON OF MAXIMUM MEASURED (OR INFERRED)

AND MAXIMUM PREDICTED 24 HOUR PM10 CONCENTRATIONS (1 NOVEMBER 2000 TO 31 OCTOBER 2001) 158

TABLE 10.5 ESTIMATED ENERGY REQUIREMENTS FOR MINING 159

TABLE 10.6 CONTROL PROCEDURES FOR WIND BLOWN DUST 160

TABLE 10.7 CONTROL PROCEDURES FOR MINING GENERATED DUST SOURCES 160

TABLE 11.1 AMBIENT NOISE MONITORING SURVEY 164

TABLE 11.2 OPERATIONAL NOISE CRITERIA 165

TABLE 11.3 NOISE SOURCES 167

TABLE 11.4 MITIGATED OPERATIONAL NOISE LEVELS 170

TABLE 11.5 SLEEP DISTURBANCE IMPACT – INP WIND (VALIDATED) 171

TABLE 11.6 CUMULATIVE NOISE AT PROPERTIES AFTER MITIGATION, DB (A) 172

TABLE 11.7 BLASTING ASSESSMENT 173

TABLE 12.1 SITE DESCRIPTIONS AND CONTENTS 182

TABLE 14.1 TRAFFIC VOLUMES 211

TABLE 14.2 ANTICIPATED CONSTRUCTION WORKFORCE 214

TABLE 14.3 CONSTRUCTION VEHICLE MOVEMENTS 217

TABLE 14.4 NUMBER OF EMPLOYEE VEHICLES ACCESSING OPERATIONS 220

TABLE 14.5 EMPLOYEE ACCESS DIRECTION TO WARKWORTH 222 TABLE 15.1 CUMULATIVE NOISE ASSESSMENT 229

TABLE 17.1 SUMMARY OF PROJECT ALTERNATIVES 255

TABLE 17.2 OPTION EVALUATION MATRIX 260 EXECUTIVE SUMMARY

INTRODUCTION

Warkworth Mine is operated by Warkworth Mining Limited (WML) on behalf of Warkworth Associates, an unincorporated joint venture comprising of four partners. Coal and Allied (CNA) is the majority shareholder and is also the mine manager and operator.

This environmental impact statement (EIS) has been prepared by Environmental Resources Management Australia Pty Limited (ERM) in association with a number of specialist companies. The EIS has been prepared to support a development application (DA) to be submitted to planningNSW, for the proposed extension of Warkworth Mine.

BACKGROUND

Warkworth Mine is located in the Upper Hunter Valley of NSW. It is an existing open cut coal mine that has been producing coal, for export and domestic markets, since operations began in 1981. Currently, Warkworth Mine produces 10 million tonnes per annum (Mtpa) of unprocessed raw coal, which equates to approximately 7 Mtpa of saleable coal.

Based on existing mining methods and rates of production, it is expected that the mine will intersect existing approval boundaries by April 2003. To allow continuity of the operation, approval is required for an extension to the mine by this date. If approval is not achieved, mining operations will be required to wind down and ultimately cease.

The proposal continues all aspects of the Warkworth Mine as it presently operates and extends them as described in this EIS. This includes extending two pits (known as the North and West Pits) to the west and one pit (Woodlands Pit) to the south. Wallaby Scrub Road will form the extent of the extension of the North and West Pit, while The Putty Road and the Mining Lease boundary will form the extent of the extension of the Woodlands Pit.

APPROVALS

Two main approvals for the proposed extension to Warkworth Mine are required to be obtained, including development consent from the NSW Minister for Planning under the provisions of the Environmental Planning and Assessment (EP&A) Act, 1979 and approval from the Commonwealth Minister for the Environment under the provisions of the Environmental Planning and

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/5 SEPTEMBER 2002 i Biodiversity Conservation (EPBC) Act, 1999. In addition, before development consent can be granted, the Minister for Planning must consult with the NSW Minister for the Environment.

While two main approvals are required to be obtained, only one assessment process is required to be undertaken. This is the NSW environmental impact assessment (EIA) process set out in the EP&A Act and the Threatened Species Conservation (TSC) Act, 1995, which have been accredited by the Commonwealth Environment Minister. The EP&A Act and TSC Act require the preparation of an EIS and a species impact statement (SIS) to accompany the DA to the Minister for Planning for the proposed extension.

THE SITE AND SURROUNDS

Warkworth Mine is located approximately 12 kilometres (km) south west of Singleton, in the Upper Hunter Valley. The existing mine is bounded by Jerry’s Plains Road (also known as the Golden Highway) to the east and north, The Putty Road to the south and Wallaby Scrub Road to the west.

Warkworth Mine is located in an area dominated by coal mines including Hunter Valley Operations and Wambo Mine to the north and north west and Mount Thorley Operations and Bulga Mine to the south. Other related industry in the locality includes the Mount Thorley Coal Loader (MTCL) and the Mount Thorley Industrial Estate. The remainder of the locality predominantly consists of agricultural land uses, with the villages of Bulga and Warkworth located to south west and north west of the mine respectively.

The site of the proposed extension contains a mixture of cleared pasture, regrowth woodland and woodland. A large area of dry sclerophyll woodland and regrowth woodland of varying quality occurs in the northern part of the site. Regrowth woodland and cleared land occurs within the centre and south of the site. All of the woodland on the site appears to have been logged and cleared for grazing over the last 50 years and is bisected by roads, tracks and powerline easements.

The site contains gentle to moderate slopes located midway between the Hunter River and the Wollombi Brook. The highest point on the site, at 165 metres (m) to Australian Height Datum (AHD), occurs on the southern part of the site which forms part of main north-trending ridge which has been intersected by current mining operations in the North Pit. The ridge separates the catchments of the Hunter River and Wollombi Brook.

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/5 SEPTEMBER 2002 ii PROPOSAL DESCRIPTION

Objectives

Detailed planning was undertaken in the formulation of the preferred alternative in order to balance impacts upon the local environment, community needs and the economic viability of the proposal. The specific aims of the project were therefore divided into three categories including:

• production and operational objectives;

• environmental objectives; and

• socioeconomic objectives.

These guided the planning and assessment process and the formulation of the preferred alternative for the extension to Warkworth Mine.

Alternatives

A number of alternatives were considered in developing the proposal and assessed against the “do-nothing” option of ceasing mining operations at the existing consent boundaries. The alternatives included progressing mining in the extension area via underground mining methods and a variety of alternative open cut mine footprints, which were designed to meet a variety of often conflicting objectives, including maximising the utilisation of coal resource, environment protection and biodiversity conservation.

An options evaluation matrix has been developed to allow a qualitative assessment of the biophysical, social and economic considerations associated with each project alternative. The preferred alternative is based on a revision of the original mine plan, retaining the elevated ridges located near the northern and southern boundaries of the Mining Lease.

The elevated ridges conserve significant Aboriginal archaeological resources, retain habitat value, provide visual screening and act as buffers to assist in the amelioration of noise and dust impacts to surrounding residents. The preferred alternative was selected as it provides the greatest balance between the operational, environmental and socioeconomic objectives of the proposal.

The Proposal

The proposal involves continuing existing mining operations at Warkworth Mine beyond current consent boundaries. This involves:

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 iii • extending the North and West Pits to the west; and

• extending the Woodlands Pits to the south.

Wallaby Scrub Road will form the limit to the extension of the North and West Pits, while The Putty Road and the Mining Lease boundary will form the limit to the extension of the Woodlands Pit.

The proposal also allows for future consolidation of the operations at Warkworth Mine and the adjacent Mount Thorley Operations if required. New infrastructure required as a part of the proposal includes:

• the construction of two new bridges over The Putty Road linking Warkworth Mine and Mount Thorley Operations;

• the construction of a by-pass side road adjacent to The Putty Road and modifications to The Putty Road to facilitate the crossing of heavy equipment;

• the construction of a new conveyor from Warkworth Mine to Mount Thorley Operations and MTCL; and

• the upgrade of office and maintenance facilities at Warkworth Mine.

Warkworth Mine is currently operating with an approval for output of 7 Mtpa saleable coal, which equates to approximately 10 Mtpa of run of mine (ROM) coal. The extension involves increasing the output of the mine to a maximum of 18 Mtpa ROM under existing operational practises.

The method of mining will continue under the existing operational practises, which can be divided into four parts:

• vegetation clearing and topsoil stripping;

• overburden and interburden removal;

• coal removal; and

• progressive rehabilitation.

Coal preparation, handling and rejects disposal will also continue under existing operational practices and through the implementation of the operational synergies allowed for by the new mine infrastructure. Raw coal will be transferred directly, via internal haul roads, to either the Warkworth Mine or Mount Thorley Operations’ Coal Preparation Plants (CPPs) for processing, prior to transfer to the MTCL. Overburden may also be transferred between Warkworth Mine and Mount Thorley Operations to assist in rehabilitation of voids.

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 iv The existing water management system (WMS) at Warkworth Mine will be extended to the extension area with minor changes to allow for the provision of water sharing with Mount Thorley Operations, the MTCL and Hunter Valley Operations. To further augment operational synergies, coarse and fine reject materials may also be transferred between Warkworth Mine and Mount Thorley Operations.

ISSUES IDENTIFICATION

A consultation strategy was undertaken as a part of the EIA process to assist in the identification of key issues for consideration by CNA and the EIS project team. Consultation with a range of government and community stakeholders was incorporated into the strategy to both inform the stakeholders of the project and to allow any issues of concern to be raised at an early stage of the planning process and incorporated into the EIS.

Government Consultation

All levels of government were consulted in order to identify all key issues, including consultation with the Commonwealth’s Environment Australia (EA), a number of State Government agencies and Singleton Shire Council (SSC). Government consultation has been both formal and informal and has been used to refine the EIS and project planning. In particular, extensive consultation has been conducted with planningNSW, National Parks and Wildlife Service (NPWS), Environment Protection Authority (EPA), Department of Mineral Resources (DMR), Department of Land and Water Conservation (DLWC) and SSC.

Issues raised by government agencies were largely dependent upon the portfolios for which they manage. For example, NSW Fisheries was concerned with the impact upon aquatic habitats and NSW Agriculture raised issues regarding the productivity of the land following mining operations. The major issue to arise through government consultation was the potential impacts upon the ecological integrity of the site. A SIS has been prepared concurrently with this EIS to determine the potential for significant impacts upon threatened species and to develop mitigation measures and management strategies to minimise the impact of the proposed mine extension.

Community Consultation

Community consultation was recognised to be an integral component of the proposed development and crucial to the issues identification process. A consultation strategy was developed to promote open and transparent

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 v communication with the local community, throughout the EIA process. Elements of the consultation strategy included:

• early briefing of Warkworth Mine employees;

• personal interviews with the nearest neighbours;

• distribution of newsletters;

• community information days at the villages of Warkworth and Bulga;

• briefing the Warkworth and Mount Thorley Operations Community Consultative Committees; and

• consultation with the surrounding mines.

A number of key community issues were identified throughout the consultation process. Issues relating to the quality of life and local amenity including noise, vibration, air quality and visual amenity were generally of greatest concern, together with impacts upon property prices and local livelihoods.

ENVIRONMENTAL ASSESSMENT

Background

The project is State significant, integrated and designated development as defined in the EP&A Act and EP&A Regulation. Therefore, the Minister for Planning will be the consent authority and an EIS needs to accompany the DA. Integrated development means that other approvals will be required before the development can lawfully be carried out. As such, the Minister must also obtain from each relevant approval body the general terms of any approval granted to the development.

This EIS was prepared in accordance with the EP&A Act and EP&A Regulation and the principals of ecologically sustainable development (ESD). It reflects the comments and requirements of authorities who have a statutory responsibility for some aspect or consequence of the proposal. The comments and concerns of local residents were also considered during its preparation. Under the EP&A Act, the EIS must be publicly exhibited for at least 30 days so interested parties can make formal submissions.

The EIS has examined the environmental consequences of the proposal and where appropriate has developed amelioration methods to minimise potential impacts. The following sections provide an overview of the findings of the EIS having regard to the biophysical, social and economic considerations of the environment.

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 vi Ecology

Detailed ecological investigations, including the preparation of a SIS, were undertaken to assess the potential impacts of the proposed extension on flora and fauna.

The impacts of the proposal on flora and fauna, including regionally significant biota and threatened and migratory species listed under the TSC Act and EPBC Act, are unlikely to be significant at the local, regional, state or national level. No flora and fauna species or their habitat or vegetation communities are likely to be lost from the local area as a result of the proposed development.

Affected species that occur on the subject site are part of local populations that occur in the wider study area. Amelioration measures which form part of a Green Offsets Strategy will conserve, enhance and manage habitat within the study area, so that local populations can be maintained. These areas will also help mitigate against local fragmentation by enhancing habitats and increasing their potential as dispersal and colonisation corridors.

Regional corridors and connectivity are unlikely to be affected by the proposal since regional routes will be maintained. The Green Offset measures will also enhance these corridors by conserving and managing these habitats.

The Green Offset measures are feasible and will ensure that the status of flora and fauna, including threatened species would not be significantly harmed by the proposal.

In light of the above, the proposal is unlikely to have a significant impact on flora and fauna, including significant and threatened biota at the local, regional, state or national level.

Water Resources

A water management study has been undertaken for the continuation of mining at Warkworth Mine. The study has investigated potential impacts upon both groundwater and surface water issues together with an analysis of the mine water management.

Continued mining at Warkworth Mine will result in ongoing groundwater seepage to the North and West Pits with an increasing contribution occurring as leakage from the surrounding undisturbed coal measures. Leakage may also occur from shallow alluvial areas associated with Wollombi Brook and the Hunter River which provide joint connectivity throughout the strata to facilitate this.

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 vii The water quality will reflect a mixture of coal seams and interburden with a salinity level generally similar to that observed in the current mine water system and ranging from 4,000 to more than 6,500 EC.

Clean water run-off will continue to be segregated from mine water via the maintenance of contour drains, the diversion channel between Sandy Hollow and Longford Creeks and sedimentation and mine water dams. Continued mining will have negligible impact on local and regional watersheds. Parts of Sandy Hollow, Dights and Doctors Creek catchments previously consumed by mining will be rehabilitated and natural run-off returned to these creeks in eastern and north eastern areas of the Mining Lease.

Modelling indicates the likelihood that surplus water will need to be removed from site. Testing of the mine WMS against 100 years of daily rainfall records indicates surpluses can be adequately managed by transferring water between other adjacent CNA managed sites and by utilising the Hunter River Salinity Trading Scheme (HRSTS) high and flood flow discharge opportunities.

Air Quality

An air quality study was undertaken which assesses air quality impacts associated with the proposed extension of Warkworth Mine. The assessment was based on a computer dispersion model using local meteorological data and estimates of dust emissions to predict the concentration and deposition rate of particulate matter from the proposed extension and other mines expected to be operating concurrently with Warkworth Mine.

The study concludes that with the exception of Property Nos. 13 and 26, all private properties surrounding Warkworth Mine will experience dust levels below EPA amenity and health goals for the life of the proposed extension. Property No. 13 is predicted to experience an exceedance of the 24 hour 50 3 µg/m criterion for PM10 in Years 10, 15 and 18 while Property No. 26 is predicted to experience an exceedance of the annual average cumulative 30 3 µg/m criterion for PM10 in Year 10 alone.

Noise

A noise study was undertaken to assess potential noise impacts associated with the extension of mining operations at Warkworth Mine. The noise study concludes that with mitigation measures, most surrounding private residential properties will experience noise levels below the EPA’s noise goals during calm weather.

The study also concludes that under worst case weather conditions, noise at most surrounding residential properties will be below or marginally (less than 3 dB) above EPA noise goals.

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 viii A comparison against possible acquisition limits imposed on similar mining operations, indicates marginal exceedances at five private residential properties, which are identified in the EIS as Property Nos. 6, 10, 34, 36 and 46. At these properties, noise from the extension is predicted to only increase marginally compared to existing levels.

Vibration

Warkworth Mine’s existing blast management strategy will be used to ensure appropriate charge masses are used for blasting in areas closest to residences and the Mount Thorley Industrial Estate. This will ensure there will be no exceedances above relevant guidelines.

Aboriginal Heritage

The Aboriginal heritage study identifies Aboriginal archaeological sites located within the study area and assesses the likely impacts of the proposed mine extension on these sites. A number of Aboriginal archaeological sites will be directly impacted by the extension of the mine and a number of landform zones will also be either partially or completely removed by it.

The majority of sites to be removed are considered to be of low conservation significance, consisting of open artefact scatters, comprising low numbers of artefacts, many of which are already in disturbed contexts. The artefacts are of locally derived raw materials and generally do not contain any attributes that make them unique or rare in the Upper Hunter Valley.

The overall impact on Aboriginal cultural significance was, however, considered to be substantial given the nature of the development. There were a small number of sites within the study area that were considered to be of moderate to high conservation significance and of particular concern to the local Aboriginal community, including two grinding groove sites and a sand sheet adjacent to Sandy Hollow Creek. The southern boundary of the extension area was modified to avoid disturbing one of the grinding groove sites.

Whilst the in-situ conservation of a number of these sites is unfeasible due to the relative positions within the extension area, appropriate management in consultation with the local Aboriginal community including possible salvage operations and exclusion zones will minimise the impacts upon the significance of the area.

Visual

Warkworth Mine will become increasingly visible to a number of viewer locations throughout the 18 year extension. However, the proposal forms an

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 ix extension of existing operations at Warkworth Mine and will be visually integrated with surrounding mining operations throughout the locality.

The design of the mine plan and the retention of natural topographic features will provide significant screening of mining operations, creating integration with the existing landscape character and ensuring the proposal is sympathetic to significant viewer locations.

Night lighting is not expected to create significant impacts due to the visual shielding of active mining areas. Lighting will be restricted to the minimum necessary for operational and safety requirements and be directed away from incoming views. Lighting above natural topographic screens will be directed downwards and light shields will be used as required to limit the effect of lighting.

Transport

A traffic impact study was prepared to assess the potential impacts upon local traffic networks associated with infrastructure construction and the operation of Warkworth Mine over the proposed 18 year mine extension.

Vehicle movements associated with construction activities are not expected to have a noticeable impact on the surrounding road network. An expected 2.3 % increase in vehicle movements on The Putty Road will be experienced during the peak civil infrastructure construction, over a period of approximately 3 months.

Partial and full road closures will be required at various stages of infrastructure construction on The Putty Road. Road Closures will be restricted to the minimum time necessary to complete the work and be subject to appropriate traffic controls detailed in a traffic management plan (TMP).

The possible consolidation of the Warkworth Mine and the Mount Thorley Operations workforce commencing and finishing shifts at Warkworth Mine has been considered. The existing intersection on The Putty Road is considered adequate to cater for vehicle movements entering and leaving the site.

Warkworth Mine will continue to be managed under existing operational practises, with a correspondingly minor increase in service vehicle requirements associated with an increase in production.

The minor increase in traffic generation during construction is not expected to significantly impact upon road capacity or traffic flow in the local area. The number of employee vehicles accessing the operations will be relatively steady through to Year 10 of the mine plan before declining to 392 in 2020. Assuming the majority of staff travel from the east, employee vehicles represent

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 x approximately 10 % of total vehicle movements on The Putty Road and the Golden Highway. Therefore, the impact of the proposed extension on the surrounding road network is expected to be minimal.

Social Amenity

A socioeconomic assessment was undertaken to provide an outline of the social impacts and considerations associated with both the proposed extension and the closure of the mine.

The extension of the mine will result in impacts upon social amenity due to issues associated with air quality, noise, vibration and visual amenity. However, it is expected that the operation of the other local coal mines would continue to contribute to these environmental issues and closure of Warkworth Mine would not lead to a dramatic improvement in social amenity.

Best practice mitigation measures will be employed throughout the proposed extension to minimise impacts on nearby residents from continued operations of the mine. For any nearby property that will be subject to predicted noise and dust levels exceeding EPA amenity criteria, as determined by an agreed monitoring program, WML will offer to purchase the property at market rates.

Social benefits to the community will be generated from the continued opportunities that are presented to local residents from CNA and Warkworth Mine’s operations. The operations at Warkworth Mine provide local residents with community and family open days, developing the skills of the employees through education and training programs, and support for local schools, charity groups and emergency services.

The continuation of social networks, and the unified identity of the area as a coal mining locality will continue to strengthen with the continued operation of Warkworth Mine. The retention of employment will support the stability of the local population and therefore support the maintenance of services and infastructure.

Economic Considerations

The socioeconomic assessment concludes that the proposed 18 year extension to operations at Warkworth Mine will provide significant economic benefits to the local and regional economy.

Warkworth Mine’s extension will employ, at its peak, up to 742 full time equivalent persons. This level of employment will provide a significant economic benefit to the community through an increased expenditure on salaries and subsequent local expenditure.

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 xi The proposed mine extension will make a significant economic contribution to the economy at a local, national and international level. It is expected to provide $8.6 billion in additional sales revenue and $340 million in royalties. Based on expenditure over the previous 12 months, Warkworth Mine is expected to inject $163 million into the local economy per annum, which equates to $2.9 billion over the life of the mine.

Cumulative Impacts

To fully determine the impacts associated with the proposed extension to Warkworth Mine, the EIS has included an assessment of the proposal in the context of the cumulative effect of the proposed mine extension together with any other existing or proposed mine in the locality.

The cumulative noise assessment assessed the influences from surrounding industrial activity on residences potentially impacted by the proposal. The assessment shows that all private residential properties will be within or marginally (not more than 3 dB) above the EPA’s amenity goal of 40 dB(A). Those predicted to experience cumulative noise marginally above the EPA criterion are contributed to by a combination of the proposal and other operations.

Cumulative air quality impacts were determined by assessing the planned ROM coal production and dust emission rates for each neighbouring mine operating in the area, for the years that dispersion modelling was undertaken. The results of the study indicate that Property No. 26 is predicted to be affected by dust in Year 10 beyond EPA criteria when dust emissions from Warkworth Mine and other sources are taken into account.

An assessment of the visual impacts associated with the proposed mine extension was undertaken in consideration of both the local and regional setting. Cumulative visual impacts will predominantly be limited to viewer locations located to the west of the Warkworth Mine. The mine will become increasingly visible to a number of receivers, but will not be adding a new landscape feature to the visual catchment.

The existing operations at Warkworth and the surrounding mines provide significant contributions to local traffic volumes, with mine employee traffic expected to make the greatest contribution. The study, which included vehicle movements associated with both Warkworth Mine and Mount Thorley Operations, concluded that there was not expected to be any cumulative impacts associated with the proposal on the local road network.

The major cumulative effect in relation to surface and groundwater is the cumulative depressurisation of coal seam aquifers as a result of mining in the locality. Coal measure pressures will never recover to pre mining levels, as the region now retains different hydraulic properties, with spoil permeability being two to three orders of magnitude higher than undisturbed coal measures.

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 xii The net effect of the changed properties will be a relatively flat water table over the mined area at a maximum elevation of about 45 m AHD. Since the majority of the mines in the locality are located near the headwaters of a number of small catchments, the overall impact is not considered significant.

ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT

A comprehensive environmental management system (EMS) already exists at Warkworth Mine to provide an overall framework for the management of environmental impacts during the operation of the mine. Implementation of the EMS has assisted in achieving environmental regulatory compliance and ensure regular reporting of environmental performance is undertaken.

The EMS will be expanded to incorporate environmental management plans (EMPs) for both the infrastructure construction and mine operational phases of the proposed Warkworth Mine extension. The EMPs will ensure that all mitigation measures and monitoring are effectively implemented and sustainable practices are adopted during the construction activities and operation of the mine.

CONCLUSION

This EIS has presented the findings of an environmental assessment for the proposed extension to Warkworth Mine. The EIS was prepared having regard to biophysical, economic and social considerations and the principles of ESD.

No significant environmental impacts have been identified during the preparation of the EIS that cannot be mitigated by appropriate safeguards and management strategies. Mitigation measures identified in the EIS form part of the proposal and will be incorporated into the EMPs for construction activities and the operation of the mine.

The social and economic benefits afforded by the continued operation of the mine, provide justification for the proposed extension to Warkworth Mine.

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 xiii Extension of Warkworth Coal Mine environmental impact statement

PART A Background

1 Introduction 2 Existing Operations Extension of Warkworth Coal Mine environmental impact statement

CHAPTER 1

Introduction 1 INTRODUCTION

1.1 BACKGROUND

Warkworth Mine is located in the Upper Hunter Valley of NSW, approximately 12 kilometres (km) south west of Singleton. It is an existing open cut coal mine which has been producing coal, for export and domestic markets, since operations began in 1981. Currently, Warkworth Mine produces 10 million tonnes per annum (Mtpa) of unprocessed raw coal, which equates to approximately 7 Mtpa of saleable coal.

Warkworth Mine’s Mining Lease covers an area of 4,200 hectares (ha). It extends between the Mount Thorley Industrial Estate in the east and the Wollombi Brook in the west and between Jerry’s Plain Road in the north and The Putty Road in the south. In 1981 mining operations commenced in the eastern part of the Mining Lease, and have since gradually moved to the west towards Wallaby Scrub Road.

The proposal continues all aspects of the Warkworth Mine as it presently operates and extends them as described in this proposal. This includes extending two pits (known as the North and West Pits) to the west and one pit (Woodlands Pit) to the south. Wallaby Scrub Road will form the extent of the extension of the North and West Pit, while The Putty Road and the Mining Lease boundary will form the extent of the extension of the Woodlands Pit.

The proposed extension was developed after consideration of a number of alternatives, including underground mining and different footprints for an open cut operation. Underground mining is an economically unviable alternative as it would result in such a limited recovery of the available resource.

In January 2001, Coal and Allied (CNA) acquired the assets of Peabody Resources Limited, formerly the largest shareholder in Warkworth Mine. This makes CNA the largest shareholder and manager of Warkworth Mine. CNA is also the largest shareholder and manager of the adjacent Mount Thorley Operations.

While mining operations at Warkworth Mine and Mount Thorley Operations are physically separated by The Putty Road, the mines share a common Mining Lease boundary. Sharing the lease boundary allows CNA to take advantage of operational synergies between the two mines. In order to realise these synergies, the proposal also involves:

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 1 • the construction of two new bridges over The Putty Road to allow for heavy vehicle haulage of coal and overburden and the transfer of mining equipment between Warkworth Mine and Mount Thorley Operations;

• the construction of a by-pass road adjacent to The Putty Road to all allow for the relocation of heavy mining equipment between the mines, such as a dragline or shovel, that is unable to cross via one of the bridges;

• the construction of a new overland conveyor between Warkworth Mine, Mount Thorley Operations and the Mount Thorley Coal Loader (MTCL); and

• the upgrading of administration and maintenance facilities at Warkworth Mine which will also enable future consolidation with Mount Thorley Operations if required.

Further details on the proposal are contained within Chapter 3.

1.2 APPROVALS REQUIRED

In 1997, Mining Lease 1412 was issued and Consolidated Coal Lease (CCL) 753 was renewed authorising mining at the Warkworth Mine under the Mining Act 1992.

The existing development consent granted by the then Minister for Urban Affairs and Planning in 1995, as modified in 2000 and 2001, authorises the existing mining operations under the Environmental Planning and Assessment (EP&A) Act, 1979. The new consent will renew the approval of the existing operations and those described in the proposed extension. The new consent will constitute a singular approval under the EP&A Act for Warkworth Mine. Subject to the new consent being accepted, the existing planning approvals will be surrendered.

An existing consent that was granted to Redbank Power Station by the Land and Environment Court in November 1994 and modified in February 1997, which authorises some activities at Warkworth Mine, will continue. These activities include:

• the Jamieson Cell;

• a conveyor which transfers tailings from Warkworth Mine to Redbank Power Station;

• pipelines which return water back to Warkworth Mine from Redbank Power Station and disposal of water at Warkworth Mine; and

• disposal of ash from Redbank Power Station within Warkworth Mine.

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 2 Two main approvals for the proposed extension are required to be obtained, including development consent from the NSW Minister for Planning under the provisions of the EP&A Act and approval from the Commonwealth Minister for the Environment under the provisions of the Environmental Planning and Biodiversity Conservation (EPBC) Act, 1999. In addition, before development consent can be granted, the Minister for Planning must consult with the NSW Minister for the Environment.

While two main approvals are required to be obtained, only one assessment process is required to be undertaken. This is the NSW Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) process set out in the EP&A Act and the Threatened Species Conservation (TSC) Act, 1995, which has been accredited by the Commonwealth Environment Minister. The EP&A Act and TSC Act require the preparation of an environmental impact statement (EIS) and a species impact statement (SIS) to accompany the development application (DA) to the Minister for Planning for the proposed extension.

The purpose of the EIS is to enable consideration of the implications, including environmental, social and economic implications, of proceeding with the proposal. It has been prepared in accordance with the EP&A Act and EP&A Regulation which provide the framework for the environmental impact assessment of developments in NSW. The SIS has been specifically prepared to assess potential impacts on flora and fauna. The SIS has been prepared in accordance with the regulatory framework of the EP&A Act and Regulation and TSC Act. Both the EIS and SIS have been prepared in accordance with Director-General’s requirements, which were obtained for the EIS on the 8 July 2002 and the SIS on the 26 April 2002. The Director General’s requirements for the EIS are presented as Annex A of Volume 1.

The EIS has been prepared by Environmental Resources Management Australia Pty Limited (ERM), in association with a number of specialist companies. A list of these companies and the studies they undertook are contained in Table 1.1. The EIS study team is presented in Annex B of Volume 1.

The SIS was prepared by ERM with input from an ornithologist from SMEC.

Table 1.1 Specialist Companies Involved in Preparation of EIS

Company Study Holmes Air Sciences (HAS) Air quality Australian Museum Business Services (AMBS) Aboriginal heritage Mackie Environmental Research (MER) Surface and groundwater management Global Soil Systems (GSS) Soils and land capability

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/5 SEPTEMBER 2002 3 1.3 THE SITE AND SURROUNDS

In this EIS any reference to Warkworth Mine is a reference to the current mine, including all existing pits, the Warkworth Mine Coal Preparation Plant (CPP), maintenance sheds and offices. Any reference to the site or subject site is a reference to the site of the proposed extension only.

Warkworth Mine is located within the Upper Hunter Valley, approximately 12 km south west of Singleton. The existing mine is bounded by Jerry’s Plains Road to the east and north, The Putty Road to the south and Wallaby Scrub Road to the west. The Warkworth Mining Lease extends west to Wollombi Brook. The location of Warkworth Mine in its regional context can be seen in Figure EIS-1 in Volume 4.

Warkworth Mine is surrounded by Hunter Valley Operations to the north, Wambo Mine to the north west, the MTCL to the south east and Mount Thorley Operations and Bulga Mine to the south. To the east is the Mount Thorley Industrial Estate and a number of intensive agricultural land uses located on the alluvial floodplain of the Hunter River. To the west are a number of agricultural land uses, including a chicken hatchery. The villages of Bulga and Warkworth are located approximately 7.25 km south west and approximately 6.5 km north west of the centre of the mine, respectively. The location of Warkworth Mine in its local context can be seen in Figure EIS-2 in Volume 4.

The site of the proposed extension is located generally between the North and West Pits to the east and Wallaby Scrub Road to the West. It is owned under freehold by Warkworth Mining Limited (WML) and is contained within the Mining Lease held by WML. The majority of the site is currently under grazing.

The site contains a mixture of cleared pasture, regrowth woodland and woodland. A large area of dry sclerophyll woodland and regrowth woodland of varying quality occurs in the northern part of the site. Regrowth woodland and cleared land occurs within the centre and south of the site. All of the woodland on the site appears to have been logged and cleared for grazing over the last 50 years and is bisected by roads, tracks and powerline easements.

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 4 1.4 HISTORY OF WARKWORTH MINE

Table 1.2 provides an overview of the history of the development of Warkworth Mine.

Table 1.2 History of Warkworth Mine

Year Event 1976 Tender for coal lease released by State Government Coal Lease (CL) 205 granted 1980 Development consent granted by SSC for mining operations State Pollution Control Commission (SPCC) approval to develop mine granted 1981 CL 276 granted Official opening of mine 1988 Department of Mineral Resources (DMR) approval to commence mining in North Pit 1990 CCL 753 issued in respect of CL 205 and CL 276 1991 DMR approval to extend operations in West Pit 1994 DMR approval to extend operations in North, South and West Pits 1995 Development consent granted by the Department of Urban Affairs and Planning (DUAP) for expansion of operations to 4.5 Mtpa 1997 Operations commence in Woodlands Pit Renewal of CCL 753 Mining Lease 1412 issued 1999 Second dragline commissioned 2000 Modification to consent granted by DUAP for expansion of operations to 7 Mtpa 2001 Modification to consent granted by DUAP for an extension of the haul road between Warkworth Mine and Mount Thorley Operations Source: 2001 Annual Environmental Management Report for Warkworth Mine

Historical aerial photographs of the site can be seen in Figure EIS-3, Figure EIS- 4, Figure EIS-5. Figure EIS-3 shows the site in 1963, Figure EIS-4 shows the site in 1979 and Figure EIS-5 shows the site in 1998. A recent aerial photograph of the site, taken in early 2002, can be seen in Figure EIS-2. The aerial photographs in 1963 and 1979 show the site prior to the commencement of mining operations while the photograph in 1998 and 2002 show the site after the commencement of mining.

Prior to mining the site was extensively disturbed by agriculture including clearing of the majority of native vegetation.

1.5 COMPANY PROFILE

Warkworth Mine is operated by WML on behalf of Warkworth Associates, an unincorporated joint venture comprising of four partners (see Table 1.3).

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 5 Table 1.3 Joint Venture Partners in WML

Joint Venture Partner Ownership (%) CNA 55.57 Mitsubishi Development Pty Limited 28.90 Nippon Steel Australia Pty Limited 9.53 Mitsubishi Materials (Australia) Pty Limited 6.00 Source: CNA Annual Report 2001

CNA is the majority joint venture partner in Warkworth Mine. CNA is also the mine manager and operator.

CNA is one of the largest mining companies within the Upper Hunter Valley, with interests in a number of mines throughout the Valley (see Table 1.4). CNA also manage the MTCL and has a significant interest in Port Waratah Coal Services in Newcastle.

CNA employs more than 1,800 people (the majority being in the Hunter Valley) and manages approximately one-third of all coal exports from the Hunter Valley.

Table 1.4 CNA’s Interests in Upper Hunter Valley

Mine Ownership in Mine (%) Warkworth Mine 55.57 Mount Thorley Operations 80 Hunter Valley Operations 100 Bengalla 40 Mount Pleasant (authorised to prospect) 100 Source: CNA Annual Report 2001

CNA is committed to managing and minimising any environmental impacts of its operations. Under the Minerals Industry Code for Environmental Management, CNA has agreed to a number of commitments, including:

• accepting environmental responsibility for all of its actions;

• strengthening its relationship with the community;

• integrating environmental management into the way it operates;

• minimising the impact of its activities;

• encouraging responsible production and use of its products;

• continual improvement of its environmental performance; and

• communicating its environmental performance.

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 6 The above commitments extend to the responsible handling of cultural heritage issues, progressive rehabilitation of mined areas and sound water and waste management practices. These commitments form the basis of CNA’s Health, Safety and Environmental Policy Statement, which is described in the following section.

CNA regularly reviews its environmental policies and standards which prescribe what employees must do to appropriately manage the environment whilst mining. A common, integrated Environmental Management System (EMS) is currently being prepared to be implement across all CNA’s managed sites in the Hunter Valley.

1.6 OBJECTIVES OF THE PROPOSAL

The proposal will be undertaken in accordance with CNA’s Health, Safety and Environmental Policy Statement. This states that CNA:

“… are committed to supplying coal-based energy to global markets in an efficient, safe and environmentally responsible manner. To this end we will:

• Conduct our business in a way that maintains a safe and healthy workplace for our employees, contractors, visitors and surrounding community;

• Use all our resources efficiently;

• Protect the environment during all stages of mining;

• Develop sustainable solutions that contribute to meeting the world’s energy needs; and

• Provide resources to manage our health, safety and environmental performance.”

Specific objectives for the proposed extension follow.

1.6.1 Production and Operational Objectives

CNA has a number of production and operational objectives for the Warkworth Mine. These are to:

• extend open cut mining into areas not covered by existing development consents;

• maintain a world class, competitive open cut coal mine which provides quality coal to both domestic and overseas markets;

• provide access to long term coal reserves for the continued supply to existing and emerging markets;

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 7 • continue to manage the mine in an environmentally sensitive manner according to regulatory requirements and best environmental practices, whilst ensuring economic viability;

• maximise operational synergies between Warkworth Mine and Mount Thorley Operations by sharing of infrastructure and resources;

• optimise resource use; and

• continue to operate mines that meet or exceed community expectations.

1.6.2 Environmental Objectives

CNA has an excellent record in the development and implementation of sound environmental management practices at its mines. These practices will be enhanced through the development of an integrated EMS for all of its sites. CNA aims to achieve the following objectives for WML in relation to the environment:

• to minimise impacts on native flora and fauna;

• to offset the loss of native habitat through the provision of off-site habitat management areas;

• to provide site rehabilitation that enhances existing fauna habitat values;

• to limit noise and blasting impacts on surrounding residences;

• to limit air quality impacts on the surrounding area;

• to protect the quality of local surface and groundwaters;

• to maximise on-site mine water usage;

• to minimise public health and amenity risks from mining operations; and

• to limit impacts on the visual amenity of the area.

1.6.3 Socioeconomic Objectives

On behalf of WML, CNA must ensure that the proposed extension does not adversely affect the existing socioeconomic value of the site and surrounding region. Therefore, CNA will aim to achieve the following objectives:

• maintain local employment and educational opportunities;

• optimise the economic benefits in the local and regional communities from continued mining;

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 8 • to minimise adverse effects on surrounding residential properties during operation of the mine;

• to identify sites of Aboriginal or European heritage significance and to protect these in situ where possible;

• to liaise with the Upper Hunter Wonnarua Council (UHWC) and Lower Wonnarua Tribal Council (LWTC), the Wonnarua Nation Aboriginal Corporation (WNAC), the Wanaruah Local Aboriginal Land Council (WLALC) and other appropriate agencies to manage the Aboriginal archaeological resource; and

• to promote community liaison and effectively resolve community issues and concerns.

1.7 EIS STRUCTURE

This EIS has been prepared in accordance with the requirements of the EP&A Act and the Regulation, including specific Director-General requirements. It has also been prepared to address the requirements of relevant government agencies, non-government organisations and issues raised by the community.

The EIS contains four volumes. Volume 1 (this volume) contains the main report. Volume 2 contains copies of specialist studies, which have been summarised in the relevant sections of Volume 1. Volume 3 contains the SIS and Volume 4 contains all relevant figures and graphics referred to throughout Volumes 1 and 3.

Volume 1 is divided into five parts, as follows.

Part A – Background

Part A contains two chapters; it provides an introduction to the proposed mine extension, the objectives of the proposal and an overview of existing operations at Warkworth Mine.

Part B – The Proposal

Part B contains three chapters; it provides a detailed description of the proposed extension, an outline of the legislative planning framework and approval requirements and an outline of the issues raised during the government and community consultation process.

Part C – Environmental Interactions

Part C contains 10 chapters; it describes the interactions between the proposed extension and the socioeconomic and biophysical environment. It provides an assessment of the likely environmental impacts associated with the proposal

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 9 and a description of the mitigation measures which form a part of the proposal to minimise the environmental impacts as described.

Part D – Environmental Management and Project Justification

Part D provides an outline of the EMS and environmental mitigation measures to be adopted as a part of the proposal and provides justification for the proposed extension of Warkworth Mine.

Part E – References and List of Abbreviations

Part E contains a list of references and abbreviations used in this EIS.

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 10 Extension of Warkworth Coal Mine environmental impact statement

CHAPTER 2

Existing Operations 2 EXISTING OPERATIONS

2.1 MINING OPERATIONS AND FACILITIES

2.1.1 Existing Operations

Warkworth Mine is an existing open cut coal mine, currently operating in four active pits. The coal seams are extracted via a series of strips that run north- south, with the mine progressing down dip to the west as each new strip of coal is uncovered. Mining is currently carried out using two draglines and one shovel, which are supported by loaders, dozers and a fleet of trucks. The North and West Pits are roughly orientated north south and are progressing in a westerly direction. The Woodlands Pit consists of a series of parallel strips located in the south west corner of the site, progressing to the south towards The Putty Road. The South Pit consists of a series of parallel strips located in the south east corner of the site, progressing south towards The Putty Road and west towards Woodlands Pit.

Vegetation removal and topsoil stripping precede mining operations. Topsoil is either stockpiled for future rehabilitation work or is spread directly onto contoured spoil in continuing the rehabilitation of the site.

Overburden is drilled and blasted to achieve fragmentation for removal by shovel and dragline. Pre-stripping by shovels and trucks precede the dragline operations. Pre-strip material is transported from its source to overburden dumps in previously mined areas of the pit. The material is placed between heaps of dragline material spoil, prior to the areas being reshaped for rehabilitation.

The coal seams are relatively thin with the majority of seams averaging between 0.5 and 1.5 m thick. To maintain high coal recovery, close attention is paid to the coal roof clean up and extraction operations. The draglines leave a thin layer of rock above the seams. The tops of the coal seams exposed by pre- stripping are also bulldozed to remove excessive roof rock contaminant and a grader or rubber tyred dozer cleans the remaining rock from the roof.

Coal is extracted by front-end loaders, placed in trucks and delivered to the raw coal stockpile facility adjacent to the CPP on the eastern edge of the site.

A conveyor delivers processed coal to the MTCL where it is loaded onto trains for transport to the Port of Newcastle for export. A private haul road has also recently been commissioned from the Warkworth Mine CPP to the Mount Thorley CPP. The haul road includes a bridge over The Putty Road that has been constructed with a highway loading and is only suitable for the transport of loaded B-double trucks, not heavy vehicle coal haulage or heavy equipment associated with coal mining. Road haulage on public roads would now only occur in the event of an emergency situation.

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 11 An overview of the method of mining coal at Warkworth Mine can be seen in Figure EIS-6 in Volume 4. Figure EIS-7 in Volume 4 provides a flowchart of existing operations at Warkworth Mine.

Warkworth Mine is currently operating with an output of approximately 10 mtpa run of mine (ROM) coal. The coal resource in the Warkworth Mining Lease has been estimated at 816 million tonnes (Mt), including 422 Mt of measured resource, 214 Mt of estimated resource and 180 Mt of inferred resource.

2.1.2 Site Infrastructure

The major infrastructure at the site is predominantly located on the far eastern edge of the lease adjacent to Jerry’s Plains Road. The facilities include:

• workshops – to provide servicing and repair services to the mining fleet;

• vehicle washing facilities – vehicle washing facilities are provided for both heavy and light vehicles;

• fuel storages – bulk oil and fuel storages for handling new and waste oil;

• storage hoppers and crushers ;

• coal stockpiles;

• CPP;

• bathhouse;

• general stores; and

• technical services offices.

Mobile lunch and amenity facilities are also located for employees working in open cut areas. The facilities are trailer mounted and located near active working areas.

2.1.3 Coal Preparation and Handling

Raw Coal Handling

Coal is transferred from the active working areas to the handling facilities at the CPP by truck. The coal can be delivered directly to the ROM dump hoppers, the ROM stockpile or to the Boral Crusher Pad, which is used to process coal for the domestic coal market.

Export quality coal is generally delivered directly to one of two ROM receival dump hoppers, each with a capacity of 500 tonnes (t). These are fitted with automatic dust control sprays to control dust emissions from the hoppers. Land next to the dump hoppers is used as a emergency stockpile area for

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 12 ROM coal, to minimise the effect of production variations or inclement weather on the continuity of supply to the CPP. The ROM coal stockpile has a maximum capacity of 80,000 t, with coal transferred by front end loader to the dump hoppers as required.

The raw coal in the dump hoppers is fed via conveyors to the crushers, for three stages of crushing and automatic sampling before being either fed directly to the CPP or selective stockpiling on each of two 60,000 t capacity raw product stockpiles. Upon reclaiming by portal ladder type reclaimers of 1,200 tonnes per hour (tph) capacity, the raw coal can be blended before being conveyed to a 1,000 t surge bin feeding the two module CPP. Raw coal is also transferred to the Mount Thorley Operations CPP for processing via an internal haul road.

The domestic grade coal is transferred directly to the Boral Crusher Pad, which has a maximum capacity of 22,000 t. The coal is crushed and transferred by truck directly to the MTCL. Backup fuel for the Redbank Power Station is crushed in the dump hoppers and is transported to the power station by an overland conveyor when required.

Coal Preparation Plant

The CPP contains processing equipment that separates the raw coal into various saleable products and rejects. The plant is a two module plant consisting of a product 380 tph dense medium cyclone and spiral plant. Raw coal is screened into two sizes with coarse coal with a diameter greater than 1.5 millimetres (mm) treated in a two-stage dense medium cyclone circuit and the fine fraction washed in a two-stage spiral process.

The coal is processed and washed in accordance with market requirements. Washing relies on the fact that coal has a lower specific gravity than non-coal material. The CPP will separate the raw coal into low ash and high ash products, coarse rejects and fine rejects.

The coarse coal circuit relies on relatively simple gravity separation, with coal particles floating in a magnetite and water mixture known as a dense medium. The heavier non-coal material sinks while the coal remains in solution. The separation is enhanced for coarse coal particles by pumping dense medium and ROM coal together through dense medium cyclones.

Fine ROM coal is cleaned in a process circuit that does not use a dense medium. It is mixed with water and pumped through classifying cyclones to remove the very fine particles, which generally contain a very high proportion of non-coal materials including clays. It is then fed to spiral separators, which separate materials by gravity, taking advantage of the differing centrifugal effects produced by coal and non-coal particles as they wind their way down the spiral pathways.

After thickening in coal cyclones, the coal product streams are de-watered in centrifuges prior to stockpiling.

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 13 When coking coal is washed, primary product coal of lower ash content is produced from the first dense medium cyclones and spiral washing plants. The second circuit is generally used to process coal rejected from the first dense medium cyclone, producing a secondary product coal known as steaming coal. When only steaming coal is being produced, the secondary dense medium cyclone is bypassed and hence no secondary product is formed.

Rejects and Fines Disposal

The washing process in the CPP produces a number of by-products including coarse rejects and fine rejects. Coarse rejects consisting of material greater than 0.125 mm is transported by rear dump trucks to overburden dumps and buried. The reject is covered by at least 5 m of inert material.

Fine reject is flocculated and thickened to a solids density of 20 to 30 per cent (%) by weight and then is pumped through a pipeline to the tailings dam, located in the north of the site.

After settling, the fine reject water decants into a series of sedimentation ponds where it is combined with mine water to form the water supply for the CPP and for dust suppression.

Redbank Power Station

The Redbank Power Station was commissioned in September 2000 and accepts de-watered fines from Warkworth Mine, for use as a fuel for power generation. The total annual fuel requirement for Redbank Power Station is expected to be in the order 13 million gigajoules (MGJ) per annum with Warkworth Mine used as the sole fuel supplier. Fine rejects are treated in a Beneficiated Dewatered Tailings (BDT) plant which is located within the CPP and transferred to the power station by a 3.7 km overland conveyor. Backup fuel is transported to the power station via the same conveyor as required. Water to be used in the BDT process is supplied by Redbank Power Station via a pipeline. Ash generated from the power station is disposed in the Warkworth Mine Tailings Dam No. 2 via a pipeline.

The Redbank Power Station development consent allows for fuel preparation, transfer, conduct and operation of the power station and associated activities adjacent to and within Warkworth Mine.

Clean Coal Output

Primary and secondary clean coal products are conveyed separately from the CPP to three inter-connected stockpiles of 100,000 t capacity on the southern side of the plant.

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 14 The majority of the clean coal is transported approximately 2 km by overland conveyor to the MTCL for transport to the Port of Newcastle. At the MTCL, coal is fed into two rail loading storage silos, each of 3,500 t capacity. The coal is then dispatched at a rate of 3500 tph to the Warkworth Mine train loading bin situated on the nearby rail loop. Export coal is also trucked to the loader, using internal haul roads. Trains of varying capacity from 2,000 to 8,000 t are then loaded with coal for transport to ship loading facilities in Newcastle.

The CPP operates seven days a week and in 2001 had a throughput of 8,447,514 t ROM. This included, but was not limited to:

• 674,360 t of primary coal products (semi-coking coal);

• 5,234,402 t secondary coal products (steaming coal); and

• 27,891 t of beneficiated dewatered tailings.

2.1.4 Site Services

Electricity Supply

Electricity is supplied from existing transmission lines to mining equipment such as electric rope shovels, the workshop, administration facilities, employee amenities, CPP and coal handling facilities.

Water Supply

The Singleton Shire water supply is piped to Warkworth Mine for potable uses.

Fuel supply

Fuel is regularly delivered to three fixed, fully contained fuel farms that house 10 x 110,000 litre (l) fuel tanks. These fuel farms are strategically located around Warkworth Mine to minimise the time taken to refuel mining equipment. There is also a 90,000 l diesel tank located at the CPP reagent farm. Each site is fitted with an oil/water separation system, with sumps being pumped out on a monthly basis.

Explosives

Hazardous and explosive materials are transported and stored on site in accordance with the Dangerous Goods Act, 1975 and Dangerous Goods (General) Regulations, 1999. Hazardous material inventories, material safety data sheets and current licences are made available through the Warkworth Mine stores system. Explosives inventories are maintained on a daily basis in compliance with the Regulations.

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 15 Sewerage

Sewage from the administration areas is treated in septic tanks and transpiration areas. Sewage from the workshop complex and CPP flows or is pumped via a septic tank into a specially designed maturation pond. The pond is periodically pumped out and used to irrigate pasture in specifically designated irrigation areas.

Sewage from the in-pit crib huts is pumped out and removed or treated with the ‘biocycle system’. Where required, the sewage from the crib huts is pumped to the on-site maturation ponds.

2.1.5 Employment Status and Operating Hours

Warkworth Mine currently employs 437 full time employee equivalents of which approximately 36.5% live in the Singleton local government area (LGA). The remainder of the employees live in surrounding LGAs including Maitland, Cessnock, Newcastle, Muswellbrook and Scone.

A number of local companies are also contracted to provide services at Warkworth Mine. The tasks undertaken by contractors include cleaning, electrical maintenance, mechanical maintenance, rehabilitation works, earthmoving and information technology support.

Warkworth Mine operates 24 hours a day, seven days a week.

2.1.6 Access

Access to Warkworth Mine is currently gained via a sealed, two-laned access road linking The Putty Road and Jerry’s Plains Road on the eastern edge of the mine site.

2.2 WATER MANAGEMENT

2.2.1 Overview

Warkworth Mine currently operates a water management system (WMS) that is designed to divert clean catchment run-off around the mine site and to contain all mine water arising from run-off within disturbed areas. The objective of the system is to minimise disruptions to site operations and minimise any potential off-site impacts. The system involves:

• maximising beneficial reuse of mine water;

• controlling water quality and quantity at its source wherever possible;

• segregating water of different quality;

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 16 • reusing the lowest quality of water first;

• ongoing maintenance and review of the system; and

• disposing of excess water in accordance with the relevant guidelines and regulations.

2.2.2 Water Supply and Use

Since mining commenced, the WMS has operated with both a deficit and a surplus in supply depending upon the prevailing climatic conditions. Any deficit in supply has been met by drawing water from the Hunter River under the Mount Thorley Water Supply Scheme (MTWSS) as shown in Table 2.1, which outlines the supply history for Warkworth Mine from the MTWSS. Improved recycling of water within the CPP has resulted in a decrease in the required abstraction form the Hunter River in 2001.

Table 2.1 Supply History to Warkworth Mine from the MTWSS

Year ML Year ML Year ML 1991 110.0 1995 511.0 1999 273.7 1992 63.3 1996 413.1 2000 351.6 1993 29.0 1997 423.1 2001 154.0 1994 159.3 1998 342.1 Source: CNA 2001 Notes: 1. ML = million litres

Surpluses are generally contained on site for use on the mine, however, Warkworth Mine retains a licensed discharge point to facilitate releases of mine water via the Hunter River Salinity Trading Scheme (HRSTS) at a maximum rate of 100 million litres per day (MLpd) to Doctors Creek.

The mine requires water for the following uses:

• coal preparation;

• dust suppression;

• potable purposes; and

• vehicle wash down.

The management of water for these purposes is described below.

Coal Preparation Plant

The estimated annual water usage at the Warkworth Mine CPP is approximately 3,127 ML. Water used in the CPP is supplied principally from the Main Water Storage Dam of 300 ML capacity. If on site water stocks are

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 17 low additional input maybe supplied by the MTWSS and water from the washery settling ponds.

Water lost during the washing process is:

• contained in the coarse reject, which is trucked to and placed on the spoil dumps;

• incorporated in the fine rejects;

• bound in the product coal; and

• evaporation.

The greatest volume of water output from the CPP is that incorporated in the tailings pumped to Tailings Dam No. 2 which is pumped back for reuse. The return pumping system pumps back to the Main Water Storage Dam settling ponds by way of a pipeline around the rehabilitation area. A small quantity of water is permanently bound in the tailings. Seepage that occurs from this dam collects in the North Strip and CD voids and is returned via the mine water system.

Siphon pipes just below surface level of Tailings Dam No. 1 decant the settled water returning it to the Main Water Storage Dam for recirculation via the mine water settling ponds.

Dust Suppression Water

Water trucks used for haul road dust suppression fill from three points including, Swan Lake in the North Pit, the 400 ML Dam and the CPP ROM loop. The water cart fleet consists of 2 x 66,000 l and 1x 124,000 l water carts and uses on average approximately 511 million litres per annum (MLpa).

The washery header tank also provides the water used in spraying the coal stockpile areas. Stockpile watering consumes approximately a further 44 MLpa.

Vehicle Wash Down Water

Surface runoff from the catchment surrounding the main office/bathhouse/workshop complex flows through the Oil Separation Dam and is collected in the Washpad Dam for use as vehicle wash down water. The wash down water is then recycled back through the Oil Separation Dam (including two sediment traps) and into the Washpad Dam.

The Washpad Dam may be topped up with water from the Main Water Storage Dam by way of water trucks or with water from the MTWSS when required. The sediment traps are desilted on a needs basis.

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 18 Potable Water

The Singleton Shire town water supply is piped to Warkworth Mine for drinking and bathing purposes.

2.2.3 Mine Water Management

A summary of the main water storages currently operating at Warkworth Mine is presented in Table 2.2 and a schematic diagram of the existing WMS is presented in Figure EIS-8 in Volume 4. Existing mine water elements can be seen in Figure EIS-9.

The proposed mine extension will utilise the existing WMS with minor modifications to allow for water sharing with Mount Thorley Operations and the MTCL. The proposed WMS is described in more detail in Section 3.7 of the proposal description and in the surface and groundwater management study presented in Part B of Volume 2.

Table 2.2 Summary of Water Management System’s Main Storages

Title Area Capacity Name and Characteristics (m2) (ML) Main Water Storage Dam 4,530 300 The main water storage dam supplying the washery. Licensed HRSTS discharge to Doctors Creek. West Pit Storage Dam 43,270 400 Accepts water pumped from northern part of the West Pit via the West Pit settling ponds. Swan Lake 22,852 20 Accepts water from the southern part of the North Pit via the pit ramp. Pumped water also includes seepage from Tailings Dam No. 2 that migrates down the ramp. CD Pit Sump 3315 +2,000 Void storage accepts water from Woodlands Pit (east) and South Pit via undisturbed catchment draining northwards to the void. Also accepts significant seepage from Tailings Dam No. 2 and to a lesser extent Tailings Dam No. 1. North Pit Transfer Dam 2868 40 Accepts water pumped from the northern part of the North Pit and from undisturbed catchments to the west of the highwall (Sandy Hollow Creek and Dights Creek). Sediment Dams Nos. 1, 2 36,857 90 Accepts water pumped from Swan Lake, and 3 West Pit 400ML Dam and CD Pit Sump. The dams act as settling ponds decanting to the Main Water Storage Dam. West Pit Settling Ponds 35,485 100 Accepts water from West Pit and acts as settling ponds decanting to the West Pit 400 ML Dam. Tailings Dam No. 1 4,286 +100 May hold water temporarily but either pumped to Sediment Dam No. 2 via the Tailings Clarified Water Dam or water is lost through seepage downwards (reporting to CD Pit Sump). Tailings Dam No. 2 4,303 +200 May hold water temporarily but either pumped to Sediment Dam No. 2 or water is lost through leakage downwards (reporting to CD Pit Sump). Source: Mackie Environmental Research 2002

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 19 2.3 ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT AND MONITORING

2.3.1 Overview of EMS

A comprehensive ISO 4001 accredited EMS currently operates at Warkworth Mine covering all aspects of the operation including open cut operations, coal transport, coal preparation, rail loading facility and associated services such as vehicle maintenance and water supply. The EMS provides an overall framework for the management, monitoring and reporting of environmental impacts during operational activities at the mine.

The EMS ensures that all mitigation measures and monitoring are effectively implemented and sustainable practices are adopted throughout the duration of the project. Proper implementation of the EMS also assists in achieving environmental regulatory compliance and ensures regular reporting of environmental performance is undertaken.

The existing system is regularly updated following the principles of continuous improvement to maintain best practise techniques and to respond to trends or changes in the environment or operations.

2.3.2 Meteorological Monitoring

Meteorological data is collected from a weather station located at Mount Thorley Operations. Data collected includes wind speed and direction, temperature, rainfall, atmospheric pressure and relative humidity. The weather station is operated and maintained in accordance with Australian Standard (AS) 2923–1987, with data compiled on a monthly basis for interpretation and analysis.

2.3.3 Surface and Groundwater

Surface water monitoring occurs at Warkworth Mine on a monthly basis, with grab samples taken at 14 locations across the site. The surface water monitoring locations can be seen in the surface and groundwater management study contained in Part B of Volume 2. All monthly samples are analysed for pH, TSS and EC.

A comprehensive package of analysis is also undertaken on a quarterly basis, testing for a range of analytes including specific conductance, pH, TSS, chloride, sulphate, a range of metals, BOD, cyanides, phenolics, ammonia, organic nitrogen and oil/grease. Mine water discharges, if required, are also monitored to assess salinity content under the HRSTS.

Groundwater monitoring is undertaken at 15 borehole sites around the perimeter of the mine. The sites are concentrated on the north, east and west of the site as shown in the surface and groundwater management study contained in Volume 2. Quarterly sampling is undertaken at each borehole

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 20 where surface water level, pH and EC are recorded. This is supplemented by monthly sampling at 4 borehole locations and annual sampling for a comprehensive range of analytes decribed above.

Sampling and analysis is undertaken in accordance with Standard Methods for the Examination of Water and Wastewater (APHA, AWWA, SPCF 2nd edition 1998), Australian/New Zealand Standard (AS/NZ) 5667.1-1998 and AS 2031.2- 1987.

2.3.4 Erosion and Sediment Management

All active mining and rehabilitation areas have appropriate sediment containment facilities including drains and dams to allow for a retention period to enable settling of entrained sediments.

All sediment control structures are monitored by visual observations on weekly inspections. Sediment control dams undergo regular integrity inspections to ensure that the dams have at least 75 % of their dam capacity available for sediment containment. The effectiveness of the structures in meeting the environmental goals are confirmed by the surface water quality monitoring program described above.

2.3.5 Air Quality Management

The objective of the air quality management at Warkworth Mine is to minimise the generation of dust from the site and the associated dust deposition and concentration levels at the surrounding privately owned residences.

The dust management program aims to maintain dust deposition rates at adjoining residences below an annual average of 4 grams per square metre per month (g/m2/month) and below 8 g/m2/month in any single month. Total Suspended Particulate (TSP) criteria is the National Health and Medical Research Council (NHMRC) guideline of a mean annual concentration of 90 micrograms per cubic metre (µg/m3) and no single 24 hour monitoring period to exceed 260 ug/m3.

Air quality monitoring is undertaken monthly utilising a combination of vertical deposit gauges and directional deposit gauges to establish particulate fallout levels. A total of 22 dust gauges are established around Warkworth Mine, with 11 of the gauges located outside the Mining Lease. The location of these dust gauges can be seen in the air quality study contained in Part C of Volume 2.

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 21 Each gauge is analysed for insoluble solids, combustible matter and ash residue, with the results reviewed monthly against Environment Protection Authority (EPA) Guidelines. All sampling and analysis of ambient air is undertaken in accordance with AS 3580.10.1 - 1991 for standard deposition dust and AS 2724.5 - 1987 for directional dust analysis.

Two high volume air samplers are used to monitor TSP on the site and are located to the north west and south east of the site respectively. Particulates are monitored for 24 hours on a six day cycle at each site in accordance with AS 2724.3-1987 and EPA schedules.

2.3.6 Noise Management

The objective of noise management at Warkworth Mine is to ensure compliance with the relevant performance indicators and regulatory requirements and that noise emissions do not unduly affect the amenity of nearby residences.

Noise monitoring is undertaken four times a year at seven nominated sites in accordance with the EPA’s Industrial Noise Policy (INP) guidelines and AS 1055. Monitoring includes continuous monitoring, attended monitoring and monitoring of meteorological conditions to allow correlation of atmospheric parameters and measured noise levels.

2.3.7 Vibration and Airblast

The objective of blast design is to ensure that optimal fragmentation is obtained, whilst conforming to EPA comfort criteria for vibration and airblast, minimising dust generation and adhering to safety standards.

CNA currently operate six permanent blast monitoring units surrounding the Warkworth Mine. The blasting results are be monitored in the main office via a radio connection.

2.3.8 Community Relations

CNA manages and operates Warkworth Mine and maintains a close working relationship with the local community.

Various committees and forums are held throughout the year to ensure the local community is kept informed of activities occurring at Warkworth Mine and are provided with opportunities to raise any issues of concern. The Warkworth Community Consultative Committee meets twice a year to discuss the mine’s progress and to monitor compliance with the development consent conditions. The committee includes local community members together with representatives from SSC, DMR, Department of Land and Water Conservation (DLWC), EPA and CNA staff.

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 22 CNA also conducts regular site visits throughout the year catering for local and regional schools, universities and teachers.

2.3.9 Reporting Procedures

An annual Environmental Management Report (EMR) is produced for Warkworth Mine. The production and distribution of the report fulfils the reporting requirements for the following regulatory agencies:

• SSC;

• EPA;

• DMR;

• planningNSW;

• National Parks and Wildlife Service (NPWS);

• DLWC; and

• Community Consultative Committee.

The report compiles monitoring results and discusses trends, system changes and responses to any potential issues identified during the monitoring and targets for future initiatives are identified.

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 23 Extension of Warkworth Coal Mine environmental impact statement

PART B The Proposal

3 Proposal Description 4 Regulatory Framework 5 Issues Identification Extension of Warkworth Coal Mine environmental impact statement

CHAPTER 3

Proposal Description 3 PROPOSAL DESCRIPTION

3.1 OVERVIEW OF PROPOSED MODIFICATIONS TO MINING OPERATIONS

It is proposed to continue existing mining operations at Warkworth Mine beyond current consent boundaries. This involves:

• extending the North and West Pits to the west; and

• extending the Woodlands Pits to the south.

Wallaby Scrub Road will form the extent of the extension of the North and West Pit, while The Putty Road and the lease boundary will form the extent of the extension of the Woodlands Pit.

The proposal allows for some aspects of the operations at Warkworth Mine and Mount Thorley Operations to be integrated. New infrastructure required as a part of the proposal includes:

• the construction of two new bridges over The Putty Road linking Warkworth Mine and Mount Thorley Operations;

• the construction of a by-pass side road adjacent to The Putty Road and modifications to The Putty Road to facilitate the crossing of heavy equipment;

• the construction of a new conveyor from Warkworth Mine to Mount Thorley Operations and MTCL; and

• the upgrade of office and maintenance facilities at Warkworth Mine.

Each of the above components is discussed in more detail below. An overview of the proposal can be seen in Figure EIS-10 in Volume 4. The extent of the proposal, or DA area can be seen in Figure EIS-11.

The continued operation of Warkworth Mine will comprise of all aspects of the currently approved mining operations as extended by this proposal.

3.2 MINING PLANNING

3.2.1 Mine Design

The design of the proposed extension has been influenced by a number of factors including:

• geology;

• recovery costs;

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/5 SEPTEMBER 2002 25 • out-of-pit emplacement and rehabilitation requirements;

• ROM coal transport options;

• the capacity of the CPPs at Warkworth Mine and Mount Thorley Operations and the MTCL;

• adjacent mine operations;

• road and utility locations; and

• environmental factors such as the location of archaeological sites, site visibility and native habitat.

It is proposed that the continuation of mining operations into the extension area will involve using the existing operational practices including draglines, shovels, loaders, dozers and truck fleets. This combination has proved appropriate for the geological conditions encountered and the required production rates.

The proposal involves extending the existing North and West Pits to the west and the Woodlands Pits to the south as indicated in Figure EIS-10 in Volume 4. The mine plan also involves extending the South Pit to the west where it will meet Woodlands Pit. Mine planning during the early development at Warkworth Mine resulted in this area being left unmined due to the lower quality of coal and high stripping ratios associated with thick bands of conglomerate between coal seams. Completing mining operations in South Pit will ensure the coal resource is fully utilised and will allow for an improvement in current rehabilitation practises, enabling a linear rehabilitation program to follow the mine plan to the west.

Mining in the North and West Pits will continue in a predominantly westerly direction towards Wallaby Scrub Road as shown in Figure EIS-10 in Volume 4. The coal seams from the Whynot seam through to the Vaux seam will be extracted via a series of strips. The alignment of the two pits will be re- configured to align the high walls on a north west to south east axis parallel to the strike of the coal seams. The mine will then progress down dip to the west as each new strip of coal is uncovered. The dragline strips will be 60 m wide and range in length from approximately 5,000 m in the east and 3,000 m in the west, covering the combined North and West Pits. Existing haulage ramps at the northern and southern ends and in the middle of each pit will be progressively extended to meet the existing haul roads on the eastern side of the pit.

The western limit of mining in the 18 year mine plan is defined by Wallaby Scrub Road and elevated ridges located on the southern and northern boundaries of the site. The highest point in the Mining Lease at 165 m AHD, occurs on the southern part of Saddleback Ridge which forms the main north trending ridge extending through the middle of the lease. A lower ridge extends in a north westerly direction, parallel to Wallaby Scrub Road reaching its high point at Watts Peak of 140 m AHD, near the north western corner of the site.

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 26 The highpoints on both ridgelines are retained in the 18 year mine plan. These areas will not be mined due to both the uneconomical strip ratios associated with increased overburden on the elevated terrain and the environmental benefits they provide such as the avoidance of archaeological sites and visual screening of mining operations for the villages of Bulga and Warkworth.

The northern and southern limits to mining are defined by the Mining Lease boundary and Jerry’s Plains Road and the Putty Road respectively. The eastern limit is defined by the existing operations and mine infrastructure together with the Mining Lease boundary.

Plans showing the extension of the mine in Year 2, Year 5, Year 10, Year 15 and Year 18 are provided in Figure EIS-12 to Figure EIS-16 in Volume 4.

3.2.2 Mining Method

General

The extension of the mine will continue to operate under the existing operational practises, which can be divided into four parts:

• vegetation clearing and topsoil stripping;

• overburden and interburden removal;

• coal removal; and

• progressive rehabilitation.

The characteristics of each of these parts are described below.

Vegetation Clearing and Topsoil Stripping

A pre-clearing survey will be undertaken before vegetation is cleared and topsoil stripped. The purpose of the pre-clearing survey is to identify habitat trees and understorey habitats such as fallen logs.

Staged clearance areas will be surveyed approximately one week prior to clearance of strips to identify and remove any appropriate microhabitats such as rocks and fallen limbs for use in habitat rehabilitation. Habitat trees will also be surveyed and marked to determine if fauna are using them.

Any marked trees that show signs of current or recent use will be reserved for the latest possible removal to discourage their use and ensure that any fauna within the trees can leave on their own accord. This approach is used for all stages to minimise any impacts of clearing on nesting, roosting and feeding habitats of protected and threatened or vulnerable fauna.

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 27 Before clearing, trees suitable for timber will be selectively marked and removed. Tree stands providing a viable seed source will be harvested where practical. Vegetation may be chipped for rehabilitation mulch. A topsoil stripping plan will be produced as part of detailed mine planning. These plans are required to gain open-cut mining approvals under the Mining Act 1992.

Topsoil and subsoil will be removed according to this plan up to 250 m ahead of mining, using dozers. Soil will be stripped at least 15 m outside the design excavation limit to allow for access tracks. It will then be stockpiled or preferentially used immediately on reshaped land ready for final rehabilitation.

Where topsoil must be stored before being used for rehabilitation, the following procedures will be adopted:

• stockpiles will be located away from trafficable or mine areas, trees or watercourses and placed on flat areas or along the contour to minimise erosion;

• stockpiles will be set out in windrows to maximise surface exposure to the atmosphere. This helps maintain soil oxygen levels and biological viability;

• topsoil stockpiles will be clearly signposted to prevent contamination or disturbance;

• stockpiles kept for longer than six months will be fertilised and sown with a cover crop of deep rooting and nitrogen fixing grasses to maintain topsoil viability and minimise erosion; and

• weeds will be controlled by spraying with specific herbicides.

• soil types and quantities are discussed in Chapter 8.

Overburden and Interburden Removal

Overburden removal at Warkworth Mine is centred around dragline stripping and shovel pre-stripping methods. Multiple bench pre-stripping is used to expose shallower coal seams down to the Lower Blakefield seam using a shovel and truck fleet. Below the lower Blakefield seam, rock is removed by a combination of shovel and dragline operations, with shovels operating initially to leave a rock depth suitable for dragline operations. The flexibility afforded by a combined dragline and shovel operation allows mining of a complex sequence of coal seams and rock to enable the blending of coals to suit market demands.

Prestrip material is transported from its source to overburden dumps in previously mined areas of the pits. The material is placed between heaps of dragline spoil prior to areas being reshaped for rehabilitation.

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 28 Almost all overburden will require fragmentation by drill and blasting. Depending on the thickness, thin layers of interburden may be simply ripped with dozers before being removed by shovel, excavator or front-end loader. Overburden rehandle generally does not require further fragmentation.

Warkworth Mine is required to close any public roads when blasting approaches within 500 m of the road. Road closures of generally less than 15 minutes per blast are currently undertaken under the approval of SSC on Jerry’s Plains Road and The Putty Road. Similar approvals will be sought for blasting in the extension area within 500 m of Wallaby Scrub Road.

Coal Removal

The mine plan is designed to allow simultaneous mining from a number of coal seams to enable the production of coal of different qualities. Access to the seams is gained via a series of longwall, endwall and highwall ramps. The majority of the seams are relatively thin, averaging between 0.5 and 1.5 m thick. To maintain a high coal recovery, close attention is paid to the coal roof clean up and extraction operations, with as much stone as possible removed from the coal in the pit, rather than in subsequent washing operations.

Draglines will leave a thin layer of rock above the coal seam prior to removal and cleaning by tracked and rubber tyred dozers and graders. Seams thinner than 2 m will be ripped by dozer and pushed into windrows. Seams greater than 2 m will be drilled and blasted. Coal will then be placed into trucks by front-end loaders and delivered to the ROM coal stockpile facility at either the Warkworth Mine or Mount Thorley Operations CPP.

Rehabilitation

Rehabilitation of the overburden emplacement is considered an integral component of the mining operations and will be conducted progressively over the life of the mine.

As part of the proposal, the development of the Woodlands and South Pit will be accelerated which will also accelerate the rehabilitation of these two areas.

Progressive rehabilitation will then occur following the mine plan to the west. This approach will minimise the area of disturbance at any point in time and the associated visual and dust impacts relating to unrestricted emplacement material. The proposed mine rehabilitation schedule is discussed in greater detail in Section 3.8.

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 29 3.3 SCHEDULE AND QUANTITIES

Warkworth Mine is currently operating with an approval for output of 7 Mtpa saleable coal (approximately 10 Mtpa ROM). At this stage, the extension involves increasing the output of the mine to a maximum of 18 Mtpa ROM. The current forecasted production schedule is provided in Table 3.1 and Table 3.2.

Table 3.1 Schedule of Overburden and Interburden Moved

Typical Equipment Amount of Overburden and Interburden Moved (Mtpa) Year 2 Year 5 Year 10 Year 15 Year 18 Dragline BE 1370 12,100,000 7,000,000 - - - Dragline P&H 9020 17,800,000 22,200,000 28,132,450 23,000,000 22,900,000 Dragline M 8200 - 14,100,000 16,211,921 9,000,000 6,300,000 Shovel P&H 4100 11,800,000 14,100,000 14,781,457 13,600,000 13,500,000 Shovel P&H 5700 - 15,200,000 - - - Shovel P&H 4100 XPB - - 22,768,212 19,400,000 19,300,000 Excavator EX 3500 11,950,000 5,420,000 12,635,762 11,600,000 11,700,000 Front End Loaders 3,950,000 8,300,000 10,013,245 11,400,000 11,000,000 TOTAL 57,600,000 86,320,000 104,543,046 88,000,000 84,700,000 Source: CNA 2002

Table 3.2 Schedule of Coal Production at Warkworth Mine

Amount of Coal Produced (Mtpa) Year 2 Year 5 Year 10 Year 15 Year 18 CPP ROM Coal Feed Warkworth Mine CPP 8,700,000 8,700,000 8,700,000 8,700,000 8,700,000 Feed Mount Tholey 1,294,000 6,400,000 9,180,795 4,500,000 4,000,000 Operations CPP Feed TOTAL CPP FEED 9,994,000 15,100,000 17,880,795 13,200,000 12,700,000 Product Coal Output1 Warkworth Mine CPP 6,090,000 6,090,000 6,090,000 6,090,000 6,090,000 Output Mount Tholey 905,800 4,480,000 6,426,557 3,150,000 2,800,000 Operations CPP Output TOTAL PRODUCT 6,995,800 10,570,000 12,516,557 9,240,000 8,890,000 COAL Source: CNA 2002 Notes: 1. Product coal assumed to be 70 % of ROM coal

3.4 MINING EQUIPMENT

Mining will continue under current operational practises, using the existing mining fleet at Warkworth Mine consisting of draglines, shovels, loaders, dozers and truck fleets. Additional equipment will be acquired to meet the mining requirements.

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 30 In addition, it is proposed to increase the synergies between Warkworth Mine and Mount Thorley Operations through the shared use of equipment between the operations. Sharing of equipment will improve efficiencies on both mine sites maximising the efficient use of existing equipment.

As previously stated, two new bridges and a bypass road are proposed to be constructed to assist in facilitating the shared use of equipment between the mines.

After vegetation is cleared, topsoil will be removed with scrapers and bulldozers. Overburden will then be drilled and blasted prior to removal by truck and shovel and dragline operations. Interburden and coal will be either ripped using tracked bulldozers or drilled and blasted, depending on thickness. Coal is extracted by front-end loaders, placed in trucks and delivered to the raw coal stockpile facility adjacent to both the Warkworth Mine and Mount Thorley Operations CPPs.

Graders will be used to maintain roads and dozers will clean up stockpiles. Water trucks will control dust on active haul roads and working areas. A list of the type and style of equipment, currently proposed to be used throughout the mine extension is presented in Table 3.3. The schedule provides an indication of the likely style and capacity of equipment and is not intended to be a prescriptive list of equipment. As earth moving technology develops over the period of the mine plan, new equipment may be introduced to the site.

Table 3.3 Proposed Typical Equipment Schedule

Typical Equipment Equipment Number Year 2 Year 5 Year 10 Year 15 Year 18 Draglines BE 1370 1 1 0 0 0 P&H 9020 1 1 1 1 1 M 8200 0 1 1 1 1 Shovels P&H 4100 1 1 1 1 1 P&H 5700 0 1 0 0 0 P&H 4100 XPB 0 0 1 1 1 Excavators EX 3500 1 1 2 2 2 Front End Loaders L 1800, L 1400 or CAT 994 2 2 2 2 2 Trucks CAT 190 29 37 37 37 37 CAT 777 5 7 8 8 8 240S 8 8 8 8 8 Dresser 830E 0 7 7 7 7 Waste Truck 2 2 2 2 2 Dozers TIGER 12222 DUCK 1 1 1 1 1 CAT D10 or D111114141313 Graders CAT 16G 2 2 2 2 2

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 31 Typical Equipment Equipment Number Year 2 Year 5 Year 10 Year 15 Year 18 CAT 16H 3 4 5 5 5 Drills ODRILL 3 3 3 4 4 CDRILL 1 1 1 1 1 Cable Activities 1 1 1 1 1 Water Pumps33444 Lighting Plant77777 Source: CNA 2002

3.5 MINE INFRASTRUCTURE

3.5.1 General

The proposed extension of Warkworth Mine will make efficient use of existing site facilities, minimising new infrastructure requirements and associated environmental impacts during construction. However, a range of new infrastructure is proposed to improve operational synergies between Warkworth Mine and Mount Thorley Operations including:

• two new bridges over The Putty Road;

• a by-pass road adjacent to one of the new bridges;

• a conveyor to transfer coal between Warkworth Mine and Mount Thorley Operations; and

• the upgrade of office and maintenance facilities at Warkworth Mine.

3.5.2 Bridges Over The Putty Road

Warkworth Mine is currently operating with an approval for output of 7 Mtpa saleable coal (approximately 10 Mtpa ROM). As previously mentioned, the extension involves increasing the output of the mine to a maximum of 18 Mtpa ROM in Year 10, which is above the plant’s operating capacity. Rather than upgrading Warkworth Mine’s CPP, it is proposed to utilise Mount Thorley Operations’ CPP to handle the extra throughput.

The construction of the bridges and access roads will allow heavy vehicle haulage of coal from Warkworth Mine to the Mount Thorley Operations CPP. The bridges will also enable coal to be hauled from Mount Thorley Operations to the Warkworth Mine CPP for processing during plant shutdowns or during emergencies. The eastern bridge, will be constructed between the South and Woodland Pits immediately following approval. The location of the bridge has been designed to link with existing haul roads in both mines. The western bridge, will be constructed to the west of the Woodlands Pit approximately 10 years after approval.

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 32 While both bridges will principally be used for the haulage of coal, they will also facilitate the transfer of mining equipment between Warkworth Mine and Mount Thorley Operations. The western bridge may also be used for the future transfer of overburden between Warkworth Mine and Mount Thorley Operations to assist in the rehabilitation of dumps and voids.

Final bridge design is subject to a review of option feasibility with the eastern bridge likely to be either a 30 m wide dual lane bridge or 18 m wide single lane bridge and the western bridge likely to be a 18 m wide single lane bridge. It is likely that the bridges would be constructed using precast, prestressed 1,150 mm deep concrete girders with a 300 mm deck. The bottom of the concrete girders would be placed a minimum of 3.5 m above The Putty Road. Both bridges will be designed to regularly take 500 t Gross Vehicle Mass (GVM) coal trucks

The proposed areas where the bridges will be located can be seen in Figure EIS-10 in Volume 4. A conceptual design of both bridges can be seen in Figure EIS-17.

3.5.3 By-Pass Road

A by-pass side road will be constructed adjacent to the area of the proposed western bridge, on Warkworth Mine land. This road will allow virtually unrestricted traffic flow along The Putty Road during the transfer of heavy mining equipment (that is unable to cross the heavy vehicle bridges) between Warkworth Mine and Mount Thorley Operations. This would include transfer of draglines (6,000 t GVM) and shovels (up to 2,000 t GVM). Traffic would be temporarily directed down the by-pass road while the crossing of The Putty Road is being undertaken.

It is expected that the by-pass road will be utilised approximately four times a year, including twice a year for the relocation of a dragline and twice a year for shovels.

To protect The Putty Road during crossing of mining equipment, the pavement will be strengthened to a similar standard as a haul road (allowing for far less loading repetitions). In this regard, a 1,450 mm deep pavement will be constructed which includes a 250 mm reinforced concrete slab. An internal access road will be constructed to The Putty Road Crossing location to enable equipment to access the site.

The by-pass road will be constructed to a design speed of 40 kilometres per hour (km/hr) immediately following approval.

A conceptual design of the by-pass road can be seen in Figure EIS-18 in Volume 4.

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 33 3.5.4 Conveyor

A new conveyor will be installed to transfer coal between the two sites. The new conveyor will be located in an existing easement adjacent to the existing conveyor which extends beneath The Putty Road. The new conveyor will extend to the Mount Thorley Operations CPP for the transfer of ROM coal for processing, allowing the simultaneous transfer of ROM coal and product coal to the storage silos at the MTCL. An arm from the proposed conveyor to the MTCL may also be installed to allow additional transfer of coal directly to the MTCL.

The location of the new conveyor can be seen in Figure EIS-10 in Volume 4.

3.5.5 Upgrade of Office and Maintenance Facilities

As part of the proposal, office and maintenance facilities at Warkworth Mine will be upgraded to satisfy the requirements of the extension. The upgrade will also allow for future consolidation with Mount Thorley Operations if required. The upgrade of facilities includes:

• administration office;

• employee amenities;

• employee and visitor car parking;

• heavy vehicle workshop;

• heavy vehicle wash station;

• bathhouse;

• tyre bays; and

• muster point.

Upgrading of these facilities will require the following works at Warkworth Mine:

• internal renovations to the existing administration office;

• construction of a new car park containing 240 parking spaces;

• extension of the employee amenities;

• extension of the mine office; and

• extension of the heavy vehicle workshop.

Plans of the proposed modifications to existing site facilities at Warkworth Mine are provided in Figure EIS-19 in Volume 4.

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 34 3.6 COAL PREPARATION, HANDLING AND REJECTS DISPOSAL

Coal preparation and handling will continue under the basic operational practices described in Chapter 2 and through the implementation of the operational synergies created by the new mine infrastructure described in Section 3.5.

Rejects disposal will also continue under existing operational practises. Coarse rejects that consist of materials greater than 0.125 mm are transported to overburden dumps and buried. The reject is covered by at least 5 m of inert material.

Fine rejects are flocculated and thickened to a solids density of 20 to 30 % (by weight) and then is pumped through a pipeline to the tailings dam, located in the north of the site. After settling, the fines reject water decants into a series of sedimentation ponds where it is combined with mine water to form the water supply for the CPP and for dust suppression. Dewatered fines, known as beneficiated dewatered tailings will continue to be transferred to the Redbank Power Station by a separate overland conveyor.

The capacity of the tailings dams at Warkworth Mine are limited and are steadily reduced, as fine rejects settle to the base of the dam. CNA regularly undertakes investigations into potential alternatives for the disposal of fine rejects.

A Section 96A modification to both consents at Warkworth Mine and Mount Thorley Operations has been lodged with planningNSW which requests approval for the transfer of fine rejects from the Warkworth Mine CPP to the tailings dams at Mount Thorley Operations and the transfer of mine water between the operations. At the time of writing, draft conditions of consent had been prepared by planningNSW and distributed for comment. If approved, some fine rejects and water may be transferred as early as 2003.

Additional storage on the Warkworth Mine site may also be required as the existing dams reach their capacity. The feasibility of alternative options for fine rejects disposal are also under consideration including the potential for co-disposal with coarse rejects in overburden dumps. Approval from the DMR and planningNSW is required prior to the implementation of any alternative disposal methods.

3.7 WATER MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

It is proposed that the future water management at Warkworth Mine, will utilise the existing WMS with minor changes and provisions for water sharing with Mount Thorley Operations, the MTCL and Hunter Valley Operations. Figure EIS-20 in Volume 4 presents a schematic of the proposed WMS for Year 10 of the mine extension. Figures EIS-12 to EIS-16 in Volume 4 also show

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 35 different elements of the proposed WMS for the different stages of the mine. Operation of the WMS at Warkworth Mine provides for the following:

• north easterly runoff from Dights Creek undisturbed catchment to the west of the North Pit is collected in a local catch dam and pumped to the North Pit Transfer Dam via a 315 mm diameter pipeline;

• runoff in the lower part of the undisturbed catchment of Sandy Hollow Creek is pumped to the North Pit Transfer Dam via a 200 mm diameter pipeline. Runoff from higher parts of the catchment is diverted to the north west via a diversion channel and off-site via Longford Creek;

• runoff in Doctors Creek catchment immediately south and south west of the West Pit is contained by a runoff transfer dam and pumped eastward via a 315 mm diameter pipeline to a channel that discharges to Doctors Creek near the CPP and off site.;

• rainfall and groundwater seepage arising from areas north of the North Pit ramp and including the northern benches and pit area, are pumped over the high wall (westward) into a 315 mm diameter pipeline that conveys water to the North Pit Transfer Dam;

• rainfall and seepage to the southern part of the North Pit is pumped up the pit ramp to Swan Lake. This seepage includes leakage from Tailings Dam No. 2 that migrates down the ramp;

• rainfall and seepage to the West Pit generally migrates to the southern end of the pit where it is pumped up the end wall to the West Pit Settling Ponds before decanting to the West Pit 400 ML storage dam;

• rainfall and seepage to the western part of Woodlands Pit (west of the pit ramp) migrates westward to enter the West Pit. Water collecting in the eastern part of the pit is pumped up the east end wall into undisturbed catchment where it migrates northward to CD pit sump;

• rainfall and seepage to the South Pit is pumped westward up the high wall and conveyed via undisturbed catchment to CD pit sump;

• rainfall and runoff accumulating in Tailings Dam No. 1 can be siphoned over the southern wall to Sedimentation Dam No. 1 where it is subsequently conveyed to the Main Water Storage Dam. A component of accumulated water is believed to percolate downwards through the dam floor and through spoils where it is deflected and migrates southward through spoils to CD pit sump;

• rainfall, runoff and tailings decant entering Tailings Dam No. 2 can be collected and pumped via a 315 mm pipeline to Sedimentation Dam No. 2 where it is subsequently conveyed to the Main Water Storage Dam. A component of decant is known to percolate downward through the dam floor and then migrate in a southward direction (via the old Ramp 2), subsequently reporting to CD pit sump;

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 36 • accumulated water in CD pit can be pumped to the CPP. Storage in this area includes open water currently estimated at about 800 ML and water stored in spoils and estimated to be about 1,200 ML assuming a drainable porosity of about 20 % for spoils. There is an upper bound to the amount of storage that can be contained in this pit whereby seepage would be initiated through spoils at about RL 0 m AHD in a south easterly direction to the South Pit. This level equates to about 6,000 ML;

• water is pumped from the Main Water Storage Dam for consumption in the CPP. Make up water is drawn from the MTWSS on a needs basis;

• rainfall runoff in the CPP and stockpile area migrates to the Washery Settling Ponds from where surplus is drawn back to the CPP; and

• rainfall runoff in the workshop, truck wash and office area is directed to a number of local settling ponds where it is pumped back to the CPP for reuse.

The Section 96A modification to the existing consents at both Warkworth Mine and Mount Thorley Operations will provide further flexibility to re-use and recycle surplus water at both operations.

Further options to increase the operational synergies between the surrounding mines have been identified, including the potential to transfer water between Warkworth Mine and Hunter Valley Operations at the pit formerly known as South Lemington.

3.8 WORKFORCE AND OPERATING HOURS

The upgrade of administration and maintenance facilities allow for the majority of employees at Warkworth Mine and Mount Thorley Operations starting and finishing shifts at Warkworth Mine. The exception will generally be employees working at the Mount Thorley Operations CPP who will continue to start and finish their shifts at the Mount Thorley site.

Warkworth Mine currently employs 437 full time employee equivalents. Mount Thorley Operations currently employs 292 full time employee equivalents. Combined together, Warkworth Mine and Mount Thorley Operations employ a total of 729 full time employee equivalents. It is anticipated that by the end of Year 1 the majority of Mount Thorley Operations’ employees will start and finish their shifts at Warkworth Mine. In Year 1, there will be 665 full time employee equivalents employed between the two operations. In Year 9, the total number of full time employee equivalents will peak at 777 before declining to 604 in Year 17 and Year 18 which represents the end of the proposed extension.

The number of full time employee equivalents starting and finishing work at Warkworth Mine and Mount Thorley Operations over the life of the proposed extension can be seen in Table 3.4 and Figure EIS-21 in Volume 4.

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 37 Warkworth Mine and Mount Thorley Operations will continue to operate 24 hours a day, seven days a week according to the existing operational schedule described in Chapter 2.

A small construction workforce will also be required at various stages of the project. It is anticipated that the majority of the new infrastructure including the initial bridge, bypass road and upgraded mine facilities will be constructed shortly after gaining approval. The construction workforce is expected to peak at approximately 50 over a period of six months.

Mine infrastructure construction will typically take place between the hours of 7.00 am to 10.00 pm Monday to Friday and 7.00 am to 1.00 pm on Saturdays, with only minor maintenance works being carried out on Sundays and public holidays. Some activities during bridge and bypass road construction works, may be required to be undertaken outside these hours to prevent traffic disruption or disruption to mining activities.

Table 3.4 Number of Full time Employee Equivalents Starting at Warkworth Mine and Mount Thorley Operations

Year Number of Full time Employee Equivalents Warkworth Mine Mount Thorley Operations TOTAL 2002 437 292 729 2003 499 206 705 2004 630 35 665 2005 642 35 677 2006 646 35 681 2007 638 35 673 2008 737 35 772 2009 736 35 771 2010 732 35 767 2011 742 35 777 2012 639 35 674 2013 636 35 671 2014 629 35 664 2015 633 35 668 2016 609 35 644 2017 594 35 629 2018 580 35 615 2019 569 35 604 2020 569 35 604 Source: CNA 2002

3.9 REHABILITATION

3.9.1 Regulatory Requirements

The Mining Act, 1992 includes provisions for rehabilitating mined areas, which are included as conditions of a Mining Lease. A general policy requirement of the DMR is that after rehabilitation, land should have the same land capability

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 38 as before mining. Detailed rehabilitation plans must be submitted to the DMR before a surface mining approval is granted. These plans include suitability of topsoil for rehabilitation purposes, reshaped land contours, surface drainage and erosion control and revegetation species to be used. Rehabilitation reports are prepared annually, fulfilling the requirements for a number of agencies including:

• SSC;

• EPA;

• DMR;

• planningNSW;

• DLWC; and

• Community Consultative Committee.

Security deposits usually in the form of a bank guarantee must be lodged with the DMR to ensure that the rehabilitation is undertaken. These deposits are either progressively released as areas are rehabilitated or credited towards future works. Releases or credits follow reshaping, topsoiling and successful revegetation.

3.9.2 Rehabilitation Planning

Rehabilitation objectives were integrated into early mine planning to ensure compatibility with site constraints and mining operations. The rehabilitation plan also incorporates other considerations such as conservation objectives, community expectations, pre-mining land use, final land use, drainage, stability, soils, erosion control and visual compatibility. The rehabilitation plan has followed the principles and strategies outlined in the Synoptic Plan: Integrated Landscapes for Coal Mine Rehabilitation in the Hunter Valley of New South Wales (DMR 1999).

Progressive rehabilitation will occur following the mine plan to the west. The shaping of emplacements and rehabilitation will follow the active mining minimising the area of disturbance at any point in time throughout the mine plan. Community consultation during the early planning phase of the proposal, identified concerns regarding the status of rehabilitation along The Putty Road. The rehabilitation plan has consequently included accelerated rehabilitation in the Woodlands Pit and South Pit to help in addressing these concerns and minimise the associated visual and dust impacts.

It is proposed that 50 % of the extension area rehabilitation is established for biodiversity conservation. These areas will link up with other rehabilitation measures being undertaken on the mine under existing consents. This will enhance the local connectivity in the final landform by linking habitat north

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 39 and south of the subject site. The remaining areas are generally rehabilitated to their original land capability or better, contributing further to biodiversity values on the site.

Rehabilitation will be undertaken in consultation with the DMR.

Detailed rehabilitation plans are currently being prepared and will be submitted to the DMR as part of the Mine Operations Plan (MOP). Indicative mine rehabilitation plans are shown in Figures EIS-12 to EIS-16 in Volume 4.

3.9.3 Landform Design

The proposed final landform consists of a series of hills, ridges and minor valley systems. Final landform slopes will vary according to erosion hazard, stability and drainage requirements. Maximum external slopes will be less than 100 (equivalent to a slope of one vertical to 5.7 horizontal). Internal slopes may be steepened to be greater than 100. This is only permitted if approved by the DMR.

Drainage lines from the final landform will be compatible with the surrounding drainage network. This will be achieved using a combination of controls such as graded banks, designed channels and where necessary, water course reinforcement. Areas to be rehabilitated will initially be reshaped in accordance with the slopes given in the rehabilitation plan. They will then either be topsoiled and sown, or directly seeded. Where topsoil is used it will either be replaced directly from stripped areas or from stockpiles. The area will then be cultivated before sowing or planting. Grazing areas will have a minimum of 0.1 m of topsoil re-spread on the reformed surface.

3.9.4 Revegetation

The rehabilitated final landform will have a mix of pasture and forested conservation areas. The re-vegetation strategy will incorporate a variety of pasture species and local native forest species to promote regrowth and the re- establishment of local habitats.

Pasture Species

The existing revegetation program at Warkworth Mine is currently aimed at creating pasture suited to cattle grazing as a future land use. The areas more suitable to grazing such as the flatter areas on less problematic soils and access to stock water will continue to be sown for pasture. Local native grass species are predominantly used on site with a variety of native trees also planted within the pasture to give shade and shelter for stock. Species currently used at Warkworth Mine for pasture and the rate at which they are applied are shown in Table 3.5.

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 40 Table 3.5 Pasture Species at Warkworth Mine

Grass kg/ha1 Grass kg/ha Couch (hulled) 1 Sephi Medic 3 Couch (unhulled) 1 Haifa White Clover 1 Wimmera Rye 5 Lucerne 2 Rhodes Grass 5 Kikuya 1 Seaton Park Sub-clover 2 Green Panic 1 Source: CNA 2001 - Warkworth Mining Limited 2001 Annual Environmental Management Report Notes: 1. kg/ha = kilograms per hectare

Forest Species

Close liaison with NPWS and planningNSW was undertaken throughout the project to assist in incorporating habitat compensatory measures into rehabilitation planning.

Subject to the approval of relevant government authorities, up to 50 % of rehabilitated areas in the extension area will be planted with a permanent forest of trees, shrubs and groundcover. Wildlife corridors will be constructed to allow flora and fauna to disperse between patches of wildlife habitat. Preserving or establishing corridors to link habitats are practical conservation measures, which can ameliorate habitat loss and fragmentation effects. Where possible, rehabilitated areas will be linked, forming a vegetation corridor to support fauna and flora. Native species will be selected to match the existing vegetation on the site, which includes the following communities:

• Narrow-leaved Ironbark/Grey Box/White Feather Honeymyrtle Woodland;

• Narrow-leaved Apple/Coastal Banksia Woodland;

• Narrow-leaved Ironbark/Grey Box Woodland;

• Grey Box/White Box Woodland (White Box Yellow Box Blakely’s Red Gum Woodland);

• Narrow-leaved Ironbark/Bulloak Woodland (regrowth);

• Spotted Gum/Narrow-leaved Ironbark Woodland (regrowth); and

• Bulloak Woodland (regrowth).

3.9.5 Rehabilitation Techniques

CNA has undertaken extensive research into rehabilitating open cut mines in the Hunter Valley. The research was undertaken in conjunction with organisations such as the NSW Soil Conservation Service (now the DLWC),

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 41 the Forestry Commission (now NSW State Forests) and the NSW Minerals Council. A number of techniques were developed that will be applied at Warkworth Mine including:

• establishing forests by direct seeding. These have been successfully grown by directly seeding overburden emplacements or CPP reject without topsoil. Fertilisers are applied with the initial seeding;

• growing pastures on overburden emplacements with and without topsoil. An application of fertiliser is made with the initial seeding and further applications made annually;

• developing a pasture mix that provides year round grazing capacity; and

• managing rehabilitated areas so that viable grazing land is maintained.

More detailed pasture and tree planting techniques are described below.

Cultivation

All areas sown to pasture or planted with trees will be cultivated. This provides a seed bed and improves rainfall infiltration. Cultivation equipment will be selected to minimise stones on the surface, while erosion will be reduced by cultivating along topographic contours.

Pastures

Pasture will be sown into cultivated topsoil in spring or autumn, depending on rainfall. This gives the best opportunity for seeds to germinate and successfully grow. Seed will be mixed with fertiliser and spread from a tractor-mounted broadcaster working along contour where possible, allowing seeds to be uniformly distributed.

Native Habitat

Rehabilitation for biodiversity will be promoted by:

• using native endemic seeds (to match those already found on the subject site) where possible, for seeding and replanting programs;

• rehabilitate groundcover, understorey and canopy species by seeding and planting (planting understorey and tree species would be undertaken where grass competition restricts the use of direct seeding);

• planting a variety of species as opposed to a monoculture, especially species that flower at different times of the year or that provide foraging resources for affected species;

• creating a diversity of landforms and habitats such as woodland, regrowth and open forest on ridgetops and lower slopes;

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 42 • placement of habitat features such as logs, rocks, dams and dams; and

• linkage of areas rehabilitated with trees with adjacent remnant vegetation to promote regional corridors.

3.9.6 Final Land Use

It is proposed to establish 50 % of the rehabilitated area in the extension area as native habitat. Other areas will be rehabilitated to their original land capability or better. An unavoidable exception to this will be the loss of land associated with the final void. The proposed uses of the final voids are still under consideration in consultation with the DMR. The current proposed strategy for the management of the voids in each mining area is outlined below:

• CD Area (east pit) – the final void will be backfilled;

• North Pit – the final void will be backfilled using prestrip material from the West Pit;

• South Pit – the final void will be backfilled using prestrip material;

• Woodlands Pit - the final void will be backfilled using prestrip material from the West Pit; and

• West Pit – If mining ceases at Year 18, a final void will remain in West Pit. If this is the case, mine planning will reduce the size of the void. All viable options for the future use and rehabilitation of the final void will be considered in consultation with the DMR in future mine planning.

3.10 GREEN OFFSET STRATEGY

The proposed extension includes a green offsets strategy which aims to offset the loss of native habitat. The measures contained in the strategy are based on the examples of types of measures detailed in EPA concept paper entitled Green Offsets for Sustainable Development.

Three types of offset measures have been developed based on the proposed future use of the study area and include:

• Non Disturbance Areas (NDAs) – land that will provide protection of vegetation communities and biodiversity values for the life of the consent; and

• Habitat Management Areas (HMAs) – land that is currently owned by WML that is within a Mining Lease and may eventually be developed; and

• contribution to research or Conservation Trust Fund.

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 43 Other types of offset measures suggested in Green Offsets for Sustainable Developments such as regeneration have been included as amelioration measures described in previous sections.

The locations of NDAs and HMAs area are shown in Figure SIS-7 in Volume 4. The total area of the land designated to be NDA is 461 ha and the total area of land designated as HMA is 1,074 ha. This is a total of 1,535 ha.

The sizes of vegetation communities and habitat for affected species that will be cleared and the corresponding areas within the NDA and HMA lands are shown in Table 7.1 and Table 7.2 in the SIS in Volume 3. The sizes of habitats are based on the distribution of vegetation communities and the likelihood that affected species would utilise these communities in the study area.

Habitat Management Plans (HMPs) for NDA and HMA land will be prepared and will provide details on the proposed management measures for these areas. The proposed management measures are outlined below.

3.10.1 Non Disturbance Areas

Land to be protected as NDA has been identified adjacent to and nearby the extension area on WML owned land. Approximately 461 ha are proposed to be designated as NDA. The location of the NDA provides connectivity between the existing woodland areas both on and off the Mining Lease. The areas located immediately north and south of the disturbance area will also provide connectivity to mine rehabilitation areas.

NDA land is proposed to be covered by a Voluntary Conservation Agreement (VCA) to protect the land from native vegetation clearance for the life of the consent after which, the land use of the NDAs will be subject to assessment of the environmental issues as well as the stringent controls and requirements under the EPA Act, TSC Act and EPBC Act.

Management of the NDA land will be funded by WML. It is proposed that local Aboriginal groups conduct all of the management requirements of the NDA land on behalf of WML. This will be formalised in a contractual agreement between the two parties. This management will be under the direction of WML to ensure satisfactory standards, consent conditions and management plan commitments are being met. Management of land will commence following granting of the consent and will be undertaken for the duration of the impact of the vegetation clearance.

At present the area immediately south of the disturbance area has limited vegetation. It is proposed that regeneration of this area be undertaken to recreate habitat that is proposed to be cleared.

These areas will also be managed to protect and in some cases increase their biodiversity value. The management measures to be implemented include:

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 44 • destocking of the land;

• feral animal control;

• weed control;

• bushfire control;

• repairing erosion problems; and

• fencing.

3.10.2 Habitat Management Areas

The subject site is part of a larger patch of woodland in the study area. Some of this woodland is owned by WML and development of the land may occur in the future. This land is adjacent to areas proposed to be NDA land for the extension and therefore provides connectivity to these areas. As the land may be developed in the future it is proposed to manage the land to maintain the existing vegetation communities until the time it is developed.

The land will be managed in the same manner as the NDAs. Management of this area will be undertaken by local Aboriginal groups and funded by WML. This would be formalised in a contractual agreement between the two parties. This management would be under the direction of WML to ensure satisfactory standards, consent conditions and management plan commitments are being met. Management of land will commence following granting of the consent and will be undertaken for the duration of the impact of the vegetation clearance or until the land is required for development.

3.10.3 Management Measures

Habitat within the NDA and HMA land will be managed to allow dispersal and colonisation of affected species, especially those affected species that are known to occur on the subject site.

As can be seen in the past, cessation of clearing and grazing in the study area can lead to the regeneration of habitat for a wide range of flora and fauna, including affected species.

Some of the areas in the NDA and HMA land currently have low habitat value for flora and fauna and affected species, which limits local dispersal and regional movement for migratory species. Threatening processes such as grazing and clearing will cease in these areas and they will be allowed to naturally regenerate. Key habitat species will also be planted in NDA. In addition, other threatening processes will be controlled, such as feral cats, dogs, foxes, introduced plants and any erosion problems.

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 45 Management of the land will commence immediately following consent being received. As the majority of the regrowth is not be cleared for 10 years, this will allow some regeneration to occur prior to significant clearing.

The following specific measures for some affected species will also be undertaken in selected sites in these areas:

• creation of 4 dams in NDA land, management of 6 and 3 dams in NDA and HMA land respectively. Dams will be strategically located in potential movement corridors across the study area.

• planting of key Allocasuarina feeding trees for the Glossy Black-cockatoo;

• maintenance of open woodland areas lacking dense understorey for the Brown Treecreeper;

• maintenance of regenerating woodland with tall shrubs for the Grey- crowned Babbler;

• planting of key nectar producing trees for the Swift Parrot and Regent Honeyeater (eg White Box, Spotted Gum, Narrow-leaved Ironbark);

• planting Coastal Banksia and winter-flowering acacias near know habitat for the Squirrel Glider; and

• maintenance of some open grassland areas with rocks as potential habitat for the Pink-tailed Worm Lizard.

3.11 CONTRIBUTION TO RESEARCH

It is proposed that a once off $50,000 contribution be provided to a conservation trust fund or contributed to a conservation management program. Additional discussion is required to be undertaken with planningNSW, NPWS and EA to agree on an appropriate fund or program.

3.12 MONITORING AND REPORTING

The biodiversity value and success of these offset measures will be assessed annually and changes made to improve the program if required. In particular, flora and fauna surveys will assess the presence of affected species in the NDA and HMA land to determine the value of these areas as natural resources offsets.

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 46 3.12.1 Non Disturbance Areas

Annual flora and fauna surveys of the NDA will be undertaken by WML from the commencement of mining in the extension area. The flora and fauna surveys will be reviewed to establish what impact the extension and the management strategy is having on the NDA land. Flora and fauna survey results will be reported annually in Warkworth Mine’s Annual Environmental Management Report. It is envisaged that these results will be able to be utilised by government agencies to increase the information in their databases.

Both the management of the land and the flora and fauna management will be detailed in a HMP. In line with current development consents the plan would be approved by planningNSW, NPWS and EA and would be reviewed every 5 years.

3.12.2 Habitat Management Areas

Annual flora and fauna surveys will be undertaken within a section of the HMA each year by WML. The area to be surveyed will vary each year to enable the entire area to be surveyed in detail over a number of years. Surveys will occur once mining commences in the subject site. Flora and fauna survey results will be reported annually in Warkworth Mine’s Annual Environmental Management Report.

Again, both the management of the land and the flora and fauna management will be detailed in a HMP.

3.13 EXTINGUISHMENT OF EXISTING CONSENT

Warkworth Mine currently operates under a development consent which was granted by the Minister for Planning on 14 December 1995. This consent was originally for the extension of Warkworth’s mining area, construction works, upgrading of the coal handling facilities and an increase in the saleable production of coal to 4.5 Mtpa. This consent has been modified on three separate occasions, including:

• a modification approved on 26 June 2000 by the Minister for Urban Affairs and Planning which allowed for an increase in saleable coal to 7 Mtpa and for the transportation of coal to the MTCL via a private haul road;

• a modification approved by the Minister for Planning on 28 September 2001 to allow for the haulage of coal between Warkworth Mine and Mount Thorley Operations on a new internal haul road; and

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 47 • a modification recently approved by the Minister for Planning which allows for the disposal of tailings from Warkworth CPP within Mount Thorley Operations and the return receipt of decant water from Mount Thorley Operations to Warkworth Mine.

It is envisaged that the 1995 consent will be extinguished as part of the consent for the subject application and that the new consent will authorise and control all of the operations at Warkworth Mine from the time that it is issued.

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 48 Extension of Warkworth Coal Mine environmental impact statement

CHAPTER 4

Regulatory Framework 4 PLANNING AND REGULATORY FRAMEWORK

4.1 GENERAL

The two main approvals required to be obtained for the proposed extension of Warkworth Mine are development consent from the NSW Minister for Planning under the provisions of the EP&A Act and an approval from the Commonwealth Minister for the Environment under the provisions of the EPBC Act. In addition, before development consent can be granted, the Minister for Planning must obtain concurrence from the NSW Minister for the Environment.

While two approvals are required to be obtained, only one assessment process is required to be undertaken. This is the NSW EIA process set out in the EP&A Act and TSC Act. These acts require the preparation of an EIS and a SIS to accompany the DA to the Minister for Planning.

An overview of the approval process for the proposed extension can be seen in Figure EIS-22 in Volume 4.

4.2 COMMONWEALTH LEGISLATION

The EPBC Act commenced on 16 July 2000. It prescribes the Commonwealth’s role in environmental assessment, biodiversity conservation and the management of matters of national environmental significance (NES).

Under the EPBC Act, any action that has, or is likely to have, a significant impact on a matter of NES, may progress only with the approval of the Commonwealth Minister for the Environment. An action is defined as a project, development, undertaking, activity (or series of activities), or alteration to any of these. Matters of NES include:

• world heritage properties;

• Ramsar wetlands of international importance;

• listed threatened species and communities;

• internationally protected migratory species;

• Commonwealth marine areas; and

• nuclear actions.

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 49 On the 2 April 2002, a referral was forwarded to Environment Australia (EA), the Federal agency responsible for managing the EPBC Act, requesting determination as to whether the proposed extension is a controlled action under the EPBC Act, and therefore, if it requires approval from the Commonwealth Minister for the Environment.

On 2 May 2002, EA determined that the proposed extension is a controlled action. The determination stated that the controlling provisions for the action are in relation to potential impacts on listed threatened species and communities and listed migratory species.

There are a number of EIA processes under the EPBC Act, including assessment by an accredited process where a state or territory manages the assessment on behalf of the Commonwealth. The accredited process will only be applied where the Commonwealth Environment Minister is satisfied that certain standards will be met, that the process will ensure the relevant impacts of the action will be fully addressed and that he will receive an adequate report on those impacts.

On 17 June 2002, EA accredited the NSW EIA process under both the EP&A Act and TSC Act. As such, planningNSW will undertake the assessment on behalf of EA. Following its preparation, a copy of planningNSW’s assessment report will be forwarded to EA. The Commonwealth Environment Minister must make a decision on whether to approve the taking of the action within 30 business days of receiving the assessment report.

4.3 NEW SOUTH WALES LEGISLATION

4.3.1 General

The proposed extension to Warkworth Mine will be assessed in accordance with the framework established by the EP&A Act, EP&A Regulation and the TSC Act.

4.3.2 Requirement For Development Consent

Due to the development consent requirements for coal mines within the Rural 1(a) zone under the Singleton Local Environmental Plan (LEP) 1996, Part 4 (known as Development Assessment) of the EP&A Act applies to the proposal.

4.3.3 State Significant Development

Under the EP&A Act, there are two types of development that require consent, namely local development and State significant development. Generally, local development is any development other than State significant development. State significant development is development that is, among other things,

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 50 declared by a State Environmental Planning Policy (SEPP) or a Regional Environment Plan (REP) to be State significant development. As described in Section 0, under SEPP 34, the proposed extension is classified as State significant development as it will employ more that 100 persons on a full-time basis.

Under the provisions of both the EP&A Act and SEPP 34, the Minister for Planning is the consent authority for State significant development. As such, the DA will be submitted to planningNSW for assessment prior to the Minister making his decision.

4.3.4 Designated Development

Schedule 3 of the EP&A Regulation sets out development that is defined as designated development. This includes, among other things:

“Coal Mines that mine process or handle coal, being:

(a) underground mines, or

(b) open cut mines:

(i) that produce or process more than 500 tonnes of coal or carbonaceous material per day, or

(ii) that disturb or will disturb a total surface area of more than 4 hectares of land (associated with a mining lease or mineral claim or subject to a notice under Section 8 of the Mining Act 1992) by clearing or excavating, by constructing dams, ponds, drains, roads, railways or conveyors or by storing or depositing overburden, coal or carbonaceous materials or tailings, or

(i) in or within 40 metres of a natural waterbody, wetland, a drinking water catchment or an environmentally sensitive area, or

(ii) within 200 metres of a coastline, or

(iii) on land that slopes at more than 18 degrees to the horizontal, or

(iv) if involving blasting, within 1000 metres of a residential zone or within 500 metres of a dwelling not associated with the mine.”

The proposal is to extend mining operations at Warkworth Mine. The extended operations will produce more than 500 t of coal per day and will, over the life of the mine extensions, disturb more than 4 ha of land. Accordingly, the proposal is classified as designated development.

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 51 4.3.5 Requirement to Prepare an EIS

Pursuant to the EP&A Act, an EIS must accompany a DA in respect of designated development. As the proposal is classified as designated development, it must be accompanied by an EIS.

Division 4 of the EP&A Regulation provides general requirements for EISs, including what an EIS must contain and the need to obtain the requirements of the Director-General of planningNSW concerning the preparation of an EIS. In terms of obtaining Director-General requirements, the EP&A Regulation states that the applicant responsible for preparing an EIS must consult with the Director-General and, in completing the EIS, must have regard to the Director-General’s requirements. In the case of integrated development (see below), the Director-General must request each relevant approval body to provide the Director-General with that approval body’s requirements.

Director-General requirements were sought by CNA on 22 February 2002 and issued by the Director-General on 3 July 2002. A copy of the Director-General requirements is contained in Annex A of Volume 1.

4.3.6 Requirement to Prepare a SIS

Pursuant to the EP&A Act, a DA in respect of development on land that is, or is part of, critical habitat or is likely to significantly affect threatened species, populations or ecological communities, or their habitats, must be accompanied by a SIS.

Flora and fauna surveys undertaken on the site in early February 2002 identified four fauna species listed as vulnerable under the TSC Act. These species were:

• Squirrel Glider (Petaurus norfolcensis);

• Speckled Warbler (Pyrrholaemus saggitata);

• Brown Treecreeper (eastern subspecies) (Climacteris picumnus victoriae); and

• Grey-crowned Babbler (Pomatostomus temporalis temporalis).

Following the surveys, eight part tests under section 5A of the EP&A Act were prepared to ascertain whether the proposed extension is likely to have a significant affect on these and other threatened species that may be potentially contained on the site, and as such, whether a SIS would be required. The eight part tests, which formed part of a preliminary flora and fauna report prepared in March 2002, stated that the proposed extension has the possibility to significantly impact upon the above species, and therefore concluded that an SIS was required.

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 52 On 25 March 2002, CNA forwarded a copy of the preliminary flora and fauna report to NPWS accompanied by a letter requesting Director-General requirements for a SIS. Director-General requirements were issued to CNA on 26 April 2002. A copy of the Director-General requirements is contained in the SIS in Volume 3.

Under Section 79B(3) of the EP&A Act, the Minister for Planning cannot grant development consent for development that is likely to significantly affect a threatened species, population or ecological community, or its habitat unless the Minister has consulted with the NSW Minister for the Environment.

4.3.7 Integrated Development

General

Integrated development is defined under Section 91 of the EP&A Act. It includes projects that require development consent and one or more specified approvals under the following acts:

• Fisheries Management Act, 1994;

• Heritage Act, 1977;

• Mine Subsidence Compensation Act, 1961;

• National Parks and Wildlife Act, 1974;

• Protection of the Environment Operations Act, 1997;

• Rivers and Foreshores Improvement Act, 1948;

• Roads Act, 1993;

• Water Act, 1912; and

• Rural Fires Act, 1997.

Where one of these approvals is required, the DA must be submitted to the relevant approval authority and the consent authority (in this case the Minister for Planning) can not determine the application until that approval authority has provided General Terms of Approval.

In addition to the requirement to obtain development consent, the proposal will require a number of approvals under the abovementioned acts, including approvals under the Fisheries Management Act, 1994, the National Parks and Wildlife Act, 1974, the Protection of the Environment Operations Act, 1997, Roads Act, 1993 and the Water Act, 1912.

As such, the proposal will be classified as integrated development. The potential approvals relevant to the proposal are discussed below.

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 53 Fisheries Management Act, 1994

Approval is required under the Fisheries Management Act, 1994 to carry out dredging or reclamation work. The proposed extension will disturb Sandy Hollow Creek, which may be defined as dredging and reclamation work under the act. As such, the proposal will require approval from the NSW Fisheries, which, under the integrated assessment provisions of the EP&A Act, becomes an approval body for the purposes of the assessment of the DA.

National Parks And Wildlife Act, 1974

Under Section 90 of the National Parks and Wildlife Act, 1974, consent is required to knowingly destroy, deface or damage or knowingly cause or permit destruction or defacement of or damage to, a relic or Aboriginal Place.

Archaeological investigations have indicated that the proposed extension will have an impact on a number of Aboriginal sites. These sites are identified in the Aboriginal heritage study prepared by AMBS which is contained in Part E of Volume 2.

Under the integrated development provisions contained within the EP&A Act, NPWS becomes an approval body for the purposes of the assessment of the DA.

An application to destroy sites under Section 90 of the National Parks and Wildlife Act 1974 is not required to be submitted with the DA. However, CNA is required to apply to NPWS for a Section 90 consent within three years of the granting of development consent. Consent to destroy must be issued by NPWS prior to the sites being impacted.

Protection of the Environment Operations Act, 1997

The proposed extension will require modifications to Warkworth’s existing Environment Protection Licence (Licence 1376). As such, the proposal will require approval from the EPA.

Under the integrated development provisions within the EP&A Act, the NSW EPA will be an approval body for the purposes of assessment of the DA.

Roads Act, 1993

Under Section 138 of the Roads Act, 1993, consent from the Roads and Traffic Authority (RTA) is required to erect a structure or carry out a work, in, on or over a public road.

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 54 The proposal will involve the construction of:

• two additional bridges over The Putty Road (Main Road 503), linking Warkworth Mine and Mount Thorley Operations;

• a by-pass road adjacent to The Putty Road (which accesses the road at two points); and

• a concrete slab in The Putty Road pavement to facilitate at grade crossing of draglines and shovels.

The Putty Road is a RTA administered classified road under the care and control of the RTA. As such the proposed bridges, the grade crossing and the crossing of the road by the draglines and shovels will require approval from the RTA, which becomes an approval body for the purposes of the assessment of the DA.

Water Act, 1912

Under Section 116 of the Water Act, 1912, a licence is required to commence sinking a bore, or to enlarge, deepen or alter a bore. Licences will be required to be obtained for additional observation piezometers that are proposed to be installed for continued monitoring of depressurisation and water quality in areas west of the proposed extension (as indicated in the surface and groundwater management study contained in Part B of Volume 2).

As such the new bores will require approval from DLWC, which becomes an approval body for the purposes of the assessment of the DA.

4.4 HERITAGE ACT, 1977

The Heritage Act, 1977 was introduced to conserve the environmental heritage of NSW. Environmental heritage is defined as including buildings, works, relics or places which are of historic, scientific, cultural, social, archaeological, architectural, natural or aesthetic significance to the state.

A search of the following heritage registers was conducted to determine the significance of Warkworth Mine and the surrounding area:

• Singleton LEP;

• Hunter Heritage REP;

• NSW Heritage Office State Heritage Inventory; and

• Register of the National Estate.

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 55 There were no listed items in the vicinity of Warkworth Mine that may be potentially impacted by the proposed works. The closest listed heritage item to Warkworth Mine was the Bulga Bridge where The Putty Road crosses Wollombi Brook.

Wollemi National Park is included in the World Heritage listing for the Greater Blue Mountains Area, which was inscribed on the World Heritage List in December 2000. The Warkworth Mine extension is not expected to impact upon the world heritage values of the Greater Blue Mountains area which was listed for world heritage values including the in situ conservation of biological diversity and the maintenance of ecological processes within the National Park.

The Heritage Act, 1977 provides for the making of a variety of orders and permits to protect items of environmental heritage, including items classified as ‘relics’. The definition of a European relic under the Heritage Act, 1977 states that a European relic:

“… means any deposit, object or material evidence:

(a) which relates to settlement of the area that comprises New South Wales, not being aboriginal settlement; and

(b) which is 50 or more years old.”

If any European relic is disturbed, an excavation permit is required under Section 140 of the Heritage Act, 1977.

There are no known items of environmental heritage in the vicinity of the Warkworth Mine extension. Heritage Council approval is therefore not required for the proposed works. If any unidentified relics are discovered during the course of mining operations, the NSW Heritage Office will be immediately notified.

4.5 PLANNING INSTRUMENTS

4.5.1 General

The proposed extension will be subject to a number of local, regional and State Environmental Planning Instruments (EPIs). Those EPIs relevant to the proposal are summarised below.

4.5.2 Singleton LEP

Under the Singleton LEP, the site is zoned Rural 1(a). Within this zone, coal mining is permissible with development consent. One of the objectives of the Rural 1(a) zone is:

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 56 “To allow mining where environmental impacts do not exceed acceptable limits and the land is satisfactorily rehabilitated after mining.”

The proposal is to extend an existing operation in an area of intense mining activity. Technical studies undertaken as part of this EIS conclude that extension to mining operations can be undertaken in a manner where environmental impacts do not exceed acceptable limits.

Following completion of mining, with the exception of the final void, all mined areas will be properly rehabilitated. Rehabilitation will be undertaken progressively in accordance with a rehabilitation plan approved by the Minister for Mineral Resources. Details of Warkworth Mine’s rehabilitation program are provided in Chapter 3.

Clauses 22 to 30 of the Singleton LEP refer to heritage items of local, regional and State significance, which are separately listed in Schedule 3 of the LEP. A review of this schedule indicates that there will be no heritage items affected by the proposed extension.

4.5.3 Hunter REP

General

The Hunter REP sets a policy framework for development in the Hunter Region between 1989 and 2009. The plan guides the preparation of local EPIs and the processing of DAs in accordance with regional objectives.

The parts of the Hunter REP with direct relevance to coal mining include:

• Division 1 of Part 4 – Land Use and Settlement;

• Division 1 of Part 5 – Transport;

• Division 1 of Part 6 – Natural Resources; and

• Division 1 of Part 7 – Environmental Protection.

The requirements of each of these parts are discussed below.

Division 1 of Part 4 – Land Use and Settlement

Division 1 of Part 4 relates to rural land. The objective of the Hunter REP in relation to rural land is to protect prime crop and pasture land from alienation, fragmentation, degradation and sterilisation. Prime crop and pasture land is defined as land which is classified by the Department of Agriculture as being Class 1, 2 or 3, or special purpose land.

The site does not contain any prime crop or pasture land. All land contained within the footprint of the proposed extension has been classified as either Class 5 or 6.

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 57 Division 1 of Part 5 – Transport

Division 1 of Part 5 of the Hunter REP seeks to maximise accessibility and facilitate the movement of people and goods throughout the region in a manner which recognises social, economic, environmental and safety considerations. The REP encourages the transport of goods, especially coal and other bulk materials, by rail and other non-road modes where practicable. To achieve this, clause 34 of the Hunter REP states that:

“… consent must not be granted for a development which involves the storage or handling of goods or material which are likely to be delivered by heavy transport vehicles, unless it has been considered whether use could be made of a transport mode other than road which is economically practicable.”

Coal will continue to be transported by rail from the MTCL to the Port of Newcastle. There will be no coal, either ROM or washed coal, transported on any public road except in the case of an emergency.

Division 1 of Part 6 – Natural Resources

Division 1 of Part 6 of the Hunter REP relates to planning strategies for mineral resources and extractive materials. Clause 41 of the REP lists a range of matters that a consent authority must consider when considering applications for mining. Each of these matters is listed below followed by a comment on the proposal’s compliance with each matter.

Matter

“should consider the conservation value of the land concerned and apply conditions which are relevant to the appropriate post-mining or extraction land use;”

Comment

The conservation value of land within the proposed extension area has been considered in various sections of this EIS, as well as the SIS. The ecological conservation value of the land is discussed in Chapter 8 of this volume as well as Volume 3. The archaeological significance of the land is discussed in Chapter 12 as well as the Aboriginal heritage study contained in Volume 2. And the scenic significance of the land is addressed in Chapter 13 of this volume.

Matter

“should consult with officers of the Department of Water Resources in respect of extraction from river banks or channels to ensure that instability and erosion are avoided;”

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 58 Comment

The proposal will not result in the extraction of mineral resources from river banks, including the banks of the Hunter River and Wollombi Brook.

However, the existing mine occurs in a number of watersheds that either direct runoff into local water courses or disturbed watersheds that direct runoff into the mine water system. These watersheds include Sandy Hollow Creek, Dights Creek and Doctors Creek.

Other drainages within the Mining Lease mostly drain to the west or north west to Wollombi Brook. All are ephemeral and first or second order drainages. Future mining operations will continue to the west and eventually breach the main north south catchment divide. Additional areas of catchment for Sandy Hollow Creek, Dights Creek and Doctors Creek will be consumed, as will part of the catchment for Longford Creek and an unnamed creek.

No creek diversions are planned, however, a number of sedimentation dams will be constructed in the upper reaches of the creeks prior to construction works.

Matter

“should consult with officers of the Department, the Departments of Minerals and Energy, Lands (as appropriate) and Agriculture and Fisheries, the Soil Conservation Service and the Forestry Commission to determine appropriate post-mining or extraction land uses;”

Comment

The Minister for Planning will be required to consult with the above government authorities prior to determination of the proposal.

Matter

“should ensure the progressive rehabilitation of mined or extracted areas;”

Comment

With the exception of the final void, all mined areas will be progressively rehabilitated in accordance with an approved rehabilitation plan. This plan is described in Chapter 3.

Matter

“should minimise the likelihood and extent of a final void and the impact of any final void, or facilitate other appropriate options for use of any final void;”

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 59 Comment

The proposed rehabilitation plan has been designed to minimise the extent and impact of the final void. All viable options for the future use and rehabilitation of the final void will be considered in consultation with the DMR in future mine planning.

Further details on the final void are contained in the surface and groundwater management study contained in Part B of Volume 2. The final void will act as a sustained evaporative sink or groundwater attractor with an equilibrated level below 45 m AHD.

Matter

“should minimise any adverse effect of the proposed development on groundwater and surface water quality and flow characteristics;”

Comment

The proposed extension’s impact on groundwater and surface water quality and flow characteristics has been addressed in Chapter 9 and in the surface and groundwater management study contained in Part B in Volume 2.

Matter

“should consider any likely impacts on air quality and the acoustical environment;”

Comment

The proposed extension’s impact on air quality is addressed in Chapter 10 of this volume and the air quality study contained in Volume 2. The impact on the acoustical environment is addressed in Chapter 11 of this volume and the noise and vibration study contained in Volume 2.

Matter

“should be satisfied that an environmentally acceptable mode of transport is available;”

Comment

As previously stated, coal will continue to be transported by rail from the MTCL to the Port of Newcastle. There will be no coal, either ROM or washed coal, transported on any public road except in the case of an emergency is currently approved.

Matter

“should have regard to any relevant Total Catchment Management Strategies.”

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 60 Comment

There are no Total Catchment Management Strategies relevant to the proposed extension.

Division 1 of Part 7 – Environmental Protection

Division 1 of Part 7 of the Hunter REP relates to pollution control, including the control of air, noise and water pollution. Clause 47 of the REP lists a range of matters that a consent authority must consider when considering applications for designated development (such as coal mines) or the expansion of designated development. Each of these matters is listed below followed by a comment on the proposal’s compliance with each matter.

Matter

“topographic and meteorological conditions are such that air pollutants would have no significant adverse effect;”

Comment

The air quality study contained in Volume 2 concludes that the proposed extension will not have a significant impact upon the local environment. Dispersion modelling undertaken as part of the study indicates that only two private properties will experience dust levels above EPA guidelines during the proposed life of the mine. One property (Property No. 26) will experience annual average cumulative PM10 concentrations above EPA guidelines during Year 10 of the proposed operations only while the other property (Property

No. 13) will experience 24 hour PM10 concentrations above EPA guidelines during Years 10, 15 and 18.

Accordingly, topographical and meteorological conditions are such that air pollutants will not have a significant adverse effect on surrounding properties.

Matter

“an appropriate buffer zone can be provided to ensure that noise, dust and vibration are maintained at acceptable levels;”

Comment

As mentioned above, the air quality study concludes that only two private properties will experience dust levels above EPA guidelines during the five years of operations that were modelled.

The noise and vibration study concludes that under adverse weather conditions, noise at all but five private residential properties is below or marginally above noise acquisition goals imposed by planningNSW on similar mining operations. At all of these properties, noise levels are predicted to only increase marginally compared to existing noise levels.

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 61 As such, an appropriate buffer can be provided to ensure that noise, dust and vibration levels will be maintained at acceptable levels.

Matter

“the best practicable technology for air, water and noise pollution control will be incorporated in the design and operation of the equipment and facilities to be used for the purposes of the industry;”

Comment

CNA utilises best practice procedures and technology for the control of air, noise and water pollution. These procedures and technology, which are detailed in Chapters 9, 10 and 11, as well as the surface and groundwater management, air quality and noise and vibration studies contained in Volume 2, have been incorporated into the design of the proposed extension.

Matter

“there will be no significant deterioration of air or water quality as a result of emissions from that equipment or those facilities; and”

Comment

See above.

Matter

“the site will not become contaminated within the meaning of Part 5 of the Environmentally Hazardous Chemicals Act 1985.”

Comment

Part 5 of the Environmentally Hazardous Chemicals Act, 1985 has been repealed.

4.5.4 Hunter Heritage REP

Clause 5 of the Singleton LEP excludes the Singleton LGA from the Hunter Heritage REP. All items of regional and local significance contained within the Hunter Heritage REP are listed in Schedule 3 of the Singleton LEP. As previously stated, the proposed extensions will not affect any of these items.

4.5.5 SEPP 11 – Traffic Generating Developments

SEPP 11 aims to ensure that the RTA is made aware of, and given the opportunity to comment on DAs for developments that are likely to generate large volumes of traffic.

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 62 DAs for development specified in Schedules 1 and 2 of SEPP 11 are required to be referred to the RTA. This includes any DA for extractive industry or mining. Accordingly, under SEPP 11, once a DA for the proposed extension is received by planningNSW, it must be referred to the RTA for their comment.

4.5.6 SEPP 26 – Littoral Rainforests

SEPP 26 provides a mechanism for the consideration of DAs that are likely to damage or destroy littoral rainforests areas with a view to the preservation of those areas in their natural state.

SEPP 26 states that a person shall not carry out work, disturb, change or alter any landform or disturb, remove, damage or destroy any native flora on land to which SEPP 26 applies, except with the consent of the relevant council and concurrence of the Director-General. Such development is declared to be designated development and an EIS is required to be prepared.

A review of maps which identify the locations of SEPP 26 littoral rainforests indicates that the proposed extension will not affect any of these rainforests. In addition, it is unlikely that there would be any works, including changing or altering landforms or removing native vegetation, within, or near, any SEPP 26 littoral rainforests.

4.5.7 SEPP 34 – Major Employment-Generating Industrial Development

SEPP 34 aims, among other things, to promote and coordinate the orderly and economic use and development of land and the economic welfare of the State and to facilitate certain types of major employment-generating industrial development of State significance.

SEPP 34 applies to a number of major industrial developments, including development for the purposes of mining, which would (after the construction stage) employ 100 persons or more on a full-time basis or have a capital investment value of $20 million or more. Such development is declared to be State significant development and the consent authority for the purposes of the development becomes the Minister for Planning.

The proposed extension will employ more than 100 persons on a full-time basis. Accordingly, the proposal can be classified as State significant development and under both SEPP 34 and the provisions of the EP&A Act the Minister for Planning becomes the consent authority.

SEPP 34 also requires the Minister to give notice to a council of any DA to carry out development to which SEPP 34 applies which is proposed to be carried out in the council’s area. SEPP 34 also requires the Minister to take into consideration any submissions made by that council in determining the DA. As such, the Minister will be required to notify SSC of the DA once it has

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 63 been lodged and to take into consideration any submission made by SSC in respect of the proposal.

4.5.8 SEPP 44 – Koala Habitat Protection

SEPP 44 aims to encourage the proper conservation and management of areas of natural vegetation that provide habitat for koalas to ensure a permanent free-living population over their present range and reverse the current trend of koala population decline.

Clause 7 of SEPP 44 states that, before a council can grant development consent to an application for consent to carry out development on land to which the SEPP applies, the consent authority must satisfy itself (based on information obtained by a person who is qualified and experienced in tree identification) that the land is or is not potential koala habitat. If the land is not potential koala habitat, the council is not prevented (because of SEPP 44) from granting development consent.

Potential koala habitat is defined as areas of vegetation where koala feed tree species constitute at least 15 % of the total number of trees in the upper or lower strata of the tree component. Surveys undertaken on the site of the proposed extensions indicate that, while the site does contain some koala feed tree species, including Forest Red Gum (Eucalyptus tereticornis) and White Box (Eucalyptus albens), these tree species constitute less than 15 % of the total number trees on the site. As such, the site does not contain potential koala habitat.

4.5.9 Upper Hunter Cumulative Impact Study

The Upper Hunter Cumulative Impact Study sets a framework for monitoring the cumulative impacts of development, including mining. It aims to:

• establish the cumulative impacts of various existing and proposed land uses and activities;

• provide the basis for coordinated environmental monitoring and enhanced environmental management practices; and

• to assist future strategic land use and development planning at the local and regional levels.

The study concluded that there are currently no major cumulative impacts in the Hunter Region which warranted additional regulatory intervention. However, large projects should still include an assessment of cumulative environmental impacts. The potential for the proposed extension to interact cumulatively with surrounding mining operations is outlined in Chapter 15.

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 64 Extension of Warkworth Coal Mine environmental impact statement

CHAPTER 5

Issues Identification 5 ISSUES IDENTIFICATION

5.1 ISSUES IDENTIFICATION PROCESS

5.2 GOVERNMENT CONSULTATION

5.2.1 General

Throughout the EIA process, all levels of government were consulted in order to identify all key issues, including consultation with EA (Commonwealth Government), a number of State Government agencies and SSC.

Consultation with government has been both formal and informal and has been used to refine the EIS and project planning. In particular, extensive consultation has been conducted with planningNSW, NPWS, EPA, DMR, DLWC and SSC.

5.2.2 Planning Focus Meeting

A Planning Focus Meeting (PFM) was held at Warkworth on the 14 March 2002. The PFM is an essential component of the EIA process, facilitating information exchange between relevant government and non-government agencies and the proponent relating to the details of the proposal and potential issues relevant to each agency.

A background paper was prepared and distributed to all participants prior to the meeting. The background paper provided an overview of the proposal, a summary of the planning framework, consultation strategy and likely environmental issues associated with the proposal.

The PFM included a series of presentations providing details of the proposal, followed by a period of open discussions and a tour of the site to assist agencies in developing their requirements for the EIS. The following agencies were in attendance at the PFM:

• PlanningNSW;

• SSC;

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/5 SEPTEMBER 2002 65 • EPA;

• DMR;

• The Mine Subsidence Board;

• NPWS;

• Rail Infrastructure Corporation (RIC);

• RTA;

• LWTC; and

• WLALC.

Following the PFM, planningNSW requested that all agencies prepare a list of issues and matters that they want to see addressed in the EIS. This list formed the basis of the Director-General’s requirements.

5.2.3 State Government Agency Consultation

The DMR was initially briefed on the project on 14 February 2002, to gain endorsement of the conceptual project development plan prior to the PFM. A DMR representative also attended the community information day held at the Bulga Hall on 5 April 2002 to gain a detailed overview of the proposal and an insight into the community perception towards the project.

A presentation was given to representatives of NPWS in their offices on 22 March 2002. The purpose of this presentation was to brief relevant NPWS staff on the proposed extension and the results of fieldwork undertaken within the project area in February 2002. As previously mentioned, these surveys identified four species listed as vulnerable under the TSC Act, including one glider and three woodland birds. Given the results of these surveys, the requirement to prepare a SIS was discussed at the end of the presentation.

Following the presentation to NPWS, representatives of planningNSW and NPWS attended an inspection of the proposed extension area on 25 March 2002. The site tour provided the opportunity for agency staff to gain first hand insight into the ecological values of the site and assist them in the preparation of ecological requirements for the project.

Based on the presentation to NPWS and the site inspection on 25 March 2002, NPWS officers agreed that a SIS should be prepared. A request for Director- General requirements for the SIS was forwarded to NPWS the same day.

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/5 SEPTEMBER 2002 66 Close liaison was maintained with NPWS to determine the specific requirements for the SIS, including a more detailed survey and assessment of the likely impacts of the proposed development and formulation of appropriate measures that can be used for ameliorating potential impacts on these threatened species.

Following an initial meeting with planningNSW on 23 May 2002, a presentation on potential ecological impacts and project alternatives was given to planningNSW, NPWS and EA on 19 June 2002. The presentation included:

• an overview of the mine and site ecology;

• details of alternative mine plans and mining methods;

• a comparison of ecological impacts and economic benefits of the proposal;

• justification of the preferred alternative mine plan; and

• management and mitigation recommendations.

A number of informal and formal discussions have been held with relevant officers from the EPA in relation to the noise and air quality assessments, including meetings on 9 May and 17 May 2002. The purpose of the meetings was to agree on the methodology for undertaking both assessments.

On 31 May 2002, a site meeting was held with an officer from the RTA. The purpose of the site meeting was to brief the officer on the proposal to construct bridges over The Putty Road and by-pass road.

A meeting was also held with representatives from DLWC on 13 June 2002 to discuss the surface and ground water assessment. Like the meetings with the EPA, the purpose of the meeting with DLWC was to discuss the methodology being undertaken for the surface and ground water assessments.

The Director-General’s requirements for the preparation of this EIS were developed from the issues raised at the PFM and subsequent agency consultation. A copy of the Director-General’s requirements is provided in Annex A of Volume 1. The key issues raised at the PFM and subsequent meetings are summarised in Table 5.1.

5.2.4 Aboriginal Groups

The Aboriginal community in the Warkworth region is currently represented by four groups:

• UHWC;

• LWTC;

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 67 • WNAC; and

• WLALC.

Consultation with the local Aboriginal community aimed to identify the cultural significance of the site and the impact of the proposed extension on the cultural value of the site.

Table 5.1 Summary of Agency Issues

Agency Summary of Issues Relevant Section in EIS PlanningNSW • The conservation values of the area proposed Chapter 8 and to be mined must be fully quantified and all Volume 3 measures to maintain and enhance these values should be investigated. • Alternative mine plans and project layouts Chapter 17 which reduce ecological impacts must be considered in detail. • Predicted impacts should be assessed in a Volume 3 regional and State-wide context in accordance with the Director-General of NPWS requirements for the preparation of a SIS. • Impacts of the proposal on local air quality, Chapter 10 and health and amenity at nearby residences must be addressed. • Potential noise impacts during construction Chapter 11 and operation of the proposed development on any surrounding landuses and residences must be addressed. • Proposed water management and discharges Chapter 9 and Part must be detailed and potential impacts on B of Volume 2 water resources such as local aquifers, creeks, and the Hunter River must be fully addressed. • Impacts on Aboriginal cultural heritage must Chapter 12 and be assessed in consultation with NPWS and Part E of Volume 2 relevant local Aboriginal groups. • Impacts on landscape and visual amenity, and Chapter 13 impacts on views from residences and public places must be addressed. • Cumulative impacts on air quality, noise, Chapter 15 ground and surface waters, flora and fauna, Aboriginal heritage, and traffic must be assessed. • Considering the predicted environmental, Chapter 17 social, and economic impacts of the proposal justify the project in the context of ecologically sustainable development (ESD). EPA • The likelihood of noise impacts due to mining Chapter 11 operations. • The potential for dust generation during Chapter 10 earthworks, open cut mining operations and road haulage of coal/reject material and its handling in the CPP. • The mines water balance and WMSs. Chapter 9 RTA • Safe and efficient operation of state roads Chapters 3 and 14 including Golden Highway/Jerry’s Plains

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 68 Agency Summary of Issues Relevant Section in EIS Road and The Putty Road. • Any works to a state road to comply with RTA Chapter 14 standards safety, uniformity in geometric design and quality of product. NPWS • Protection of biodiversity values of the locality Chapter 8 and including an assessment of impacts upon Volume 3 vegetation communities, rare or threatened flora and fauna and endangered ecological communities. Chapter 8 and • Minimisation of habitat disturbance. Volume 3 • Consideration for off–site habitat conservation. Chapter 8 and • Assessment of the cumulative effect of Volume 3 loss/destruction of biodiversity values. • Impacts upon known and potential Aboriginal heritage. Chapter 12 NSW Fire Brigades • Identification of potential hazardous Chapter 3 processes. Chapter 7 • Fire prevention, protection and fire fighting measures and equipment. Chapters 3 and 4 • Compliance with relevant regulations. Chapter 9 • Retention of on-site firefighting water. DLWC • Surface water management including the Chapter 9 design specifications for integrated WMSs, monitoring requirements, water supply and details of any natural water course diversions. • Groundwater management, including a description of the existing groundwater Chapters 2 and 9 environment and any potential changes to the groundwater regime, details of all proposed groundwater works including the installation of bores and the proposed groundwater monitoring program. • Details of the proposed rehabilitation Chapter 3 program. Chapter 9 • Erosion and sediment controls; and • Crown land issues. NSW Fisheries • Potential impacts associated with stream Chapter 9 diversions or removal, particularly in relation to downstream aquatic habitats. NSW Agriculture • Identification of potential impacts on current Chapter 7 agricultural enterprises and future agricultural productivity. • Details of proposed rehabilitation measures Chapter 3 including strategies to effectively re-establish and maintain pastures, timbered areas, water storages and biodiversity. Chapter 3 • Consideration of co-ordinated approach to rehabilitation with surrounding mines. Mine Subsidence • The site falls within the Patrick Plains Mine Chapter 4 Board Subsidence District. Approval required for the construction of mine infrastructure improvements. HCMT • Assessment of spatial extent, location and Chapter 8 and potential impacts upon the Warkworth Sands Volume 3 Woodland Community • Assessment of wildlife movement through the existing vegetation corridor

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 69 Consultation was consistent throughout the EIA process and included a PFM, detailed meetings, telephone conversations and representatives participating in fieldwork, including both the surface surveys and test excavations. All groups were consulted with regard to significance assessment and management recommendations.

At the time of the surface survey, in November 2001, the Aboriginal community was represented by the UHWC and the WNAC. Members of the WLALC were also employed by the UHWC for the survey fieldwork.

Following the survey, CNA was advised by NPWS that two other Aboriginal community groups were now active in the area and were to be consulted regarding the proposed extension and invited to participate in the test excavation stage of investigation and assessment. The previously completed survey work and preliminary research permit for the test excavation were discussed with all four groups.

Each group was sent the research design for the test excavation for comment and input. Representatives from the UHWC, LWTC, WNAC and WLALC were involved throughout the test excavation.

Comments have been sought from each of the four groups on the Aboriginal significance of the site of the proposed extensions and impact it will have on the cultural heritage value. Statements provided by these groups on significance, impacts and recommendations have been incorporated into the Aboriginal heritage study in Part E of Volume 2.

5.2.5 Singleton Shire Council

CNA representatives met with the Mayor of SSC and senior planning officers in meetings on 1 March and 4 March 2002 respectively. The objective of the meetings was to brief Council on all aspects of the proposed development and to obtain feedback at an early stage of the EIA process.

The Council was generally supportive of the proposal and the associated employment and economic activity the mine will bring to the LGA. However, they stressed the importance of an adequate assessment process in relation to environmental amenity and the need for Warkworth Mine’s continued economic contribution to the shire.

5.2.6 Commonwealth Liaison

A referral was made to the Commonwealth Government under the EPBC Act on the 2 April 2002. The referral included an assessment of the potential for the proposal to have a significant impact upon the matters of NES listed under the Act.

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 70 The referral process includes posting the referral information on the internet, allowing for public submissions in regard to the determination of the action. No submissions were received for the 21 day period of public display.

The referral was declared a controlled action on 2 May 2002. Controlling provisions under the EPBC Act included Section 18 and 18a (Listed Threatened Species and Communities) and Sections 20 and 20a (Listed Migratory Species). The decision was based on the quantity of vegetation to be cleared, the possible presence of the Illawarra Greenhood Orchid and the possible presence of the Regent Honeyeater.

Further consultation and liaison was undertaken with EA following the declaration. A Preliminary Information Form was prepared to provide further information in relation to the proposal and to determine the appropriate assessment process.

EA also attended the presentation on potential ecological impacts and project alternatives on 19 June as detailed in Section 5.2.3.

5.3 COMMUNITY CONSULTATION

5.3.1 Overview of Strategy

Community consultation was recognised to be an integral component of the proposed development and crucial to the issues identification process described in this chapter.

A consultation strategy was developed to promote open and transparent communication with the local community, throughout the EIA process. Key elements of the strategy were to ensure:

• the community was fully aware of all aspects of the proposal and the EIA process;

• there was provision for multiple mechanisms for community participation and for ongoing communication and feedback;

• opportunities provided for any queries to be addressed directly by the project team to minimise the effects of incorrect information being passed through the community;

• community issues and concerns in relation to the proposal were identified at an early stage of the EIS;

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 71 • issues raised by the community were pro-actively assessed and managed throughout the project; and

• appropriate solutions and mitigation strategies were developed to minimise the negative impacts associated with the proposal.

5.3.2 Warkworth Mine Employees

Warkworth Mine employees were progressively informed of the proposed development throughout the first two weeks in March 2002. Due to the size of the workforce and shift style employment, a series of presentations were required to address the majority of the staff. The presentations involved a brief overview of the proposal and the EIA process.

Ongoing progress and results of studies have been presented to Warkworth Mine employees throughout the EIA process.

5.3.3 Nearest Neighbours

Residents living in close proximity to the site were considered likely to be the most affected by the existing operations at Warkworth Mine and correspondingly be most concerned about potential impacts associated with the proposed mine extension. The nearest neighbours were therefore selected for a series of individual interviews, prior to details of the proposal being disseminated to the wider community.

Initially, 27 local residences were selected for individual interviews, principally based on their proximity and connectivity to the site. Residents were initially contacted by telephone, with a series of interviews arranged on the 11 and 12 March 2002. A total of 17 interviews were arranged over the two day period and attended by employees from CNA and ERM. The interviews involved providing residents with details of the proposal and providing a forum for issues of concern to be raised directly with project team members for incorporation into the EIS.

5.3.4 Newsletters

A series of newsletters were developed for distribution to the wider community throughout the preparation of the EIS. The newsletters were designed to provide the wider community with an overview of the proposal and the EIA process and ensure the community was kept up to date with the progress of the EIS and any project developments.

The first newsletter was distributed in the week beginning 24 March 2002 throughout the local community including the villages of Warkworth and Bulga, rural-residential properties in the Mount Thorley and Long Point regions and the Mount Thorley Industrial Estate. The newsletter provided an

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 72 overview of the proposal, the planning framework and details of the environmental issues that would be assessed in the EIS. The newsletter also provided details of opportunities for the public to provide input into the preparation of the EIS and advertised the date, time and location for forthcoming information days, which were held in Bulga and Warkworth.

A second newsletter was produced and distributed in June 2002. The newsletter provided an outline of the progress of the various technical studies being undertaken and issues that have arisen during the preparation of the EIS. Copies of Newsletters 1 and 2 are provided in Annex C of Volume 1.

A third newsletter will be produced and distributed prior to submission of the EIS to planningNSW. The newsletter will provide an outline of the key findings of the EIS, together with the details of public exhibition of the EIS and community information days, to be held within the first two weeks of exhibition period.

5.3.5 Information Days

The first round of community information days was held at the Bulga Community Hall on the 5 and 6 April 2002 and at the Warkworth Hall on the 11 April 2002.

The aim of the information days was to provide an opportunity for the wider community to obtain information regarding the proposal, view maps and aerial photographs of site and surrounding locality and provide the opportunity for residents to discuss issues of concern directly with the EIS project team.

The first round of information days were held early in the planning process, prior to the commencement of technical studies, to allow input and feedback from the community to be used to identify and prioritise issues for assessment. Representatives from both CNA and ERM were available on each occasion to discuss the project.

The information days were attended by a total of 19 groups of residents, who were appreciative of the opportunity to gain information on the proposal and discuss issues of concern. A number of key issues were identified for assessment in the EIS.

Figure EIS-23 in Volume 4 show the layout of the information displayed at the Bulga and Warkworth information days.

As previously discussed, a second round of community information days will be held during the first 2 weeks of the exhibition period to provide a forum for members of the community and other stakeholders to express their views and obtain information about the project. The information day and EIS exhibition will be advertised in the third newsletter to all surrounding residents and landowners and in the local newspaper.

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 73 5.3.6 Warkworth Community Consultative Committee

The Warkworth Community Consultative Committee is made up of representatives of the local community, SSC, DLWC, DMR, EPA and Warkworth Mine. The committee meet twice a year to discuss the mines progress and to monitor compliance with development consent conditions. The community representatives share information from meetings with the rest of their community and bring back items for discussion.

At the Community Consultative Committee meeting held in April 2002, a presentation was made on the progress of the EIS. Details of the proposal, issues raised by the community during meeting’s and open days, EIS schedule and the status of various studies were presented and the Community Consultative Committee comments and concerns recorded.

5.3.7 Consultation With Surrounding Mines

Representatives from the mines in the vicinity of Warkworth Mine were contacted by CNA employees and informed of the proposed extension. The mines were also sent newsletters to keep them informed of the progress of the EIS.

5.3.8 Key Community Issues

A number of key community issues were identified through both the individual meetings with the nearest residents and the community information days. While the level of concern and the specific details of concerns varied, predictably there were a number of recurring themes and issues that developed throughout the consultation process. Issues relating to the quality of life and local amenity were generally of greatest concern, together with impacts upon property prices and local livelihoods. A summary of the key community issues is presented in Table 5.2.

5.4 EIS EXHIBITION

The exhibition of the EIS and invitation for submissions is an important component of the consultation process.

The EIS will be lodged with planningNSW with a copy being forwarded to the SSC. The EIS will be placed on public exhibition for a period of at least 30 days. Any person may inspect the document and make a submission on the proposal during the exhibition period. The EIS will be available for viewing at the following locations.

• PlanningNSW, Sydney;

• PlanningNSW, Newcastle; and

• SSC offices.

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 74 Table 5.2 Key Community Issues

Issue Category Specific Issues Relevant Section Vibration Impacts associated with blasting and vibration were Chapter 11 and considered a key issue in the local community. A number of Part D of Volume residents maintain a register of vibration incidents, which 2 included shaking floors, light fittings and windows. The register is part of an initiative by CNA to resolve and understand the impacts of blasting. Pleasingly, a number of residents had a pragmatic attitude, expressing an interest to work constructively with the local mining industry to improve blast management practices. Air Quality Issues relating to air quality included the impact of Chapter 10 and emissions from the site and the cumulative impact of Part C of Volume emissions from surrounding mining operations. Residents 2 were particularly concerned about the impacts of dust on human health and the surrounding environment. A number of residents were also interested in amenity criteria being developed for incorporation into the air quality assessment including impacts such as restricted visibility on The Putty Road and dust gathering on ceilings, walls and water tanks of residential properties. Water Quality A number of residents expressed concerns regarding the Chapter 9 and WMSs at Warkworth Mine and Mount Thorley Operations. Part B of Volume Concerns were related to the potential for off-site discharges 2 of contaminated water into local streams, many of which run through neighbouring agricultural properties and are heavily relied upon for stock watering and the operation of the properties. Noise An increase in operational noise levels associated with the Chapter 11 and operation of the mine were of concern to residents. Concerns Part D of Volume were principally related to night time operational noise 2 levels, with some residents experiencing existing amenity issues in relation to the clanging of shovel buckets, loose tracks on dozers and general mining operations in close proximity to the high wall. Visual Impacts The increased visibility of mining operations, including the Chapter 13 impacts of lighting were raised as important issues by a number of residents. Rehabilitation of the areas immediately adjacent to The Putty Road was also seen as a key issue in terms of both visual amenity and road safety issues associated with driver distractions. Property Values Potential impacts of the proposed mine extension will have Chapter 6 on property values was a concern for a number of residents in the locality. Ecological One resident expressed concerns regarding the impact of the Chapter 8 and Values proposal on the local flora and fauna communities and Volume 3 disturbances to the ecological values of the site. Road Safety Issues involved reduced vision on The Putty Road from dust Chapter 14 emissions and the safe operation of the proposed bridges with concerns of loose coal falling from haul trucks onto traffic passing below. Proposed Dirt Proposed dirt bike track on Mount Thorley Operations land Bike Track – a number of residents expressed concerns that a bike club was proposing to develop a dirt bike track on land currently serving as a buffer to the existing mining operations. CNA has discussed these concerns with SSC.

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 75 Any other exhibition locations will be advertised prior to the exhibition of the EIS.

Printed copies of the EIS will be available at a cost of $27.50 including the Goods and Services Tax (GST). CD copies will be available at a cost of $11.00 including GST. During the exhibition period all members of the community, interest groups and government authorities are invited to view the EIS and accompanying documents and make a written submission on any aspect of the project.

5.4.1 Guidelines for Making a Submission

Submissions should include:

• the nature of the interest in the project;

• opinions on the project;

• suggestions about alternatives, or improvements to the project;

• additional measures considered necessary to adequately protect the environment;

• errors or omissions in the information presented in the documents;

• additional factual information (and its source); and

• other aspects that are relevant to this project and its determination.

So that the matters raised in submissions can be analysed and properly considered it is preferable to:

• list points wherever possible;

• refer each point to the relevant section (or sub-section) of this document;

• include details such as name, address and date;

• state whether an acknowledgment is required (all submissions received with details of a return address are likely to be acknowledged); and

• make the submission as legible as possible.

All information in representations received may be published in subsequent assessment documents. Where the person or group making the submission indicates the information should be kept confidential, planningNSW will attempt to do so, however it may be deemed by planningNSW that there is legislative or legal justification for the release of some information. For example, under the Freedom of Information Act 1989 or under subpoena or statutory instrument. Form letters are acceptable and will be considered.

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 76 5.5 ISSUES SUMMARY

A consultation strategy was developed from an early stage of the EIA process, to allow issues raised in government, stakeholder and community consultation to be incorporated and addressed in the EIS. Consultation is planned to continue throughout the development of the project, to allow for ongoing communication and feedback with government authorities and the community.

The major issues raised by the community were in relation to impacts upon the quality of life and public amenity in the locality as described in Table 5.2.

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 77 Extension of Warkworth Coal Mine environmental impact statement

PART C Environmental Interactions

6 Socioeconomics 7 Physical Environment 8 Ecology 9 Water Resources 10 Air Quality 11 Noise and Vibration 12 Aboriginal Heritage 13 Visual 14 Transport 15 Cumulative Impacts Extension of Warkworth Coal Mine environmental impact statement

CHAPTER 6

Socioeconomics 6 SOCIOECONOMICS

6.1 INTRODUCTION

A socioeconomic impact assessment aims to:

• assess the social and economic conditions of the site area and surrounds;

• predict the social and economic impacts of new developments;

• enhance the benefits of the development; and

• identify and address any potentially negative impacts.

This socioeconomic assessment is linked to many other technical aspects of the EIS which have impacts affecting individuals and communities.

There are five project alternatives, including the proposed extension considered in this EIS, which have been assessed as part of the EIS process. These project alternatives have been summarised into two outcomes for the purpose of this socioeconomic assessment. These are:

• Outcome 1 – no extension to mining operations and subsequent closure of the mine;

• Outcome 2 – an extension to mining operations as proposed.

This chapter identifies, assesses and provides recommendations on the social and economic impacts of these two outcomes.

An extension of Warkworth Mine will provide for the continuation of current economic benefits to the local and regional community, and on a broader scale the state and nationally. The alternative of closing the mine will have social and economic ramifications including loss of over 400 direct jobs, 1,200 indirect jobs and a loss of coal to local and international markets. The potential social and economic effects of the two outcomes are listed in Table 6.1.

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 79 Table 6.1 Future Scenarios and Their Implications for Warkworth Mine

Outcome 1 Outcome 2 Imminent Closure of Warkworth Mine Extension of Warkworth Mine Loss of sales for the local, regional and state Projected sales of $8.6 billion over 18 years. economy in the order of $8.6 billion over 18 years.

Loss of over 400 direct jobs and up to 1,200 Maintain employment at Warkworth Mine, indirect jobs. and indirect employment into the community.

Uncertainty for the medium term of direct Maintenance of 180 direct jobs from Mount jobs for 180 workers at Mount Thorley Thorley Operations and a further 540 indirect Operations (as it is envisaged that the majority jobs. will be relocated to Warkworth Mine from 2004) and indirectly up to a further 540 jobs.

Loss of supply contracts to the operations. Maintenance of ongoing supply contracts to the operations. Loss of direct and indirect revenue for Ongoing expenditure to the local and regional surrounding townships of approximately $163 economy of approximately $163 million per million per annum. annum.

Loss of mining on the site which has a strong Maintenance of a mining presence. mining heritage and identity.

Reduction in the level of support for local Future injection of Warkworth Mine’s social community projects, employment of and financial contributions to the local and apprentices, training for local staff and regional community. sponsorship of local events.

Reduced impacts on local residences in the Continued impacts on local residences, with form of noise, dust and visual amenity. mitigation measures designed to minimise these.

6.2 METHODOLOGY

This chapter has been prepared using publicly available information sourced from SSC, CNA (Annual Report and Social and Environment Report), Australian Bureau of Statistics (ABS), various government agencies, research bodies and the wider community.

Previous studies and planning documents relating to community services, facilities, and employment in the area have been reviewed and utilised as appropriate. CNA has provided additional data on mine operations, financial details and proposed employment levels.

The study area for the site is the immediate vicinity of the mine, with information also provided for the Singleton LGA. Due to the significance of the project, the Hunter Region has been considered which also includes the LGAs of Cessnock, Muswellbrook, Newcastle and Scone.

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 80 A community consultation process has been undertaken throughout the preparation of the EIS and the findings of these consultations, where relevant, have been integrated and addressed in this chapter. The findings of the consultation process in conjunction with relevant data have been analysed to determine potential impacts from the alternatives. These impacts have been assessed for significance and mitigation measures outlined.

6.3 SOCIOECONOMIC PROFILE

6.3.1 Hunter Valley Region

The Hunter Valley region stretches from the Lake Macquarie area in the south, and extends north to Great Lakes and the Upper Hunter reaches of Murrurundi. The Hunter region consists of 13 LGAs including, Cessnock, Lake Macquarie, Maitland, Newcastle, Port Stephens, Dungog, Gloucester, Great Lakes, Merriwa, Murrurundi, Muswellbrook, Scone and Singleton. There are five LGAs in the Lower Hunter Valley and eight in the Upper Hunter Valley. Warkworth Mine is located in the Upper Hunter Valley in the Singleton LGA.

Demographic Profile

The Lower Hunter is the sixth largest urban area in Australia and is the largest non capital urban area in Australia. More than half the population of the Lower Hunter lives in the two LGAs of Newcastle and Lake Macquarie. There are strong links between the Lower Hunter and the Singleton LGA which adjoins it. Some areas of the Hunter Region have experienced a population decline between 1991 and 1996 (Merriwa and Murrurundi) while areas like Port Stephens are growing at a rapid rate.

According to the Hunter Valley Research Foundation (HVRF) regional report, Newcastle and the Hunter Region 2000-2001, there has been a slight population increase in Newcastle, Gloucester, Muswellbrook and Singleton LGAs. This report states:

“Growth in the latter two LGAs has largely been due to the restructuring of the Hunter coal mining industry, changing from underground mining in the Lower Hunter to open cut in the Upper Hunter. The electricity generation industry and various businesses associated with its operation and maintenance have also stimulated growth in Muswellbrook and Singleton.” (HVRF 2000)

At the time of the 2001 Population and Housing Census, the Hunter Statistical Division (SD), which includes all LGAs in the Lower and Upper Hunter Valley, had an estimated population of 563,587 people. The Hunter SD exhibited a slightly lower proportion of elderly persons in 2001 than the NSW level, with 15 % of the population over the age of 65 years, compared to 16.5 % of NSW. The majority of residents in the Hunter region were Australian born (85.5 %), which is significantly higher than the NSW overall population of 69.9 %.

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 81 Economic Profile

The unemployment rate for the Hunter region in March 2002 was 9.3 %, and the participation rate stood at 56.6 %. The HVRF Regional Indicators for March Quarter 2002 stated that there had been a 5.7 % reduction in the unemployment rate from March 2001. The HVRF states that this figure is largely attributable to the reduction in the participation rate as people cease to look for full time work. However, within this time period, it should be noted that the mining industry has recorded the largest increase in jobs.

The closure of many heavy manufacturing industries, such as BHP in Newcastle has shifted the economic focus of the Hunter region. Whilst the traditional manufacturing industries, such as coal and mining, continue to account for a significant proportion of the Hunter economy, more focus has also been placed in the tertiary sector, such as tourism, health, education and information technology due to the lapse in the secondary sector.

The main industries employing residents of the Hunter Valley during the 2001 Census was not available at the time of writing this EIS. The 1999-2000 Monthly Labor Force Survey data shows that 13.7 % of the Hunter Valley population was employed in the secondary sector, and the tertiary sector accounted for 79.5 %. The largest sectors of employment for the Hunter region at the time of the 1996 Census were retail trade (21 %), manufacturing (23 %), and health, education and community services (18 %).

Figure EIS-24 in Volume 4 illustrates that the Hunter region has an increasing proportion of its workforce employed in goods producing industries, which grew by 3 % between 1997 and 2000, reflecting the importance of agricultural, mined and manufactured goods to the Hunter economy. Figure EIS-24 in Volume 4 also illustrates the increase of tertiary sector jobs, such as person based service industries and knowledge-based services, which have increased significantly over the past three years.

The weekly individual income of the residents of the Hunter region at the 1996 Census is illustrated in Figure EIS-24 in Volume 4.

Figure EIS-24 in Volume 4 shows that during the time of the 1996 Census 148,570 persons (35.2 % of the population) earned between $1 and $199 per week, followed by $200 and $399 per week (21.3 % of the population). This was slightly higher than the NSW statistic of 30.4 % for people in the $1 and 199 per week bracket.

6.3.2 Singleton LGA

Demographic Profile

Singleton LGA covers an area of 4,896 square kilometres (km²) and is comprised of the larger villages of Broke, Bulga and Jerry Plains and smaller surrounding communities. The LGA is bordered by the LGAs of Muswellbrook, Rylstone, Scone, Dungog, Maitland, Cessnock and Hawkesbury.

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 82 The demographic profile considers the townships which adjoin Warkworth Mine, and for comparative purposes, the demographics of NSW.

The demographic statistics that are considered to be relevant are outlined below and include population size, age structure, income, cultural composition, and labour force participation rates and sectors.

Population Growth

The Singleton LGA had a population of 20,384 people at the 2001 Census. The population of the area grew rapidly between 1991 and 1996, with 7.3 % increase in the number of persons residing in the area. Table 6.2 illustrates that the population growth for the Singleton LGA has slowed since the 1996 Census. Between 1996 and 2001, the Singleton population grew by 1.2 % (244 people). In comparison to the Hunter region and NSW growth rates for the period 1996 to 2001, this growth rate was reasonably small.

Table 6.2 Population Growth of the Singleton LGA Compared to Hunter SD and NSW 1991 to 2001

Persons 1991 Persons 1996 Persons 2001 % Change % Change 1991-1996 1996-2001 Singleton LGA 18,661 20,133 20,384 7.3 1.2 Hunter SD 513,693 540,491 563,587 5.0 4.1 NSW 5,732,032 6,038,696 6,371,745 5.1 5.6 Source: Singleton Demographic Profile 1998 and ABS 2001

Population projections produced by SSC have suggested that the population of the Singleton LGA will continue to grow by 23.7 % between 2001 and 2021, to a total of 26,700 persons. This equates to an average growth rate of 1.1 % per annum.

Age Distribution

Table 6.3 illustrates the age characteristics of the Singleton LGA, as compared to the Hunter SD and NSW population. The Singleton LGA had 5,037 persons (24.8 % of the population) below 15 years of age in 2001. This is above the Hunter and NSW proportion of people aged 15 or below, of which there were 21 % and 20.8 % respectively. Similar to the Hunter and NSW, the age bracket with the largest concentration of persons was 35 to 44 years (16.3 % in Singleton LGA).

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/5 SEPTEMBER 2002 83 Table 6.3 Age Distribution for Singleton LGA 2001

Age Singleton LGA Persons Singleton LGA % Hunter SD % NSW % 0-4 1,589 7.8 6.6 6.7 5-14 3,448 17.0 14.4 14.1 15-24 2,782 13.7 13.0 13.4 25-34 2,913 14.4 12.8 14.5 35-44 3,308 16.3 14.6 15.3 45-54 2,850 14.0 13.5 13.5 55-64 1,550 7.6 10.0 9.4 65-74 1,053 5.2 8.1 7.1 75+ 796 3.9 7.0 6.1 TOTAL 20,289 100 100 100 Source: ABS 2001 Notes: Excludes overseas visitors

Tenure

A high proportion of residents (65.8 %) residing within the Singleton LGA own their own home, although this is also characteristic of the Hunter and NSW populations. The proportion of home ownership illustrates a level of financial independence.

Table 6.4 Tenure Type for Singleton LGA 2001

Singleton LGA Singleton Hunter SD NSW Tenure Type Number of LGA % % % dwellings Fully owned or being purchased 4,603 65.8 68.0 63.7 Rented 1,797 25.7 25.4 28.2 Other tenure type 271 3.9 2.8 2.8 Not stated 322 4.6 3.8 5.3 TOTAL 6,993 100 100 100 Source: ABS 2001

Labour Force

The labour force data from HVRF indicates an unemployment rate of 9.3 % in March 2002. The importance of the mining industry to the local economy is illustrated in the proportion of employed persons working within the mining industry in 1996. The main industries employing residents of Singleton LGA in 1996 were mining industry (18.8 %), retail (11.6 %), and government administration and defence (10.2 %) of employed persons.

Income

The Singleton LGA is reasonable wealthy in comparison to the Hunter and NSW statistical divisions. Table 6.5 is a comparison of the weekly individual income of the Singleton LGA, in comparison to the Hunter SD and NSW.

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/5 SEPTEMBER 2002 84 It shows that a lower proportion of its population earning below $499 per week in comparison to the Hunter SD (62.6 %) and 54.5 % of Singleton population. At the 2001 Census, 18.4 % of residents in the Singleton LGA (2,434 persons) earned in excess of $1,000 per week. This figure is higher than the Hunter (8.9 %) and NSW (12.3 %) proportions. This illustrates the relative wealth of the Singleton LGA.

Table 6.5 Weekly Individual Income for the Singleton LGA 2001

Number of Occupied Weekly Income Singleton LGA % Hunter SD % NSW % Dwellings Negative or nil 1,194 7.8 5.7 6.7 $1-$119 1,247 8.2 6.8 6.2 $120-$299 3,456 22.6 33.2 25.9 $300-$499 2,418 15.8 16.9 15.9 $500-$699 1,736 11.4 12.0 13.2 $700-$999 1,527 10.0 9.6 11.6 $1,000-$1,499 1,250 8.2 6.1 7.6 $1,500+ 1,254 8.2 2.8 4.7 Not Stated 1,180 7.7 6.9 8.2 TOTAL 15,262 100 100 100 Source: ABS 2001 Notes: Excludes overseas visitors

Economic Profile

Singleton LGA and the Hunter Valley consist of an economy dominated by mining, agriculture, power generation, tourism and defence. According to SSC, there were 17 mining operations in Singleton LGA that directly employed 3,500 staff, and produced 65 Mtpa of coal in 2000.

Agricultural products produced in the area included milk, beef, cattle, grapes and vegetables, which had a total value of $52 million in 1995.

The other major employment sources were defence, which employed 10 % of the population, particularly in association with the Singleton Infantry Centre. 11.6 % of residents in the Singleton LGA were employed in the retail trade.

6.4 VALUE OF THE COAL INDUSTRY

Mining is Australia’s largest export earner. In 1999 and 2000, minerals and metals exports totalled about $40 billion or one-third of total exports. Australia produces about 220 Mtpa of coal and exports to 35 countries.

According to the Coal Industry Profile 2002, coal mining accounted for $5 billion in income from mining in NSW during 2000 and 2001, contributing approximately $3.8 billion in export earnings for NSW. At the end of June 2001, the coal mining industry provided direct employment for 9,849 people

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/5 SEPTEMBER 2002 85 in the five coalfield regions of NSW. The industry also has indirect benefits to other industry sectors such as iron, steel and aluminium which rely on high quality coal and the more competitive electricity prices offered in NSW.

According to the NSW Minerals Council, nationally, the mining industry generates three additional jobs in other industries for every job in mining. These jobs cover mining equipment manufacture, transport, construction and service industries.

The Minerals Council also notes that the minerals industry contributes to local, state and federal government revenues with approximately $800 million per year paid in royalties, payroll tax and land tax etc. A further $700 million is paid for major services including rail haulage, electricity, water and port services and the industry is the largest customer of the State owned rail network and the ports of Newcastle and Port Kembla.

The Hunter Coalfield, where Warkworth Mine is located, is the largest coal producing area in NSW. In 2000 to 2001, the raw coal production from the Hunter Coalfields was 89.7 Mt. Production in this coalfield has been growing over the past decade and it is the fastest growing area of coal production in the State, particularly in open cut operations.

In 2000 to 2001 Warkworth Mine had raw production of 9.61 Mt, saleable production of 6.67 Mt. Thermal coal from the mine is exported to Japan, South Korea and Taiwan and also used domestically. The coking coal is exported to Japan.

6.5 CONTRIBUTION OF CNA AND WARKWORTH MINE TO SINGLETON LGA AND THE HUNTER REGION

CNA has made significant contributions to the Hunter Valley community. This has been achieved through continuing consultation with the Singleton and Hunter region communities through keeping the residents informed, community meetings, sponsorship programs and open days, all of which are discussed in the following sections.

6.5.1 CNA Consultation with the Community

CNA has increased the awareness of its activities and relationship with the community through a range of community consultation initiatives which, in 2001 included:

• face-to-face meetings with neighbours, residents and interest groups;

• Community Consultation Committee meetings which consist of representatives from SSC, community representatives, DLWC, EPA and DMR;

• conducting family open days and community open days;

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/5 SEPTEMBER 2002 86 • providing site tours for schools, universities and social groups;

• distributing local media releases;

• providing new publications to stakeholders; and

• the preparation of an annual Social and Environment report.

CNA has also raised awareness of its operations through a community survey, which was distributed to 700 community leaders and in excess of 1,600 employees to assess their perception of CNA’s performance in 2000 and 2001. From this, CNA has deduced that environment, occupational health and safety, increasing the skill development, regional economic development and sustainable employment remain top priorities for the company, as well as its relationship with the community.

6.5.2 Contribution to the Local Community

CNA has contributed significant funds into the local community to assist with increasing job skills, education schemes, charity organisations, and emergency groups within the Singleton LGA and Hunter Valley.

CNA has made donations and initiated sponsorship programs for the local and regional community. In 2001 alone, approximately $120,000 was donated to 120 community groups in the area, such as the Health Start Program coordinated by the Red Cross at Muswellbrook High School and $58,600 sponsorship was donated to emergency services that are used by the community, such as the Hunter Westpac Rescue Helicopter, Hunter Medical Research Institute and HVRF in 2001.

CNA established a Community Trust in 1999 to assist community led initiatives which address long term local issues identified through consultation with community and business leaders in the areas of sustained education, social and economic development. To date, the CNA Community Trust has committed over $1.8 million to Upper Hunter community projects, of which $807,000 was distributed in 2001.

Warkworth is also utilised by local and regional schools, through inviting universities, teachers, and students to on-site visits. In 2001 over 23 schools and universities, and community groups undertook site visits to CNA mines of which seven took place at Warkworth Mine. Open days have taken place at the Bengalla, Mount Thorley Operations and Warkworth Mine, with the Warkworth Mine open day taking place in 2002. The financial contribution of Warkworth Mine and CNA to the local and regional community is therefore extremely valuable to the residents of the area.

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/5 SEPTEMBER 2002 87 6.5.3 Assisting Warkworth Mine Employees

CNA provides its employees with training and helps develop new skills through programs conducted throughout the year. For example, CNA provides its supervisors with the Leading the Frontline training programs to help build their skill base and team leadership abilities.

Through the Hunter Valley Training Company, CNA manages an apprentice program for 36 apprentices. It is a four year program aimed to give the apprentices experience in organisations, such as CNA whilst they complete their formal qualifications.

CNA also supports a number of first year university students with $2,000 scholarships to contribute to their university fees.

6.5.4 Complaint Handling Procedures

A complaint handling procedure has been set in place at all CNA operations, including Warkworth Mine. CNA has a 24 hour environmental contact hotline for community issues which relate to the operations of the mine. A complaints handling procedure has been introduced, which states that if a complaint is made to the hotline, a company representative is notified, who immediately contacts the complainant to discuss the nature of the complaint.

After a complaint is made, an environmental complaint form is completed, outlining the nature of the complaint, time, date, and site location. This information is then entered into the complaints database and an investigation is undertaken. The relevant site personnel are also notified to resolve the issue promptly and to make them aware of the issue. The Manager or General Manager may also be contacted to assist in resolving the issue. The original complainant is then notified of the resolved issue.

In 2001, there were only a few minor complaints regarding Warkworth Mine. They included excessive noise and dust levels during a period of dry, windy weather. Immediate actions were undertaken by Warkworth Mine staff and recorded in the complaints handling database. More frequent inspections are now held and an independent audit of the EMS has been introduced.

The above mechanisms were noted when CNA was awarded the NSW Premier’s Mineral Export of the Year award. This award stated that CNA has been a leader in helping to make coal extraction and transport more compatible with surrounding activities and communities.

6.6 POTENTIAL IMPACTS AND IMPACT ASSESSMENT

This section discusses the potential social and economic impacts of two possible future scenarios for Warkworth Mine. Outcome 1 addresses the potential social and economic impacts should Warkworth Mine close after

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/5 SEPTEMBER 2002 88 reaching the limits of current consent boundaries. Outcome 2 looks at the potential impacts of the mine’s continuing operation and expansion under the proposal.

6.6.1 Outcome 1

General

As discussed in Chapter 17, Warkworth Mine will intersect consent boundaries in April 2003. If development consent is not granted, the mine will wind down and ultimately close. Outcome 1 addresses the potential social and economic impacts of the closure of the coal mine, should the proposal to extend its operations not be approved.

Social Impacts

The potential closure of Warkworth Mine may result in benefits and losses to the surrounding community. It is expected that benefits may stem from a small alleviation in environmental amenity issues such as noise, vibration and dust. The long term social disadvantages to the community would involve loss of revenue and support for the community, social impacts of unemployment, and loss of social networks.

Whilst the closure of Warkworth Mine may result in some increase in environmental amenity issues through less noise and vibration, and improved air quality, it is expected that the continuation of the other local coal mines would continue to contribute to these environmental issues. Local quality of life may therefore be similar to the current situation, should the operations close. If Warkworth Mine extends it operations, best practice mitigation measures will be employed to minimise impacts on nearby residents from continued operations of the mine. For any nearby property that will be subject to predicted noise and dust levels exceeding industry standards, as determined by an agreed monitoring program, WML will offer to purchase the property at market rates. These issues are discussed in Outcome 2.

The closure of Warkworth Mine may place increased pressure on families in the area, due to the loss of income and job opportunities for residents who are currently employed at the mine. This is particularly the case with long term employees in the 40 to 50 year age group, who may experience difficulty in seeking alternative employment.

The closure of the mine may also result in population loss in the surrounding towns and villages, and within time, a loss of social services and facilities in the smaller towns. The growth rate in the Singleton LGA has slowed markedly between 1996 and 2001 and the loss of employment may well result in families leaving the town and create less opportunities for people to move into the district.

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/5 SEPTEMBER 2002 89 The mining industry has been an integral part of the Singleton LGA and Hunter Valley and has assisted in formulating the surrounding villages’ identity. Mining within the Singleton LGA has existed since 1870 and has remained an important part of the economic and social system. In December 2000, there were 17 operational mines and 8 new mining projects that had commenced or were at the DA stage within the Singleton LGA.

Warkworth Mine has a number of long term employees, therefore the potential loss of the mine to the community may adversely impact upon the social networks, and sense of community formed between the employees at Warkworth Mine. As most workers are shift workers with irregular hours, the social networks between miners often plays an important role as many have time off when families are working or sleeping.

Economic Impacts

Unemployment

The HVRF March Quarter 2002 Economic Indicators report noted that unemployment remains persistently high in the region and that the lower participation rate implies that discouraged workers are no longer seeking employment as the probability of seeking employment in the concurrent market is low.

Warkworth Mine currently employs 437 full time employee equivalents. Many employees are long standing workers at the mine with an average length of service of 15 years and an average age of 46 years.

The future operations at Warkworth Mine also cannot be considered in isolation. The neighbouring mine, Mount Thorley Operations, is nearing the end of its current mining approvals and in the absence of further approvals, it will be gradually scaled down. As a result, if the proposed extension is granted it is likely that 144 full time staff will be relocated to Warkworth Mine. At its peak, the joint operations will employ 777 full time employee equivalents in Year 9 as indicated in Table 6.7. If the extension to Warkworth Mine is not granted, the future of the majority of these jobs is uncertain.

Table 6.6 outlines Warkworth Mine employee’s current residential location, with one third drawn from the Singleton LGA, and the remainder drawn from neighbouring LGAs. There is a similar profile for those currently employed at Mount Thorley Operations.

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/5 SEPTEMBER 2002 90 Table 6.6 Residential Location of the Warkworth Mine Workforce

LGA Proportion of Workforce Singleton 36.5 % Cessnock 28.5 % Maitland 24 % Port Stephens 3 % Muswellbrook 3 % Newcastle 5 % Source: CNA 2002

Any mine closure would result in significant job losses for this area. As previously mentioned, CNA has indicated that if approval is not granted for an extension, then the current consent boundaries would be reached in April 2003. Based on an altered mine plan, Warkworth Mine would cease within a few years, with the workforce being reduced as the reserves are exhausted. The estimated decline in workforce numbers over the subsequent shortened life of the mine would be significant. The eventual loss of between 300 and 450 jobs in this area during the next five years would have significant impact on the local community. The eventual loss of a further 220 job opportunities in the longer term (assuming a peak workforce of 777 persons at the combined operation) will also significantly impact the local community. Almost all the workers are male, and with an average age of 46 years, many would find it difficult to obtain alternative employment outside the coal industry. Some workers may find employment at other mines, though this may be in the form of contract employment (the preferred option for a number of mine operators) which has lower job security.

The Minerals Council estimates that for every direct job in the coal sector nationally, another 3 jobs result in associated sectors. Due to concentration of mining in the Hunter, it would result in greater regional impacts than other areas. Using this multiplier, up to 1,350 jobs would be impacted in the economy over the next 5 years and up to 2,000 jobs in the longer term by the closure of Warkworth Mine. This would include suppliers, rail and ports operators and other contractors.

Financial Implications

Warkworth Mine provides a significant investment into the local, regional, state and national economies. As outlined in Table 6.8, between 1993 and 2002, the sales revenue from the mine has been $2.2 billion. In addition to this, $182 million has been paid in taxes and a further $92 million in royalties.

CNA estimates a sales revenue of $8.6 billion over the projected life of the extension. If the coal resource in this area is not recovered, there would be a significant opportunity cost to the Australian economy, and our potential export earnings and balance of trade over the next 18 years. In addition, royalties of up to $340 million payable to the NSW Government would be lost.

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 91 It is acknowledged that if Warkworth Mine were to close, other coal mines in the Hunter or other areas may be able to fulfill export contracts, however, there is no guarantee that the supply of coal could be maintained from the same coalfield. Therefore this may well result in significant lost revenue to the Singleton LGA.

Flow on Effects into the Economy

The expenditure into the local economy from Warkworth Mine is estimated at $163 million over the past 12 months. This comprises $75 million in the Singleton LGA and a further $88 million to the remainder of the Hunter region.

Purchases in the local area include tyres, plant parts and repair labour, explosives, magnetite, flocculant, equipment hire, plant and equipment purchase, consumables, safety goods and services, council rates, transportation of heavy equipment (excluding rail freight), fuel, lubricants and consultants (all disciplines). These figures do not include items such as electricity and telephone services which are paid from a central office off site.

According to CNA, a closure of operations at Warkworth Mine would impact greatest on smaller engineering firms and parts supply businesses and large suppliers in the Singleton LGA.

Property Values

The closure of the mine and subsequent rehabilitation of the mine site may impact on surrounding property values. There may be a decrease due to local unemployment and population loss which may be counterbalanced by improved amenity to those properties nearest the mine. This may occur over the medium to long term, however, these impacts have not been quantified in this study.

6.6.2 Outcome 2

General

The proposal will extend the life of the mine to 2020, therefore Outcome 2 addresses the social and economic impacts of the extension option. This is essentially the opposite of impacts outlined for mine closure.

Social Impacts

The potential social impacts of the extension of the mine include a number of long term benefits to the local and regional community, as well as potential environmental amenity issues. The social impacts of the continuation and extension of the mine’s operations have been taken from the issues raised by the community during the extensive community consultation process that occurred throughout the preparation of the EIS.

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 92 The potential environmental amenity issues associated with the continuation of Warkworth Mine include noise and vibration, air and water quality issues, visual impacts, loss of native habitat and reduction in archaeological resources. The prominent issues raised by the community included:

• noise and vibrations impacts due to blasting;

• dust emissions from the site, and their impacts on human health;

• potential discharges of contaminated water into local waterways;

• impacts to visual amenity; and

• concerns about road safety as a result of reduction of visibility on The Putty Road due to dust.

All of these issues have been thoroughly explored in the EIS and SIS and appropriate mitigation measures will be implemented to ensure that the community’s quality of life is not significantly impacted. Mitigation measures that will be introduced to address environmental amenity issues and are addressed in Chapter 16. A general summary of pertinent strategies to address the community’s concerns is provided in Section 6.7.

The benefits to the community will be generated from the continued opportunities that are presented to the residents from CNA and Warkworth Mine’s operations. The operations at Warkworth Mine provide local residents with community and family open days, developing the skills of the employees through education and training programs, and donations to the local schools, charity groups and emergency services.

The continuation of social networks, and the unified identity of the area as a coal mining locality will continue to strengthen with the continuing and expanding operations of Warkworth Mine. The retention of employment will support the stability of the local population and therefore support the maintenance of services and industry.

Over the 18 year life of the extended operations, there is a predicted peak of employment in Year 9 of 742 staff at Warkworth Mine which is then scaled back to 569 in Year 17. Staff numbers will be built up over time which will allow for adequate planning to ensure the availability of skilled staff at the appropriate time. From Year 2, most of Mount Thorley Operations’ staff will commence and finish shifts at Warkworth Mine resulting in a maximum workforce of up to 777 from both operations as outlined in Table 6.7.

Economic Impacts

Local

Warkworth Mine’s extension will have an 18 year time frame, which at its peak will employ up to 742 full time employee equivalents. This level of

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 93 employment will provide a significant economic benefit to the community through an increased expenditure on salaries and subsequent local expenditure.

Table 6.7 Warkworth Mine and Mount Thorley Operations Workforce over the Life of Proposal

Year Number of Full Time Employee Equivalents 2002 729 2003 705 2004 665 2005 677 2006 681 2007 673 2008 772 2009 771 2010 767 2011 777 2012 674 2013 671 2014 664 2015 668 2016 644 2017 629 2018 615 2019 604 2020 604 Source: CNA 2002

The employment catchment area has a population of over 20,384 people in the Singleton LGA and 563,587 people in the Hunter SD, and together includes a number of major centres such as Newcastle, as well as a range of towns, such as Maitland, Scone, Muswellbrook, Cessnock and Singleton. The population profile indicates a labour force with experience and characteristics, which are suited to the employment, required for coal mining.

On the basis of the mine plan from CNA, the workforce will be largely sourced from the existing operations at Warkworth Mine and Mount Thorley Operations. Therefore, there is no expected influx of employees from outside the region seeking accommodation, community facilities, and services. In addition, the continued operations at Warkworth Mine will ensure that the current 400 employees will not be without employment and that they would not be concurrently seeking work in the region or drawing on other support services.

As outlined in Table 6.8, the proposed mine extension will make a significant economic contribution to the economy at a local, national and international level.

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 94 Table 6.8 Economic Contribution of Warkworth Mine

Item 1993-2002 (Measured) 2003-2020 (Forecast) Taxes payable $182 million $975 million Royalties $92 million $340 million Sales revenue $2,213 million $8,664 million Rail freight $174 million $437 million Capital NA $256 million Labour $158 million (1998-2002) $665 million Source: CNA 2002

Warkworth Mine currently expends $163 million into the local economy per annum. The proposed extension of the mine will extend the operations until 2021 and generate $8.6 billion dollars in revenue, which will be filtered into the local, regional and state economy.

Regional

CNA’s mining operations employ over 1,800 people in the Hunter Valley. In addition to the personnel who are involved in the operations at Warkworth Mine, personnel are also employed in the area of cleaning, electrical maintenance, mechanical maintenance heritage, environmental, rehabilitation works, earthmoving, and information technology support. The majority of these personnel are employed from local contractors from the surrounding townships.

State and National

The public sector also receives benefits from the coal industry through taxes, state owned enterprises and royalties. The Federal Government receives revenue in the form of taxes (company, sales and income tax from employees), and excise on fuel and imported equipment and goods.

The State Government holds an interest in rail freight and port charges and in some consumers of coal (electricity). The State Government collects payroll tax on the wages of employees and some royalties.

Local Government

Local government benefits from rate revenues and the rates of employees living in the surrounding areas.

Key Economic Linkages

Coal mining in the Hunter Coalfields is an integral part of the regional economy, contributing to value added manufacturing carried out in the Newcastle area, and earning export income via the Port Waratah Coal Terminal.

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 95 The Coal Industry Profile 2002, predicts a continued growth in demand for thermal coal over the next decade. The NSW Government’s strategic study of the coal sector predicted that 13 coal mines will close in the Hunter and Newcastle coalfields over the next 10 years, due to the depletion of reserves. The report goes on to predict that by 2007 to 2008, approximately 50 % of production could be from new mines and extensions, a significant proportion of which will come from open cut mines in the Upper Hunter Valley.

The HVRF has indicated that the main concern in the Hunter is job losses. The number of persons working in the region in 2001 was 266,000, which fell to 230,000 in February 2002. Therefore, employment is a key issue for the region.

The average weekly earnings of coal miners in open cut mines in 2000 to 2001 is $1,776.10 equating to an annual salary of approximately $90,000. This provides for an annual after tax salary of approximately $60,000. Based on a maximum total integrated workforce of 777 in 2011, this equates to approximately $46 million in available annual household expenditure (a conservative estimate based on 2002 dollar values). Based on the Mining Industry and Employee Survey undertaken for the Mount Arthur North EIS in 2000, up to 85 % of household expenditure will be undertaken in the surrounding LGAs, 9 % in Newcastle and 6 % outside the region.

6.6.3 Cumulative Impacts

Outcome 1

The closure of the Warkworth Mine’s operations may slightly lessen the cumulative environmental impacts caused by the coal mining industry in the Singleton area. However, should the mine be forced to close, there would still be approximately 17 mines operating in the Singleton area, with four in close proximity to Warkworth Mine. Consequently, while the closure of the mine may provide some environmental amenity benefits, coal mining will remain the dominant industry in the area.

Should the coal mine close, there will be significant direct and indirect job losses placing additional strain on the social support services within the area, such as Centrelink and other job agencies. In some circumstances, residents of the town that are employed by Warkworth Mine may be forced to move to another area to seek new employment opportunities.

Economic cumulative issues include the structural adjustments occurring in the global coal industry. Any significant mine closure in the area may create uncertainty in the sector, particularly for businesses who largely supply to Warkworth Mine.

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 96 Outcome 2

As the employees utilised by Warkworth Mine in the planned extension of the mine would mainly consist of the current workforce, it is not expected that the extension of the mine would place pressure on the social infrastructure in the area, such as community services, housing and services.

The extension of the mine would maintain the supply of thermal coal which has been identified by the State Government as a key export earner. This will have flow on effects to other key industries and local contractors.

6.7 MITIGATION

If Outcome 1 proceeds, then a complete mine closure plan would need to be developed with a significant component related to employment and structural adjustment to the wider economy. This would need to be developed by CNA in conjunction with local, state and federal government agencies and other relevant authorities.

The social and economic component of the plan would need to:

• identify and include a timeframe for the mine closure stating the scale down in employment by types of worker;

• identify all contractors, suppliers and associated industries linked to the mine operation and identify direct and indirect impacts;

• develop strategies which attempt to redeploy workers and full time contractors;

• work with coal marketing agencies to develop alternative sources of coal for the domestic and international market;

• identify alternative sources of support for the local community which currently benefits from sponsorship and financial support; and

• work with social services agencies to provide support for retrenched workers and their families.

The potential environmental amenity issues that may stem from Outcome 2 included issues with regards to noise and vibration, water quality, air quality, visual amenity, loss of native habitat, Aboriginal heritage resources and road safety. The mitigation measures for these issues have been discussed extensively in the relevant chapters.

As the employees utilised by Warkworth Mine in the planned extension of the mine would mainly consist of the Warkworth Mine and Mount Thorley Operations workforce, it is not expected that the extension of the mine would place pressure on the social infrastructure in the area, such as community services, housing and services.

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 97 Warkworth Mine have an existing community consultation strategy, which ensures that the staff at Warkworth Mine and CNA liaise with the local community, stakeholders and government authorities. In order to minimise the social impacts of the extension of the coal mine effectively, the following management strategies will be implemented:

• throughout the operation of the mine, CNA and Warkworth Mine staff will continue to have a pro-active community information program. The Warkworth Community Consultative Committee will continue to meet with members of SSC, DLWC, DMR and the EPA to discuss the mine’s progress and compliance with conditions of development consent;

• newsletters will be distributed to inform residents in advance of significant activities taking place; and

• a 24 hour contact line will continue to operate, allowing the community to contact CNA staff, should they have an issue with the operation of the mine. The complaints process ensures that complaints are recorded and monitored, effectively handled, and reviewed on a regular basis.

These strategies will be implemented to ensure that the community is informed of on-site works, as well as being able to contact persons on-site to raise any issues of concern, make complaints or provide positive feedback.

6.8 CONCLUSION

The extension of Warkworth Mine will ensure that mining operations will continue until 2020. This additional 18 year time frame will ultimately provide a benefit to the local and regional community and economy by:

• ensuring ongoing employment of up to 777 people predominantly from Warkworth Mine and Mount Thorley Operations;

• an additional sales revenue of an estimated $8.6 billion;

• a further $340 million in royalties;

• over $163 million per annum into the local economy; and

• significant flow on effects into the regional, state and national economy.

To not progress with the mining of such a valuable coal resource by both domestic and international markets will result in a significant lost opportunity cost.

It should be noted that some neighbouring properties are impacted currently by Warkworth Mine and that this is predicted to continue under the proposed mine plan. However, mitigation strategies have been developed to minimise impacts and Warkworth Mine is committed to ensuring all complaints are addressed as soon as practicable. In addition, WML will offer to purchase, at

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 98 market value, any property where noise and dust levels are predicted to exceed industry standards, as determined by an agreed monitoring program.

CNA will continue throughout its operations to be socially responsible, as seen through the Warkworth Community Consultative Committee, Community Survey and comprehensive complaints handling procedure. The involvement and consultation with the community has also been evident through the community and family open days, meetings with residents, school site tours. Programs such as the Community Trust, sponsorships, donations and the Aboriginal Development Consultative Committee have provided support to the local community. The extension of the mine will ensure that these efforts continue, and that the community is able to benefit from the operations within the region.

The direct economic benefits of Warkworth Mine and the flow on effects into the local, regional and national economies are significant. The continued operation of the mine is vital to the ongoing economic development of the region.

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 99 Extension of Warkworth Coal Mine environmental impact statement

CHAPTER 7

Physical Environment 7 PHYSICAL ENVIRONMENT

7.1 GEOLOGY AND COAL RESOURCE

7.1.1 Regional Geology

Warkworth Mine is covered by CCL 753 and Mining Lease 1412. The major stratigraphic unit within the Mining Lease is the Late Permian Wittingham Coal Measures comprising the coal bearing Jerry’s Plains and Vane Subgroups and the non-coal bearing Saltwater Creek Formation. These are underlain by the marine Maitland Group which consists of the Mulbring Siltstone, Muree Sandstone and the Branxton Formation. The Wollombi Coal Measures overlie the Wittingham Coal Measures and outcrop in the far south western corner of the Mining Lease.

Quaternary and alluvium deposits occur along the Hunter River and its major tributaries and isolated patches of Cainozoic windblown sands occur within the northern, central and western parts of the Mining Lease.

7.1.2 Geology of CCL 753 and Mining Lease 1412

General

Warkworth Mine is located within the Singleton Super Group. Regional stratigraphic nomenclature is shown in Figure EIS-25 in Volume 4.

The Jerry’s Plains Subgroup outcrops across the majority of the Mining Lease, with the Wollombi Coal Measures outcropping in the south west of the Mining Lease and the Vane Subgroup and Saltwater Creek Formation exposed along the eastern boundary of the Mining Lease adjacent to the Mount Thorley Monocline. Quaternary alluvial deposits associated with the Hunter River and Wollombi Brook obscure the Permian strata over the northern and eastern parts of the Mining Lease.

Mount Leonard Formation

The Mount Leonard Formation forms the uppermost unit of the Jerry’s Plains Subgroup. Within the Warkworth Mining Lease the unit is approximately 20 m thick and is composed of massive sandstone to conglomerate with intercalated thin coal seams including the Whybrow seam.

Althorpe Formation

The Althorpe Formation forms a persistent band of light greenish to white tuffaceous claystone generally less than 2 m in thickness. This formation directly overlies the Redbank Creek coal seam within the Warkworth Mining Lease.

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 101 Malabar Formation

The Malabar Formation is approximately 140 m thick within the Warkworth Mining Lease and conformably overlies the Mount Ogilvie Formation, with the basal contact marked by the Blakefield coal seam. This unit consists of sandstone, siltstone, conglomerate and minor claystone, and includes the Redbank Creek, Wambo, Whynot and Blakefield coal seams.

Mount Ogilvie Formation

The Mount Ogilvie Formation within the Warkworth Mining Lease is approximately 50 m in thickness with the base of the unit marked by the base of the Woodlands Hill coal seam. The Saxonvale Member, a pale cherty tuffaceous claystone (siltstone marker unit), marks the top of this formation. The Mount Ogilvie Formation is composed of sandstone, siltstone, carbonaceous siltstone and minor claystone and includes the Glen Munro and Woodlands Hill coal seams.

Milbrodale Formation

The Milbrodale Formation within the Warkworth Mining Lease is generally less than 1 m in thickness and occurs as a waxy white tuffaceous claystone to cherty siltstone that occurs at the base of the Woodlands Hill coal seam.

Mount Thorley Formation

The Mount Thorley Formation is essentially a continuation same coal bearing sequence as the Burnamwood Formation. Within the Warkworth Mining Lease the thickness of this unit is approximately 110 m and the unit contains the Warkworth, Bowfield and Arrowfield coal seams.

Fairford Formation

The Fairford Formation forms a distinctive 1.25 to 1.5 m thick unit that separates the Burnamwood Formation and the Mount Thorley Formation. This unit immediately overlies the Mount Arthur seam and is composed of off white claystone to volcanogenic lithic sandstone.

Burnamwood Formation

The Burnamwood Formation is the lowermost unit in the Jerry’s Plains Subgroup, the base of which is defined by the Bayswater seam. This unit is composed of sandstone and siltstone as well as five named coal seams, namely the Bayswater, Broonie, Vaux, Piercefield and Mount Arthur seams.

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 102 Archerfield Sandstone

The Archerfield Sandstone forms the stratigraphic division between the Jerry’s Plains Subgroup and the underlying Vane Subgroup. The Archerfield Sandstone underlies the basal split of the Bayswater Coal Member and is represented within the Warkworth Mining Lease as a medium to coarse grained lithic sandstone with a characteristic brown colouration.

Foybrook Formation

The Foybrook Formation consists of up to 370 m of interbedded conglomerate, sandstone, siltstone, mudstone and coal seams. The coal members represented within the Foybrook Formation are the Lemington, Pikes Gully, Arties, Liddell, Barrett and Hebden seams.

Saltwater Creek Formation

The Saltwater Creek Formation is the basal unit of the Wittingham Coal Measures, it is represented by medium to coarse grained sediment and is barren of coal seams. The Saltwater Creek Formation outcrops over the eastern portion of the Mining Lease and defines the eastern limit of exploration.

7.1.3 Structure

The strata within the Warkworth Mining Lease dip to the west and the south west generally between 4 and 6 degrees with dips increasing up to in excess of 60 degrees in the south eastern corner of the Mining Lease along the western limb of the Mount Thorley Monocline. A broad syncline is developed in the north western part of the Mining Lease with localised folding along its eastern edge. One major fault, the Lemington Fault, occurs with an approximate throw of 15 m to the west of the current North Pit.

7.1.4 Resources and Reserves

The Warkworth Mining Lease contains significant resources of thermal, soft and semisoft coking coal. It contains both open cut and underground resources. Open cut resources total 166 Mt, comprising 92 Mt of measured resource and 74 Mt of indicated resource. Total underground resources are estimated at 650 Mt, with 330 Mt of this assigned to measured status, 140 Mt indicated status and 180 Mt inferred.

A summary of the available coal seams and their characteristics is presented in Table 7.1.

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 103 Table 7.1 Coal Seam Characteristics

Seam Seam Thickness Number of Workable Product Potential (m) Sections Redbank Creek 2.15 4 Coking/steaming Wambo 1.80 3 Coking/steaming Whynot 1.45 3 Coking/steaming Blakefield 3.35 6 Coking/steaming Glen Munro 2.35 3 Steaming Woodlands Hill 2.60 3 Coking/steaming Arrowfield 2.50 2 Steaming Bowfield 4.00 2 Steaming Warkworth 3.80 4 Steaming Mount Arthur 7.50 5 Steaming Piercefield 4.50 6 Coking Vaux 2.50 3 Coking/steaming Source: ERM 1998

7.2 TOPOGRAPHY

7.2.1 Regional Topography

The Hunter Valley has four landform units:

• Liverpool and Mount Royal Ranges (including Barrington Tops);

• Merriwa Plateau and Goulburn Valley;

• North Eastern Foothills; and

• Central Lowlands.

The Liverpool, Mount Royal and Barrington Tops in the north and north east of the valley form the headwaters of the Hunter River.

The Merriwa Plateau is derived from weathered basalt. The Goulburn Valley to the south has softer sandstones forming broad open valleys. A sandstone escarpment and plateau forming the Wollemi National Park defines the south western part of the Upper Hunter.

The north eastern part of the Upper Hunter is a hilly and low mountainous area derived from hard sedimentary rocks and lava. It extends from the Mount Royal and Barrington Tops to the central part of the Valley.

The Central Lowlands extends from Murrurundi to Branxton and was formed from relatively weak Permian sediments. Warkworth Mine is located in the Central Lowlands of the Hunter Valley.

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 104 7.2.2 Local Topography

The landscape character of the area is dominated by moderate to gentle undulating slopes, with several locally dominant smaller ridges. The highest point in the lease at 165 m AHD, occurs on the southern part of Saddleback Ridge which forms the main north-trending ridge through the middle of the lease. The ridge slopes northwards towards the junction of Sandy Hollow and Dights Creeks, where prior to mining, it was only 70 m AHD. The ridge is now intersected by current mining operations in the West Pit.

A lower ridge which extends in a north westerly direction, parallel to Wallaby Scrub Road, separates the catchments of the Hunter River and Wollombi Brook. The ridge reaches its high point at Watts Peak of 140 m AHD, near the north western corner of the Mining Lease. From these ridges, the land slopes down to undulating and gently undulating land and then to the alluvial flats of the Hunter River and Wollombi Brook, which lie at elevations of approximately 40 to 50 m AHD and 60 m AHD, respectively.

7.3 LAND USE

7.3.1 Regional Land Use Patterns

The Upper Hunter has a strong historical association with the rural sector and has traditionally been dominated by a mixed grazing and cropping landscape, with dairy farms clustered along the Hunter River floodplain. The region is also a well established wine growing area with over 50 vineyards located throughout the Upper Hunter.

Coal mining was introduced into the Upper Hunter approximately 30 years ago and the region now has the highest proportion of coal mining in NSW, 90 % of which is open cut. Whilst coal mining is a visually dominant land use, it occupies less than 0.8 % of all available land in the region.

Land use statistics are provided in Table 7.2.

7.3.2 Local Setting

The area in the immediate vicinity of Warkworth Mine is dominated by coal mines and associated industry as shown in Figure EIS-2 in Volume 4. Hunter Valley Operations and Wambo Mine are located to the north and north west of the site and Mount Thorley Operations and Bulga Mine are located to the south.

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 105 Table 7.2 Land Use in the Upper Hunter

Land Use Area (ha) % Grazing 874,750 47.8 Timber 769,500 42.0 Cropping 153,750 8.4 Mining 14,700 0.8 Water Bodies 6,000 0.3 Urban 4,450 0.2 Vineyard 4,250 0.2 Recreation 1,350 0.1 Vegetables 300 0.2 Quarrying 650 < 0.1 Utilities 450 < 0.1 Industrial 300 < 0.1 Orchards 250 < 0.1 Intensive Animal Production 250 < 0.1 TOTAL 1,830,950 100 Source: DUAP 1997

The distribution pattern for surrounding agricultural properties is predominantly determined by the local landscape character. More intensive agriculture is largely restricted to rich alluvial soils that occur in narrow corridors along the floodplains of the Hunter River and Wollombi Brook, to the north, east and west of the site. Intensive agricultural uses include dairy and beef cattle grazing on improved and non-improved pasture, fodder cropping and the running of horses. The undulating hillslopes in the surrounding areas are generally used for grazing on non-improved pasture.

7.3.3 Land Ownership and Local Setting

With the exception of pockets of land located in the north western corner of the Mining Lease and some crown land, WML currently owns the vast majority of land in the Warkworth Mining Lease, including all land subject to the proposed extension. Other interests in the surface land within the Mining Lease include properties owned by:

• Coal & Allied Operations Pty Limited;

• Wambo Mining Corporation Pty Limited; and

• CM Hawkes Pty Limited

CNA have identified 127 privately owned properties within a radius of 4 to 5 km from the edge of the Mining Lease, including properties contained within the villages of Warkworth and Bulga. For the purpose of this EIS, these are properties that do not contain mine owned residences or commerical or industrial uses.

Details of property ownership within and surrounding Warkworth Mine’s Mining Lease can be seen in Figure EIS- 26 in Volume 4. Details of privately owned properties are summarised in Table 7.3.

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 106 Mulally, McMaugh, Burke J, P & G Burke J, P & Mulally, McMaugh, (Hexon Sands) Lot 18 Unknown Stuart D, B & P Stuart D, B & P V Kime t modelling purposes. modelling t 2 2 3 3 3 120 101102103 T Burley 104 H Kannar 105 H Kannar 106 J G & Delaney 107 DJ & PM Welsh 108 L G & Welsh 109 Upward 110 E Neville C & 111 C & P Reid 112 F Turnbull C & P Reid 114 D D & Strachan 115116 Dawsons 117 P Ritchie 118 F Bailey R & 119 P Culbert M G & Banks H Upward 121122123 Ltd Pty Hawkes CM 124 B Anderson 125 Carnevale 126 Burgess & Goldstein D Clemson N & Neal C 100 113 127 128 129 Property No. Owner Property Property Owner Property DR HD & Hobden M & J Saada & Assad Headly S Langdon B L J & Clements A K & Phillips Famel F & J L Price C & Farmer I 101 Lot E Mackenzie D Vikas S & & Mitchell Lot 2 Unknown G Turnbull L S & Pringle R McLaughlin McLaughlan L & N T P & Swindail Harris & Caban R & K Nichols & Anderson R & S Saunders D & V M S & Mitchell Pritchard J A B, R & Gallagher Bartholomew I & A Bartholomew I & A E Quinlan 128 Lot 140 Lot Banks G & M Bailey C Stokes 2 2 2 2 2 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 77 78 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 97 98 99 76 79 80 95 96 Property No. These property numbers have been reserved for noise and dus and reserved for noise been have numbers property These Lot 4 Unknown Edward & Haynes K & LF 2 2 343536 J O'Hara R & 37 Kelly CM 38 Ltd Pty Heuston 39 Vidler Ltd Pty Heuston 41 Ltd Pty Heuston 4243 GA Ball CS & 44 Topdock 45 Moore 46 Pitt 47 Ltd Pty Marendale 48 Berry GE & EA 49 Hall J 50 L & C Slade 51 R Thrift & Co 52 J F & Ventra 53 Kannar H 54 Kannar H Exxon 555657 F Wellard M & 58 Langdon L & S 59 Kannar RW 60 R Russell BJ & P Adamthwaite A R & Godyn 636465 R Halter 66 R Halter Barry WT & LU DR Riley NF & 61 62 40` WEA Ball Property No. Owner Property Property Owner Property Kannar H Lucas JL & KA Welsh W & H R & O'Hara J Berry KG, TK, GE & LA R & J Klasen Waldock K C Russell B & K Isaac C Russell P & Headly S Headly J Larkin Lobb M Slade K W Townsend Clark J & C Garland Fogwell B Smith K & R Circosta Abrocuff Pty Ltd Merrick H Maizey D Lambkin Henderson J L Kelly WM & Algie RJ & CY - - Russell C Renaud A & N Upward H & E 1. residences. private contain not 30 do 29 and Nos. Property 2.3. 113. 100 and 96, 95, 80, 79, 76, 62, 61, Nos. Property for be obtained able to been have details No ownership affectation. of zone Mine’s Warkworth within contained 129 are currently 128 and 127, Nos. Property 1 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 31 32 33 29 30 Property No. Source:Notes: 2002 CNA Table 7.3 on Ownership of Private Properties Surrounding Warkworth Mine Details

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 107 7.4 SOILS AND LAND CAPABILITY

7.4.1 Introduction

A soil and land capability survey for the site was undertaken by GSS in May 2002 on behalf of CNA. The major objectives of this survey were to:

• describe, classify and map soils and land capability within the extension area; and

• analyse the various soil units to identify their suitability for topdressing of disturbed areas within the mine.

The soil and land capability survey is presented in full in Part A of Volume 2, with the results summarised in the following sections.

7.4.2 Survey and Methodology

Soil Survey

The broad objective of the survey is to qualify the reserves of suitable topdressing material to assist planning of future rehabilitation operations. A soil map was initially developed using the following resources and techniques:

• aerial photographs and topographic maps;

• previous soil surveys; and

• stratified observations.

Soil surveys were carried out in 1994 by HLA Envirosciences and were used in the development of soil profile descriptions. A total of 15 soil profile exposures were assessed to provide representative profiles of the range of soil types encountered over the study area. Soil layers were generally distinguished on the basis of changes in texture and/or colour. Soil colours were assessed according to the Munsell Soil Colour Charts.

Soil observations were made by GSS to confirm the soil units and boundaries between different soils. Soil layers for each profile site were then assessed for the recognition of suitable topdressing materials.

A number of samples were taken from exposed soil profiles during the 1994 HLA Envirosciences survey. The samples were subsequently analysed for the following parameters:

• particle size analysis;

• dispersion percentage;

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 108 • emerson aggregate test;

• pH; and

• electrical conductivity.

The laboratory test results were used in conjunction with the field assessment results to determine the depth of soil material, which is suitable for stripping and re-use for the rehabilitation of disturbed areas.

Land Capability Survey

The land capability survey was conducted according to the DLWC rural land capability assessment system. The system consists of eight classes, which classify land on the basis of an increasing soil erosion hazard and decreasing versatility of use. It recognises the following three types of land uses:

• land suitable for cultivation;

• land suitable for grazing; and

• land not suitable for rural production.

These capability classifications identify the limitations to the use of the land as a result of the interaction between the physical resources and a specific land use. The principal limitation recognised by these capability classifications is the stability of the soil mantle.

The method of land capability assessment takes into account a range of factors including climate, soils, geology, geomorphology, soil erosion, topography and the effects of past land uses. The classifications do not necessarily reflect the existing land uses, rather they indicate the potential of the land for such uses as crop production, pasture improvement and grazing.

7.4.3 Site Soils

The majority of the survey area is encompassed by the Branxton and Jerrys Plains soil landscapes. Soil unit classifications were based on the Northcote classification system and included the following units within the study area:

• Red Duplex Loam - dominates the central ridge area that occurs in the south eastern corner of the study area. The soil unit covers approximately 7 % of the total study area. The soil is characterised by a dark brown loamy surface horizon which grades to a reddish brown medium clay;

• Yellow Brown Duplex Loam - located on the ridge areas, encompassing only 2 % of the study area. The brown loam surface horizon grades to a yellowish brown mottled light clay;

• Grey Brown Gradational Loam - occurs on top of the central ridge area, covering approximately 1 % of the study area. The unit is characterised by

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 109 a brownish black loam which grades to a greyish brown sandy clay loam and eventually into a sandy clay;

• Brown Duplex Loam - occurs in the north of the study area and to the west of Sandy Hollow Creek. The unit covers approximately 14 % of the study area and consists of a brown loam surface horizon grading to a grey brown sandy clay and eventually to a mottled light medium clay;

• Yellow Duplex Sandy Loam - dominates the site and encompasses 72 % of the study area. The soil occurs on the Doctor’s Creek flats and adjacent footslopes together with the western footslopes and sideslopes of the Sandy Hollow Creek catchment. The unit consists of a dark brown sandy loam surface horizon which grades to a brown sandy clay loam and eventually to a yellowish brown light clay; and

• Uniform Sand - located in an isolated area on the north western boundary of the study area and forms approximately 4 % of the study area. The unit features a deep uniform sand grading to a sandy loam.

Soil profile descriptions for each classification unit and a distribution map are provided in the soil and land capability survey contained in Part A of Volume 2.

Laboratory Analysis

Soil samples taken during the 1994 HLA Envirosciences survey were analysed by the DLWC Soil and Water Testing Laboratory at Scone. All soil analytical results are provided in Table 7.4.

Table 7.4 Soil Analytical Results

Sample Site/ D EC Particle Size Analysis EAT pH Depth (cm) (%) (dS/m) Clay Silt Fine Sand Coarse Sand Gravel 1 20 – 30 23 12 35 16 14 97 2(2) 6.2 0.17 6 1 – 10 7 14 36 33 10 60 3(1) 5.8 0.02 6 10 – 30 5 8 20 18 49 89 3(1) 6.2 0.06 81 0 – 10 22 15 24 34 5 74 3(2) 5.9 0.05 9 10 – 20 16 20 29 14 21 97 2(2) 6.4 0.07 10 0 – 10 13 14 41 28 4 74 3(1) 7.3 0.06 10 10 – 20 33 13 31 21 2 81 2(2) 6.8 0.23 10 20 – 30 29 15 31 24 1 91 2(2) 7.2 0.32 13 0 – 10 9 10 23 19 39 57 3(1) 5.6 0.06 13 10 – 20 6 7 14 14 59 87 2(1) 6.0 0.04 13 20 – 30 30 8 17 20 25 93 2(3) 6.1 0.14 13 30 – 40 36 11 22 22 9 93 2(3) 5.7 0.42 14 0 – 10 36 42 16 4 2 51 3(3) 6.4 0.08 15 1 – 10 17 18 49 14 2 54 3(1) 5.8 0.04 Source: GSS 2002 Notes: 1. Soil profile site D = Dispersion EAT = Emmerson aggregate test EC = Electrical conductivity

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 110 7.4.4 Soil Suitability for Rehabilitation

Soil analytical results were used in conjunction with the field assessment to determine the depth or thickness of soil materials which are suitable for stripping and re-use for the rehabilitation of disturbed areas.

Structural and textural properties of soils within the study area are the most significant limiting factors for determination of topdressing suitability.

The surface and initial sub-surface horizons are structurally weak and are considered marginally suitable for stripping, stockpiling and re-spreading as a topdressing material for reshaped overburden. Limited stripping potential (0.1 m) is available on the majority of ridge and upper-slope areas. The combination of fine texture and structural weakness (high ped disruption rating) of sub-surface horizons translates to these materials being unsuitable as topdressing media.

Whilst most of the material identified for topdressing purposes is of satisfactory quality, all materials within the study area are relatively dispersible and will require amelioration. The soils are erodible and are prone to surface sealing and structural decline following exposure. To promote successful germination and plant growth, the use of gypsum immediately prior to sowing is highly recommended.

The survey revealed that most soils within the study area can be stripped to at least 0.1 m for topdressing of disturbed areas. Some areas can be stripped to a depth of 0.2 m to yield soil of suitable quality.

Individual volumes of available topdressing material for each recommended stripping depth are illustrated in Table 7.5.

Table 7.5 Topdressing Availability

Stripping Depth (m) Area (ha) Volume (m3) 0.1 492 492,000 0.2 45 90,000 TOTAL 537 582,000 Source: GSS 2002

7.4.5 Land Capability

The pre-mining land capability for the extension area was assessed based upon the system of rural land capability assessment developed by the NSW Soil Conservation Service. The classification system includes an eight class hierarchical system ranging from Class I encompassing land with the greatest potential for agricultural uses, to Class VIII including land unsuitable for any agricultural, pastoral or grazing uses. The classifications are based on an

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 111 evaluation of biophysical attributes of the land and the extent to which this may limit a particular land use.

The extension area encompasses land capability Classes V and VI. The classes are not suitable for cultivation owing to considerable biophysical limitations such as fine textured shallow soils and relatively steep slopes. The recommended soil conservation practices for these land classifications include structural soil conservation works (Class V land) and pasture improvement, low stocking rates, fire prevention and vermin control (Class VI land).

7.5 CLIMATE

7.5.1 General

The climate of the Upper Hunter Valley is characterised by warm, dry summers and cool, dry winters.

In summer, the weather is dominated by synoptic high pressure systems which alternate with low pressure systems. Rainfall is highest during the summer months. In winter, the climate is modified by the mid-latitude westerlies and high pressure systems alternating with cold fronts. Winter is drier than summer with regular frosts and fogs occurring from mid autumn to late spring.

The following sections provide general climatic data for the area surrounding Warkworth Mine. More specific climatic data were used in the surface and ground water management, noise and vibration and air quality studies contained in Volume 2.

7.5.2 Temperature

Temperature data has been obtained from the Mount Thorley Operations’ weather station during 2001. The data indicates that the area experiences average monthly temperatures between 17.2 and 33.1 0C during summer and 6.5 and 19.4 0C during winter (see Table 7.6).

7.5.3 Rainfall

Long term rainfall data between 1884 and 2000 has been obtained from a Bureau of Meteorology weather station at Jerry’s Plains. The data indicates that the area experiences average monthly rainfall between 68.8 and 78.1 mm during summer and 37.0 and 45.5 mm during winter (see Table 7.7). The annual average rainfall between 1884 and 2000 is 642 mm.

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 112 Table 7.6 Average Monthly Temperature

Month Average Minimum Temperature (0C) Average Maximum Temperature (0C) January 19.3 33.1 Febuary 19.3 30.2 March 16.9 26.0 April 13.6 24.9 May 9.9 19.4 June 6.5 19.2 July 7.6 18.0 August 6.9 19.4 September 10.3 23.5 October 11.8 25.6 November 14.3 26.5 December 17.2 30.8 Source: Mount Thorley Operations Weather Station 2001

Table 7.7 Average Rainfall

Average Rain Minimum Maximum Month Average Rain Days (mm) (mm) (mm) January 78.1 8.1 0 217.0 Febuary 69.5 7.6 0 340.4 March 56.2 7.5 0 238.1 April 46.3 6.7 0 172.2 May 42.0 6.9 0 314.3 June 45.5 7.9 2.3 288.4 July 44.2 7.5 0.3 231.6 August 37.0 7.3 0 206.9 September 42.7 6.9 0 156.1 October 53.5 7.9 1.4 170.0 November 58.5 7.8 1.0 217.8 December 68.8 7.8 2.6 186.0 Source: MER 2002

7.5.4 Wind

Annual and seasonal wind roses for the Mount Thorley Operations weather station are shown in the air quality study contained in Part C of Volume 2. These roses show that over a year the prevailing winds are aligned along a north west to south east axis, which is common for the Hunter Valley as this corresponds to the orientation of the valley. However, the south easterly summer, and to a lesser extent, autumn and spring, winds are generally distributed between the east and south and south south east.

The south south east winds are the result of topographical effects caused by the high ground on the southern edge of the Hunter Valley and are a local phenomenon, not apparent in the central areas of the valley.

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 113 7.6 LAND MANAGEMENT

7.6.1 Weed Control

A number of weed species are known to occur on the Warkworth Mining Lease as indicated in Table 7.8. Weeds are located primarily on areas that have been previously disturbed such as old cultivation lands, rehabilitation areas and spoil dump piles. Ongoing weed management and control on the lease area is carried out to the satisfaction of the Rural Lands Protection Board (RLPB). Control methods include spraying, wick weeding, cultivation and grazing. Weed management is undertaken on a regular basis.

Table 7.8 Weed Species Known to Occur at Warkworth Mine

Noxious Weeds Non Noxious Weeds African Boxthorn Scotch Thistle Noogoora Burr Wild Turnip Golden Dodder Cobblers Peg Galvanised Burr Fennel Green Cestrum Thornapple Johnson Grass Cathead Patersons Curse Marshmallow Star Thistle Khaki Weed Pampas Grass Galenia Source: Warkworth Annual Environmental Management Report 2001

7.6.2 Feral Animal Control

A feral animal control program for the Mining Lease includes ongoing baiting to control the numbers of rabbits, hares, foxes, wild dogs, and feral cats. Rabbits innoculated with myxomatosis are released on site in conjunction with the RLPB for rabbit control.

7.6.3 Bushfire Management

A number of management procedures are used to minimise the potential for bushfire hazard including:

• maintenance of grazing practices to reduce fuel loads and maintain low grass levels in areas of high bushfire potential;

• provision of an adequate level of fire breaks and access trails throughout the lease area;

• regular maintenance and grading of access trails; and

• provision of sufficient on-site fire fighting equipment.

Bushfire management at Warkworth Mine is achieved in conjunction with surrounding mines managed by CNA and the pastoral companies associated with each mine.

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 114 Extension of Warkworth Coal Mine environmental impact statement

CHAPTER 8

Ecology 8 ECOLOGY

8.1 INTRODUCTION

This chapter provides a summary of the assessment of the flora and fauna impacts associated with the proposed extension of Warkworth Mine. The aim of the assessment was to assess the impacts on flora and fauna at the local, state, regional, national and international level. Information on proposed mitigation measures, including Green Offset measures, is also summarised. Full results of this flora and fauna assessment are provided in the SIS in Volume 3.

The flora and fauna assessment was undertaken in sufficient detail to address the requirements of the planningNSW and NPWS Director-General’s requirements for the EIS and SIS, respectively.

Within the SIS, affected species are defined as threatened species listed in the schedules of the TSC Act that are likely to be affected by the proposed extension.

8.2 BACKGROUND

Flora and fauna surveys were undertaken in February 2002, which resulted in the identification of four threatened species in the proposed mine extension area. Pursuant to Section 5A of the EP&A Act, Eight Part Tests were undertaken to determine whether the proposed extension was likely to have a significant impact on threatened species, populations or communities listed in the schedules of TSC Act. The Eight Part Tests indicated that there may be a significant impact on several threatened species and their habitats and that a SIS was required. Director-General’s requirements for the SIS were consequently sought and obtained from NPWS.

The proposal was also referred to EA for assessment under the EPBC Act. EA indicated that the proposal is a controlled action, meaning that it has potential for a significant impact upon threatened and migratory species listed under the EPBC Act. Therefore, the Director-General’s Requirements for the EIS have incorporated the Commonwealth requirements for assessment of threatened and migratory species.

Therefore, an SIS has been prepared to address the requirements of planningNSW, NPWS and EA pursuant to the TSC Act, EP&A Act and EPBC Act and is presented in Volume 3.

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 115 8.3 METHODOLOGY

EISs and SISs must assess the likely impacts of a proposed development on flora and fauna, including threatened species. In order to do this, information must be obtained about the distribution and abundance of such biota in the study area and their significance in the local, regional, state, national and international context. This information typically comes from both published and unpublished information in reports and databases, and from flora and fauna surveys, including targeted flora and fauna surveys.

Database searches and literature reviews were completed to identify significant flora and fauna, including flora and fauna of regional significance, and threatened or significant biota listed under the TSC Act and EPBC Act, that have the potential to occur within the locality around the subject site. This included discussions with the HCMT, Birds Australia, NPWS and local ecologists.

This list of species and communities are referred to as subject species and communities. This list was refined to a shorter list of species that had potential to be affected by the proposed development and these are referred to as affected species. Affected species are listed in Table 8.2

Fauna and flora investigations were designed to:

• describe and map vegetation communities and habitats that may be directly or indirectly affected by the proposal;

• assess the significance of flora and fauna in the study area in a local, regional, state, national or international context, including the significance of habitat corridors and linkages in the study area;

• identify and describe the threatened species and communities known or likely to be present in the study area and assess which species or communities may be affected by the proposal; and

• describe the type, location, size and condition of habitat of affected species and communities and provide details of the distribution and condition of similar habitats in the locality and region.

Field surveys were undertaken within the study area in January, February and April 2002. These were designed to map and describe the vegetation communities and habitats and target threatened flora and fauna that may be directly or indirectly affected by the proposal so that potential impacts on flora and fauna could be assessed.

Flora and fauna survey methods and efforts are described in Chapter 3 of the SIS in Volume 3.

January surveys included a two day general vegetation, habitat mapping and targeted flora survey undertaken by one ecologist on 14 and 15 January 2002. The February survey was conducted from 11 to 15 February 2002 and was

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 116 longer and more detailed than the January surveys. Survey techniques included targeted and general flora surveys, ground Elliott trapping, ground and arboreal hair funnels, spotlighting, ultrasonic bat detection, bird transect surveys during early morning, owl and frog call playback and active reptile and amphibian searches.

April flora and fauna surveys were completed to fulfil the requirements of the SIS that had not been met in preceding surveys. The fieldwork occurred over a much wider area than the areas covered in January and February. It encompassed the subject site and the large patch of regrowth and remnant vegetation that extends to the south, north and west of the subject site, which is referred to as the study area (see Figure SIS-4 in Volume 4).

The April surveys spanned 10 days between 15 to 26 April 2002 and involved 5 personnel. Three survey sites were located within each of the three main vegetation types identified during previous surveys.

At each survey site a range of flora and fauna techniques were undertaken including flora quadrat surveys, random meandering flora searches, habitat assessments, the use of hair funnels, point call and visual censuses for birds, tree-trapping using B-size Elliott traps, use of Ecopros for recording nocturnal and diurnal bird calls, all-night and evening ultrasonic detection of bats, harp trapping, stagwatching, owl call playback, spotlighting, acoustic detection of frogs and dedicated reptile searches. Flora and fauna were also recorded while driving and walking between sites.

8.4 RESULTS

8.4.1 The Locality, Study Area and Subject Site

The locality, study area and subject site are shown in Figure SIS-1 in Volume 4. Historically the locality has been used for intensive agriculture on the rich alluvial soils in narrow corridors along the floodplains of the Hunter River and Wollombi Brook. This has included dairy and beef cattle grazing on improved and non-improved pastures, fodder cropping and the running of horses. The undulating hillslopes in the surrounding areas are generally used for grazing on non-improved pasture. Wollemi National Park is located south west of the study area. It largely consists of sandstone associated vegetation on steep escarpments and valleys.

A number of mines occur around Warkworth Mine and include Hunter Valley Operations to the north, Wambo Mine to the north west and Mount Thorley Operations and Bulga Mine to the south. Mount Thorley Industrial Estate is located to the south east. The villages of Bulga and Warkworth are located approximately 7.25 km south west and approximately 6.5 km north west of the centre of Warkworth Mine, respectively.

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 117 The study area is a relatively large fragmented patch of bushland that is bounded by Wollombi Brook, the Hunter River, Warkworth Mine and Mount Thorley Operations. It forms part of known and potential regional corridor routes for highly mobile and migratory species. It also provides dispersal and colonisation habitat for more sedentary or territorial species (such as plants, ground and arboreal mammals, reptiles, amphibians and sedentary birds) and as such is an important regional connectivity and dispersal corridor in the Hunter Valley.

The subject site is located east of existing mining operations at Warkworth Mine and west of Wallaby Scrub Road. The majority of the subject site is currently under cattle grazing. It contains a mixture of cleared pasture and regrowth woodland of varying ages. A large area of regrowth dry sclerophyll woodland and younger regrowth woodland of varying quality occurs in the northern part of the subject site. Regrowth woodland and cleared land occurs within the centre and south of the subject site. All of the woodland on the subject site appears to have been logged (based on ground observations of stumps and past aerial photographs) over the last 50 years and is bisected by roads, tracks and powerline easements.

The subject site was extensively cleared before 1963. The only old trees that remain occur in narrow strips along fence lines or in thinly scattered patches/groups of individuals among pasture and regrowth. Since this time the subject site has experienced different levels of clearing and grazing, resulting in a mosaic of regrowth woodland and occasional older trees.

8.4.2 Vegetation Communities

General

The vegetation of the subject site and study area, with locations of vegetation quadrats is shown in Figure SIS-5 in Volume 4. The locations of the quadrats on the subject site and in the study area indicate areas where ground-truthing has included flora quadrat surveys. The areas in hectares of the vegetation communities on the subject site are provided in Table 8.1.

Vegetation types on the subject site and in the study area include cleared land, native pasture, areas of open regrowth dominated by saplings and areas of older regrowth woodland. The quality of this vegetation varies due to past disturbance regimes such as clearing, logging and different grazing regimes over the last 50 years. Other disturbances include roads, powerline easements, two dwellings and dirt tracks across the landscape which have created a mosaic of vegetation and cleared areas. Aerial photographs from 1963, 1979 and 1998 show that most of the subject site has been cleared in the past (see Figure EIS- 3 to Figure EIS-5 in Volume 4).

The vegetation communities on the subject site are described below.

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 118 Table 8.1 Vegetation Communities in the Study Area

Subject Site Study Area Vegetation Community (ha) (ha) On the Subject Site Narrow-leaved Ironbark/Grey Box/White Feather 89.0 592.4 Honeymyrtle Woodland Narrow-leaved Apple/Coastal Banksia Woodland 36.5 258.7 Narrow-leaved Ironbark/Bulloak Woodland (regrowth) 166.7 792.6 Spotted Gum/Narrow-leaved Ironbark Woodland (regrowth) 2.7 28.9 Bulloak Woodland (regrowth) 16.5 59.0 Native pasture 177.0 341.3 Cleared Land 80.3 3,027.0 Within Remainder of the Study Area Acacia saliciformis Woodland 0 0.3 Blakely's Red Gum Woodland 0 4.0 Coastal Banksia Low Woodland 0 63.6 Forest Red Gum Woodland 0 5.8 Grey Box/Narrow-leaved Ironbark Woodland 0 791.7 Grey Box/Narrow-leaved Ironbark Woodland (regrowth) 0 296.5 Grey Ironbark Woodland 0 1.0 Hemlock1 Shrubland 0 1.1 Narrow-leaved Ironbark/Grey Box Woodland 0 47.8 River Oak Woodland 0 8.9 Slaty Box Woodland 0 1.4 TOTAL 568.7 6,322.0 Notes: 1. Introduced species

Narrow-leaved Ironbark/Grey Box/White Feather Honeymyrtle Woodland

This community occurs on higher ground in the north of the subject site and also occurs north of Jerry’s Plains Road. It has been disturbed by past clearing, erosion, tracks, roads, dam construction and widespread dumping of rubbish. It is a structurally and floristically variable community with scattered mature eucalypts but is generally dominated by younger and shorter trees. In some places there is a thick shrub layer dominated by White Feather Honeymyrtle with a sparse ground layer, however, where there are fewer shrubs there is a denser grassy ground layer. There are also small patches dominated by White Cypress Pine (Callitris glaucophylla) in the eastern portion of this community. Introduced flora species are dominant in disturbed areas such as roads and tracks. The total weed cover in the community is estimated to be 5 %.

Narrow-leaved Apple/Coastal Banksia Woodland

This community occurs in a u-shaped band on silaceous sands in the north west of the subject site, adjacent to the Narrow-leaved Ironbark/Grey Box/White Feather Honeymyrtle Woodland. Large occurrences of this community are allocated in a broad band immediately west of Wallaby Scrub Road and in the south-west of the study area adjacent to Wollombi Brook.

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 119 The sandy soils support floristically different assemblages of species than the surrounding vegetation, which occurs on the more clay-dominated soils. Introduced species are dominant where it has been disturbed by past clearing, tracks, roads and cultivation of an orchard. The total weed cover in this community is estimated to be 2 %.

Narrow-leaved Ironbark/Bulloak Woodland (regrowth)

This community occurs in a mosaic with Native Pasture and Cleared Land in the east and south of the subject site. It is occurs immediately north of the subject site on both sides of Jerry’s Plains Road, and in the south of the study area west of Wallaby Scrub Road. It is floristically similar to Narrow-leaved Ironbark/Grey Box/White Feather Honeymyrtle Woodland, but varies in the dominant species and structural characteristics, since clearing and grazing pressure eased at a comparatively later time. Disturbances include introduced flora along roads, fences and around dams and eroded areas. The total weed cover in this community is estimated to be 8 %.

Spotted Gum/Narrow-leaved Ironbark Woodland (regrowth)

This community occurs along Wallaby Scrub Road within the south-western corner of the subject site. It also occurs in small patches south of the subject site and near The Putty Road. The tree layer is dominated by Spotted Gums (Corymbia maculata) and the dominant shrub and ground layer species are similar to Narrow-leaved Ironbark/Bulloak Woodland (regrowth). The total weed cover in this community is estimated to be 5 %.

Bulloak Woodland (regrowth)

This community occurs in the south of the subject site adjacent to The Putty road, frequently on land that has been disturbed for erosion and run-off control purposes. It also occurs in patches south of the subject site near Wallaby Scrub Road. It is similar in structure and floristics to Narrow-leaved Ironbark/Bulloak Woodland (regrowth), but is dominated by young and mature Bulloaks and contains far fewer mature or young regrowth eucalypts. The shrub layer is usually thick and the ground layer is usually sparse. Introduced species are common. The total weed cover in the community is estimated to be 10 %.

Native Pasture

This community occurs throughout the middle and eastern part of the subject site in a mosaic with regrowth and woodland communities and Cleared Land. There are some patches of this community within Narrow-leaved Ironbark/Grey Box/White Feather Honeymyrtle Woodland. Native grasses usually dominate this community. Introduced grasses and herbs are also

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 120 present, especially along areas that have been disturbed for run-off control or disturbed by cattle. The total weed cover in this community is estimated to be 10 %.

Cleared Land

This community occurs in a mosaic with the previous communities in the east of the subject site. It consist of pasture improved land that is dominated by introduced pasture species and is regularly grazed by cattle. The total weed cover in this community is estimated to be 40 %.

8.4.3 Fauna

The varying degrees, age and types of past disturbances have created a mosaic of fauna habitats that support a wide range of fauna species and assemblages across the study area. Habitat include woodland dominated by native species, regrowth woodland and open pastures dominated by both native and introduced grasses and herbs that provide limited habitat for fauna. These habitats are generally also present within the study area, north, west and south of the subject site.

Habitat for arboreal mammals includes sparsely distributed and or clumped hollow-bearing trees in the woodland and regrowth. Native trees, shrubs and ground layers provide foraging resources.

Fallen logs and branches in woodland and regrowth provide ground-based refuge areas for smalls ground mammals such as antechinus and native rats. Introduced mice are also present in these areas. The siliceous sands provide habitat for the Common Wombat (Vombatus ursinus) in which it can easily construct its burrows. Woodland, regrowth and open grassy areas also provide resources for macropods and introduced species such as wild dogs.

There is potential roosting and known foraging habitat for insectivorous bats within the woodland and regrowth habitats on the site and abandoned buildings also provide potential roosting habitat. There are no culverts or mines that would provide roosting habitat for bats on the subject site.

The native woodland and regrowth vegetation provides habitat for a wide range of forest and woodland bird species. Different assemblages of birds (that prefer more open canopies and grassy areas) are found in more open regrowth areas compared to the thicker regrowth woodland habitats.

Habitats for reptiles and amphibians include native and introduced grasses, dumped rubbish, woodland and regrowth habitat of varying quality, farm dams, rocky outcrops, Sandy Hollow Creek and associated riparian vegetation, dead trees, decorticating bark and logs and litter on the ground.

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 121 Fauna that were recorded in the study area include 99 birds, 32 mammals (including 7 introduced mammals), 10 reptiles and 8 amphibians. On the subject site, a total of 47 birds, 27 mammals (including 7 introduced mammals), 5 reptiles and 8 amphibians were recorded (see Volume 3).

Disturbances include currently used and old overgrown roads and tracks. Sheet erosion and mild gully erosion are also present in the woodland in the north of the subject site.

8.4.4 Regionally Significant Flora and Fauna

Narrow-leaved Apple/Coastal Banksia Woodland and Spotted Gum/Narrow-leaved Ironbark Woodland (regrowth) are regionally significant plant communities that also occur off the subject site in the study area.

One Rare or Threatened Australian Plant (RoTAP) (Briggs and Leigh 1995), Grevillea montana, occurs on the edges of Narrow-leaved Apple/Coastal Banksia Woodland on the subject site.

A population of the Wombat (Vombatus ursinus) also occurs in Narrow-leaved Apple/Coastal Banksia Woodland on the subject site and in the study area and this occurrence is of regional significance within the Hunter Valley.

The plant communities contain habitat features such as mature hollow bearing trees, intact grassy ground layers, shrubs, logs, rocks, dams, streams, leaf litter and regrowth vegetation.

8.4.5 SEPP 44

One threatened species, the Koala (Phascolarctos cinereus), is also protected by SEPP 44. The main aim of SEPP 44 is to:

“... encourage the proper conservation and management of areas of natural vegetation that provide habitat for Koalas, to ensure permanent free-living populations over their present range and to reverse the current trend of population decline ...”

Under SEPP 44, it is necessary to investigate potential and core Koala habitat before seeking development consent in scheduled LGAs. Scheduled LGAs are located within the known state-wide distribution of the Koala and SSC is a scheduled LGA.

Potential Koala habitat, defined as vegetation which incorporates a minimum of 15% of tree species in the upper or lower strata of the tree component, is listed in Schedule 2 of SEPP 44. The consent authority may grant development consent if the subject land does not contain Core Koala habitat.

No Schedule 2 species were found on the site that constituted more than 15% of the total tree species in the woodland or regrowth communities.

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 122 Consequently, these communities do not support potential Koala habitat. Koalas or signs of their presence such as scats, were not seen on the subject site and are not likely to occur there. Accordingly, the subject site does not constitute core habitat.

8.4.6 Matters of NES

Matters of NES that could have been recorded on the subject site or that have the potential to occur in the study area include threatened species, endangered ecological communities and migratory species. Some of the endangered and vulnerable species have been identified as affected species as part of the SIS. Their abundance and distribution in the study area and potential impacts and amelioration measures are discussed in the following sections.

The study area also provides a regional corridor function for migrating species such as the White-throated Needle-tail (Hirundapus caudacutus), Black-faced Monarch (Monarcha melanopsis) and Rufous Fantail (Rhipidura rufifrons). The Yellow-faced Honeyeater (Lichenostomus chrysops) is a migratory species (not listed under the EPBC Act) that was observed in the thousands flying over the site in a generally eastern direction during the April surveys. Therefore the subject site is also part of a regional corridor for migratory species.

8.4.7 Threatened Species

Figure SIS-1 in Volume 4 shows the locations of database records of threatened species within the locality. These records are from the NPWS Wildlife Atlas Database (February 2002), Birds Australia database (July 2002), the Hunter Birds Observers Club (HBOC) (July 2002), Australian Museum database (June 2002) and the Sydney Royal Botanic Gardens (RGB) (July 2002).

The Director-General’s requirements for the SIS listed species and communities to be considered for inclusion as subject species or subject communities. This list was refined to identify species that may be affected by the proposal (affected species) based on the results of database searches, vegetation mapping, habitat assessment, known habitat requirements of species and flora and fauna surveys, including targeted surveys.

Table 8.2 shows affected species, their status under the TSC Act and EPBC Act, whether they were recorded on the subject site during surveys for the SIS or in the remainder of the study area. Figure SIS-6 in Volume 4 shows the locations of threatened species detected in the study area during surveys undertaken for this assessment.

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 123 Table 8.2 Affected Species

Common Name/Sceintific Name TSC EPBC Subject Study Act Act Site Area Slaty Red Gum (Eucalyptus glaucina)VV-- Illawarra Greenhood Orchid (Pterostylis gibbosa)EE-- Green and Golden Bell Frog (Litoria aurea)EV-- Glossy Black-cockatoo (Calyptorhynchus lathami)V--x Brown Treecreeper (Climacteris picumnus victoriae)V-xx Painted Honeyeater (Grantiella picta)V--- Swift Parrot (Lathamus discolor)EEx- Black-chinned Honeyeater (Melithreptus gularis gularis)V--- Grey-crowned Babbler (Pomatostomus temporalis temporalis)V - x x Speckled Warbler (Pyrrholaemus sagittata)V-xx Regent Honeyeater (Xanthomyza phrygia)EExx Large-eared Pied Bat (Chalinolobus dwyeri)V--- Eastern Falsistrelle (Falsistrellus tasmaniensis)V--- Little Bentwing-bat (Miniopterus australis)V-xx Large Bentwing-bat (Miniopterus schreibersii oceanensis)V-x- Eastern Freetail-bat (Mormopterus norfolkensis)V-xx Large-footed Myotis (Myotis adversus)V--x Squirrel Glider (Petaurus norfolcensis)V-xx Grey-headed Flying Fox (Pteropus poliocephalus)V--- Yellow-bellied Sheathtail-bat (Saccolaimus flaviventris)V--- Greater Broad-nosed Bat (Scoteanax rueppellii)V--- Pale-headed Snake (Hoplocephalus bitorquatus)V--- Pink-tailed Worm Lizard (Aprasia paraapulchella)VV-- Notes: V = vulnerable E = endangered x = recorded - = not listed/not recorded

There are 23 affected species and no affected communities (see Table 8.2). These species have either been recorded within the study area, and are likely to be directly or indirectly affected, or are likely to occur within the study area and are also likely to be affected.

The SIS (Volume 3) provides a detailed discussion of the local and regional abundance, local and regional corridors, habitat assessment and conservation status of the affected species. Assessment of likely direct and indirect impacts on flora and fauna including affected species is summarised below.

8.5 IMPACTS

8.5.1 General

The proposed extension will directly impact upon a relatively small portion of a large remnant of native vegetation within the locality.

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 124 Direct impacts include the gradual removal over 18 years, of vegetation and habitat on the subject site that has regenerated after being almost totally cleared at least 39 years ago (Figure EIS-3 to Figure EIS-5 in Volume 4). The gradual removal of habitat is likely to allow flora and fauna species to disperse and colonise adjacent suitable habitat over the 18 years of mining. It is expected that no species are likely to be lost from the study area.

Indirect impacts include habitat fragmentation and a small reduction in regional connectivity. The proposal could potentially result in the spread and establishment of weeds and feral animals in the study area. Other potential indirect impacts such as changes to hydrology and water quality in the study area are unlikely to significantly affect flora and fauna. The significance of these impacts on flora and fauna in the study area at the local and regional level is discussed below.

8.5.2 Vegetation Clearance and Habitat Loss

Approximately 569 ha of land, including regrowth woodland and cleared land, will be gradually removed over 18 years ( Table 8.1). This would result in the eventual loss of known and potential habitat for a range of flora and fauna including some regionally significant flora and fauna and affected species (Table 8.2).

The removal of vegetation and habitat is listed as key threatening process under the TSC Act and land clearance is listed as a key threatening process under the EPBC Act. However, it is unlikely that any flora or fauna species would be lost from the study area as a result of the proposal since they are known or are likely to occur in locations outside the proposed area of disturbance.

All of the vegetation communities are present within the study area and would not be lost from the local area. Most vegetation communities are well represented within the study area and the region. However, there would ultimately be a relatively small reduction in total area of vegetation, which would reduce the level of interactions between flora and fauna in the study area.

The proposed Green Offset measures contained in the Green Offset Strategy would ensure that these communities and habitat are retained and managed in the study area.

8.5.3 Habitat Fragmentation and Regional Connectivity

The proposal would cause a relatively small decrease in the size of the bushland remnant in the study area, which would decrease the size of populations of flora and fauna in the study area at the local and regional level.

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 125 This impact is likely to be greater on the dispersal and colonisation of flora and sedentary fauna species. However, because the subject site is on the eastern edge of the bushland remnant, this is unlikely to significantly affect the local north-south corridor through the study area.

Therefore, the impact of fragmentation at the local level is not likely to be significant since considerable barriers to interactions to the east of the study area already exist (mine operations) and the proposal is not likely to exacerbate these barriers. Rehabilitation of the subject site after mine closure will also reduce fragmentation at the local level.

Impacts on the study area from an increase in the edge/area ratio (which can cause changes in microclimate and increase susceptibility to invasion from non-indigenous species) would be minimised by the gradual removal of vegetation over 18 years and management of vegetation and habitat on the subject site and adjacent areas before it is cleared.

8.5.4 Regional Connectivity

The proposal is unlikely to increase the existing barriers to regional connectivity for flora and fauna in the Hunter region. Migratory species are likely to have covered large areas of open land before they reach the study area and are likely to use it as a resting and foraging area. It is unlikely to reduce the area that is available for local dispersal and colonisation of non- migratory flora and fauna such as terrestrial and arboreal mammals, reptiles and amphibians and bird species that avoid open habitats. These fauna groups are likely to disperse to the north and south of the study area if habitat is allowed to regenerate.

8.5.5 Other Indirect Impacts

Other indirect impacts that could arise from the proposal include:

• small microhabitat changes within habitats, such as shading of vegetation underneath bridges across The Putty Road;

• weed infestation;

• alteration to the fire regime; and

• disturbances from noise and dust.

Weeds are a potential threat to any site that experiences soil disturbance and there is potential for weeds to spread and establish in areas that are to be cleared, prior to mining. Weeds may also establish on spoil piles or in areas that are to be rehabilitated.

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 126 However, proposed rehabilitation and weed control strategies will control and monitor any threats from weeds as a result of the proposal and provided these strategies are maintained, impacts from weeds as a result of the proposal are not likely to be significant.

The subject site and study area is likely to have received a high fire frequency in the past. Maintenance of the subject site and areas included in the Green Offset Strategy will aim to reduce the fire frequency in these areas, which will benefit flora and fauna within the study area.

Noise and dust are not expected to have a significant impact on adjacent flora and fauna since animals can become accustomed to noise and can remain in areas subject to noise, provided that the habitat is present. The mine works also have a finite life and will be rehabilitated in the long term, which will also minimise long-term impacts from dust.

Feral animals are already present on the subject site and in the study area. The management of habitat on the subject site and within the adjacent study area for native flora and fauna as part of the Green Offset Strategy is likely to reduce the available habitat for these species. Control measures for feral animals such as foxes and wild dogs are already undertaken within the study area and this will continue.

8.5.6 Key Threatening Processes

The following key threatening processes are considered relevant to the proposal:

• clearing of native vegetation (TSC Act) and land clearance (EPBC Act);

• predation by the European Red Fox (Vulpes vulpes) (TSC Act and EPBC Act);

• predation by the Feral Cat (Felis catus) (TSC Act and EPBC Act);

• predation on tadpoles by the Plague Minnow (Gambusia holbrooki) (TSC Act); and

• inappropriate fire regimes (TSC Act).

These key threatening processes have been addressed in the SIS (Volume 3) and are not likely to have a significant impact on biodiversity in the locality. Measures contained in the Green Offset Strategy will ensure that the impact on flora and fauna and biodiversity within the region is offset and that these processes are managed.

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 127 8.5.7 Regionally Significant Flora and Fauna

The most significant impacts will be on Narrow-leaved Apple/Coastal Banksia Woodland vegetation community because it has a small local distribution and is regionally significant. This would also result in the removal of habitat for the Common Wombat, which appears to be restricted to this vegetation type in the study area. However, similar habitat is also present west of Wallaby Scrub Road and removal of habitat from the study area is unlikely to have a significant impact on the local population of this species.

A relatively small area of Spotted Gum/Narrow-leaved Ironbark Woodland (regrowth) vegetation would be removed, which is of “preliminary regional importance” (Peake 2000). However, the impact of the proposal on this community is unlikely to be significant at the local or regional levels because this community consists of scattered trees in a thin strip along Wallaby Scrub Road.

The nature of the proposal means that these impacts on native flora and fauna are unavoidable. However, these impacts can be offset which will result in a some environmental benefit for flora and fauna within the study area. In addition, because the subject will be gradually cleared over 18 years, the potential impact of vegetation removal would be minimised by enhancing the quality of flora and fauna habitat on the subject site and in other locations in the study area where these communities will be retained.

8.5.8 Threatened Species

Twenty-three threatened species are known or are likely to occur on the subject site and in the study area and are likely to be affected by the proposal (Table 8.2). The relative significance of potential direct and indirect impacts on groups of these species is summarised below in Table 8.3. The estimated areas in hectares of known or potential habitat of affected species that would be cleared based on vegetation and habitat mapping and known habitat requirements is provided in Table 8.4.

The removal of habitats from the subject site would result in the loss of individuals or family groups that are part of local populations that occur in the study area, locality or region. Together with the current land uses and impacts from mining there is potential for this to result in a significant cumulative impact on these species.

However, the proposed measures contained in the Green Offset Strategy would conserve and manage known and potential habitat for all of these species, including a range of vegetation types. Therefore, it is unlikely that these species would be lost from the study area during the life of the proposal or in the long term. Therefore, impacts from vegetation clearance and habitat loss would be offset and local populations of these threatened species are unlikely to be lost from the study area.

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 128 Indirect impacts such as fragmentation at a local scale and a small reduction in regional connectivity corridor function are not expected to be significant for these species. This is because the proposed amelioration measures would maintain migratory, dispersal and colonisation habitat and harmful processes such as grazing will cease. Other indirect impacts such as changes to water quality and hydrology are likely to be minimal and are not likely to significantly affect the potential habitat of these species on the subject site or in the study area.

Key threatening processes would also be managed on land that is retained as part of the Green Offset measures and are not likely to significantly affect these species.

New Eight Part Tests were completed for all affected species to consider whether the proposal is still likely to have a significant effect on these species or their habitat based on the more detailed information contained in the SIS. These Eight Part Tests are provided in the SIS. The results of these Eight Part Tests indicated that there would not be any significant impacts on affected species as a result of the proposal.

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 129 X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X XX . X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X XX ional Connectivity Hydrology and Water Quality Potential Impacts without amelioration measures. without amelioration measures X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X XX XX XX XX amelioration measures. significant in the long term term in the long significant be significant in the long term in the long be significant X X X X X X X X X X X XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XXX XXX rm impacts likely without Vegetation and Habitat Loss Fragmentation Reg XX = some short term (over 18 years) impacts likely, likely to be likely likely, impacts (over 18 years) short term XX = some XXX = significant short (over 18 years) and long te Affected Species Affected Orchid and Illawarra Greenhood Red Gum Slaty Green and Golden Bell Frog Cockatoo Glossy-black and Painted Honeyeater Honeyeater Black-chinned Brown Treecreeper Swift Parrot and Regent Honeyeater Grey-crowned Babbler Speckled Warbler Squirrel Glider Squirrel Large Bentwing-bat Large Eastern Freetail-bat Large-footed Myotis Eastern Falsistrellus Little Bentwing-bat Large Pied Bat Grey-headed Flying Fox Yellow-Bellied Sheathtail-bat Broad-nosed Bat Greater Pink-tailed Worm Lizard Pale Headed Snake Notes: possible, could impacts (over 18 years) short term X = some Table 8.3 Potential Impacts on Affected Species

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 130 8.6 GREEN OFFSETS AND AMELIORATION MEASURES

Measures provided in the Green Offset Strategy provide a method of having development that provides for economic benefits while affording environmental protection. These offsets are an initial proposal and details of vegetation communities, habitats, timing and land areas to be included will be negotiated with NPWS and planningNSW. The following types of offset measures have been proposed for the future use of the study area:

• NDAs – surface land that will provide protection of vegetation communities and biodiversity values for the life of the consent;

• HMAs – surface land that is currently owned by WML or is within a Mining Lease and may eventually be developed; and

• contribution to research or Conservation Trust Fund.

These areas are shown in Figure SIS-7 in Volume 4. The approximate areas in hectares to be included in the NDAs and HMAs are shown in Table 8.5. In addition, the subject site will be also be managed over the 18 years and cleared gradually during this time, which will increase the opportunity for affected species to colonise NDAs and HMAs in the study area.

It is proposed to establish 50% of the subject site rehabilitation for biodiversity conservation. This area and areas cleared for construction would be rehabilitated with local native species to prevent weed invasion and maintain habitat. The subject site will also be progressively rehabilitated to increase biodiversity and provide connectivity within the study area. This would contribute to offsetting the impact of clearing during and after mining has been completed.

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 131 (ha) 637.9 522.2 381.4 760.4 828.8 177.8 926.9 368.2 815.6 13 dams 1138.4 1146.7 1091.5 tential foraging Total Managed Habitat apping and known (ha) 448.5 807.5 370.4 235.3 572.0 626.2 235.3 807.3 629.6 861.5 177.8 626.2 HMAs 3 dams 3 0.0 (ha) 189.4 330.9 146.1 151.7 188.4 202.6 132.9 284.2 297.4 285.2 189.4 NDAs 10 dams Bell Frog and which would also provide po and which would Bell Frog 1 0 (ha) 89.0 125.5 488.4 185.9 255.7 169.4 142.0 258.4 274.9 125.5 294.9 19 dams tential habitat has been estimated based vegetation and m ecies but was recorded in the study area. was recorded in the study ecies but th habitat features for the Green and Golden Area of Known or Potential Habitat Cleared eenhood Orchid 89.0 188.4 572.0 760.4 habitat requirements. habitat for the Large-footed Myotis. 2 2. The Hooded Robin is not an affected sp 3. This includes the creation of 4 dams wi Affected Species Affected Slaty Red Gum and Illawarra Gr Green and Golden Bell Frog Grey-headed Flying Fox Pale-headed Snake Glossy Black-cockatoo Notes: 1. species have not been recorded on the site and po Some Regent Honeyeater, Swift Parrot, Painted Honeyeater and Black-chinned Pink-tailed Worm Lizard Hooded Robin Large-footed Myotis (dams) Speckled Warbler Brown Treecreeper Grey-crowned Babbler Squirrel Glider Insectivorous Bats Table 8.4 Measures for Affected Species Offset

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 132 (ha) Total Managed Habitat (ha) HMAs (ha) NDAs 80.3 129.4 212.1 341.5 (ha) 568.7 461.3 1073.8 1535.1 Area Cleared ather Honeymyrtle Woodland 89.0 18.8 135.1 153.9 Woodland (regrowth) 2.7 24.3 0.0 24.3 oodland (regrowth) 166.7 71.5 235.3 306.8 tals 568.7 291.7 636.7 928.4 Subject Site sub-to Area the Study Remainder of Grey Box/Narrow-leaved Ironbark WoodlandGrey Box/Narrow-leaved Ironbark Woodland (regrowth)Narrow-leaved Ironbark/Grey Box Woodland WoodlandRiver Oak Blakely’s Red Gum WoodlandForest Red Gum Woodland WoodlandAcacia saliciformis Study Area sub-totalsTOTAL 0 0 0 0.0 132.5 177.8 37.1 0 255.6 0 0 0 0.0 177.8 388.1 0.0 0 0.0 0 0 37.1 169.6 2.3 0.0 1.3 0.2 437.1 2.3 0.0 1.3 0.2 606.7 Narrow-leaved Apple/Coastal Banksia WoodlandNarrow-leaved Ironbark/Bulloak W Spotted Gum/Narrow-leaved Ironbark Bulloak Woodland (regrowth)Native pastureCleared Land 36.5 1.0 16.5 54.2 13.2 177.0 55.2 0.0 33.5 0.0 13.2 33.5 Vegetation Communities Subject Site Narrow-leaved Ironbark/Grey Box/White Fe Table 8.5 Measures for Vegetation Communities (Approximate Hectares) Offset

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 133 HMPs for NDA and HMA land will be prepared to ensure that these areas are managed to maintain habitat for flora and fauna that would be affected by the proposal. This includes natural and assisted regeneration of habitat for significant vegetation communities, plants, amphibians, birds, bats and arboreal mammals. Management would include:

• destocking of the land;

• feral animal control;

• weed control;

• bushfire control;

• repairing erosion problems; and

• fencing to exclude livestock.

Specific habitat features for significant vegetation communities, plants, amphibians, birds, bats and arboreal mammals will also be managed and include planting of key species of trees that provide foraging resources, maintenance of different structures of plant communities (that provide different habitats) and construction of breeding habitat (ponds for amphibians).

The biodiversity value and success of these offset measures would be assessed annually and changes made to improve the program if required. In particular, flora and fauna surveys will assess the presence of affected species in the NDA and HMA land to determine the value of these areas as natural resources offsets.

8.7 CONCLUSIONS

The impacts of the proposal on flora and fauna including regionally significant biota and threatened and migratory species listed under the TSC Act and EPBC Act are unlikely to be significant at the local, regional, state or national level. No flora and fauna species or their habitat or vegetation communities are likely to be lost from the local area as a result of the proposed development.

Affected species that occur on the subject site are part of local populations that occur in the wider study area. The proposed Green Offset Strategy will conserve, enhance and manage habitat within the study area, so that local populations can be maintained. These areas will also help mitigate against local fragmentation by enhancing habitats and increasing their potential as dispersal and colonisation corridors. Regional corridors and connectivity are unlikely to be affected by the proposal since regional routes would be maintained.

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 134 Extension of Warkworth Coal Mine environmental impact statement

CHAPTER 9

Water Resources 9 WATER RESOURCES

9.1 INTRODUCTION

This chapter of the EIS provides a summary of surface and groundwater management study prepared by MER. A copy of this study is contained in Part B of Volume 2.

The surface and groundwater management study provides an assessment of the surface and groundwater impacts of the proposed extension of Warkworth Mine, including assessments in relation to:

• surface hydrology including watersheds, stored waters, change to the local hydrology and management of runoff;

• groundwater aquifers including predicted hydrogeologic and hydrochemical impacts during and after mining; and

• mine water management including storage and details of the locations and structures that may be used in the future for discharge of mine water as part of the HRSTS.

Each of these matters are addressed below.

9.2 SURFACE WATER HYDROLOGY

Current operations at Warkworth Mine occur within a number of watersheds that either direct clean runoff into local water courses or disturbed watersheds that direct runoff into the mine water system. These watersheds include Sandy Hollow Creek, Dights Creek and Doctors Creek.

The upper part of Sandy Hollow Creek catchment is presently diverted to the north into Longford Creek via a contour drain and a diversion channel. Dights Creek runoff is collected in a local dam and is pumped to the north into the mine water system. Doctors Creek is diverted around the southern perimeter of the mine site via collection and pumping from a sedimentation dam in the south west and ultimately flows into the Hunter River.

Other drainages within the Mining Lease mostly drain towards the west or north west to Wollombi Brook. All are ephemeral and first or second order.

Future operations will continue to the west and eventually breach the main north south catchment divide as the most westerly limit of the mine catchments. Further catchment will be consumed east of the divide while rehabilitation will return runoff from large areas of mined out land to the catchment. Table 9.1 provides a summary of impact on drainage catchments to date and future impacts to 2020 or Year 18.

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 137 The proposed extension is unlikely to require any new creek diversions. However, a number of sedimentation dams will be constructed on the upper reaches of the westward draining (unnamed) creeks prior to the commencement of mining. Existing contour drains situated east of the divide will be relocated up slope of the encroaching highwall crest at appropriate times in order to convey runoff around the mine site.

Table 9.1 Impact of Proposed Extension on Surface Drainages (Not Including Rehabilitation)

Catchment Area to 2002 Area Affected to 2011 Area Consumed Watershed (ha) (ha) % Sandy Hollow Creek 119 119 100 Dights Creek 59 59 100 Doctors Creek 279 158 57 Longford Creek 658 89 14 Unnamed Creek 2 819 38 5 Source: MER 2002

9.3 GROUNDWATER HYDROLOGY

9.3.1 Introduction

Groundwater occurrence within the region has been mapped as part of the surface and groundwater management study.

The main groundwater resource is contained within the alluvium adjacent to the Hunter River and Wollombi Brook. This resource is exploited by the regional farming community for stock and irrigation supply via wells and bores that are most often located close to the river or the brook in order to access rapid recharge and improved quality water. While detailed survey has not been conducted on the alluvial lands due to the significant distances between these resources and current mining operations, it is most likely that the alluvial lands act as sinks to saline groundwaters migrating from the coal measures under natural pressure gradients. Deeper zones within the alluvium should therefore exhibit more saline conditions.

Existing mining operations are located typically more than 1 km from the alluvial lands. The exception is Doctors Creek where alluvial deposits are about 350 m distant from the existing box cut entry to South Pit.

The regional coal measures aquifers constitute the principal aquitard system. Groundwater storage and transmission in the coal measures is predominantly within coal seams (cleats) or within occasional joints in interburden and overburden. The frequency of joints in regional unmined areas cannot be established easily and is best estimated from observations in the mine highwalls. Unjointed or intergranular permeability of interburden is likely to be negligible since core exhibits high rock strength and low porosity.

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 138 The occurrence and pressure distribution of groundwater within the coal measures has changed since mining commenced in 1981. Originally, the piezometric surface within the Mining Lease undoubtedly reflected topography with elevated water levels/pressures in areas distant from the two major drainages (Wollombi Brook and the Hunter River) and reduced levels in areas adjacent to the alluvial lands. Pit development has now created a groundwater sink around the mine site that merges with the depressurisation sinks developed around both Mount Thorley Operations and Bulga Mines to the south thereby generating a regional depressurisation envelope.

9.3.2 Existing Bores and Wells

A search of the DLWC database was conducted to determine the locations of existing wells and bores in the area. The adopted search area extended several kilometres from the perimeter of the current and proposed mining operations.

Results of the search indicated only one bore west of Wallaby Scrub Road. This bore has not been located and may be erroneously coordinated. More distant bores are situated within the alluvial lands close to either Wollombi Brook or the Hunter River.

9.3.3 Observation Piezometers

Warkworth Mine currently maintains a network of 15 observation piezometers within and around the Mining Lease. These piezometers are used to monitor water levels in the coal measures at different seam horizons and in the alluvial lands to the east. The locations of the monitoring piezometers are shown in the surface and groundwater study contained in Part B of Volume 2.

Monitoring data shows piezometers located to the east of mining operations in the alluvial lands generally exhibit stable conditions unaffected by pit development. Similarly, piezometers to the north and north east exhibit fairly stable water levels although this may be attributed to the relatively shallow depth of construction at some locations and the influence of rapid recharge within the alluvial lands.

Only three piezometers (identified as OH1122, OH1123, and OH1125) show declining pressures. OH1122 is located to the south west between Warkworth Mine and Mount Thorley Operations and reflects the cumulative responses of depressurisation arising from pits in these mines. OH1123 is located approximately 2 km west of West Pit and exhibits a pressure decline of the order of 10 m in all piezometers (leakage suspected between piezometers), while OH125’s deepest piezometer exhibits a decline of approximately 6 m. Shallow piezometers are stable without decline.

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 139 The reason for the decline in piezometers OH1123 and OH1125 is attributed to a combination of depressurisation within more transmissive seams at depth and falling shallow water tables due to reduced rainfall recharge in recent times.

9.3.4 Regional Piezometric Surface

As noted, regional water levels (pressures) within the coal measures are the result of interactions between rainfall recharge and topography over a very long period of time. Rainfall percolation has sustained an elevated water table while drainage channels have incised the water table and provided a leakage pathway thereby constraining maximum aquifer pressures to the drainage bed elevations or root zones. In rainfall recharge periods, water levels in shallow aquifer systems respond by rising several metres. During subsequent dry periods, levels decline through natural seepage into local watercourses. At these times salinity in surface drainages normally rises.

In order to generate a regional piezometric surface with the limited availability of water level measurements, a ‘probable’ pressure distribution has been generated by utilising aquifer modelling methodologies with regionally distributed rainfall, brook and river bed elevations (interpolated for all relevant reaches) and the current mine pit development. This probable pressure distribution, which can be seen in the surface and groundwater management study contained in Part B of Volume 2, shows elevated pressures (+60 m AHD) west of the mine pits with flow paths directed towards Wollombi Brook or flow paths attracted towards the mine pits where pit floor elevations range from approximately 5 m in North pit to –40 m in West Pit.

Depressurisation is limited to the east due to the presence of alluvium that probably supports downward leakage via occasional joints in the strata although this is expected to be relatively minor due to westward dipping stratigraphy and sub cropping low permeability strata associated with the Archerfield Sandstone and the Mulbring Siltstone.

9.3.5 Coal Measures Hydraulic Properties

Table 9.2 provides a summary of measured seam permeabilities.

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 140 Table 9.2 Coal Measures Permeability Estimates

Strata or Seam Horizontal Permeability (m/day) Whybrow 2.50E-02 Whynot 4.40E-02 Blakefield 1.00E-02 Glen Munro 6.50E-03 Woodlands Hill (4) 1.20E-02 Arrowfield 5.10E-02 Bowfield 5.00E-02 Warkworth (1/2) 1.00E-02 Piercefield 1.41E-01 Vaux 1.48E-01 Broonie 3.70E-02 Bayswater 2.30E-02 Interburden (siltstone-sandstone) 1.00E-06 Source: MER 2002

9.3.6 Coal Measures Water Quality

The water quality of coal measures has been monitored for several years through sampling of piezometer groundwater and sampling of mine pit water. Generally, the quality of groundwaters in coal measures and in alluvial lands areas near the Hunter River is very poor and highly saline.

The coal seams groundwater in the extension area has no beneficial use. Future piezometers constructed in interburden may reflect a lower salinity more typical of the region. Established water quality guideline data are provided in Table 9.3 together with typical mine water and piezometer groundwater for comparison.

Table 9.3 Generalised Water Quality Criteria and Comparison with Local Water

TDS (mg/L) Equivalent EC (uS/cm) Beneficial Use 1,0001 1,540 Acceptable taste limit for humans 1,500 2,300 General upper limit based on taste 1,3002 2,000 Approximate limit for lucerne on alluvial lands 3,0002 4,600 Limit for poultry and pasture/fodder 4,0002 6,100 Limit for dairy cattle 32,500 50,000 Sea water 4,230 6,500 Typical Main Water Storage Dam 8,670 13,340 Typical borehole groundwater (OH1122) Source: MER 2002 Notes: 1. ADWG 2. ANZECC

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 141 Salinity data for specific locations indicates a range in salinity for coal measures piezometers from 2,900 to more than 18,000 uS/cm with salinities above 12,000 uS/cm dominating. Surface water sampling exhibits a range from 3,930 to 9,400uS/cm, with the Main Water Storage Dam ranging from 4,000 to more than 6,500 uS/cm.

9.4 GROUNDWATER IMPACTS

9.4.1 General

Continued mining of coal seams will expand the depressurisation surface to the west of the current pit areas. In order to assess the likely impacts from depressurisation arising from continued mining, a computer aquifer model of the region has been developed.

Details on the model, including properties and values assigned to the model, geographical extent of the model and timeframe of modelling are provided in the surface and groundwater study contained in Part B of Volume 2.

9.4.2 Open Cut Depressurisation

The aquifer model has been used to simulate past and future depressurisation of the coal measures. The model shows:

• a regional depressurisation surface extending westward to Wollombi Brook alluvium and eastward to the Hunter River alluvium where depressurisation beneath these unconsolidated deposits is predicted to establish a reversal of the original upward leakage of saline groundwater to these deposits, resulting in a downward leakage from the alluvium to the coal measures;

• present pit seepage rates attributed to depressurisation of the coal measures are estimated to be of the order of 1.4 ML/day;

• long term seepage is expected to rise to approximately 4.2 ML/day in Year 18 depending upon the prevailing climate at that time;

• upward leakage between the Hunter River and Wollombi Brook and the underlying coal measures is shown to decline shortly after the commencement of mining below the regional water table; and

• downward leakage is shown to increase from Wollombi Brook from about 1992 onwards and from the Hunter at about Year 10 onwards with a total downward leakage rate of about 0.6 ML/day expected at the end of mining.

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 142 The quality of groundwater entering the mine pits will continue to reflect an average of water quality for the coal measures spoils and contributions from the surrounding coal measures. Future hydrochemistry is expected to be similar since interburden is similar although the influence of highly saline specific seams (piezometers) is unclear.

Since all pit water will remain within the mine water system and since an inward flow regime will prevail at all times, seepage water will not migrate beyond the pit area

9.4.3 Recovery of Aquifer Pressures Post Mining

If mining is discontinued at the end of Year 18, spoils will be reshaped to establish stable high and end walls, and pit water levels will be permitted to recover.

The rate of recovery of water levels in the pit void will depend upon the remaining water held in storage in the coal measures, the rate of strata seepage back to the mine pit, the rate of induced leakage from shallow alluvial deposits and the extent of recharge from rainfall runoff. An estimate of the rate of recovery of pressures and water levels has been made using the aquifer simulation model.

Results from the model indicate that depressurisation within the coal measures will continue to expand for a number of years after mining ceases but hydraulic gradients towards the pit void reduce as the void fills. More than 100 years would be required for recovery to approach an equilibrated state assuming groundwater seepage is the primary source of water. Full recovery of original coal measure pressures will not occur since the pit void and spoils (including Mount Thorley Operations) have already established different hydraulic characteristics to those for insitu coal measures.

Recovery of pit water levels will be accelerated by contributions from rainfall and runoff. The extent to which these will contribute will depend in part upon closure planning to be undertaken during the last five years of mining and monitoring of runoff from rehabilitated areas prior to that time.

9.4.4 Final Void Groundwater Quality

A closure strategy for the void will be prepared following detailed assessments of final landforms, monitoring of pit water seepage and evaporative losses approximately five years prior to closure. The current design provides for open water void conditions where a localised sink or groundwater attractor will prevail at the pit void and salinisation will occur in time.

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 143 Void water/groundwater quality will be largely influenced by the re- saturation of spoils and leaching of salts from the saturated, fragmented interburden. Other contributing factors will include continuing coal measures seepage and contributions from direct rainfall runoff entering the void.

An estimate of the long term salinity of void water has been prepared using mass balance estimates and an average mobilisable salt load of between 0.96 and 2.36 kg/m3 of spoils. This mobilisable load is the estimated leached load over a period of at least 100 years and has been determined from leach trials conducted on interburden samples over a period of 12 weeks.

Final void recovery levels will result in about 880,000,000 m3 of spoil being resaturated to a maximum 45 m AHD recovered void water level. If a final emplacement bulk porosity of 20 % is assumed, then the calculated mobilisable salt load over the duration of recovery is estimated to lie between 844,800 and 2,076,800 t.

Mixing of the leachable load with the open void water derived from rainfall runoff and coal measures water leads to an estimate of void/spoils water quality in the range 4,667 to 7,559 mg/l before evaporative concentration is considered. Current salinity of mixed mine water observed in the Main Water Storage Dam ranges from 2,600 mg/l (4,000 EC) to more than 4,225 mg/l (6,500 EC).

With the void runoff catchment areas, runoff will be insufficient to balance evaporative losses. A groundwater sink will be established and will continue to attract from the surrounding coal measures thereby impeding migration of saline water into the coal measures. Salinity will steadily rise.

Based on leachate trials, the void groundwater is expected to tend towards a sodium chloride/bicarbonate water groundwater with a pH in the range 7.5 to 9.0.

9.5 MINE WATER MANAGEMENT

9.5.1 Introduction

Future water management will utilise the existing WMS with minor changes and provisions for water sharing with Mount Thorley Operations, MTCL and Hunter Valley Operations. The main goals of the mine WMS include:

• diversion of natural catchment runoff around the mine site where practically feasible;

• capture and storage of pit seepage and disturbed area runoff in order to maintain site workability;

• efficient usage of stored water for process water supply in the CPP;

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 144 • watering for dust minimisation on haul roads, trafficable areas and stock piles;

• minimisation of river make up water during dry and drought periods; and

• maximisation of the usage of surplus mine water between operations.

9.6 MINE SITE WATER BALANCE

9.6.1 General

The mine water balance is a representation of all inflows, outflows and changes in storage for the WMS. It provides an understanding of the need for storage and the impacts of seasonal and climate change. In the current study, a computer based simulation model has been used to assess the dynamics of the system under conditions of varying rainfall and groundwater seepage rather than a simple wet and dry year water balance.

The model develops a daily water balance for the mine site for wide ranging climatic conditions by utilising historical rainfall and evaporation records to generate catchment runoff estimates. The model provides for pumping and accumulation of mine water, transfer of mine water between dams, losses related to the CPP, dust suppression and discharges to the Hunter River in compliance with the HRSTS if required.

CPP, Dust Suppression and Other Water Usage Rates

Mine water usage can be attributed to three areas, including the CPP, dust suppression on roadways and stockpile areas and truck wash down. Estimates of these usage rates have been either calculated indirectly or determined from available pumping data. Table 9.4 provides a summary of usage/loss rates.

Table 9.4 Summary of Current and Future Mine Water Usage Rates

Mine Water Usage Usage Rate (ML/day) Current loss rate for CPP 2.15 Future loss rate for CPP 3.40 Dust suppression on haul roads 1.40 Stockpile watering 0.12 Truck wash down 0.03 Source: MER 2002

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 145 Assessment of Future System Response

Model simulation of the mine WMS has been conducted for projected future mine/pit catchments using historical rainfall record. Details on inputs and rates used in the model are provided in detail in the surface and groundwater management study contained in Part B of Volume 2.

Model simulations indicate the following:

• North and West Pits are maintained in a generally dewatered state 95 % of the time. During the remaining 5 % of the time, storage could rise above 200 ML if more extreme rainfall periods are encountered. Increased pumping capacity would reduce the risk of impairing workability but additional storage would be required to contain pumped water;

• total mine storage is mostly below 1,000 ML. For the remaining time the storage rises to a predicted maximum of between 1,200 ML and 2,500 ML depending upon the rainfall received;

• the 500 ML Discharge Dam is predicted to be less than half full for 50 % of the time. This is attributed to an aggressive HRSTS discharge regime where all flood and high flow opportunities are utilised with high flow discharges ranging from zero to a maximum of 70 ML/day depending upon the available storage in the Discharge Dam; and

• the Main Water Storage Dam is at capacity for 60 to 80 % of the time with a possibility of storage exhaustion up to 7 % of the time. Make up water would need to be drawn from either surplus water at Mount Thorley Operations, Hunter Valley Operations or from the MTWSS during these times. It has been calculated that a maximum rate of 5 ML/day would be required.

While the above provides predicted outcomes based on model parameters, in reality it is likely that some HRSTS discharge events will not be fully utilised, pumps may fail or Discharge Dam water quality may rise and reduce the high flow discharge rate in terms of salt tonnes exported from site. As a result, it is likely that pit water storage may rise and be retained for longer periods. Additional HRSTS salinity credits may then need to be obtained to boost high flow discharge rates and recover system balance. CNA retains more than 200 participatory credits within the HRSTS. The credits and the flexibility to be able to pump water between CNA’s mine sites will ensure any fluctuations that arise can be well managed.

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 146 9.7 ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACTS

9.7.1 Introduction

The proposed extension of Warkworth Mine will continue to change the local groundwater and surface water environments. Potential impacts arising from the development will include:

• continuing loss of coal measures aquifer pressures;

• change in groundwater quality in coal measures and alluvial lands;

• leakage of shallow groundwater from the Hunter River and Wollombi Brook alluvium;

• change in runoff in local watersheds;

• change in surface water quality; and

• salinisation in the final voids following cessation of mining.

Each of these matters is addressed below.

9.7.2 Loss of Coal Measure Aquifer Pressures

Future mining will continue to induce loss of aquifer pressures in the seams and in formations overlying the seams with pressure losses predicted to continue post mining for a period of more than 100 years. Coal measure pressures will never recover to pre mining levels since the area of mine development (including neighbouring mines), now retains different hydraulic properties with spoils permeability being two to three orders of magnitude higher than undisturbed coal measures. The net effect of changed properties will be a relatively flat water table over the mined area at a maximum elevation of about 45 m AHD. Since the area of extended mining is located at the headwaters of a number of catchments, the overall impact is not considered to be significant.

Depressurisation of the coal measures and depressurisation impacts are predicted to extend no further than about 2 to 3 km from the proposed pit perimeters over the remaining mine life. This distance will extend to, and possibly beneath, Wollombi Brook.

Loss of aquifer pressures is not predicted to impact any existing water supply bores or wells within the coal measures since most are located within shallow alluvium.

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 147 9.7.3 Change in Groundwater Quality

Groundwater within the coal measures west of the mine site is highly saline with salinity levels often observed to be above 15,000 EC. These elevated salinities are atypical for the upper Hunter and reflect discrete coal seams within which the monitoring piezometers have been located.

Pit water qualities reflect a lower range from less than 4,000 to 6,500 EC suggesting a mixing of coal measure water and rainfall runoff. Continued mining will sustain regional depressurisation and may lead to aquifer/aquitard leakage with some change and possible improvement in groundwater quality. However, it is highly improbable that coal measure groundwaters will exhibit a fall in salinity to the point where beneficial usage is possible.

9.7.4 Leakage from the Alluvial Lands

Coal measure pressure losses will migrate further westward towards Wollombi Brook leading to an increased hydraulic gradient between the brook and North Pit. Leakage is predicted to have commenced in about 1997 from alluvial areas near and including Wollombi Brook. However, the leakage rate is calculated to be very low and less than 0.015 ML/day over an area of more than 2.4 km2. This estimate is also subject to possible interference pressures generated by Wambo Mine, Hunter Valley Operations and Mount Thorley Operations. The leakage rate is predicted to increase to a maximum of about 0.24 ML/day assuming hydraulic connection between strata vertically beneath Wollombi Brook is present. The long term rate is likely to remain very low and when distributed over the approximate zone of depressurisation, calculates to 0.1 l/m2/day.

Leakage from the area east of current mining is also predicted to increase from approximately Year 10 of the extended mining period rising to 0.36 ML/day at the end of mining. This eastern region comprises a much larger area of alluvial lands than the western area. A leakage rate of about 0.037 l/m2/day is calculated over an area of 9.9 km2.

9.7.5 Loss of Catchment Runoff

There will be a continuing loss of runoff in local catchments as they are consumed by the mine pit. The main drainages impacted include Sandy Hollow Creek, Dights Creek and Doctors Creek. However, rehabilitation of areas in the eastern part of the mine site will reinstate runoff to these same drainages with a net increase in catchment runoff. A part of Longford Creek catchment (13.6 %) and another unnamed creek (4.6 %) will also be consumed. Loss of runoff is considered unlikely to impact these catchments.

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 148 9.7.6 Change in Runoff Water Quality

Runoff water quality in rehabilitated areas draining to Sandy Hollow, Dights and Doctors Creeks is likely to exhibit a reduced salt load compared to other local drainages and historical measurements in Doctors Creek. This is mostly attributed to the removal of regional aquifer pressures within the coal measures. All areas planned to be returned to the natural catchment will be carefully monitored at the sedimentation dam exit points during early years of rehabilitation to ensure water qualities (suspended and dissolved constituents) are acceptable.

9.7.7 Final Void

An open pit (free water) void will remain at the completion of this mining approval. If mining ceases, the void would exhibit salinity levels higher than existing pit water due to leaching of salts from spoils, and evaporative processes. Some cyclic variability is predicted as runoff from adjacent rehabilitated areas dilutes salinity and evaporation concentrates salinity. The extent to which catchment runoff is directed to the void, would be determined through runoff monitoring during the last five years of the mine life and detailed design during closure planning.

For the resultant void from this extension of Warkworth Mine, the leachable salt load (over 100 years) is estimated at 8.4 x 105 tonnes generating a minimum void water quality of 4,667 mg/l (7,180 EC) before any evaporative concentration is included. Inclusion of evaporation will significantly escalate the salinity of void water in the long term. The runoff area contributing to the void is calculated to be sufficiently small to ensure that evaporation dominates and the void remains as a long term groundwater sink thereby preventing advective dispersion of salinity back into the coal measures.

9.8 CONCLUSION

Water management studies have been conducted for the extension of mining at Warkworth Mine. The studies have addressed groundwater and surface water issues together with an analysis of the mine water management. Within the constraints and limitations imposed by the available data base and analytical methods, the following conclusions can be drawn.

In respect of surface water, clean water runoff will continue to be segregated from mine water via the maintenance of contour drains, the diversion channel between Sandy Hollow and Longford Creeks, sedimentation and mine water dams. Continued mining will have negligible impact on local and regional watersheds. Parts of Sandy Hollow, Dights and Doctors Creek catchments previously consumed by mining will be rehabilitated and natural runoff returned to these creeks in the eastern and north eastern areas.

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 149 In respect of groundwater, it is concluded that continued mining will result in ongoing groundwater seepage to the North and West Pits with an increasing contribution occurring as leakage from the surrounding undisturbed coal measures. Leakage may also occur and increase from shallow alluvial areas associated with Wollombi Brook and the Hunter River providing joint connectivity prevails throughout the strata to facilitate such leakage.

Pit water seepage will increase from a current estimated rate of about 0.64 ML/day to a rate of about 4.2 ML/day after 18 years. The water quality will reflect a mixture of coal seams and interburden with a salinity most probably similar to that observed in the current mine water system and ranging from 4,000 to more than 6,500 EC. Potentially higher salinities will be evident when contributions from certain seams, are intercepted. Seams to the west of the present operations exhibit salinities as high as 18,000 EC.

Loss of formation aquifer pressures will influence areas several kilometres from the mine pit and the final void. Existing water supply boreholes or wells have not been identified within the zone of significant depressurisation. Bores and wells located within the alluvial lands near Wollombi Brook and the Hunter River will not be affected.

Pit water will accumulate and water levels will recover in the final voids if mining ceases after year 18. A period of more than 100 years is predicted for an equilibrated system to re-establish based on groundwater seepage alone. However the period will be shortened by runoff contributions from surrounding landforms. Water levels will never fully recover due to changed conditions within the coal measures where relatively permeable spoils have replaced impermeable coal measures. Instead the recovered water table elevation will ultimately be governed by evaporative processes. Current estimates based on final void preliminary design support a sustained evaporative sink with an equilibrated level below 45 m AHD. Spoils re- saturation within the void will result in an initial void water quality estimated to range from 4,667 to 7,559 mg/l rising in the long term to high salinity through evaporative concentration. Because the void will act as a sink or groundwater attractor, advective dispersion of void salinity into regional areas is unlikely.

The continued mining to greater depths will attract more groundwater into the mine water system than is currently managed. This increase will be offset in part by a reduction in runoff from areas scheduled for rehabilitation. However, modelling indicates the likelihood of surplus water that will need to be removed from site. Testing of the mine water system against 100 years of daily rainfall records indicates surpluses can be managed providing most HRSTS high and flood flow discharge opportunities arising in the future, are utilised.

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 150 Extension of Warkworth Coal Mine environmental impact statement

CHAPTER 10

Air Quality 10 AIR QUALITY

10.1 INTRODUCTION

This chapter of the EIS provides a summary of an air quality study prepared by HAS. A copy of this report is contained in Part C of Volume 2.

The air quality study provides an assessment of the air quality impacts of the proposed extension of Warkworth Mine. The assessment is based on a computer dispersion model which uses local meteorological data and estimates of dust emissions to predict the concentration and deposition rate of particulate matter from the proposed extension and other mines expected to be operating concurrently with Warkworth Mine.

10.2 AIR QUALITY ASSESSMENT CRITERIA AND METHODS

Air quality assessment criteria is stipulated by the EPA in a document titled Approved Methods and Guidance for the Modelling and Assessment of Air Pollutants in NSW. The criteria contained in this document that are relevant for use in assessing impacts from mining using dispersion models are summarised in Table 10.1 and Table 10.2.

Table 10.1 Impact Assessment Criteria for Pollutants

Pollutant Averaging Period Concentration pphm I µg/m3 II

PM10 III 24 Hour - 50 Annual - 30 TSP IV Annual - 90

SO2 V 10 Minutes 25 712 1 Hour 20 570 24 Hour 8 228 Annual 2 60

NO2 VI 1 Hour 12 246 Annual 3 62 ppm VII mg/m3 VIII CO IX 15 Minutes 87 100 1 Hour 25 30 8 Hours 9 10 Source: HAS 2002 Notes: I. pphm = parts per hundred million II. µg/m3 = micrograms per cubic metre III. PM10 = particulate matter with aerodynamic diameters less than 10 µm IV. TSP = total suspended particulate V. SO2 = sulphur dioxide VI. NO2 = nitrogen dioxide VII. ppm = parts per million VIII. mg/m3 = milligrams per cubic metre IX. CO = carbon monoxide

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 151 Table 10.2 Impact Assessment Criteria for Dust Fallout

Pollutant Averaging Period Maximum Increase Maximum Total Deposited Dust Annual 2 g/m2/month1 4 g/m2/month1 Source: HAS 2002 Notes: 1. g/m2/month = grams per square metre per month

In practice the sulfur content of Australian diesel is too low and mining

equipment is too widely dispersed over mine sites to cause SO2 goals to be exceeded even in mines that use large quantities of diesel. For this reason no

detailed study is required to demonstrate that emissions of SO2 from the mine

will not significantly affect ambient SO2 concentrations. In addition, NO2 and CO emissions are too small and too widely dispersed to require a detailed modeling assessment.

Therefore the main focus of the study is on the potential effects of particulate matter (PM) emissions. PM has the capacity to affect health and to cause nuisance effects.

To assist in interpreting the significance of predicted concentration and deposition levels some background discussion on the potential harmful effects is provided in the following sections.

PM can be categorised by size and/or by chemical composition. The potential harmful effects depend on both. The human respiratory system has in-built defensive systems that prevent particles larger than approximately 10 µm from reaching the more sensitive parts of the respiratory system. Particles

with aerodynamic diameters less than 10 µm are referred to as PM10. Particles larger than 10 µm, while not able to affect health, can soil materials and generally degrade aesthetic elements of the environment. For this reason, air quality goals make reference to measures of the total mass of all particles suspended in the air. This is referred to as TSP. In practice particles larger than 30 to 50 µm settle out of the atmosphere too quickly to be regarded as air pollutants. The upper size range for TSP is usually taken to be 30 µm. TSP

includes PM10.

10.3 DISPERSION METEOROLOGY

The computer-based dispersion model ISCST3 has been used in the air quality study. This model requires data on wind speed, wind direction, atmospheric stability class and mixed-layer height.

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 152 Extension of Warkworth Coal Mine environmental impact statement

CHAPTER 11

Noise and Vibration 11 NOISE AND VIBRATION

11.1 INTRODUCTION

A comprehensive noise and vibration study was prepared by ERM and is contained in Part D of Volume 2. The report encompassed all the relevant features of potential noise impact from the proposed extension including:

• an assessment of the existing noise environment;

• description of applicable noise and vibration criteria;

• analysis of prevailing meteorological conditions to determine assessable conditions;

• noise modelling for all assessable meteorological conditions;

• field validation of the noise model;

• mitigation advice and remodelling of noise emissions with mitigation;

• assessment of potential sleep disturbance impacts;

• cumulative noise effects with other local industry;

• assessment of noise and vibration from blasting;

• potential for construction, road traffic and rail noise; and

• noise management strategy.

This chapter forms a summary of the full noise report, briefly covering the method, results and conclusions of each analysis. For a full description of the analysis undertaken refer to Part D of Volume 2.

Technical terms used in this chapter are defined in the glossary contained in Part E of this EIS.

11.2 EXISTING BACKGROUND NOISE

Unattended and attended monitoring was conducted at six locations around Warkworth Mine with the locations chosen as representative of the potentially affected properties. The results of the monitoring are summarised in Table 11.1. The monitoring locations can be seen in the noise and vibration study in Part D of Volume 2.

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 163 Table 11.1 Ambient Noise Monitoring Survey

Existing Leq Location RBL1, dB(A)2 Industrial Noise Comments Level, dB(A) Label Day Evening Night Warkworth Mine operations N1 30 30 30 35 slightly audible Redbank Power Station audible N2 33 33 33 35 and Warkworth Mine slightly audible Redbank Power Station audible N3 30 30 30 33 and Warkworth Mine slightly audible Wambo and Warkworth Mines N4 33 33 33 35 slightly audible Mining noise from Wambo Mine, N5 30 31 30 Low Hunter Valley Operations and Warkworth Mine slightly audible Bulga commercial and domestic N6 33 34 33 Nil noise Notes: 1. RBL = Rating Background Level. This is an overall single figure background level representing each assessment period over the whole monitoring period. 2. dB(A) – Noise is measured in units called decibels (dB). There are several scales for describing noise, the most common being the ‘A-weighted’ scale.

11.3 NOISE CRITERIA

11.3.1 Operational Noise

Based on the noise monitoring and the EPA’s Industrial Noise Policy (INP), project specific noise criteria were developed for 30 properties (identified as Property Nos. 1 to 30) considered to be representative of all assessable locations around the mine. The location of Property Nos. 1 to 30 can be seen in Figure EIS-31 in Volume 4. This figure also shows the location of all other properties surrounding Warkworth Mine. Property Nos. 1 to 28 are private residences. Property No. 29 is a church and Property No. 30 is an industrial property located within the Mount Thorley Industrial Estate.

Project specific noise criteria are shown in Table 11.2. Also shown in Table 11.2 are the potential acquisition limits for each representative property based on an ‘existing background + 10 dB’ approach that planningNSW have previously applied to similar operations.

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/5 SEPTEMBER 2002 164 Table 11.2 Operational Noise Criteria

Property Project Specific Limits Possible Acquisition Limits Number Leq,15minute, dB(A) Leq dB(A) Day Evening Night Day Night 13838384543 23535354540 33535354540 43535354540 53535354540 63535354540 73535354540 83535354540 93535354540 10* 37 37 37 45 42 11 35 35 35 45 40 12 35 35 35 45 40 13 35 35 35 45 40 14 35 35 35 45 40 15 35 35 35 45 40 16 35 35 35 45 40 17 35 35 35 45 40 18 38 38 38 45 43 19 38 38 38 45 43 20 38 38 38 45 43 21 35 36 35 45 40 22 38 38 38 45 43 23 38 38 38 45 43 24 35 35 35 45 40 25 35 35 35 45 40 26 38 38 38 45 43 27 38 38 38 45 43 28 35 35 35 45 40 29 50 50 50 NA NA 30 70 70 70 NA NA Notes: * Based on data collected during a previous study.

11.3.2 Cumulative Noise

The cumulative impact of more than one development can be compared against the EPA’s ‘amenity’ criteria. This is consistent with the INP’s holistic approach to cumulative noise.

11.3.3 Sleep Disturbance

In this case, the most stringent sleep disturbance criterion can be drawn from the EPA’s Environmental Noise Control Manual (ENCM). The criterion uses a ‘background + 15 dB’ comparison against predicted L1 noise levels. This criterion can be as low as 45 dB(A)L1 at the quietest locations around Warkworth Mine.

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 165 11.3.4 Blasting

The Australian and New Zealand Environment and Conservation Council (ANZECC) recommend the following limitations to minimise annoyance of blasting (these limitations apply where blasting is audible at noise sensitive locations):

• air blast overpressure should not exceed 115 dB(LinPeak) for more than 5 % of the total number of blasts in a year;

• air blast overpressure should not exceed 120 dB(LinPeak) at anytime;

• peak particle velocity for ground vibration should not exceed 5 mm/s for more than 5 % of the total number of blasts in a year;

• peak particle velocity for ground vibration should not exceed 10 mm/s at any time;

• no blasting on Sundays or public holidays; and

• blasting should be avoided during temperature inversion conditions.

11.4 OPERATIONAL NOISE MODELLING

11.4.1 Calculation Procedures

The ENM noise prediction software was used for modelling purposes. ENM takes into account distance, ground effect, atmospheric absorption and topographic detail. ENM is an EPA accepted noise prediction model. It gives consistently reliable predictions of environmental noise. Initial calculations were performed with no wind or temperature gradients, which are termed still iso-thermal (SI) or calm conditions. Assumed night time air temperature and relative humidity were 10 °C and 80 % respectively. Calculations were then performed under assessable meteorological conditions determined in accordance with the EPA’s INP (refer Section 11.4.4).

The model incorporates three dimensional digitised ground contours for the surrounding land and mine plans. Contours of the mine and overburden emplacement areas for each project stage were superimposed on surrounding base topography.

The noise model calculated Leq noise levels, assuming all plant and equipment operate simultaneously and at full power. In practice, such an operating scenario would be unlikely to occur. The results are therefore considered conservative.

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 166 11.4.2 Noise Sources

The model used sound power levels based on measurements conducted at the existing mine and the proponent’s other mines. Equipment was placed at various locations and heights, representing realistic operating conditions throughout the life of the mine. These locations were chosen to represent operations for that period and represent typical worst case schedules and activities. A summary of equipment and activities is shown in Table 11.3.

Table 11.3 Noise Sources

Area Noise Sources Mine Drills, rope shovels, front-end loaders, trucks, dozers, graders, dragline and generators for lighting sets. Overburden and reject Trucks, dozers, graders and generators for lighting sets. emplacements and haul roads Coal transportation Trucks and graders on haul road to Warkworth Mine and Mount Thorley Operations’ CPPs. Conveyors between Warkworth Mine, Mount Thorley Operations and MTCL.

11.4.3 Noise Model Validation

Field validation of the model predictions was undertaken using an easily identifiable noise source and measurements at significant distance. A comparison between wind assisted noise measurements and the model results indicated that the model consistently overpredicts expected noise levels from the Warkworth Mine area by 3 dB(A). This factor was used to correct the final modelled wind-affected results only.

11.4.4 Assessable Weather Conditions

General

Under various wind and temperature gradient conditions, noise levels may increase or decrease compared with SI or calm conditions - ie, zero wind and temperature gradient. A thorough review of the vector components of hourly wind data in accordance with the INP was undertaken.

Winds

It is demonstrated that the assessable winds occur during evening and night time and that daytime winds are not considered a ‘feature’ of the area according to the INP. Since the evening and night mine operations are the same and the night time wind data set provides a more statistically valid analysis, the ‘feature’ winds occurring during the night are used for noise assessment. This analysis also confirmed that a combined wind and

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 167 temperature inversion occur significantly less than the EPA’s 30% threshold. Therefore, a combined wind and temperature inversion calculation was not produced.

The results are consistent with possible drainage flow winds, which would exist from the escarpment to the south west of the mine or Bulga area.

Temperature Inversion

Records of wind speed, wind direction and sigma-theta (σθ - used to approximate Pasquill Stability Classes) were available from Mount Thorley Operation’s weather station. Twelve months of hourly data were used, including, the periods 1 November 2000 to 31 October 2001.

Analysis of results indicate that atmospheric Stability Class F occurs for 24.6 % of the winter nights in the area. This is below the EPA’s 30 % threshold where temperature inversions are considered to be a ‘feature’ of an area and therefore does not need to be included in noise impact assessment. This is consistent with data relevant to this area presented in Appendix F of the INP.

11.4.5 Mitigation

To minimise noise impacts from the proposed extension, CNA have investigated the feasibility of adding noise suppression to their haul trucks (Komatsu 830E, 240 tonne Leibherr and 190 tonne CAT) as well as the existing coal conveyor. The truck noise suppression package may include engine and fan shrouding, modified retarders being added to equipment working in exposed areas. Conveyor mitigation will include quieter rollers and shrouding. The retrofitting of noise attenuation packages together with ongoing maintenance and monitoring is estimated to be in the order of $8 million staged over the mine life. The truck suppression package is expected to result in a 5 dB reduction of the maximum noise under dynamic load. The representative Leq,15 minute sound power level for these trucks was approximated as 111 dB(A) for modelling purposes. The noise modelling incorporated such mitigation.

The suppression of the existing conveyor is assumed to result in a reduction of 8 dB or equivalent to the proposed conveyor (based on Bengalla Mine). The noise model therefore assumes a 75 dB(A) sound power level per linear metre for each of the existing mitigated and proposed conveyor.

11.4.6 Results

Operational Noise

The noise modelling results incorporating the mitigation are demonstrated, for the five mine stages at the nominated properties. The results are summarised in Table 11.4. Combined worst case results both without and with

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 168 the aforementioned mitigation are presented graphically in Section 6 and Section 7 of the noise and vibration study respectively. The results show a clear reduction in the overall received noise level due to the mitigation. These reductions vary and range between 1 dB to 8 dB for INP wind predictions, depending on the property.

Unmitigated noise modelling results are presented in Figures EIS-32 and EIS-33 in Volume 4.

With mitigation, under SI or calm weather conditions, all properties experience noise levels below the EPA’s noise goals, which is generally 35 dB(A) (refer Figure EIS-34 and Figure EIS-35 in Volume 4).

The model has also shown that under worst case INP derived weather conditions, noise at most properties is below or marginally (less than 3 dB) above EPA noise goals. The private residential properties that may experience higher noise levels are those in the vicinity of Property Nos. 6 and 10. From Table 11.4 and interpolation of noise contours in Figures EIS-34 and EIS-35 in Volume 4, Property Nos. 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 46 and 47 also fall within this description. However, Warkworth Mine noise levels are predicted to only increase marginally compared to existing levels. This is evident when comparing the modelled Year 2 operations (which are approximately equivalent to existing conditions) and subsequent mine stages (refer Tables 6.1 and 6.5 in the noise and vibration study).

A comparison against possible acquisition limits imposed on similar mining operations, indicates marginal exceedances at five private residential properties, which are:

• Property 6;

• Property 10;

• Property 34;

• Property 36; and

• Property 46.

Again, Warkworth Mine noise at these locations is predicted to only increase marginally compared to existing levels.

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/5 SEPTEMBER 2002 169 eq 43 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 42 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 43 43 43 40 43 43 40 40 43 43 40 Acquisition Possible Night Possible Limit, dB(A) L dB(A) Day Night Noise Criteria, Night ( INP Wind) Year 18 (SI) 35.8 41.0 70 70 NA Day 38.836.831.533.8 22.135.0 26.538.3 23.732.9 27.7 35.533.6 29.4 36.331.9 31.6 33.439.9 26.8 34.5 3835.0 26.1 35.9 3536.5 22.1 39.2 35 38 12.8 30.2 33.4 35 35 21.4 26.1 34.4 35 35 25.7 24.9 32.3 35 35 27.1 11.7 40.1 35 35 23.3 18.0 35.0 35 35 25.4 20.7 36.4 35 35 24.8 22.1 12.4 37 35 26.1 20.9 21.0 35 35 26.8 20.6 24.4 35 37 27.3 22.3 26.2 35 35 27.1 21.4 23.4 35 35 28.4 24.4 25.0 35 35 30.0 22.9 25.0 35 35 39.2 23.7 26.8 35 35 33.3 24.1 26.5 38 35 30.2 26.1 28.1 38 35 35.2 29.8 28.5 38 38 39.1 23.5 27.8 35 38 20.3 30.0 38 38 25.0 40.2 38 35 34.4 35 38 29.8 35 38 35.8 38 35 38 35 35 38 50 38 35 50 NA Night ( INP Wind) Year 15 (SI) 35.8 Day 35.435.832.534.9 22.9 36.3 25.8 39.6 23.7 34.0 26.5 34.8 27.7 33.2 30.5 40.6 25.9 35.4 24.7 36.6 22.1 13.9 29.3 21.7 26.0 24.9 25.1 26.4 12.2 23.5 17.9 24.9 20.6 25.0 21.5 26.0 18.7 25.8 19.8 27.1 20.2 24.5 21.2 27.2 22.6 28.4 21.9 38.2 22.7 30.2 22.8 29.4 24.9 32.2 29.4 42.4 23.7 21.1 24.6 Night ( INP Wind) Year 10 (SI) Day 46.5 36.7 Night ( INP Wind) Year 5 (SI) 21.727.424.130.3 36.531.5 37.234.1 34.129.7 36.5 21.7 28.5 38.0 25.8 24.8 41.6 23.4 35.0 36.1 28.1 27.1 37.2 29.7 27.2 36.1 32.3 12.9 43.8 27.5 14.6 35.9 26.9 16.8 37.3 23.1 17.3 13.8 31.5 15.4 21.5 26.3 15.3 25.0 25.9 16.2 25.6 13.2 15.1 23.6 16.8 16.1 24.4 18.5 16.4 24.3 20.2 17.5 24.3 16.5 16.0 24.7 18.3 16.8 24.5 18.0 20.4 22.2 18.6 16.0 25.5 18.7 18.9 26.2 18.8 16.9 27.0 18.7 41.0 26.5 18.6 29.5 19.3 27.5 27.6 19.6 18.4 21.3 Day e potential acquisition limits. e potential acquisition 43.0 Night ( INP Wind) Year 2 (SI) 21.125.722.0 36.4 27.5 36.0 29.6 32.6 32.6 34.4 28.1 36.2 27.2 40.5 21.6 34.5 31.7 34.4 23.3 31.5 23.0 40.3 10.8 32.0 12.5 33.8 14.7 11.4 15.0 20.2 13.6 23.4 13.4 24.6 13.3 21.4 12.4 22.8 12.5 22.6 12.7 23.4 13.7 23.4 12.2 22.7 13.1 20.8 17.7 24.3 13.3 24.8 17.9 22.8 14.2 25.4 38.7 28.6 24.8 Day 2. Bold indicates levels abov 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 Number Property Notes: 1. The night (INP Wind) results include the 3 dB validation factors, with the exception of Property No. 13. Table 11.4 Mitigated Operational Noise Levels

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 170 Sleep Disturbance

Sleep may be disturbed by transient noise such as shovel gates banging, bulldozer track plates and heavy vehicle reversing alarms. A single truck movement can also disturb sleep, particularly if it is isolated from other mine- related noise.

Maximum noise levels were calculated under INP wind conditions for each Property and corresponding worst case operation (see Table 11.5). Calculations were for a single event, rather than the simultaneous operation of a number of plant items because the values given are instantaneous maxima. The sleep disturbance impacts have not be adjusted for the mitigation effects as in some cases Lmax events are independent of the aforementioned mitigation (eg shovel gates banging) and in other cases unmitigated equipment (eg dozers) can be louder.

The calculated noise levels under prevailing weather conditions are within the EPA’s conservative sleep disturbance criterion at all residential properties.

Table 11.5 Sleep Disturbance Impact – INP Wind (Validated)

Property L1,1min Criteria, External Lmax Noise Level From On-Site Plant, dB(A) Number dB(A) Year 2 Year 5 Year 10 Year 15 Year 18 1 39.4 37.4 38.9 41.5 39.8 48 2 38.3 38.1 38.0 37.8 38.7 45 3 38.6 38.9 36.6 38.0 38.9 45 4 33.8 34.1 34.1 33.8 34.0 45 5 35.8 35.9 36.0 35.5 35.9 45 6 39.7 40.0 39.9 39.9 39.9 45 7 33.3 32.3 32.0 32.0 32.0 45 8 34.9 35.1 34.9 34.5 34.7 45 9 35.8 36.6 34.9 34.9 34.9 45 10 39.4 44.5 39.3 39.3 38.8 47 11 38.8 37.7 37.2 37.7 37.7 45 12 41.4 39.8 39.8 39.8 39.8 45 13 13.7 13.7 13.7 13.7 13.7 45 14 20.4 23.8 24.3 21.8 23.8 45 15 23.1 28.6 29.0 28.3 28.6 45 16 24.3 31.1 31.1 27.3 31.1 45 17 19.0 23.4 24.4 22.8 23.4 45 18 22.1 26.5 26.4 25.8 26.5 48 19 20.8 25.7 26.0 24.8 25.7 48 20 21.5 26.3 27.4 26.8 26.3 48 21 22.1 24.3 25.0 25.3 24.3 45 22 21.8 26.1 27.4 26.5 26.1 48 23 20.6 26.8 24.1 27.3 27.1 48 24 24.9 25.4 26.2 28.3 25.4 45 25 26.5 30.1 26.3 29.5 30.1 45 26 24.3 25.6 43.0 43.2 45.8 47 27 25.5 24.8 33.3 35.2 35.9 47 28 26.1 27.0 27.5 29.8 28.2 45 Notes: Property Nos. 29 and 30 not included as these properties do not contain residences.

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 171 Cumulative Noise

A calculation of cumulative noise effects with other surrounding industry is shown in Table 11.6. The additive effect of Warkworth Mine is in some cases marginally noticeable and in most cases insignificant. The total cumulative noise is within the EPA’s night time amenity goal at most locations, the exceptions are Property Nos. 8 to 11 where noise levels are marginally above 40 dB(A).

Table 11.6 Cumulative Noise at Properties after Mitigation, dB (A)

Property Number Warkworth Mine Operating Year Year 2 Year 5 Year 10 Year 15 Year 18 1 33.9 33.9 33.9 34.0 34.0 2 32.7 33.2 32.7 32.6 32.8 3 31.8 32.1 32.0 32.0 32.1 4 34.7 35.5 34.8 34.4 34.6 5 37.5 38.0 37.5 37.1 37.4 6 38.2 38.8 38.1 37.6 37.8 7 36.6 37.0 36.0 35.8 35.8 8 40.8 40.9 40.4 40.3 40.3 9 40.4 40.4 40.3 40.3 40.1 10 41.2 41.9 40.9 40.6 40.6 11 40.7 40.8 40.4 40.4 40.2 12 37.7 37.9 36.1 36.0 35.6 13 32.3 32.4 32.9 32.9 25.4 14 35.2 35.2 35.2 35.3 22.9 15 35.6 36.0 35.3 35.4 24.7 16 35.5 35.7 35.3 35.4 25.6 17 35.7 35.9 35.2 35.3 24.3 18 35.7 36.0 35.3 35.3 24.6 19 35.7 36.0 35.3 35.3 25.6 20 35.8 36.0 35.4 35.5 25.6 21 34.7 35.0 34.5 34.6 27.1 22 34.9 35.2 34.5 34.6 26.3 23 35.2 35.6 34.8 35.0 28.5 24 34.3 34.6 34.0 34.2 28.5 25 34.6 34.9 34.3 34.7 30.6 26 37.8 37.9 38.2 38.5 37.9 27 39.4 39.5 39.4 39.5 39.1 28 18.7 19.5 19.0 21.7 21.1 29 38.4 38.4 38.5 38.6 38.2 30 40.7 42.6 38.3 38.3 36.8

11.5 BLASTING NOISE AND VIBRATION

The nearest privately owned residence to proposed blasting areas is Property No. 26. This residence is located approximately 1,500 m from the north western extent of operations in Year 5. All other privately owned residences are located more than 1,500 m from any proposed blast areas.

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 172 The Mount Thorley Industrial Estate is approximately 900 m from the nearest proposed blast area in Year 2.

The blast design and corresponding air blast overpressure and ground vibration is within the control of operators. The sites existing blast management strategy will be used to ensure appropriate charge masses are used for blasting in areas closest to residences or the Mount Thorley Industrial Estate. Such charge masses, or maximum instantaneous charge (MIC), are presented in Table 11.7. These were derived from 95 % formulaes in Blastronics Pty Limited publication for monitoring data collected at similar mines in the area. The formulae were checked against Warkworth Mine monitoring data and demonstrated strong correlation.

Table 11.7 Blasting Assessment

MIC to Satisfy ANZECC 95% MIC to Satisfy ANZECC Blast to Property 8ms 8ms overpressure Limit of 115 95% Ground Vibration Limit Distance (m) dB(Lin) (kg) of 5mm/s(ppv) (kg) 900 NA 268 1,500 163 745 2,000 386 1,324 2,500 753 2,069 3,000 1,302 2,980

The 900 m blast to property distance is relevant for the Mount Thorley Industrial Estate as described earlier. The limit on MIC for this type of property is governed by the ANZECC 95 % ground vibration level of 5 mm/s since the 115 dB(Lin) air blast overpressure limit is generally applicable to residential properties. At this distance the corresponding air blast overpressure level for ground vibration of 5 mm/s(ppv) is 122 dB(Lin). This is considered acceptable and will not cause damage to structures at the Mount Thorley Industrial Estate.

Blasting will occur between the hours of 7 am to 6 pm. This will provide the mine with flexibility to blast during meteorological conditions that will result in the least impact on its neighbours. Typically, Warkworth Mine will be conducting blasting operations more than once per day.

11.6 OTHER NOISE EMISSIONS

11.6.1 Construction Activities

There will be some construction activities that include road bridge constructions at two locations to accommodate haul trucks between Warkworth Mine CPP and Mount Thorley Operations CPP. Other on-site construction activities include building extensions. These activities will occur during mining operations. The noise emission from construction activities

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 173 will be significantly less than that for mining operations and will therefore not contribute to the total overall received noise at residences.

11.6.2 Road Traffic Noise

The changes in road traffic associated with the proposal have been described in Chapter 14. The highest predicted increase in traffic volumes that affects any privately owned residences is that of the Golden Highway/The Putty Road west of Broke Road. This is based on the assumption that the majority of contractors, for construction related traffic, and mine staff would come from one of the larger urban centres to the east of the site.

The traffic assessment demonstrated that for a worst case construction scenario, whereby the entire workforce used this section of The Putty Road, a maximum 2.3 % increase in existing traffic volume can be expected over a 3 month period. The associated traffic noise increase for this worst case construction scenario is theoretically calculated as 0.1 dB. This is a level which will not be perceived in practice and given its limited duration of 3 months, is unlikely to impact residences. Similarly, mine employee traffic will generally remain unchanged, as will associated noise at nearby residences.

11.6.3 Rail Traffic Noise

The proposal will not result in any net increase in rail traffic over and above what is currently approved from Warkworth Mine and Mount Thorley Operations’ CPPs. When coal production rates increase at Warkworth Mine, coal production rates as part of its current approval, will reduce at the neighbouring Mount Thorley Operations. This will essentially result in a balance of coal rail traffic operations, with no net change anticipated.

11.7 NOISE MONITORING AND MANAGEMENT

In addition to the mitigation described earlier, a detailed noise management plan (including monitoring program) that exists for Warkworth Mine will be used to reduce impacts further. Features of the noise monitoring plan includes the need for attended as well as unattended monitoring in specified locations and operating conditions.

‘Real time’ monitoring of operations will be used to demonstrate compliance with consent conditions. Where non-conformances are detected, additional safeguards will be investigated to satisfy CNA’s statutory obligations.

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 174 11.8 CONCLUSION

This study considered the impacts of the proposed extension of Warkworth Mine. The acoustic assessment was detailed to ensure that noise outcomes were accurate. It had the following features:

• long term ambient noise survey at six representative property locations in accordance with the EPA’s INP;

• noise criteria derived in accordance with the EPA’s INP;

• 12 months of site-specific hourly meteorological data was analysed in accordance with the EPA’s INP;

• source sound power levels for all equipment were measured under operational conditions at mines, rather than using catalogue values or estimations;

• the modelling itself addressed the EPA’s INP with regard to weather effects;

• extensive on-site validation of the ENM software predictions for wind conditions; and

• the effect of noise mitigation measures including noise suppression for much of Warkworth Mine’s truck fleet, upgrading the existing conveyor and the construction of a new quiet conveyor.

With mitigation, modelling has shown that under SI or calm weather conditions, all properties experience noise levels below the EPA’s noise goals. The model has also shown that under worst case INP derived weather conditions, noise at most properties is below or marginally (less than 3 dB) above EPA noise goals. The private residential properties that may experience higher noise levels are those in the vicinity of Property Nos. 6 and 10. From Table 11.4 and interpolation of noise contours in Figures EIS-34 to EIS-35 in Volume 4, Property Nos. 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 46 and 47 also fall within this description.

However, Warkworth Mine noise levels at all these locations is predicted to only increase marginally compared to existing levels.

A comparison against possible acquisition limits imposed on similar mining operations, indicates marginal exceedances at five private residential properties, which are:

• Property 6;

• Property 10;

• Property 34;

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/5 SEPTEMBER 2002 175 • Property 36; and

• Property 46.

Again, Warkworth Mine noise at these locations is predicted to only increase marginally compared to existing levels.

Blast design will incorporate control on the MIC as described in this study and ensure acceptable limits are maintained. This will also be addressed through monitoring.

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 176 Extension of Warkworth Coal Mine environmental impact statement

CHAPTER 12

Aboriginal Heritage 12 ABORIGINAL HERITAGE

12.1 INTRODUCTION

This chapter of the EIS provides a summary of an Aboriginal heritage study prepared by AMBS. A copy of this report is contained in Part E of Volume 2.

The Aboriginal heritage study identifies Aboriginal archaeological sites located within the proposed extension area and assesses the impacts of the proposal on these sites.

This chapter summarises the rationale for the archaeological investigation, the study methodology, its findings and management recommendations for any archaeological finds.

12.2 AIMS OF THE STUDY

The key objective of the Aboriginal heritage study was to determine whether the proposed extension area contains areas of Aboriginal significance and/or Aboriginal sites or relics which would require consents to destroy under Section 90 of the National Parks and Wildlife (NPW) Act, 1974. The study set out to achieve this through:

• consultation with the local Aboriginal community and the NPWS regarding Aboriginal sites;

• review of background documentation and previous archaeological assessments of the Warkworth Mine;

• survey of the extension area to locate Aboriginal sites and recording the extent of the archaeological resource;

• assessment of the known Aboriginal sites and identification of areas of archaeological potential;

• test excavation of Sandy Hollow Creek to verify the location and extent of Aboriginal sites; and

• preparation of recommendations for management of any significant archaeological finds within the extension area through assessment of Aboriginal sites based on archaeological significance assessment criteria.

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/5 SEPTEMBER 2002 177 12.3 ABORIGINAL CONSULTATION

Consultation with the local Aboriginal community aimed to identify the cultural significance of the area and the impact that the proposed extension would have on that cultural value. The Aboriginal community also provided advice on appropriate management of the area with respect to its Aboriginal cultural significance.

The Aboriginal community in the Warkworth region is currently represented by four groups, including:

• UHWC;

• LWTC;

• WNAC; and

• WLALC.

Consultation was undertaken via telephone conversations and representatives from these groups participating in fieldwork. All groups were consulted with regard to significance assessment and management recommendations.

12.4 PREVIOUS ARCHAEOLOGICAL INVESTIGATIONS AT WARKWORTH MINE

Numerous archaeological investigations for Aboriginal sites have previously been undertaken on the Warkworth Mining Lease. These include surveys, salvage collections and excavations (Dyall 1979, Brayshaw 1989, Brayshaw and Haglund 1990, Haglund and Rich 1991, Brayshaw 1993, Haglund 1999, 2002, White 2001).

Results of these surveys generally indicate that the occurrence of sites and patterns of archaeological distribution are consistent with other parts of the Hunter Valley. Sites are generally associated with drainage lines, but also occur on slopes and ridge tops. Site types include open sites, the largest of these always associated with eroded areas along creeklines, isolated artefacts and grinding grooves. Many of these surveys focused on creeklines and areas of high visibility.

A Bora, or ceremonial, ground has also been recorded in the Warkworth Mining Lease. This site, recorded by Thorpe in 1918, was located in open woodland about 2 km west of Wallaby Scrub Road and 500 m east of Wollombi Brook. The site consisted of a number of carved trees and associated earth mounds (Thorpe 1918).

Numerous salvage collections and excavations have been undertaken on the Warkworth Mining Lease, including sites within the proposed extension area. Most of these sites are on or near creeklines. Analysis of the stone artefacts

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 178 collected has provided evidence of various activities being previously conducted on the site by Aboriginal groups over thousands of years. Large sites generally contained backed artefacts and indicate backed artefact manufacture. However, the potential for analysis is limited due to the lack of stratigraphic integrity of the duplex soils and the disturbed context of artefacts collected from eroded surfaces.

Haglund (2002) salvaged site W6, a relatively large site on Sandy Hollow Creek, with suitable intact archaeological deposit to warrant subsurface excavation. W6 was located on the banks of the creek, which in this section was a broad fairly level creek, with extensive sheet erosion, which had exposed artefacts. W6 was about 950 m long and 120 m broad. Analysis of stone artefacts indicated storage of raw material for future use. It was concluded that a wide range of activities were undertaken at the site, evidenced by backed artefact technology, grindstones and mullers and axes. The site appeared to have been used on and off over an undetermined period of time, with at least some activities being undertaken at the same time.

12.5 METHODOLOGY

12.5.1 Surface Survey

An archaeological survey of the proposed extension area and its surrounds (known as the study area) was carried out by AMBS with the assistance of Huonbrook Environment and Heritage Pty Limited (Huonbrook) in November 2001. The survey team also included a representative of each Aboriginal community group in the local area.

A reconnaissance inspection of the study area prior to the survey program allowed a field survey strategy to be formulated. On the basis of this reconnaissance, the study area was divided into a number of Landform Zones deemed likely to have different archaeological patterns. These Landform Zones formed the basis of the Survey Areas covered during the surface survey. The entire area was subject to surface survey, with some areas selected for complete survey coverage. Areas selected for complete survey included Survey Area 1, 2, 4, 5 and 6. Only proportions of the other Survey Areas were covered. The larger Survey Areas were subdivided into two or more sub-areas. Each Survey Area was further subdivided into several smaller Survey Transects.

Within each Survey Area, transect locations were based on landform units and planned on maps prior to carrying out the field survey. Transects were located so that each of the land forms present in the study area were represented in the surveyed sample. Survey team members walked over each transect. Some transects were slightly altered based on ground observations. Exposures close to transects were also surveyed. Relevant information about each survey transect was recorded in the field, including the amount of

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 179 ground visibility and surface exposure as well as the landform elements present within transects. The locations of all previously recorded sites were inspected and an updated assessment of these sites was undertaken including summary stone artefact recording. After survey, the annotated transects were redrawn using MapInfo software, allowing the dimensions and total area for each transect to be calculated. The effective survey area (ESA) was calculated by multiplying the total area of each transect or exposure by the percentage of visibility and exposure.

Survey areas can be seen in the Aboriginal heritage study contained in Part E of Volume 2.

12.5.2 Test Excavation

During the surface survey, one area was identified as warranting test excavation in order to allow for an overall archaeological assessment. AMBS and Huonbrook proposed to excavate within the sand sheet adjacent to Sandy Hollow Creek on which a recently recorded Aboriginal site had been recorded (Site W14). The sand sheet is approximately 500 m by 250 m and is an aeolian sand mantle over a lower gentle hill slope extending to the western bank of Sandy Hollow Creek. The opposite bank has a texture contrast soil comprising the classic Unit A and Unit B sequence as described by Hughes (1984) on which two large and artefact-rich sites were recorded and partially salvaged by Haglund and her team in the early 1990s (Sites W10 and W11).

During the survey, artefacts were recorded in the southern end of the sand sheet. They were eroding from an artificial contour drain next to a dam wall. The cutting revealed a sand deposit of at least 2 m depth with mottling and cementation in the lower part of the cutting (the B horizon) suggesting late Pleistocene antiquity. The upper 40 cm was a fine yellow/brown sand which may be a post-European reworked aeolian deposit. The contour drain extends the full length (north/south) of the sand sheet, but apart from one other small occurrence at the northern end (W69) no artefacts were observed in the exposed sands. The contour drain revealed the presence of artefacts at two locations in the sand sheet but did not reveal the stratigraphic location of those artefacts or indicate their true concentration or distribution. Two previously excavated sites in sand dunes in the Hunter Valley have rich stone artefact assemblages in their loose upper sands suggesting sand dunes were a focus of Aboriginal occupation (Cheshunt dune Site 37-5-166 [Hughes and Shawcross 2001] and the Hunter Valley Operations mine Site 37-5-63 [Hiscock and Shawcross 2000]). The very small amount of archaeological material found along the contour drain in the study area was surprising. On the basis of the surface survey alone, it was not possible to determine whether the sand sheet has relatively few artefacts or whether other artefacts might be present but are obscured by sand. Therefore, test excavation of the sand sheet was proposed.

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 180 The test excavation methodology involved the excavation of a series of test pits at two locations on the sand sheet adjacent to Sandy Hollow Creek, one in the north part of the sand sheet (Northern Excavation Area) and the other in the south (Southern Excavation Area). The Southern Excavation Area was selected adjacent to where artefacts were discovered during the surface survey (site W14). The Northern Excavation Area was selected near where site W69 was recorded in the contour drain cutting in the sand sheet and opposite site W11, where a large number of artefacts were exposed on the classic duplex soils. Both excavation areas can be seen in the Aboriginal heritage report contained in Part E of Volume 2.

At the two target areas, a series of 1 m² pits were excavated in 100 mm spits by hand and backhoe with due care to ensure stratigraphic hygiene. Test pits 1 to 4 were located in the Northern Excavation Area and pits 6 to 11 in the Southern Excavation Area. It should be noted that test pit 5 was not excavated due to the expected water content in the pit and surrounding disturbance. Therefore, a test pit (pit 11) was placed 20 m south of test pit 7, along the same alignment of pits (ie parallel to the diversion drain and adjacent to W14).

Where a backhoe was used, a flat cutting edge allowed for more precise control over the depth of deposit removed. It was proposed that the bulk of deposit in each pit would be removed by backhoe, with the remainder removed by shovel and trowel. However, the excavation was mostly undertaken by hand, using shovel and trowel. The nature of the loose sandy deposit meant that it was faster to excavate by hand and allowed for greater care and control. The size of the pits was generally 2 m long by 0.5 m wide, to allow for greater access and ease when excavating at depth. In all pits excavated by hand, the base of the pit was reached before or at 1.5 m.

In the Southern Excavation Area, in the vicinity of W14, three pits at 20 m intervals were dug adjacent to the drain cutting and parallel with the creek. Three pits at 20 m intervals were also dug in the same manner along a transect running at right angles to and up the gentle slope from the cutting. In the Northern Excavation Area, at a location opposite site W11 (approximately 400 m north of W14), a series of four pits were dug. The four pits were spaced at 20 m intervals, generally parallel with the creek, as for W14.

All deposit excavated was wet sieved through 5 mm and 3 mm nested screens. All artefacts, and any fragments suspected to be artefactual, were bagged for later analysis. At a location where the stratigraphy exposed by the excavations was deemed to be suitable, samples of sand were taken from the deposit for optically stimulated luminescence (OSL) dating at the Australian National University (ANU).

AMBS carried out the test excavation under Preliminary Research Permit #1327 issued by NPWS (dated 6 May 2002) in conjunction with Huonbrook and representatives from the UHWC, LWTC, WNAC and WLALC.

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 181 12.6 RESULTS

A summary of site descriptions and site contents for those Aboriginal archaeological sites recorded in the study area are tabulated below.

Table 12.1 Site Descriptions and Contents

Total No. Landform Zone Site Types Site Name of Sites 1. Sandy Hollow Creek 15 Artefact Scatter (14) B, W6, W7, W8, W10, W11, W14, W15, W16, W17, W18, W19, W63, W66 Isolated Find (1) W9 2. Longford Creek 11 Grinding Groove (1) PN10 Artefact Scatter (8) PN11, PN8, W25, W26, W27, W29, W31, W32 Isolated Find (2) PN7, PN9 3. Unnamed tributary to 17 Grinding Groove (1) M Wollombi Brook Artefact Scatter (9) K, PC5, PL10, PL12, PL13, W20, W21, W22, W54 Isolated Find (7) PC4, PL11, PL15 (‘X’), W43, W44, W53, W74 4. Sand Sheet 2 Artefact Scatter (1) W69 Isolated Find (1) W84 5. Saddle 4 Artefact Scatter (3) MT37, PL1, PL4 Isolated Find (1) PL3 6. Summit Ridge 5 Artefact Scatter (5) PL6, PL7, PL14, W12, W13 7. Woodlands 7 Artefact Scatter (2) W1, W42 Isolated Find (5) F1, F2, F3, W72, W73 8. Undulating Terrain 59 Artefact Scatter (26) J, PC2, PC3, PL5, PN1, PN5, PN6, W23, W28, W33, W36, W37, W38, W39, W41, W46, W51, W57, W65, W67, W76, W77, W79, W80, W82, W83 Isolated Find (33) PC1, PL2, PL8, PL9, PN2, PN3, PN4, PN12, W24, W30, W34, W35, W40, W45, W47, W48, W49, W50, W52, W55, W56, W58, W59, W60, W61, W62, W64, W68, W70, W71, W75, W78, W81, TOTAL 120 Source: AMBS 2002

There are 120 Aboriginal sites within the extension area. These include 47 previously recorded sites and 73 additional sites (artefact locations). The majority of sites are artefact scatters or isolated artefacts. Two grinding groove sites are located in the study area, PN10 on Longford Creek and Site M (in two locations) on the unnamed tributary to Wollombi Brook.

Site locations and types across the study area are shown on Figure EIS-36 in Volume 4.

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/5 SEPTEMBER 2002 182 The results fit with site prediction models. Stone artefact scatters were the predominant type of site recorded. The largest sites occur along major water courses. The nature of artefacts and raw materials were as expected. The artefacts were of locally derived raw materials. Grinding grooves occur where there are outcrops of sandstone in the creeklines.

This study was able to address two current issues:

• settlement patterns as reflected in differential use of landform units within the study area; and

• antiquity of occupation through the identification of open sites with stratified deposits.

In relation to models of forager settlement patterns, it is difficult to distinguish between or identify residential base sites as opposed to activity locations in the archaeological record in the study area. However, the results have indicated that there was extensive and varied use of the area, particularly along the creeklines, with a continuous archaeological distribution close to creeks. The sand sheet may have been a favoured camping location at which activities similar to those occurring on the opposite side of the creek (on the duplex soils) were carried out. Two grinding groove sites and a grindstone fragment, recovered during excavation, suggests a degree of permanence or less mobile occupation in this area. It is not clear where the closest stone source was situated, however, the landscape within the study area would have provided food and water resources, at least throughout the Holocene. The archaeological evidence also shows a diversity of raw materials and artefact types, indicating that occupation of this area may have involved base camps as well as carrying out specific activites such as tool manufacture and maintenance.

A total of 533 artefacts were recorded during the surface survey. The majority of artefacts were flakes or broken flakes. A variety of other artefact classes were also recorded, including cores, retouched flakes (including a number of backed artefacts), hammerstones, flaked pieces, heat shatters and a single grinding stone. Mudstone and silcrete are the dominant raw material across the study area. Up to 94 % of all artefacts were made from these materials. Other raw materials include quartz, petrified wood, igneous material, chert, porcellanite, quartzite and sandstone.

The frequency of mudstone and silcrete artefacts across the area is remarkably constant. Within Landform Zones 1, 2, 3, and 8, mudstone comprises about 70 % of recorded artefacts and silcrete about 23 %. Proportions of artefacts in other landform zones varied, but the numbers of artefacts recorded within these zones did not constitute large enough sample sizes to provide comparable data. The distance from raw material sources is effectively the same for all zones (raw material sources are within gravels associated with the Hunter River or further afield). Similar proportions of the different raw materials might therefore be an expected result. However, the frequency of

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 183 different materials might also be associated with different patterns of behaviour, or activities that occur, in different zones. For example, if camping or more long term occupation occurs along creeklines (close to water) then sites within these zones might be the location of more intensive knapping or where good quality material is present, these locations might be knapped more intensely than sites away from creeks. These differences might be reflected in the frequency of material types within the different zones. The survey results indicate that a greater variety of raw materials occur within Landform Zones associated with creeks, but that a higher frequency of raw material other than silcrete and mudstone occurs on undulating terrain. These findings are consistent with the model describing differential use of the landscape where more complex sites (ie sites with a greater variety of raw materials and artefact types) which represent extended periods of occupation, are associated with drainage lines.

The highest artefact densities were associated with drainage lines, suggesting more intensive use within these landforms. This is consistent with other survey results in the study area (Haglund 1999). The large number of sites recorded within the undulating terrain landform zone was interesting, although most of the sites recorded within this landform were isolated finds or contained less than 10 artefacts. This fits with the model that most of the artefacts observed on the surface are in association with drainage lines, Sandy Hollow Creek, Longford Creek and the unnamed tributary to Wollombi Brook, suggesting more intensive use of these areas.

There was also a high density of surface artefacts on the sand sheet adjacent to Sandy Hollow Creek. Test excavations also revealed artefacts within the sand sheet, including a small number at depth. This indicates that the sand sheet may have been a favoured location or focus of activity throughout time. In addition, the geomorphology and the bimodality of the archaeological evidence, suggests a stratified site. The results appear to have met the expectation that sand sheets may provide stratified sites and potential for containing older archaeological material (ie as opposed to the more commonly recovered assemblages from duplex soil contexts).

Test excavation of the sand sheet recovered 213 stone artefacts and heat shattered fragments from 10 pits. As with the surface results, mudstone was the predominant raw material, although at a slightly lower proportion. There was not as much variety in terms of raw materials in the overall assemblage recovered from the test excavations, although there was still a range of raw materials, consistent with raw materials for surface finds. Flakes were the predominant artefact type, making up over 80 % of the assemblage. Retouched flakes only comprised a small proportion of the artefact assemblage. There were no cores recovered in the test excavations. One grindstone fragment was found. A number of flakes provided evidence of bipolar knapping and backed artefact manufacture, indicative of Bondaian technology.

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 184 The size of artefacts in the excavated assemblage is generally very small, with almost half the assemblage being 10 mm or less. However, this is not unusual for an excavated assemblage (in an area where knapping has been carried out and artefacts have been retained in the deposit). It is important to note that there does not appear to be size sorting through the stratigraphy of the pits. Artefacts were not evenly distributed either across the site or vertically within the deposit. Most were recovered in the Southern Excavation Area, near to and associated with site W14. Most artefacts occurred in spit 3, between spits 2 and 4 and even more broadly between spits 2 and 6. This pattern may either be the result of sequential occupation on the sand sheet (and in this sense the sand sheet represents a stratified deposit) or of bioturbation and other taphonomic processes acting on artefacts that originate from a single occupation surface. However, the investigations of the stratigraphy of the site suggests that bioturbation would not have had this kind of effect. The proportions of mudstone and silcrete vary through the deposit and silcrete does not occur at all below pit 6. Sample size alone can not account for this pattern and it suggests earlier occupation surfaces where mudstone was the preferred material. Patterns of distribution also support this proposition. Silcrete occurs as a unimodal distribution whereas the distribution of mudstone is bimodal. In addition, the two larger artefacts recovered at depth are unlikely to have moved through the deposit and so are potentially older than the material in the upper spits.

It was also notable that a number of artefacts were recovered from two pits placed about 100 m away from Sandy Hollow Creek. It is generally expected that artefact densities decline more than 50 m from creeklines.

The results suggest that the sand sheet may have been one of the preferred locations for occupation or specific activities, such as knapping, including backed artefact manufacture, along with Sandy Hollow Creek and Longford Creek. The number, size and types of artefacts all indicate that activities that occurred at this site may not have been significantly different from activities on the duplex soils on the other side of Sandy Hollow Creek. The number and size of artefacts, particularly the size of flakes indicates that the sand sheet was the location of knapping. The presence of backed artefacts or flakes with faceted platforms and of a backing flake is strong evidence for the manufacture of backed artefacts having occurred. Bipolar flakes indicate that at least one other reduction strategy was employed.

Across the broader area, the known sites represent a range of activities. Artefact scatters occur across the landscape, although the larger, denser sites are mainly located on the creeklines (Sandy Hollow Creek, Longford Creek and the unnamed tributary to Wollombi Brook) as expected. Grinding groove sites include a large cluster along the unnamed tributary to Wollombi Brook and a smaller number of grooves on a sandstone boulder in Longford Creek. There is also a known ceremonial site situated nearby Wollombi Brook. Combined, this evidence of occupation reflects camping activities across the broader landscape as well as different activity areas (ie specific locations used for specific purposes). In addition, on the basis of the subsurface testing, it

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 185 appears that occupation may have occurred for some time (throughout the Holocene) and the sand sheet has the potential for retaining older, stratified deposit.

12.7 SIGNIFICANCE ASSESSMENT

The significance assessment below outlines the cultural value to the local Aboriginal communities as well as the archaeological or scientific significance of the study area.

12.7.1 Aboriginal Cultural/Social Significance

The UHWC has prepared a report on the assessment of Aboriginal cultural heritage for the proposed extension of Warkworth Mine. It indicates that UHWC is recognised by the WNAC (as Registered Native Title Claimants) to represent the Wonnarua people in all cultural heritage matters within the Wonnarua Tribal lands.

The report highlights the fact that a cultural heritage assessment undertaken by Aboriginal people is different to archaeology or scientific studies.

The UHWC identified the cultural values as being:

• Aboriginal sites, stating that “all Sites within their Traditional Homeland are of high importance and are in need of proper care and protection” and also that the archaeological evidence of “camping and tool making sites found today remind people of their forefathers, the original inhabitants of the land” (Perry 2002);

• the physical landscape, saying that “the land and water running through it are the lifeblood of their culture. The hills and plains, the forest and mountains provided people in past generations with the resources needed to survive” (Perry 2002); and

• visual connections to the land, indicating that “local Aboriginal people are attached to the land through physical, spiritual and visual connections” (Perry 2002).

The cultural heritage assessment report states that the two hill top locations (one in the north west of the study area and one at the southern end of the main ridgeline) as well as the deep sand deposits in the central part of the study area are unusual in terms of the environment.

The grinding groove sites have been identified as the most significant physical feature for cultural reasons.

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 186 It is clear that it is not only the archaeological sites but the actual physical features of the landscape that are considered in the assessment of cultural heritage values.

Given the landscape itself has been identified as being important, the impact of the development on cultural heritage is significant within the proposed mining area, however, the areas of greatest significance, including hilltops and the southern grinding groove sites have been avoided through modifications to the original mine plan.

It was also identified that the two grinding groove sites (the northern one on Longford Creek and the southern one on the unnamed tributary of Wollombi Brook) are of “major concern” (Perry 2002). The area of the extension of Warkworth Mine was modified to avoid disturbance to the site on the Wollombi Brook tributary, however the site on Longford Creek is within the proposed mine extension boundary.

It has also been identified by the UHWC that burials could potentially be contained within the sand sheet. As such, a strategy will be implemented during the mining process to involve the local Wonnarua people if potential burial remains are found (Perry 2002).

In addition, it is highlighted that there is a cumulative effect of mining on cultural heritage, as over 2,500 Aboriginal sites have been destroyed. This means that “the remaining sites are becoming rare and more valuable to the community” (Perry 2002).

Given the importance of sites and places to Aboriginal people, the UHWC has specified that it is critical to protect them (Perry 2002).

A site of particular significance was identified near the study area. This is the ceremonial site, where carved trees have been recorded, near Wollombi Brook, approximately 2 km west of the study area. It is specified that “these Initiation Grounds and the surrounding areas must be Protected from further development” (Perry 2002). Given the importance of this site to the local Aboriginal community, recommendations have been made in this report to ensure that this request be duly considered.

12.7.2 Archaeological Significance

The vast majority of sites in the study area were open artefact scatters which comprised of low numbers of artefacts, and many in already disturbed contexts. The artefacts were of locally derived raw materials and generally did not contain any attributes that make them unique or rare in the Upper Hunter Valley.

Therefore, these sites are generally of low archaeological significance. They do not have the potential to contribute appreciable additional information to that already obtained, during the survey stage and previous salvage work, to current research questions on antiquity, spatial patterning or inter site

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 187 variation. In order to address these research questions, an intact archaeological deposit, with some depth, is required. The archaeological deposit contained within the sand sheet adjacent to Sandy Hollow Creek is an exception (see below).

While much of the overall landscape of the study area remains largely intact, and therefore has the potential to contain archaeological material not found during the surface survey (either as it was not along a transect or it is covered over), there is no evidence that such contribution would substantially add to existing knowledge about such sites or about Aboriginal life in the past.

There was an overall low number of commonly identified artefacts and raw materials. Often sites were situated in disturbed contexts, such as in eroded exposures or on tracks or fire breaks (which are subject to regular grading). Other sites were located in areas where there was no or limited potential depth of deposit.

There are a number of sites with higher numbers of artefacts. These were mostly found in the Landform Zones associated with the creeklines (Sandy Hollow Creek, Longford Creek and the unnamed tributary to Wollombi Brook). The sites along Sandy Hollow Creek, while being large and to some degree still having intact deposit with some research potential, are still assessed as only having low archaeological significance at this stage, as this area has already been extensively salvaged and so much is already known about the stone artefact technology and use of this area. There is no evidence to suggest that further excavation and analysis of these stone artefacts would substantially add to existing knowledge about such sites or about Aboriginal activity in the past. The sites along Longford Creek, while most had not been identified by previous archaeological survey of the study area, conformed to what is known about Aboriginal archaeological sites along watercourses. It is a similar landform zone to Sandy Hollow Creek, just smaller, therefore, it is not surprising that the archaeological evidence is similar. There were many isolated artefacts recorded across the landscape during the surface survey, which can be generally seen as an overall background scatter of artefacts.

The grinding groove sites, PN10 on Longford Creek and Site M on the unnamed Wollombi Brook tributary, can also be seen to have some archaeological significance, given they are a relatively rare site type, although not unexpected. While such sites do not provide much research value, they can be seen to have social, educational and aesthetic values.

Sand sheets, however, may have some archaeological significance. Sand sheets are a relatively rare landscape feature. Test excavation of the sand sheet adjacent to Sandy Hollow Creek confirmed the presence of artefacts. The loss of this sand sheet through the proposed extension of mining may affect our ability to understand past occupation of this landform feature. Consequently, the sand sheet (Landform Zone 4) can be viewed as having moderate to high archaeological significance. However, it should be noted that other sand sheets have been identified adjacent to the proposed mine extension area.

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 188 12.8 IMPACT ASSESSMENT

12.8.1 Potential Impacts

Extension of the mine west of the current development consent boundary will impact on the known and potential archaeological significance of the area. There are a number of Aboriginal archaeological sites that will be directly impacted by the extension of the mine. In addition, test excavation of the sand sheet has shown that it may hold an older archaeological deposit (it appears that there are in situ artefacts in the lower A2 horizon, probably of Holocene age). There are no options for conservation of this sand sheet as it is situated well within the proposed mine extension area.

It should be noted that there are a number of significant Aboriginal sites situated outside the mine extension area. Through the course of this project, the original extension footprint was revised to avoid a number of the Aboriginal sites situated within the extension area. Management strategies will be implemented to ensure that the risk of indirect impacts of mining operations is avoided.

The sites affected by the proposed mine extension are shown on Figure EIS-36 in Volume 4. A list of these sites is also provided in Section 12.9 below. A number of landform zones will also be completely removed or partially affected by the extension of mining into this area. The landform zones of Sandy Hollow Creek (Landform Zone 1), the adjacent sand sheet (Landform Zone 4), the Woodlands area (Landform Zone 7) and the undulating terrain both to the east and west of Sandy Hollow Creek (Landform Zone 8) will be completely removed by mining. According to the proposed mine extension plan, the upper reaches of Longford Creek will also be affected. This includes the axe grinding groove site at PN10. Other landform zones partially affected include the summit ridge (Landform Zone 6) and the unnamed tributary to Wollombi Brook (Landform Zone 3). The mine plan shows that the southern grinding grooves (Site M) are outside the impact area.

The impact on Aboriginal cultural significance has been described as being significant. This impact is described in the Cultural Heritage Assessment Report contained in Appendix A of the Aboriginal heritage report contained in Volume 2.

The two grinding groove sites (the northern one on Longford Creek and the southern one on the unnamed tributary of Wollombi Brook) are of “major concern” to the UHWC (Perry 2002). While the site on the Wollombi Brook tributary will be retained, the site on Longford Creek is located within the proposed mine extension boundary.

The impact to the sand sheet was also of concern, given the UHWC identified the potential for burials to be contained within it. CNA is in full support of the development of a strategy to “involve the WTC should any potential burial remains be found as part of the mining process” (Perry 2002).

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 189 In addition, the cumulative effect of mining on cultural heritage was identified by the UHWC. This means that “the remaining sites are becoming rare and more valuable to the community” (Perry 2002).

12.9 SECTION 90 CONSENT REQUIRED

Sites that will be impacted by the proposed mine extension will require consent under Section 90 of the NPW Act. These sites and the landform zone in which they occur are presented within Table 19 of the Aboriginal heritage study contained in Volume 2.

12.10 RECOMMENDATIONS

On the basis of the archaeological survey and test excavation of the extension area, it is recommended that:

• No further archaeological investigation is required for the assessment for the proposed extension.

• The proposed extension results in a loss of the sand sheet adjacent to Sandy Hollow Creek. A salvage excavation could be carried out as a condition of development consent. Salvage could be targeted in the southern part of the sand sheet where most of the artefacts were recovered during the test excavations, including the artefacts at depth. The aim of the salvage would be to increase the sample size of the artefacts recovered from the sand sheet by excavating a single pit in area of approximately 4 m2 to a depth of approximately 1.5 m.

• It should be noted that the above may not be warranted if similar areas of sand sheet are preserved adjacent to this site as part of the proposed Green Offsets Strategy.

• The northern grinding groove site at PN10 on Longford Creek, will be discussed with the local Aboriginal community to determine an appropriate outcome, given there is no potential for these to be retained in situ. The possibility of the boulder on which they occur being removed (salvaged) and displayed within a local cultural centre has been raised.

• Sites that are outside the proposed impact area will be managed to ensure they are not inadvertently damaged or destroyed. Access to these areas will be maintained to interested Aboriginal community groups. Measures may include fencing of sites or whole areas to restrict access to these areas, cultural heritage awareness training to relevant CNA staff, establishing a management plan for internal use by CNA and regular inspection of these areas to monitor site condition. Ground disturbance should be avoided in areas potentially retaining buried Aboriginal material.

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 190 In addition to the above the UHWC, as the representing Aboriginal body, have stated that they would not oppose any application for consent to destroy Aboriginal heritage sites within the Warkworth extension area if WML agrees to the following:

• That the UHWC be funded to carry out an historical video of the entire lease area prior to mining to add to the UHWC’s historical library. It is their intention that this video is produced by UHWC personnel.

• That an Aboriginal collection and salvage program be drawn up by the UHWC for all the affected Aboriginal sites recorded inside the extension area.

• That representatives of the UHWC be employed to develop a strategy to be incorporated within a Archaeological and Cultural Heritage EMP for possible identification of Aboriginal remains, during the topsoil stripping process. Should remains be found, the UHWC, LWTC, WLALC and NPWS must be immediately contacted prior to any further work proceeding.

• That representatives of the UHWC be employed to assist in the removal of the northern axe grinding grooves that are to be affected by this development.

• It is the opinion of the UHWC that once the axe grinding grooves have been removed then they should be either placed close to the larger set of southern axe grinding grooves or placed in a cultural heritage centre.

• That relics recovered by UHWC are to be cleaned and catalogued by the UHWC representatives and that a report, developed by the UHWC, detailing this activity is to be supplied to CNA and NPWS once finished. Care and control of all the Aboriginal relics, salvaged by UHWC, will be applied for by the UHWC. All expenses are to be paid for by CNA.

• That the UHWC be able to fence off the ceremonial site at CNA’s expense.

12.11 CONCLUSION

The Aboriginal heritage study identified Aboriginal archaeological sites located within the study area and assesses the likely impacts of the proposed mine extension on these sites.

There are a number of Aboriginal archaeological sites that will be directly impacted by the extension of the mine. A number of landform zones will also be either partially or completely removed by the proposed extension.

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 191 The majority of sites were considered of low conservation significance, consisting of open artefact scatters, comprising low numbers of artefacts, many of which are already in disturbed contexts. The artefacts were of locally derived raw materials and generally did not contain any attributes that make them unique or rare in the Upper Hunter Valley.

However, the overall impact on Aboriginal cultural significance was considered to be substantial. There were also a small number of sites that were considered to be of moderate to high conservation significance and of particular concern to the local Aboriginal community, including two grinding groove sites and sand sheet adjacent to Sandy Hollow Creek.

The original proposed mine plan, has been altered to avoid a number of the significant Aboriginal sites located within the study area. Sites that are outside the proposed impact area will be appropriately managed to ensure they are not inadvertently damaged or destroyed.

The northern grinding groove site is located within the proposed extension area on Longford Creek and can be seen to have some archaeological significance, given they are a relatively rare site type. The site will be discussed with the local Aboriginal community to determine an appropriate outcome, given there is no potential for these to be retained in situ. The possibility of the boulder on which they occur being removed (salvaged) and displayed within a local cultural centre has been raised.

The impact to the sand sheet was also of concern, given the UHWC identified the potential for burials to be contained within it. In addition, test excavation of the sand sheet has shown that it may hold an older archaeological deposit (it appears that there are in situ artefacts in the lower A2 horizon, probably of Holocene age). There are no options for conservation of this sand sheet as it is situated well within the proposed mine extension area.

A salvage excavation of the sand sheet could be carried out as a condition of development consent. The salvage excavation could be targeted in the southern part of the sand sheet where most of the artefacts were recovered during the test excavations. The aim of the salvage would be to increase the sample size of artefacts recovered from the sand sheet. An appropriate methodology would be developed in consultation with NPWS. However, it should be noted that a salvage excavation may not be warranted if similar areas of sand sheets are preserved as part of the Green Offsets Strategy.

The UHWC, as the representing Aboriginal body have stated that they would not oppose any application for consent to destroy Aboriginal heritage sites within the Warkworth Mine extension area. This is however contingent upon a number of conditions relating to the management of sites within the study area including the involvement of the local Aboriginal community in the preparation of an Archaeological and Cultural Heritage EMP.

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 192 Extension of Warkworth Coal Mine environmental impact statement

CHAPTER 13

Visual 13 VISUAL ASSESSMENT

13.1 INTRODUCTION

This chapter provides an assessment of the likely visual impacts associated with the proposed extension of Warkworth Mine. The aim of the assessment was to determine visual impacts in both the local and regional setting and was based on an analysis of the following factors:

• visual absorption capacity – a factor of site visibility and the degree of contrast between the proposal and the local and regional visual landscape;

• visual sensitivity – a measure of the level of concern attached by a user group to a change in the landscape character. Visual sensitivity is based on the number of people affected, land use and distance of the viewer from the proposal; and

• the nature and extent of rehabilitation and landscape mitigation measures.

13.2 STUDY METHODOLOGY

The tasks involved in undertaking the assessment are summarised below:

• a review of the regional and local landscape settings;

• identification and description of significant viewer locations that represent the range of possible significant views of the proposal;

• an assessment of the visibility of the proposal from each viewer location. Visual simulations were used to assist in determining the visibility of the mine over the 18 year mine plan;

• determination of the absorption capacity of the proposal, based on visibility from each viewer location in the context of the local and regional setting;

• assessment of the visual sensitivity from each viewer location;

• determination of the likely visual impacts of the proposal, based upon an analysis of the visual absorption capacity and visual sensitivity of each viewer location; and

• a review of the timing of the proposal including proposed rehabilitation activities and feasible mitigative measures to minimise potential visual impacts.

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 193 13.3 EXISTING VISUAL CHARACTER

13.3.1 Regional Context

Warkworth Mine is located in the Upper Hunter Valley, a region characterised by a range of landscapes from steep sloping peaks along the escarpment boundary, to slightly undulating hills and the river flats on the floodplain.

The Upper Hunter was traditionally dominated by a mixed grazing and cropping landscape, with dairy farms clustered along the Hunter River floodplain. Wollemi National Park and Barrington Tops National Park form significant mountain backdrops to the south west and north east of the site, helping to create a relaxed rural landscape character in the semi enclosed valley.

The visual environment of the Upper Hunter has been significantly altered over the last 30 years following the onset of coal mining. The region now has the highest proportion of coal mining in NSW, 90 % of which is open cut. The visual environment is dominated by a combination of mining and supporting industrial infrastructure, together with the traditional agricultural enterprises spread throughout the region.

13.3.2 Local Setting

The locality immediately surrounding Warkworth Mine is dominated by coal mines and associated industry as shown in Figure EIS-2 in Volume 4. Hunter Valley Operations and Wambo Mines are located to the north and north west of the extension area and Mount Thorley Operations and Bulga Mines are located to the south. The mines and their associated infrastructure are a locally dominant feature in the landscape and are visible from a range of viewer locations including roads, residential and rural properties and nearby industrial areas.

The Mount Thorley Industrial Estate is to the east and to the west lie a number of rural and rural residential properties. The villages of Bulga and Warkworth are located to the south west and north west of the site respectively. Wollemi National Park and the escarpment dominate the visual setting to the west of Warkworth Mine.

The landscape character of the area is dominated by moderate to gentle undulating slopes, with several locally dominant smaller ridges. The highest point in the Mining Lease occurs at 165 m AHD on the southern part of Saddleback Ridge, which forms the main north-trending ridge extending through the middle of the lease. The ridge slopes northwards towards the junction of Sandy Hollow and Dights creeks, where prior to mining, it was only 70 m AHD. The ridge is now intersected by current mining operations in the West Pit.

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 194 A lower ridge extends in a north westerly direction, parallel to Wallaby Scrub Road, separating the catchments of the Hunter River and Wollombi Brook. The ridge reaches its high point of 142 m AHD at Watts Peak, near the north western corner of the Mining Lease. From these ridges the land slopes down to undulating and gently undulating land and then to the alluvial flats of the Hunter River and Wollombi Brook, which lie at elevations of approximately 40 to 50 m AHD and 60 m AHD, respectively.

The site has been extensively disturbed in the past, with clearing most extensive within the central and southern parts, where scattered remnants of predominantly regrowth woodland remain.

The quality of vegetation within the mine site varies from cleared and heavily grazed pasture to disturbed open forest. The woodland and open forest on the site appears to be predominantly regrowth, having been logged and cleared for agricultural purposes over the last 50 years. Roads, powerline easements, two dwellings and dirt tracks also run across the landscape creating a mosaic of vegetation and cleared areas.

13.4 SITE VISIBILITY

13.4.1 Overview

The visibility of Warkworth Mine is dependent upon the surrounding topography and the elevation of the viewer location. Three viewer categories were selected to provide a representation of potential views from within the visual catchment. The viewer categories include:

• western viewer locations;

• eastern and northern viewer locations; and

• road users.

Representative viewer locations from within each category were selected to determine the range and extent of visibility of both the existing operations and the proposed extension area. The viewer locations were selected through the analysis of topographic data and verified by field inspections. Simulations of the viewshed for each location were developed using a 3D digital terrain computer model and mine plans. The model simulates the extent of the viewshed from any given point on the landscape, based on a viewer height of 1.7 m (or average eye level) and the surrounding topography.

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 195 A conservative approach was adopted for the study to determine the extent of potential views of the extension area. The visual effect of foreground and background vegetation in screening the extension area was not accounted for in the model and the viewer locations with the greatest potential for significant views (ie elevated terrain) were selected for assessment.

Viewer locations are indicated in Figure EIS-37 in Volume 4 and described below.

13.4.2 Western Viewer Locations

Bulga Village

Existing Visibility

Bulga Village is located on the floodplain on the western side of Wollombi Brook. Viewer Location 1 was selected at Bulga Shop to represent views from the village (refer Figure EIS-38 in Volume 4). The majority of the village is shielded from views of Warkworth Mine by a combination of Saddleback Ridge (130 to 165 m AHD) and a secondary spur running parallel to Wallaby Scrub Road (100 to 142 m AHD) as shown in Figure EIS-38 in Volume 4, taken from the cemetery behind Bulga Hall. Riparian vegetation lining the banks of Wollombi Brook and vegetation located on either side of Wallaby Scrub Road provide further visual shielding. Mount Thorley Operations and Bulga Mine, located east and south east of the village, dominate the visual landscape, due to the relatively flat topography and lack of screening vegetation.

Scattered residences located on The Putty Road between the bridge at Bulga and Wallaby Scrub Road are situated at low elevations and are shielded from views of Warkworth Mine by local topography and foreground vegetation.

Wambo Road extends roughly parallel to Wollombi Brook to the north of the village centre, towards Wambo Mine. A number of rural residential properties are located along either side of Wambo Road. The majority of properties are located along the lower level floodplain at elevations less than 80 m AHD and are shielded from views of the mine by riparian vegetation along the brook and the raised spur running adjacent to Wallaby Scrub Road (refer Figure EIS-39 in Volume 4). Two residences are set back from Wambo Road and are positioned at similar elevations to the lower levels of the shielding spur at elevations of approximately 90 and 100 m AHD as represented by Viewer Location 2. The two properties maintain existing views to the extension area as shown on Figure EIS-39 in Volume 4.

Inlet Road rises in a westerly direction from The Putty Road towards the escarpment and Wollemi National Park. The potential for uninterrupted views of the mine site generally increases with elevation, however Saddleback Ridge and a number of small spurs located on either side of Wollombi Brook preclude views from the majority of locations. The exception occurs for residents located on elevated terrain at ‘The Inlet’, and isolated elevated

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 196 properties on the southern side of Inlet Road, which experience distant views over a central low point in the spur to operations in the North Pit. Viewer Location 3 represents potential views from The Inlet are represented by Figure EIS-40 in Volume 4.

Alterations to Views

Saddleback Ridge will continue to provide considerable visual screening to the majority of Bulga throughout the mine extension. The upper reaches of the overburden emplacement areas will become increasingly visible for a number of receivers. The potential for uninterrupted views of the site increases with elevation with properties located at Viewer Locations 2 and 3 being the most affected by the proposal.

Active mining areas will be shielded from view by the existing topography as the mine proceeds down dip to the west. The major coal seams become increasingly deep throughout the mine plan with active operations occurring up to 300 m below the ground surface. The angle of view will preclude views to active operations from the affected properties, which are located at similar elevations between 4.5 and 7 km from the edge of the disturbance boundary. Maintenance of roadside vegetation along Wallaby Scrub Road will assist in shielding the site from view.

Visible terrain located on either side of Wallaby Scrub Road is situated adjacent to the western most extension of the mine plan, above active operations. This area will predominantly be used for access to the pre-strip benches below and will be predominantly shielded from view by roadside vegetation.

The western face of the overburden emplacements and overburden heaps adjacent to the North Pit haul road will become visible from approximately Year 10 as mining proceeds through the main ridgeline. The spoil emplacements will appear as a thin band on the edge of the horizon with bare spoil contrasting the existing rural skyline.

A perspective view of the change in landscape profile through various stages of the mine plan for Location 2 is presented in Figure EIS-41 in Volume 4. This location is considered to represent the worst case scenario from viewer locations to the west of the site, due to the elevation and distance to disturbance. The highest point on the ridgeline is maintained throughout the proposed extension. The upper faces of the emplacement areas, which will be more than 5 km away, will be able to be viewed in the later years of the mine extension.

While the overburden emplacements will become increasingly visible, the extension will be visually consistent with existing operations at Warkworth and neighbouring mines. Careful mine planning will ensure the intrusiveness of the development is minimised and the proposal is sympathetic to significant viewer locations.

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 197 Warkworth Village

Existing Visibility

Warkworth Village is located north west of Warkworth Mine, adjacent to Wollombi Brook. The village is located at elevations between 50 and 60 m AHD and is predominantly shielded from views of Warkworth Mine and the extension area by elevated terrain including Watts Peak at 142 m AHD (refer Figure EIS-42 in Volume 4). Hunter Valley Operations is visible to the north of Warkworth Village.

Alterations to Views

Warkworth Village will continue to be shielded from views of the extension areas by the existing topography. Figure EIS-42 in Volume 4 displays modelling of the viewshed from Viewer Location 4 located at Warkworth Hall, indicating a thin band of overburden emplacement area may become visible by Year 18 in the mine extension. Maintenance of vegetation cover within the Mining Lease around Watts Peak will preclude active views of the mine.

Wollemi National Park

Existing Views

Wollemi National Park extends to the edge of the escarpment located to the west of Warkworth Mine. The park is the second largest national park in NSW, covering an area of approximately 488,620 ha of rugged dissected plateau. It is contiguous with other major conservation areas including the Blue Mountains National Park located west and north west of Sydney.

Middle distance views to Warkworth Mine are available from a variety of locations along the edge of the escarpment. The Warkworth Mine extension area will proceed to approximately 5 km from the nearest edge of the national park and be separated by combination of cleared pasture and disturbed forest and woodland communities on freehold land. Viewer Locations 2 and 3 are located at residential properties in Bulga situated immediately adjacent to the edge of the national park and can be considered representative of potential views from the area.

The majority of the park is shielded from views of the mine through a combination of local terrain and foreground vegetation associated with the dense forest and woodland landscape. Long distance views are expected from elevated terrain in the vicinity of the mine. For example, Mount Wambo rises considerably above Warkworth Mine to an elevation of 648 m AHD and is located approximately 10 km west of the nearest disturbance boundary. Similar views are experienced to a number of the surrounding mines in the district, which also border the northern tip of the national park.

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 198 Alterations to Views

Similarly to properties in Bulga, the western face of the overburden emplacements and overburden heaps adjacent to the north pit haul road will become visible from approximately Year 10 as mining proceeds through the main ridgeline within the Mining Lease. The spoil emplacements will appear as a thin band on the edge of the horizon with bare spoil contrasting the existing rural skyline.

13.4.3 Eastern and Northern Viewer Locations

North Eastern Sector Properties

Existing Visibility

Rural residential properties located in Gouldsville, Long Point Road and Hambledon Hill to the north east, experience existing middle to long distance views of the Warkworth Mine (refer Figure EIS-43 in Volume 4). Viewer Location 5 is located on elevated terrain on the eastern side of the Hunter River at Hambledon Hill, representing the maximum extent of potential views from this sector as shown on Figure EIS-43 in Volume 4.

The outer slopes of the overburden emplacements adjacent to Jerry’s Plains Road, were constructed during the existing operations at Warkworth Mine, providing considerable visual shielding to active mining and emplacement operations. The overburden emplacements are landscaped to match the former landscape and vegetated with mixed pasture and scattered woodland. The rehabilitated areas now dominate the visual landscape and provide significant visual shielding to active mining and emplacement areas on site.

Alterations to Views

Residential properties will maintain middle distance views of active mining operations in the Woodlands and South Pit in the early years of the mine plan. Completion of mining operations in South Pit by Year 7 of the mine plan, will enable the accelerated rehabilitation of the eastern half of the Mining Lease. The rehabilitated areas will increasingly shield active mining areas from view.

Visual impacts will initially be associated with shaping of the spoil to match the surrounding landscape contours. The outer slopes of the emplacement areas are constructed initially to provide visual screening for the remainder of the emplacement activities. The rehabilitated landscape will provide an additional visual buffer between the mine and receivers to the north and east of the site.

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 199 Figure EIS-44 in Volume 4 demonstrates a perspective view of Warkworth Mine from Viewer Location 5 at Hambledon Hill during various stages in the mine plan. Active mining areas are progressively shielded from view and the level of contrast of the mine with the surrounding rural landscape will diminish as rehabilitation progresses over the eastern half of the mine.

Mount Thorley

Existing Visibility

Scattered rural residential properties are located on The Putty Road east of Warkworth Mine towards Singleton. The majority of properties are shielded from views of the mine by localised ridges and raised spurs. However, isolated properties as represented by Viewer Location 6, have existing views towards the rehabilitation areas adjacent to Jerry’s Plains Road and active mining areas in the North and West Pits (refer Figure EIS-45 in Volume 4).

Alterations to Views

The visual effect for properties at Mount Thorley will be similar to that for properties in the north eastern sector. Active mining areas will be increasingly shielded by overburden emplacements with the accelerated rehabilitation of the eastern half of the mine.

Mount Thorley Industrial Estate

Existing Visibility

Premises within Mount Thorley Industrial Estate receive isolated views of Warkworth Mine as represented by Viewer Location 7 (Figure EIS-46 in Volume 4). The majority of the area is shielded from views of the mine by surrounding industrial premises, local topography and foreground vegetation as shown in Figure EIS-46 in Volume 4.

Alterations to Views

The proposal will not alter the existing views of the site.

13.4.4 Road Users

Jerry’s Plains Road

Existing Visibility

Jerry’s Plains Road (also known as the Golden Highway) runs to the east and north of Warkworth Mine. The road borders substantial rehabilitation areas, consisting of mixed pasture on landscaped overburden dumps, shielding active mining operations from the view of passing traffic. Viewer Location 8

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 200 is situated on Jerry’s Plains Road midway between The Putty Road and Gouldsville Road (refer Figure EIS-47 in Volume 4). The coal handling and CPP at Warkworth Mine are visible from this section of Jerry’s Plains Road (refer Figure EIS-47 in Volume 4).

Alteration to Views

Additional spoil emplacement will be visible throughout the mine plan as rehabilitation is progressed over the eastern half of the site.

Wallaby Scrub Road

Existing Visibility

Wallaby Scrub Road forms the western boundary of the proposed mine extension. A series of ridges and spurs together with roadside vegetation currently shield mining operations from the view of motorists travelling along the road (refer Figure EIS-48 in Volume 4). Viewer Location 9 represents the potential views mid way along Wallaby Scrub Road as shown on Figure EIS-48 in Volume 4.

Alteration to Views

Mining operations are not expected to be visible from Wallaby Scrub Road for the majority of the mine plan. Roadside vegetation and an elevated spur running parallel to the road will generally preclude views of Warkworth Mine. Active operations are located up to 300 m below the surface of the ground, with a small roadside buffer maintained for the length of the road. The angle of view will prevent views of the emplacement areas.

The Putty Road

Existing Visibility

The Putty Road runs immediately between Warkworth Mine and Mount Thorley Operations. The mine sites are the dominant feature of the landscape and are highly visible for vehicles travelling in either direction for the approximate 7 km stretch of road between Mount Thorley and Wallaby Scrub Road (refer Figure EIS-49 in Volume 4). Overburden dumps and dragline operations rise considerably above the road level for the majority of the impacted section as represented by Viewer Location 10.

Alteration to Views

The mine plan involves accelerating the rehabilitation of areas immediately adjacent to The Putty Road, which will assist in shielding road users from active mining areas. Mining operations will become less prominent to road

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 201 users as rehabilitation proceeds, reducing the level of contrast with other areas of the road network as shown on Figure EIS-49 in Volume 4.

The proposed bridges to be constructed over The Putty Road and the by-pass road proposed to be constructed adjacent to The Putty Road will also become visible to motorists on The Putty Road at different stages of the mine plan. The eastern bridge and the by-pass road will be constructed in the first year of the mine plan, while the western bridge will be constructed in approximately Year 10.

New England Highway

Existing Visibility

The New England Highway is a major highway servicing northern and north western New South Wales. The highway runs through Singleton approximately 12 km to the east and north east of Warkworth Mine. The majority of the highway is shielded from views of the mine by a series of raised ridges and spurs located between the road and the mine site. Motorists travelling along the New England Highway receive long distance views of Warkworth Mine from isolated sections of the highway near Singleton Airport to the south of Singleton. The eastern overburden emplacements and the central haul road can be seen across the low topography associated with the Hunter River floodplain. Warkworth Mine is not a dominant feature in the viewshed due to the limited visibility, the distance from the highway and the speed at which vehicles travel on the road.

Alterations to Views

Additional spoil emplacement will become increasingly visible throughout the mine extension as rehabilitation is progressed over the eastern half of the site.

13.4.5 Site Lighting

The 24 hour operation of the mine involves the installation of additional flood lighting to the extension area for operational and safety requirements. Warkworth Mine will therefore be visible at night and form an extension to the existing bank of lights from the adjoining mines.

The types of lighting to be used include on-board machinery lights and lighting plants. On board machinery lights will be attached to equipment such as draglines, excavators, shovels, drills and haul trucks. Lighting plants will be used in active mining and emplacement areas. The mine industrial and administration areas will also require both internal and external lighting.

Active mining areas are shielded from the view from the majority of receivers and lighting structures will not be directly visible. Lighting of active emplacement areas will be visible at various stages of the mine plan. Lighting

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 202 of emplacement operations will be directed away from incoming views and generally be seen as a low distant glow. All lighting above natural topographic screens will be directed downwards and light shields will be used where required to further limit the effect of lighting. Additional site lighting is not expected to add significantly to the effects of illumination on surrounding areas.

13.5 VISUAL ABSORPTION CAPACITY

13.5.1 Overview

The visual absorption capacity of the development can be expressed as the level of visual contrast (ie form, shape, pattern, line, texture and colour) of the proposed development to the visual setting within which it is placed.

A high visual absorption capacity will occur if there is minimal contrast and a high level of integration between the proposal and the existing landscape setting. Conversely, a low visual absorption capacity will occur when the proposal has a high visual contrast to the surrounding landscape and there is little or no visual screening, resulting in a more extensive visual impact.

Open cut coal mining is a visually intrusive process and results in a high degree of visual contrast with the surrounding landscape. However, the proposal involves the extension of a brown field site, meaning that it is an extension to existing operations, within the Warkworth Mining Lease.

The locality surrounding Warkworth Mine is dominated by coal mines and associated industry. An assessment of the absorption capacity of the development must therefore be undertaken with consideration to the local landscape context, incorporating both coal mines and the surrounding agricultural and rural setting.

13.5.2 Western Viewer Locations

Warkworth Mine will become increasingly visible to a number of receivers located west of the extension area, but will not be adding a new landscape feature to the visual catchment. Active spoil emplacements will be visible as a thin strip on the edge of the horizon by Year 18 in the mine plan for viewer locations located west of the site. The overburden emplacements will provide a distinct contrast to the existing rural landscape profile, however the extension will be visually consistent with existing mining operations at Warkworth Mine and neighbouring mines. Site lighting at night will form an extension to the existing bank of lights from the adjoining mines.

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 203 13.5.3 Eastern and Northern Viewer Locations

Viewer locations to the east of the site have existing views of operations at Warkworth Mine. Active mining areas are progressively shielded from view throughout the mine extension. The level of contrast of the mine with the surrounding rural landscape will diminish as rehabilitation progresses over the eastern half of the mine. The absorption capacity will increase as overburden emplacements are progressively shaped and revegetated to match the existing landscape character of the region. The emplacements will provide an additional visual buffer between the mine and receivers to the north and east of the site allowing the development to appear to merge or be visually absorbed with the surrounding landscape.

13.5.4 Road Users

The Putty Road and Jerry’s Plains Road will continue to run immediately adjacent to Warkworth Mine and surrounding mines and form a distinct contrast to rural vistas on the surrounding road network. However the proposed extension is visually consistent with the existing operations at Warkworth Mine and the surrounding mines.

The rehabilitation plan involves accelerating the rehabilitation of areas immediately adjacent to The Putty Road, slightly reducing the level of contrast to the rural setting.

The proposed bridges and by-pass road are consistent with the visual experience of main roads, particularly roads surrounding mines. In addition, the location of the bridges and by-pass road will not interrupt any significant views for motorists.

13.6 VISUAL SENSITIVITY

Visual sensitivity is a measure of the level of concern attached by surrounding land users to a change in the existing landscape. It is based largely upon visibility and distance from critical viewing areas, but is also influenced by land use, the current degree of exposure to the style of development proposed and the length of viewing time.

Generally the sensitivity of a user group will increase the closer they are to a critical change in landscape character. Similarly the greater the viewing time or period of exposure the more critical the user group will be to the change. The existing land use is also critical in determining the visual sensitivity of each key viewer location. Residential or recreational land uses generally have higher sensitivity to a change in landscape character than for example an industrial land use, as they place a greater emphasis on scenic qualities and visual amenity.

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 204 13.6.1 Western Viewer Locations

Residential properties located west of Warkworth Mine are expected to have the highest visual sensitivity to the proposal as mining operations will become increasingly visible and closer as the mine plan progresses through the extension area.

The village of Bulga comprises a variety of residential and rural residential properties. Proximity to the escarpment within Wollemi National Park adds to the village’s scenic qualities and relaxed rural character. Residents place a high importance on visual amenity and are correspondingly sensitive to any changes to the landscape character.

Residential properties located on elevated terrain, set back from Wambo Road are expected to have the greatest visual sensitivity towards the development. The affected properties that are located approximately 4.5 km from the nearest disturbance boundary, have middle distance views to the extension area. While the properties are orientated in an easterly direction with existing views towards Mount Thorley Operations, changes in landscape character will be viewed highly sensitively. The increased distance from the site for properties located at The Inlet, is likely to be associated with correspondingly lower visual sensitivity towards the development.

Warkworth Village is shielded from views of the mine by natural topography that will be retained throughout the mine extension. Residents experience existing views of surrounding mines and are expected to have low visual sensitivity to the development.

Middle to long distance views of Warkworth Mine will be experienced from a variety of locations within Wollemi National Park. Important values of the park include the wilderness values associated with the wild and rugged scenery and for the conservation of evolutionary and ecological processes. The mine is not visible from any of the major recreational areas in the park, which are located to the south in the Colo area and to the west around Dunns Swamp, Newnes and the Glow Worm Tunnel. Access to sections of the park with potential views to Warkworth Mine is primarily for the opportunities of solitude and experience of wilderness values. Whilst only a small number of people will be affected, their visual sensitivity is expected to be relatively high.

13.6.2 Eastern and Northern Viewer Locations

Rural residential properties located to the east and north east of Warkworth Mine, experience existing middle to long distant views of operations. Residents are expected to have moderate visual sensitivity to the development as a result of their existing visual exposure to the mine site and the predominance of working properties in the region.

The visual sensitivity of leaseholders within the Mount Thorley Industrial Estate is expected to be low due to the low visibility of the mine site and the

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 205 similar nature of their operations. A number of the adjoining industries service the mines and are reliant upon the mining industries continual operations, further reducing the sensitivity to development.

13.6.3 Road Users

Warkworth Mine is highly visible from a number of viewer locations on the local road network. Visual sensitivity of motorists in the vicinity of the mine is largely determined by the land uses the road network is servicing.

The Putty Road forms the major access route to the local mining industry from the major urban centres located to the east of Warkworth Mine. However, The Putty Road also services rural and residential areas between Milbrodale and Bulga. This section of The Putty Road runs past a number of vineyards and guesthouses, with motorists experiencing expansive views of the surrounding escarpment. The visual sensitivity of the extension and the bridges and by- pass road to visitors or tourists to the area is expected to be greater than local residents and road users associated with the operation of the mine.

The length of viewing time also has a major influence on visual sensitivity. The local road network generally operates with speed limits of 100 km/hr, limiting the viewer time of road users. However, the extent of mining and visual prominence of the operations, results in considerable views from roads in the immediate vicinity of the mine. Motorists on more distant roads including the New England Highway are not expected to be sensitive to the development due to the distance from the mine site and the limited viewer time.

13.7 MINE PLANNING AND MITIGATION

Careful mine planning will minimise the intrusiveness of the development by ensuring the highest potential visual absorption capacity is maintained throughout the mine plan.

The southern portion of Saddleback ridge, located towards the south of the Mining Lease, is retained throughout the 18 year mine plan. Saddleback ridge is the highest point on the landscape and will provide considerable visual shielding for the village of Bulga. Similarly, the high point to the north of the Mining Lease featuring Watts Peak will be maintained under the mine plan. Watts Peak provides visual screening for the village of Warkworth and scattered residents located along Jerry’s Plains Road.

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 206 Overburden emplacement areas are designed to provide visual shielding to active mining operations. The outer slopes of the emplacement areas are constructed initially, resulting in short term visual impacts associated with movement of machinery associated with emplacement and shaping activities. The outer slopes will be revegetated with pasture and native tree species as soon as possible following construction to provide continued visual shielding of active mining and emplacement activities for the life of the mine.

The rehabilitation schedule is designed to ensure the maximum possible disturbed area is rehabilitated at any one time, increasing the absorption capacity of the development. The mine plan involves returning to the South Pit, which had previously not been mined due to the lower quality of the coal resource in the area. Completion of mining operations in South Pit by Year 7 of the mine plan, will enable the accelerated rehabilitation of the eastern half of the lease area and allow future rehabilitation to progress linearly to the west following the progression of the mine.

Rehabilitation of the areas immediately adjacent to The Putty Road was also seen as a key issue during community consultation in terms of both visual amenity and road safety issues associated with driver distractions. Following consultation, accelerated rehabilitation of the South and Woodlands Pits, adjacent to The Putty Road, has been incorporated into the rehabilitation plan.

It is recognised that mine planning and on-site mitigation measures will not eliminate the visual intrusiveness associated with the extension of Warkworth Mine from the worst affected properties. Warkworth Mine will become increasingly visible to residential properties located at raised elevations to the west of the site, as the mine plan proceeds through the main north south spur around Year 10 of the mine plan. The worst affected properties are located in excess of 4 km from the proposed disturbance boundary. Individual property owners will be contacted to discuss the option of off site treatments such as landscaping works, to minimise the visual impacts from affected properties.

13.8 SUMMARY OF IMPACTS

Warkworth Mine will become increasingly visible to a number of receivers throughout the 18 year mine plan. However, the proposal forms an extension of existing operations at Warkworth Mine and will be visually integrated with surrounding mining operations throughout the locality.

The design of the mine plan will provide significant screening of mining operations, creating integration with the existing landscape character and ensuring the proposal is sympathetic to significant viewer locations.

The coal resource becomes increasingly deep to the west, with active mining operations occurring up to 300 m below the existing ground level, allowing the existing landscape features and overburden emplacements to provide visual screening for surrounding areas.

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 207 Similarly, night lighting is not expected to create significant impacts due to the visual shielding of active mining areas. Lighting will be restricted to the minimum necessary for operational and safety requirements and be directed away from incoming views. All lighting above natural topographic screens will be directed downwards and light shields will be used to limit the effect of lighting where required.

Elevated properties in Bulga will be most affected by the change in landscape character and are likely to have the greatest sensitivity towards the development. These properties will be offered the opportunity for landscaping works to minimise the visual intrusiveness of the development. Active truck, shovel and dragline operations will be predominantly shielded from view as mining proceeds down dip to the west. Exposed spoil on the active overburden emplacements will be visible in the latter years of the extension, creating a stark contrast to the existing predominantly vegetated horizon. Maintenance of forested areas within the mine buffer zone, particularly roadside vegetation along Wallaby Scrub Road will minimise the visibility of the proposal.

Properties located east and north of the site will be increasingly shielded from views of active mine operations as rehabilitation progresses over the eastern half of the site. The outer slopes of the overburden emplacements will be revegetated as soon as possible after construction to reduce the visual contrast with the surrounding landscape. Accelerated rehabilitation along The Putty Road will also minimise the visibility of active mining areas from the surrounding road network.

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 208 Extension of Warkworth Coal Mine environmental impact statement

CHAPTER 14

Transport 14 TRANSPORT AND TRAFFIC

14.1 EXISTING PUBLIC ROAD NETWORK

14.1.1 Road Network

Warkworth Mine is located in the Upper Hunter Valley approximately 12 km south west of Singleton. Wallaby Scrub Road and The Putty Road run to the west and south of the site respectively and Jerry’s Plains Road runs along the eastern and northern boundaries of the site. The public road network surrounding the mine is shown on Figure EIS-50 in Volume 4 and described below.

The Putty Road

The Putty Road is a major trunk road extending from Windsor in Sydney’s north western suburbs to the Upper Hunter Valley. The Putty Road is predominantly used within local traffic networks and as an alternative scenic route to the Hunter Valley, with the majority of traffic now accessing the Hunter from the Pacific Highway and F3 freeway. The Putty Road is generally of a high standard (100 km/hr) and is a RTA controlled road. Generally the shoulder measures 1 m and the road operates two lanes.

To the south of Warkworth Mine, The Putty Road proceeds through rural and residential areas between Milbrodale and Bulga. This section of The Putty Road runs past a number of vineyards and guesthouses, with motorists experiencing expansive views of the surrounding escarpment. Traffic volumes are generally lower in this area (refer section 14.1.2) and are predominantly associated with rural, residential and tourist activities.

The Putty Road crosses Wollombi Brook at Bulga and proceeds in an easterly direction between Warkworth Mine and Mount Thorley Operations. For approximately 2 km east of Warkworth Mine, The Putty Road shares its title with the Golden Highway, which links the New England Highway to Dubbo. From its intersection with the Golden Highway, The Putty Road extends in a northerly direction to Singleton. Traffic using this section of The Putty Road is largely associated with the operation of the mines and the adjoining industrial areas with a correspondingly high proportion of heavy vehicles.

Access to Warkworth is gained from The Putty Road via Lydes Lane. Lydes Lane is approximately 300 m in length linking The Putty Road with the Golden Highway immediately west of the Mount Thorley Road overpass. A sheltered AUSTROADS Type C treatment operates for the right turn into Warkworth Mine for vehicles travelling from the east along The Putty Road and a Type B left turn treatment utilising a deceleration taper and left turn lane for vehicles is in use for vehicles travelling from the west.

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 209 Golden Highway / Jerry’s Plains Road

From its intersection with the New England Highway south of Singleton, the Golden Highway runs west through Denman towards Dubbo. The highway merges with The Putty Road for approximately 2 km before the Mount Thorley Industrial Estate and subsequently shares its name with Jerry’s Plains Road between the industrial area and Warkworth Village. The Golden Highway / Jerrys Plains Road forms the eastern and northern borders of Warkworth Mine. Mining operations and rehabilitated stockpile areas are prominent in the viewshed of passing motorists.

The Golden Highway is a two-lane thoroughfare with a soft shoulder and marked centre lines and intersections. The highway services a combination of road users and is locally dominated by the mining industry. The road experiences considerable heavy vehicle traffic volumes associated with coal haulage from neighbouring mines including Wambo and Hunter Valley Operations.

Wallaby Scrub Road

Wallaby Scrub Road runs between Jerry’s Plains Road to the north and The Putty Road in the south and forms the limit of the proposed mine extension area. Wallaby Scrub Road is a two lane carriageway with soft gravel shoulders and no markings. The road predominantly services local traffic, linking residences in Bulga and Mount Thorley with Warkworth Village and the Golden Highway to the north. Wallaby Scrub Road also provides access to a large proportion of the Warkworth Mining Lease.

Charlton Road

Charlton Road has a two lane carriageway with a soft shoulder and no markings. From its intersection with The Putty Road, (approximately 100 m west of Wallaby Scrub Road), Charlton Road runs to the west of mining operations at Mount Thorley Operations and Bulga Mine, providing access to Broke. Charlton Road therefore links with Wallaby Scrub Road to provide access west of the existing mining operations between the tourist areas and vineyards around Broke and Milbrodale to the south and the Golden Highway and Warkworth Village to the north.

Broke Road

Broke Road has a two lane carriageway with some road and intersection markings and soft shoulders. Broke Road is the main access route linking Broke to Singleton running to the east of the major mining operations, intersecting with The Putty Road at Mount Thorley. Broke Road provides vehicle access to the MTCL and Bulga Mine.

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 210 14.1.2 Existing Traffic Volumes

A summary of historical daily traffic volumes for the area surrounding Warkworth Mine has been compiled from data from the RTA and SSC (see Table 14.1).

Table 14.1 Traffic Volumes

RTA Station Traffic Count Location Daily Traffic Volume (AADT1) Year 1984 1988 1992 1998 The Golden Highway and The Putty 05638 5,160 4,759 4,800 7,164 Road, east of Broke Road The Golden Highway and Jerry’s 05481 4,200 4,757 4,508 6,256 Plains Road, north of The Putty Road The Putty Road, east of Wallaby 05636 1,890 - 1,1592 9193 Scrub Road The Putty Road, Milbrodale, south of 05167 1,9004 1,4204 1,0754 7994 Broke Road Wallaby Scrub Road, south of Jerry’s 05840 7105 698 - - Plains Road Broke Road, south of the Golden 05431 1,430 - - - Highway and The Putty Road Source: RTA 1998 Notes: 1. AADT = annual average daily traffic (axle pairs) 2. Vehicle counts from 1991 survey by Traffic Counting Supplies and Service 3. Vehicle counts from 1994 survey by Traffic Counting Supplies and Service 4. AADT = annual average daily traffic (vehicle counts) 5. Vehicle count sourced from SSC

The Putty Road experiences moderate to high daily traffic volumes east of Warkworth Mine, averaging up to 7,164 vehicles per day near its intersection with Broke Road. This can be attributed to both local traffic and regional traffic accessing inland Australia via the Golden Highway. Demographic profiles indicate a high proportion of employees from the local mines and industrial areas reside in municipalities to the east and south east of the site. The majority of employees in the locality are therefore expected to travel to the workplace via this section of The Putty Road, contributing to higher vehicle volumes.

Jerry’s Plains Road also experiences moderate to high traffic volumes, which are associated with local and regional traffic movements. Jerry’s Plains Road also receives a considerable volume of coal truck movements from the adjoining mines such as Hunter Valley Operations and Wambo Mine, which transfer product coal to the MTCL. Heavy vehicle traffic has been recorded on Jerry’s Plains Road and the Golden Highway as constituting 40 % of total traffic (RTA 2002). The RTA indicated that of the heavy traffic along the Golden Highway, a high proportion of this is comprised of B-doubles, rigid double axle and semi-trailer trucks.

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 211 The Putty Road experiences considerably lower traffic volumes to the west of Warkworth Mine. This section of The Putty Road is not influenced by regional traffic using the Golden Highway and services a lower proportion of the workforce at Warkworth Mine and surrounding mines and industrial areas.

The traffic data indicates a gradual decline in the amount of traffic using The Putty Road to the west of Warkworth Mine. In 1984, the AADT volume for a traffic counting station on The Putty Road at Milbrodale was 1,900 vehicles, reducing down to 1,420 vehicles in 1988, 1,075 vehicles in 1992 and 799 vehicles in 1998. This was also the case at a point on The Putty Road, east of Wallaby Scrub Road, which showed a 21 % decline in vehicle traffic between 1991 and 1994. The reduction in traffic can be attributed to the decline in the use of The Putty Road as an alternate transport corridor from western Sydney, due to the attractiveness of the F3 freeway for regional transport.

There is no discernible peak period in The Putty Road’s usage as it does not service a particular community. The predominance of shift work in the local mines and industries also precludes any distinct peak in vehicle movements on The Putty Road. Hourly traffic volumes were available from the RTA for the Golden Highway at the bridge over the Hunter River. Peak weekday hourly flows show that the period between 11 am and 2 pm represented the daily peak. Peak hour represented 8 % of the daily total (RTA 1998). This percentage of vehicles flowing through peak times is typical of a rural area.

14.1.3 Future Road Network Changes

The RTA and SSC have indicated that there are no planned future road network changes that will significantly affect the road network in the locality of Warkworth Mine.

A review of SSC’s strategic reports did not reveal any planned future changes to the road network surrounding Warkworth Mine. The Mount Thorley Industrial Estate, which is situated near the junction of The Putty Road and the Golden Highway, has experienced low growth and Council anticipates it will continue to do so over the next ten years. At present, the industrial estate is not the subject of a strategic traffic management plan (TMP), however one may be undertaken in the medium to long term.

14.1.4 Road Safety

A review of accidents along The Putty Road in the Singleton LGA was undertaken for the five and a half year period from January 1997 to 6 June 2002. A summary of these results showed that a total of 125 accidents were reported to the RTA for The Putty Road.

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 212 Six accidents occurred on The Putty Road in the vicinity of Warkworth Mine, between Wallaby Scrub Road and the Golden Highway. The accidents types included two rear end collisions, two vehicles leaving the carriageway and two colliding with an animal with two of the accidents resulting in injuries to people. In comparison to the entire length of The Putty Road, the section near the mines has a good safety record with no reported fatalities.

14.2 INTERNAL HAUL ROADS

A series of internal haul roads currently operate throughout Warkworth Mine. Haulage ramps are located at the northern and southern ends and in the middle of each active pit and are progressively extended as mining proceeds. The ramps meet the existing haul roads on the eastern boundaries of the active pits to transfer the raw coal to the CPP.

An internal haul road, including a bridge over The Putty Road, was constructed in 2000 to link the Warkworth CPP to the MTCL. The bridge was constructed with a highway loading and is only suitable for the transport of loaded B-double trucks, not heavy vehicle coal haulage or heavy equipment associated with coal mining. The haul road was extended in 2001 to link the Warkworth and Mount Thorley Operations’ CPPs.

14.3 CONSTRUCTION PHASE TRAFFIC GENERATION

14.3.1 Overview

The proposal forms an extension of an existing mine and therefore has minimal infrastructure requirements and associated construction activities. However, a range of new infrastructure is proposed to improve operational synergies between Warkworth Mine and Mount Thorley Operations, including:

• two new bridges over The Putty Road;

• a by-pass road adjacent to one of the new bridges;

• a conveyor to transfer coal between Warkworth Mine and Mount Thorley Operations; and

• upgrading of existing maintenance, mining and support facilities at Warkworth Mine.

The location of the proposed new infrastructure is indicated on Figure EIS-10 and Figure EIS-19 in Volume 4.

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 213 The nature and intensity of activities that will affect the existing road network will vary throughout the construction period. Additional traffic movements will be generated as a result of construction vehicles, delivery of equipment and materials and transportation movements due to the services required to support the construction phase. Temporary road closures will also be required for the completion of activities immediately adjacent the roadway.

14.3.2 Construction Workforce

A small construction workforce will be required at various stages of the project. The anticipated workforce requirements and timing of construction activities is detailed in Table 14.2.

Table 14.2 Anticipated Construction Workforce

Estimated Estimated Contractor Construction Activity Timing Duration Workforce Construction of eastern bridge Year 1 6 months 22 Construction of by-pass road and level crossing Year 1 3 months 10 Expansion of maintenance and support facilities Year 1 6 months 18 Construction of new conveyor Year 3 3 months 15 Construction of western bridge Year 10 6 months 22

The majority of the new infrastructure including the initial bridge, by-pass road and the upgraded maintenance and support facilities is anticipated to be constructed within the first year of the extension. The construction workforce is anticipated to peak at approximately 50 over a period of six months.

A degree of car sharing is expected from construction contractors. A car usage rate of 85 % has been conservatively used to assess construction traffic generation. The peak construction workforce is therefore estimated to create an additional 43 vehicles travelling to and from the site each day, representing an additional 86 daily vehicle movements.

14.3.3 Construction Vehicle Movements

Bridge Construction

The construction of the bridges will allow heavy vehicle haulage of coal between Warkworth Mine and Mount Thorley Operations’ CPPs, as well as the transfer of some mining equipment between the mines, without disrupting traffic flow on The Putty Road. The initial feasibility studies investigated both underpass and overpass structures. The work confirmed that bridges were the most feasible option.

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 214 The eastern bridge will be constructed between the South and Woodland Pits immediately following approval. The second bridge, the western bridge, will be constructed to the west of the Woodlands Pit approximately 10 years after approval. Final bridge design is subject to a review of option feasibility with the eastern bridge likely to be either a 30 m wide dual lane or 18 m wide single lane standard girder bridge and the western bridge likely to be an 18 m wide single lane standard girder bridge. Conceptual designs of the eastern bridge are presented in Figure EIS-17 in Volume 4. Both bridges will be constructed over approximately a 6 month period.

The number of heavy vehicle movements on public roads is expected to be greatest at the commencement and conclusion of construction equating to approximately 30 movements per day. Following site commissioning, vehicle movements are expected to slowly decline until near the conclusion of construction activities, where they will again peak at 30 vehicles per day. Heavy vehicles such as piling and compaction equipment and machinery will remain on site during construction, to minimise impacts on the local traffic network.

Bridge construction involves the emplacement of reinforced earth walls parallel to the roadway on either side of the bridge. The earth walls will require approximately 1,880 m3 of fill in the wing walls and abutments, which will either be sourced internally from mining operations or the local surrounding area.

Importing fill will result in up to 30 heavy vehicle movements per day for approximately two weeks and occur near the end of the construction period. Depending on the source of the fill and the timing of the bridge and internal haul road construction, vehicle movements may be required to access the site via The Putty Road.

Construction of By-pass Road and Grade Crossing

A by-pass road and slab crossing will be constructed on Warkworth Mine, adjacent to the proposed location of the western bridge. The by-pass road will be completed within approximately three weeks and involve limited earthworks.

The Putty Road crossing slab will be constructed in conjunction with the by- pass road, in order to prevent pavement damage on The Putty Road during equipment transfer. An internal heavy equipment access road to the crossing, will also be constructed on both Mount Thorley Operations and Warkworth Mine. The crossing slab will be constructed according to RTA standards for a main road immediately following the construction of the by-pass road. A 1,450 mm deep pavement has been allowed for consisting of:

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 215 • 250 mm reinforced concrete slab;

• 600 mm gravel road base; and

• 600 mm of select fill from the mine workings.

Additional heavy vehicle movements on The Putty Road will be required for the delivery of materials and equipment during the construction. Equipment used during road construction and upgrading works typically includes haul trucks, excavators, a roller, a vibratory roller, water cart and grader during ground preparation and a concrete agitator, a concrete pump and an asphalt paver during pavement construction for the crossing slab.

It is estimated that up to 20 heavy vehicle movements per day for three weeks will be required for the construction of the by-pass road. Approximately 1,100 m3 of imported road base fill material will be delivered to the site equating to 12 vehicle movements per day. Fill material is expected to be sourced from the mining operations and will access the construction site via The Putty Road.

The grade crossing slab will be completed over a period of approximately 10 days following the construction of the by-pass road. It is estimated that up to 24 heavy vehicle movements per day will be required for equipment and material delivery over the 10 day construction program for the crossing slab. Approximately 300 m3 of both gravel and select fill is required for the crossing equating to 16 movements per day over six days to allow for the adequate compaction of layers. Delivery of concrete and reinforcing will equate to 14 vehicle movements per day for an additional three days.

Equipment required for both the construction of the by-pass road and crossing slab will be stored securely on site to minimise impacts on the surrounding road network.

Construction of New Conveyor

A new overland conveyor is proposed to be constructed between Warkworth Mine and Mount Thorley Operations’ CPPs and MTCL for the transfer of either ROM coal for processing or product coal to the MTCL.

The conveyor will utilise an existing culvert under The Putty Road.

Construction vehicles will be required for the delivery of materials and equipment including conveyor gantries, steelwork and piping. No earthworks are required for the installation of the conveyor minimising the associated construction vehicle movements. It is estimated that up to 10 vehicle movements per day will be required for the installation of the conveyor over a period of approximately 3 months.

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 216 Upgrading of Maintenance and Support Facilities

The proposal involves upgrading maintenance and support facilities at Warkworth Mine to satisfy the requirements of the extension. The upgrade has also been designed to allow for future consolidation with Mount Thorley Operations if required. The upgrade of the facilities includes:

• internal renovations to the existing administration office;

• construction of a new car park containing 240 parking spaces;

• extension of the employee amenities;

• extension of the mine office; and

• extension of the heavy vehicle workshop.

A maximum of 20 heavy vehicle movements are expected to be required for the delivery of construction materials and the removal of excess material and waste. Extension to the operation and maintenance facilities will be completed over a period of approximately six months.

A summary of the expected vehicle movements associated with construction activities is shown in Table 14.3.

Table 14.3 Construction Vehicle Movements

Maximum Expected Daily Estimated Construction Activity Vehicle Movements Duration Bridge Construction 30 6 months Construction of by-pass road and grade crossing 24 1.5 months Construction of new conveyor 10 3 months Expansion of maintenance and support facilities 20 6 months

14.4 CONSTRUCTION IMPACTS AND MITIGATION MEASURES

14.4.1 Construction Traffic

Construction phase traffic generation was detailed in Section 14.3. Vehicle movements associated with construction contractors accessing the site and construction vehicle movements are not expected to have a noticeable impact on the surrounding road network. Contractors and construction vehicles will generate approximately 86 and 74 additional daily vehicle movements respectively during the peak infrastructure construction period. In reality, vehicle movements have been conservatively estimated to determine the worst case scenario and it is unlikely that vehicle movements associated with each construction activity will peak simultaneously.

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 217 The origin of the contractors is unknown at the conceptual stage of infrastructure design, however, it can be anticipated that the majority of the contractors would access the site from one of the larger urban centres to the east of the site such as Singleton, Cessnock, Maitland or Newcastle.

In a worst case scenario of the entire construction workforce accessing the site via The Putty Road from the east, the overall increase in traffic volume would equate to approximately 2.3 % for a period of approximately 3 months. This increase falls well within a typical daily variation of 10 % for a trunk road and will therefore not be noticeable to regular users of the road. Traffic generation during construction is therefore not expected to significantly impact upon the capacity or traffic flow in the local area.

14.4.2 Road Closures

Road closures are expected at various stages of bridge construction and for The Putty Road crossing slab. Bridge construction will require both partial and full road closures on The Putty Road. Partial road closures are expected during the construction of abutments and full road closures will be required during the installation of the girders, which span the road. Full road closures are expected to occur for a maximum of 24 hours and will be limited to the minimum required to complete the works.

Full road closure will also be required for the construction of the grade crossing slab on The Putty Road. The crossing slab will be constructed following the completion of the by-pass road to allow traffic to be diverted to the by-pass road for the period of construction.

The new conveyor will be constructed within a culvert immediately adjacent to the existing conveyor. The culvert was constructed at the same time as the existing conveyor to allow for a second conveyor if required, without disrupting traffic on The Putty Road. The culvert passes under The Putty Road negating the need for road closures during the construction or operation of the culvert.

Construction activities requiring road closures are all located on the section of The Putty Road located to the west of the Golden Highway which are currently experiencing relatively low and declining traffic volumes (refer Table 14.1). Extended road closures during bridge construction will result in traffic diverted via Wallaby Scrub Road and Jerry’s Plains Road resulting in an 11.5 km diversion.

14.4.3 Mitigation Measures

The following safeguards will be implemented to minimise the extent of impacts associated with construction activities on traffic and access requirements in the surrounding area:

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 218 • consultation with SSC and the RTA is required prior to any partial or full road closures;

• a TMP will be prepared for all proposed infrastructure works. The TMP will be prepared prior to construction in accordance with RTA guidelines and approval conditions. The TMP will include as a minimum precise road closure times, duration’s and the location of any temporary traffic diversions;

• the RTA’s Specification for Control of Traffic at Road and Bridge Works will be consulted by the contractor in providing traffic control to maintain safe traffic flow;

• vehicle movements will be restricted to the minimum necessary to complete the works;

• materials and equipment are to be delivered during standard working hours;

• construction vehicles will be required to stay on formed roads or designated laydown areas;

• vehicle / plant movements will be confined to areas previously cleared of vegetation; and

• materials and equipment will be stored securely on site.

14.5 MINE OPERATION PHASE TRAFFIC GENERATION AND IMPACTS

14.5.1 Employee Traffic Generation

Existing operations at Warkworth Mine and surrounding mines provide significant contributions to local traffic volumes. Mine employee traffic provides the greatest contribution to local traffic volumes.

The extension to Warkworth Mine cannot be considered in isolation, with the proposal involving the possible consolidation of office and maintenance facilities from Warkworth Mine and Mount Thorley Operations, at the Warkworth site by Year 2 of the mine plan. This will mean that the majority of employees from each operation will be starting and finishing their shifts at Warkworth Mine.

Overall employment projections for the Warkworth Mine and Mount Thorley Operations workforce are presented in Table 3.4 in Chapter 3. The combined workforce at Warkworth Mine and Mount Thorley Operations currently operates with 729 staff and is expected to peak at 777 in Year 9 of the mine plan.

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 219 A review of employees current residential location found that one-third of employees were drawn from the Singleton LGA with the remainder drawn from neighbouring LGAs (refer Table 6.6). A similar profile is expected for those currently employed at Mount Thorley Operations.

The proportion of the overall workforce accessing the site on a daily basis is integral in calculating the effect of employee traffic movements on the local road network. The workforce currently operates on a roster system, with staff split between three daily shifts. In addition, there are a number of staff rostered off on any given day. While the overall number of employees, rises to a peak in 2011, the proportion of staff rostered off also increases, creating an overall decline in employees accessing the site on a daily basis.

The peak daily workforce for the combined operations equates to 554 staff in the first year of the mine plan including 339 on day shift, 81 on afternoon shift, 134 on night shift and 151 staff rostered off. The number of employees accessing the operations will initially decline to 379 employees in Year 5, before increasing to more than 500 employees from Year 6 to 10 of the mine plan. From Year 10 the number of employees accessing the site will gradually decline to 392 in Year 18 as indicated in Table 14.4.

Table 14.4 Number of Employee Vehicles Accessing Operations

Year Daily Number of Full Time Employee Equivalents1 Employee Vehicles2 Starting at Starting at Mount Combined Warkworth Mine Thorley Operations Total Existing 330 229 559 475 1 394 160 554 470 2 430 23 453 385 3 428 23 451 383 4 430 23 453 385 5 424 23 447 379 6 487 23 510 433 7 486 23 509 432 8 482 23 505 429 9 488 23 511 434 10 423 23 446 379 11 420 23 443 376 12 417 23 440 374 13 421 23 444 377 14 403 23 426 362 15 392 23 415 352 16 376 23 399 339 17 369 23 392 333 18 369 23 392 333 Source: CNA 2002 Notes: 1 = Number of full time employee equivalents excludes staff rostered off. 2 = Number of employee vehicles assumes 85 % employee vehicle usage.

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/5 SEPTEMBER 2002 220 With a large proportion of workers residing in local municipalities, there is expected to be some degree of car sharing particularly by shift workers. A number of recent studies have been carried out in coal mines in the Hunter Valley to determine the estimated level of car sharing and overall car usage rates for mine employees. Car usage rates have varied from 60 % at Bayswater Mine (URS Australia 2000), 66 % at Hunter Valley Operations (ERM Mitchell McCotter 1998) to an estimated 85 % at Mount Pleasant Mine (ERM Mitchell McCotter 1997). For the purpose of assessing traffic impacts the more conservative value 85 % was adopted for this study.

The majority of staff are expected to access Warkworth Mine via The Putty Road from the east, from the major urban centres including Singleton, Cessnock, Maitland and Newcastle. A small proportion of staff will access the mine via The Putty Road to the west of the site, including staff living in Bulga and Milbrodale.

The existing workforce at Warkworth Mine and Mount Thorley Operations is expected to generate 475 employee vehicles to and from the work place each day, equivalent to 950 vehicle movements. Assuming the majority of staff travel from the east, employee vehicles represent approximately 10 % of total vehicle movements on The Putty Road and the Golden Highway.

As demonstrated in Table 14.4 the daily contribution of employee vehicle movements will decline over the period of the mine plan and is not expected to impact upon the amenity of the local or regional road networks.

14.5.2 Mine Operations and Service Vehicles

Vehicles relating to the general operation of the mine also contribute to local traffic volumes including:

• service vehicles and couriers;

• plant and miscellaneous deliveries;

• diesel fuel delivery;

• explosives delivery; and

• gravel for haul roads.

It is estimated that operational vehicles currently generate approximately 50 vehicle movements per day. Warkworth Mine will continue to be managed under existing operational practises throughout the proposed mine extension and as such is not expected to have a major impact upon service vehicle requirements.

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 221 Additional service vehicles associated with the increased production rate throughout the mine plan, may result in minor increases to service vehicle movements associated with diesel fuel and explosives deliveries. It is expected that a maximum of 20 additional vehicle movements per day will be generated as a part of the proposal, representing less than 1 % of total vehicle movements on The Putty Road. Increases in service vehicles will occur concurrently to a reduction in employee daily vehicle numbers accessing the site and will not significantly impact upon the service capacity of The Putty Road.

14.5.3 Impacts on Intersections

Integration of the Warkworth Mine and Mount Thorley Operations workforce at Warkworth Mine will create minor additional pressure on the existing road infrastructure servicing Warkworth Mine, particularly The Putty Road and Lydes Lane intersection at the entrance to Warkworth Mine.

Vehicular access to Mount Thorley Operations is currently gained via Mount Thorley Road. Access to the Mount Thorley CPP is gained via Broke Road. Consolidation of the workforce will mean that the majority of employees at each operation will start and finish their shifts at Warkworth Mine. Vehicles travelling east along The Putty Road, access Warkworth Mine via a right turn bay into Lydes Lane. A left turn deceleration lane is provided for vehicles travelling from the west on The Putty Road.

Access to the Lydes Lane is also available via a sharp left hand turn from the Golden Highway and Mount Thorley Road for vehicles travelling from the Mount Thorley Industrial Estate. A medium strip precludes motorists travelling south along the Golden Highway and Jerry’s Plain’s Road making a right turn to the site.

A study of points of origin of the mine’s employees is necessary to ascertain whether any road infrastructure improvements will be necessary as a result of the integrated operations. The employees of the mining operation according to their LGA of origin is presented in Table 14.5.

Table 14.5 Employee Access Direction to Warkworth

LGA Percentage of Workforce Turning Direction1 Singleton 36.5 % Right – 80 % Left – 20 % Cessnock 28.5 % Right Maitland 24% Right Port Stephens 3% Right Muswellbrook 3% Right Newcastle 5% Right Source: CAN Notes: 1. Turning direction from The Putty Road into Warkworth Mine

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/5 SEPTEMBER 2002 222 Vehicular access to Warkworth Mine is principally gained from the right turn bay on The Putty Road via Lydes Lane. An assessment of the capacity of The Putty Road and Lydes Lane intersection to cater for the increased traffic volumes was therefore undertaken.

Adapting Gap Acceptance Procedures in accordance with AUSTROADS guidelines the intersection was analysed taking into account the direction from which employees will arrive at the mining operation and the number that arrive during the peak start time at the operation.

The peak employee consolidation at Warkworth Mine occurs in Year 10, with 251 employees arriving at in the morning for the day shift. Conservatively assuming 85% vehicle utilisation rate and 100% travelling from the east the intersection would experience 213 vehicle movements. The use of a right turn bay is found to be satisfactory to account for 213 vehicle movements with those turning into Warkworth Mine experiencing delays of under ten seconds based on an opposing flow of 100 vehicles per hour. The figure of 100 vehicles per hour is conservatively based upon historical peak hour flows of 74 vehicles an hour in 1994. Vehicles proceeding west along The Putty Road past the Warkworth Mine access point will not experience delays.

The existing sheltered AUSTROADS Type C treatment operating for the right turn into the operation for vehicles travelling from the east along The Putty Road is considered adequate to cater for increased vehicle movements associated with the proposal. The existing Type B left turn treatment utilising a deceleration taper and left turn lane for vehicles for vehicles travelling from the west is also considered adequate and therefore intersection upgrades works are not required.

14.5.4 Equipment Transfer

The operation of the bridges and the by-pass road will allow heavy vehicle haulage of coal and the transfer of equipment between Warkworth Mine and Mount Thorley Operations with virtually no impact upon traffic using The Putty Road.

The bridges will be designed to appropriate safety standards with loading capacities of approximately 500 t to cater primarily for loaded haul trucks, loaders, dozers and associated equipment.

The by-pass road will be constructed adjacent to the western bridge to allow the transfer of heavy mining equipment that is unable to cross via the bridges. This will include transfer of draglines (6,000 t GVM) and shovels (up to 2,000 t GVM). The crossing is likely to be used approximately four times per year, including twice per year by the draglines and twice per year by the shovels. Heavy equipment will access the crossing via an internal ‘walk’ road, to be constructed within Warkworth Mine and Mount Thorley Operations, on each approach to The Putty Road.

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 223 Traffic will be temporarily directed down the by-pass road, while the crossing of The Putty Road is being undertaken. Crossing by the draglines is expected to take up to three hours, with the process of directing traffic onto the by-pass road, which requires a road closure of less than fifteen minutes. The use of the by-pass road will prevent traffic from needing to undertake an 11.3 km diversion via Wallaby Scrub Road and Jerry’s Plains Road.

14.5.5 Blasting

Warkworth Mine is required to close any public roads when blasting approaches within 500 m of any road surrounding the mine. Road closures of generally less than 15 minutes per blast are currently undertaken under the approval of SSC on The Putty Road and Jerry’s Plains Road. Similar approvals will be sought for blasting in the extension area within 500 m of Wallaby Scrub Road in the final years of the mine plan.

14.5.6 Mitigation Measures

A TMP will be prepared for mining operations, providing specific details of road closure measures associated with blasting and the use of the by-pass road. The TMP will be prepared in accordance with RTA guidelines and approval conditions.

The TMP will include as a minimum road closure durations, location of any temporary traffic diversions, appropriate signage and notification procedures. The RTA’s Specification for Control of Traffic at Road and Bridge Works will be followed in providing traffic control to maintain safe traffic flow.

14.6 CONCLUSION

The chapter provides an assessment of the potential impacts upon the local traffic networks associated with infrastructure construction and the operation of Warkworth Mine over the proposed 18 year mine extension.

Vehicle movements associated with construction contractors accessing the site and construction vehicle movements are not expected to have a noticeable impact on the surrounding road network. Contractors and construction vehicles will generate approximately 86 and 74 additional daily vehicle movements respectively during the peak infrastructure construction period.

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 224 Partial and full road closures will be required at various stages of infrastructure construction on The Putty Road. Road closures will be restricted to the minimum time necessary to complete the work and be subject to appropriate controls detailed in a TMP.

Consolidation of the Warkworth Mine and Mount Thorley Operations workforce will result in fewer employees travelling to and from the integrated operations on a daily basis. Warkworth Mine will continue to be managed under existing operational practises, with a correspondingly minor increase in service vehicle requirements associated with an increase in production.

The existing sheltered AUSTROADS Type C treatment operating for the right turn into Warkworth Mine for vehicles travelling from the east along The Putty Road is considered adequate to cater for increased vehicle movements associated with the proposal. The existing Type B left turn treatment utilising a deceleration taper and left turn lane for vehicles for vehicles travelling from the west is also considered adequate and therefore intersection upgrades works are not required as a part of the proposal.

The minor increase in traffic generation during construction is not expected to significantly impact upon road capacity or traffic flow in the local area. The operation of the Warkworth Mine throughout the extension is expected to result in a net decrease in vehicles accessing the local area. Therefore, the impact of the proposed extension on the surrounding road network is expected to be minimal.

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 225 Extension of Warkworth Coal Mine environmental impact statement

CHAPTER 15

Cumulative Impacts 15 CUMULATIVE IMPACTS

15.1 CUMULATIVE IMPACT SETTING

In 1997, DUAP published a study which investigated the cumulative impacts of mining and other activities in the Upper Hunter. The study recognised that all individual disturbances to the environment caused by natural and human activities have the potential to act in unison to create cumulative impacts. The issues identified in the study have been considered in the preparation of this EIS.

In order to fully determine the impacts associated with the proposed extension to Warkworth Mine, it is necessary to assess the proposal in the context of the cumulative effect of the proposed mine extension together with any other existing or proposed mine in the locality. This is particularly important for issues associated with public amenity, including noise and air quality, where the cumulative effect is often greater than the sum of the individual components.

The cumulative impact assessments have included potential impacts associated with surrounding mines and industrial areas. The surrounding mines included for assessment were Bulga Mine, Mount Thorley Operations and Wambo Mine. The closest pit to Warkworth Mine in Hunter Valley Operations, the pit formerly known as South Lemington, is predicted to have ceased operations prior to the commencement of the proposed extension to Warkworth Mine. The Mount Thorley Industrial Estate and the Redbank Power Station have also been included in the cumulative assessment.

Cumulative impact assessments are generally complex and rely on detailed information on other companies existing and proposed operations. This information is not always available or in a consistent format that is capable of being used for the assessment. The cumulative assessment therefore requires assumptions to be made regarding the timing of developments, changes in which can significantly affect the assessment of cumulative impacts. Where information has not been available, assumptions have been made. Furthermore, so as not to underpredict potential cumulative impacts, conservative assumptions have been made.

The following sections provide a summary of the cumulative assessments undertaken throughout the EIS. More detailed information on the cumulative impacts is presented in the relative chapters of the EIS.

15.2 NOISE

The cumulative noise assessment assessed the influences from surrounding industrial activity on residences potentially impacted by the proposal. The

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 227 significant noise sources in the vicinity of the Warkworth Mine include the adjoining Wambo Mine, Mount Thorley Operations and Bulga Mine, and to some extent the Redbank Power Station.

Noise from surrounding mines was sourced from the following documents:

• an EIS produced by Envirosciences Pty Limited in 1991 for the expansion of Wambo Mine;

• an EIS produced by ERM Mitchell McCotter Pty Limited in 1995 for the extension of Mount Thorley Operations;

• a statement of environmental effects produced by ERM in January 2002 for the construction of two new pits (known as Abbey Green) at Mount Thorley Operations; and

• an EIS for continued mining at Bulga Mine produced by ERM Mitchell McCotter in February 1999.

These documents generally predicted L10 noise levels under SI conditions, and hence they were combined with the Leq noise from the proposal under the same conditions. Where noise data were not provided for every operating stage in the above documents, it was necessary to estimate levels from adjacent stages.

Other influences on cumulative noise will be coal train movements on the rail spur for the Jerry’s Plains Coal Terminal for properties to the north west and the rail spur to the MTCL for properties to the east. Since the rail movements are infrequent, only fixed coal loader noise (from MTCL) was used in the cumulative assessment.

It should be noted that the net rail movements associated with Warkworth Mine and Mount Thorley Operations are not expected to change as a result of the proposal and were therefore not included in the assessment. A review of Jerry’s Plains Coal Terminal assessment shows that the influence from the loading operations is not considered to add to receptors being assessed for this proposal.

Table 15.1 summarises the cumulative noise effects of the proposed extension and all surrounding mines and related infrastructure on representative properties surrounding Warkworth Mine. The results are for SI weather conditions as this is the only common information available in the referenced literature and represents mitigated operations at Warkworth Mine.

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 228 Table 15.1 Cumulative Noise Assessment

Property Number Warkworth Mine Operating Year Year 2 Year 5 Year 10 Year 15 Year 18 1 34.2 34.3 34.3 34.6 34.4 2 34.3 35.1 34.1 34.1 34.5 3 32.6 33.3 32.9 33.1 33.2 4 36.5 38.0 36.8 35.8 36.4 5 39.1 40.1 39.2 38.1 39.0 6 40.4 41.3 40.1 38.8 39.6 7 37.7 38.3 37.0 36.3 36.6 8 41.3 41.4 40.9 40.5 40.6 9 40.5 40.6 40.3 40.3 40.2 10 42.2 43.5 41.8 41.1 41.3 11 40.9 40.9 40.5 40.4 40.3 12 38.1 38.4 36.5 36.3 36.0 13 32.4 32.4 32.9 32.9 25.5 14 35.2 35.2 35.3 35.3 23.8 15 35.7 36.0 35.4 35.5 26.4 16 35.5 35.8 35.5 35.6 27.3 17 35.7 36.0 35.3 35.3 25.5 18 35.7 36.0 35.4 35.4 25.8 19 35.7 36.0 35.4 35.4 26.6 20 35.8 36.0 35.4 35.6 26.7 21 34.8 35.1 34.5 34.8 28.5 22 34.9 35.3 34.6 34.8 27.5 23 35.3 35.6 34.9 35.2 29.5 24 34.3 34.6 34.1 34.5 29.5 25 34.6 34.9 34.4 35.1 31.6 26 37.9 38.0 38.6 39.2 39.1 27 39.5 39.6 39.4 39.7 39.3 28 22.6 22.5 22.5 26.0 25.8 29 38.5 38.5 38.6 38.9 38.6 30 44.8 47.5 43.7 42.9 43.0 Notes: All properties are residential properties, except Property Nos. 29 and 30 which are a church and industrial property, respectively. Numbers in bold indicates levels above potential acquisition limits.

Applying a night time cumulative noise criterion equivalent to the EPA’s night time amenity goal of 40 dB(A), applicable for a rural residence according to the INP, shows that all private residential properties will be within or marginally (not more than 3 dB) above the EPA’s amenity goal of 40 dB(A). Those predicted to experience cumulative noise marginally above the EPA criterion are Property Nos. 6, 8, 9, 10 and 11. However, these exceedances are not attributed to by the proposal in the case of Property Nos. 8, 9 and 11. Whilst the marginal exceedances at Property Nos. 6 and 10 are contributed to by a combination of the proposal and other operations.

15.3 AIR QUALITY

Cumulative air quality impacts have been determined by assessing the planned ROM coal production and dust emission rates for each neighbouring

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 229 mine operating in the area for the years modelling was undertaken, namely Years 2, 5, 10, 15 and 18.

The neighboring mines included in the assessment included Bulga Mine, Mount Thorley Operations and Wambo Mine. It is acknowledged that other mines and other sources will of course contribute to PM10, TSP and dust deposition. The annual average quantum of PM contributed by these more 3 3 distant sources has been set at 5 µg/m for PM10, 10 µg/m for TSP and 0.5 g/m2/month for deposited dust. These values have been set based on experience gained from monitoring data in areas where there are no significant sources of PM. These are intended to account for miscellaneous dust sources that are not included directly in the modelling.

The EISs for Bulga Mine, Mount Thorley Operations and Wambo Mine provide estimates of ROM production and TSP emissions for selected years in the life of the mines. Ideally estimates of TSP emissions for each mine for the years corresponding to Warkworth Mine’s Years 2, 5, 10, 15 and 18 are required. Unfortunately, the data are not available in all cases and the approach taken has been to assume that the TSP emissions for the year closest to the relevant Warkworth year are the best estimates to be used for neighbouring mines.

In the cumulative modelling work each neighbouring mine has been treated as a number of volume sources located at the apparent points of major emissions as estimated from the known locations of the pits and or major dust sources on the mine or facility.

In the cumulative modelling work, Mount Thorley Operations has been represented as three volume sources located at the apparent points of major emissions as determined by inspection of the dust contours provided in the EIS. Bulga Mine has been represented as two volume sources and Wambo Mine has been represented as a single volume source.

Dust concentrations and deposition levels were predicted throughout the mine plan, considering the impact of Warkworth Mine in isolation and cumulatively. For each of the five years, isopleth diagrams have been produced showing the following:

• the predicted annual average PM10 concentration;

• the predicted annual average TSP concentration, and;

• the predicted annual average dust deposition.

Most mines in the Hunter Valley will be operating reactive control strategies to manage air quality in the short-term. The effect of these strategies can not be included in the cumulative modelling. If these strategies work then the mines should not be significant contributors to non-compliance with the short- term standards/goals.

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 230 The results of the cumulative air quality assessment are presented as a series of isopleths in the air quality study contained in Volume 2 as well as Figure EIS-28 to Figure EIS-30 in Volume 4. Comparison of the isopleths with the relevant EPA criteria allows for the identification of cumulatively affected properties.

Examination of the figures indicates that Property No. 26 will experience 3 annual average cumulative PM10 concentrations above the EPA 30 µg/m criterion in Year 10 only.

15.4 VISUAL ENVIRONMENT

An assessment of the visual impacts associated with the proposed mine extension was undertaken in consideration of both the local and regional setting.

Open cut coal mining is a visually intrusive process and results in a high degree of visual contrast with the surrounding landscape. However, the proposal involves the extension of a brown field site, meaning that it is an extension to an existing operation and is located within the Mining Lease boundary.

The locality surrounding Warkworth Mine is dominated by coal mines and associated industry. The visual assessment was therefore undertaken with consideration to the local landscape context, incorporating both coal mines and the surrounding rural and forested setting.

Cumulative visual impacts will be predominantly limited to viewer locations located to the west of the Warkworth Mine. The mine will become increasingly visible to a number of receivers located west of the extension area, but will not be adding a new landscape feature to the visual catchment.

Active spoil emplacements will be visible as a thin strip on the edge of the horizon and will be visually consistent with existing mining operations at Warkworth Mine and the neighbouring mines of Mount Thorley Operations and Bulga Mine. Site lighting at night will form an extension to the existing bank of lights from the adjoining mines. Individual property owners will be contacted to discuss the option of landscaping treatments to minimise the visual impacts from affected properties.

Viewer locations to the east and north of the site have existing views of operations at Warkworth Mine. Active mining areas are progressively shielded from view throughout the mine extension. The level of contrast of the mine with the surrounding rural landscape will diminish as rehabilitation progresses over the eastern half of the mine.

The local road network and, in particular, The Putty Road, will continue to run immediately adjacent to the Warkworth Mine and Mount Thorley

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 231 Operations and road users will continue to be impacted by the cumulative effect of the two operations. However, the proposed extension is visually consistent with the existing mines and the rehabilitation plan involves accelerating the rehabilitation of areas immediately adjacent to The Putty Road, improving the visual amenity for road users.

Careful mine planning will ensure the intrusiveness of the development is minimised and the proposal is sympathetic to significant viewer locations. On-site mitigation measures include maintaining the high points on the Mining Lease, early construction and rehabilitation of the outer slopes of the overburden emplacements and the design of the rehabilitation schedule to ensure the maximum possible disturbed area is rehabilitated at any one time.

15.5 TRAFFIC AND TRANSPORT

The effect of traffic generation on the local road network was discussed in Chapter 14. The existing operations at Warkworth Mine and surrounding mines provide significant contributions to local traffic volumes with mine employee traffic expected to make the greatest contribution.

The proposal provides for the consolidation of office and maintenance facilities from Warkworth Mine and Mount Thorley Operations at Warkworth Mine by Year 2 of the mine plan, which means mean that the majority of employees from each operation starting and finishing their shifts at Warkworth Mine. The study therefore included vehicle movements associated with Mount Thorley Operations in all traffic assessments.

The peak daily workforce for Warkworth Mine and Mount Thorley Operations equates to 554 staff in the first year of the mine plan including 339 on day shift, 81 on afternoon shift, 134 on night shift and 151 staff rostered off.

The existing workforce at Warkworth Mine and Mount Thorley Operations is expected to generate 475 employee vehicles to and from the work place each day, equivalent to 950 vehicle movements. The number of vehicles accessing the operations will be relatively steady through to Year 10 of the mine plan before declining to 392 in 2020. Assuming the majority of staff travel from the east, employee vehicles represent approximately only 10 % of total vehicle movements on The Putty Road and the Golden Highway. There is not expected to be any cumulative impacts associated with the proposal on the local road network.

15.6 WATER RESOURCES

Potential cumulative impacts upon surface water and ground water were assessed in Chapter 9 and in the surface and groundwater management study in Volume 2.

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 232 The major cumulative effect predicted is related to the cumulative depressurisation of coal seam aquifers in the locality. Coal measures pressures will never recover to pre mining levels, as the region now retains different hydraulic properties, with spoil permeability being two to three orders of magnitude higher than undisturbed coal measures. The net effect of the changed properties will be a relatively flat water table over the mined area at a maximum elevation of about 45 m AHD. Since the majority of the mines in the locality are located near the headwaters of a number of small catchments, the overall impact is not considered significant.

Depressurisation impacts are predicted to extend a maximum of 2 to 3 km from the proposed pit boundaries, which will involve impacts extending to and possibly beneath Wollombi Brook. Loss of aquifer pressure is not predicted to impact upon any existing water supply bores or wells within the coal measures, since most are located within shallow alluvium.

There will be a continuing loss of surface run-off to local catchments within the Mining Lease, as they are consumed by the extension of the mine pit. Catchment areas impacted by the proposed extension include those draining to Sandy Hollow Creek, Dights Creek and Doctors Creek. A part of the Longford Creek catchment (13.6 %) and another un-named creek (4.6 %) will also be consumed.

Altered drainage patterns associated with the proposed extension are not expected to significantly alter the cumulative effect on hydrology caused by the impact of mining operations in the Upper Hunter. The accelerated rehabilitation of the eastern half of Warkworth Mine, will increase catchment run-off and create flow patterns with a greater similarity to the pre-mining landscape.

However, runoff water quality in rehabilitated areas is likely to exhibit a reduced salt load compared to other local drainage lines and historical measurements recorded in Doctors Creek. This is mostly attributed to the removal of regional aquifer pressures within the coal measures. All areas planned to be returned to the natural catchment will need to be carefully monitored at the sedimentation dam exit points during early years of rehabilitation to ensure water qualities (suspended and dissolved constituents) are acceptable.

15.7 ECOLOGY

The subject site and study area has been cleared in the past and consists of cleared areas, woodland and regrowth vegetation, which provides habitats for a variety of flora and fauna, including threatened species and vegetation communities and species of regional conservation significance.

The proposal has cumulative impacts within the region because it adds to clearance of vegetation and habitat within the region. This cumulative loss of

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 233 habitat is a threat to flora and fauna because it involves the loss of habitat from a number of areas within a region that species, populations or vegetation communities may rely on.

When one remnant patch is lost a local population or vegetation community may still survive because it can use resources that are present in, or persist in, adjacent patches. However, the loss of many patches of habitat from a region may be large enough to cause the local extinction of species, populations or communities.

At the regional level a high proportion of the original vegetation of the Hunter Valley has been cleared in the past and so an important consideration for the project has been how to minimise cumulative impacts for net vegetation loss. In order to minimise any cumulative impacts on flora and fauna the following strategies have been proposed:

• Green Offset Strategy - designating conservation areas for the life of the consent that include land where vegetation can be retained and regenerated. Such vegetation management will provide for additional woodland habitat as woodland recovers in these areas as livestock are removed. This will maintain part of a large patch of vegetation that links with existing remnants, and help to maintain a more uniform cover of vegetation throughout the Hunter Valley floor;

• rehabilitation of 50 % of the mined area to restore the landscape to a state that provides known habitat for populations of threatened species that are currently known on the subject site. The areas proposed for regeneration are planned to connect with adjacent conservation areas and would be consistent with the DMR’s Synoptic Plan: Integrated Landscapes for Coal Mine Rehabilitation in the Hunter Valley of New South Wales; and

• assisted natural regeneration of the subject site prior to clearance. This will allow regeneration processes on the subject site to continue for a number of years, which would in turn assist in the regeneration of adjacent areas by providing propagule resources and dispersal corridors.

These measures therefore aim to minimise the cumulative impact of the clearance of vegetation and habitat within the Hunter Valley by conserving representative communities and habitats of local, state and regional conservation significance in the study area as well as maintaining local and regional corridor connectivity.

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 234 Extension of Warkworth Coal Mine environmental impact statement

PART D Environmental Management and Project Justification

16 Environmental Management and Monitoring 17 Project Alternatives and Justification Extension of Warkworth Coal Mine environmental impact statement

CHAPTER 16

Environmental Management and Monitoring 16 ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT AND MONITORING

16.1 ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

A comprehensive EMS has been developed for Warkworth Mine to provide an overall framework for the management of environmental impacts during the operation of the mine. Implementation of the EMS has assisted in achieving environmental regulatory compliance and ensure regular reporting of environmental performance is undertaken.

The EMS ensures that all mitigation measures and monitoring are effectively implemented and sustainable practices are adopted during the operation of the mine.

The EMS documents procedures and authorities for all activities with sufficient information and guidance to enable relevant personnel to:

• understand and act to meet their individual delegated responsibilities in managing environmental issues;

• manage the environmental issues identified in the EMS,

• applying the issue-specific procedures detailed in the EMS; and

• identify and take appropriate steps to appropriately manage identified environmental risks and exposures associated with their spheres of responsibility.

Any company or organisation seeking to tender as a contractor role for work on the Warkworth Mine will have to demonstrate commitment to, and satisfactory adherence to the requirements of the EMS. Implementation and adherence to the EMS requirements is subject to audit.

The EMS will incorporate environmental management plans (EMPs) for both the infrastructure construction and mine operational phases of the proposed Warkworth Mine extension. Each EMP will be prepared when the EIA process relevant to that stage is complete and all necessary approvals have been obtained.

The purpose of the EMP is to act as an environmental operations manual for the contractors and staff. The preceding chapters in this EIS have described potential impacts of the proposed development and the measures proposed to mitigate these impacts. The EMP will address all the potential impacts identified in this EIS document and include:

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 235 • details of how environmental safeguards are to be implemented;

• the timing of the implementation of the mitigation measures; and

• clear definitions of the allocation of environmental responsibilities of the contractors and staff.

The monitoring and reporting that are done as part of the EMP allows the contractor and operators to demonstrate compliance with licensing and approval requirements. The EMP will follow the principles of continuous improvement to ensure that any deficiencies identified in the management procedure are promptly addressed and that the standard of environmental performance continually improves. The EMP will therefore be a dynamic document, which can be updated and modified as necessary so that it is applicable and practical for the duration of the mine plan.

16.2 OUTLINE OF THE CONSTRUCTION EMP

The proposal involves an extension to existing operations at Warkworth Mine and therefore the majority of the mining infrastructure is already installed and operating. The EMP for the construction phase will be prepared in conjunction with the detailed design for the new infrastructure requirements including the bridge, by-pass road and conveyor construction and the refurbishment of the office and amenities facilities. An outline of the construction phase EMP is presented in Figure EIS-51 in Volume 4 and described in the following section.

16.2.1 Introduction

This section will describe the purpose and background to the infrastructure installations in relation to the environmental commitments made in this document and the requirements of subsequent assessments and approvals. Statutory and other obligations will be identified including all approvals, agreements and any consultation required with authorities and other stakeholders. The environmental management structure will be described and the roles and responsibilities detailed. The induction and training standards for all contractors and employees will be detailed.

16.2.2 Construction Sites

This section will consider the environmental characteristics of the construction sites prior to use. The location of all infrastructure installations and ancillary construction equipment will be described in detail and shown on a site plan. Key environmental characteristics include a description of the physical environment as well as issues relating to traffic, noise and vibration, air and water quality and visual amenity. The location of all construction activities will be shown on the site plan.

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 236 16.2.3 Construction Activities

This section will provide a description of construction activities and specific techniques to be utilised. Construction activities are limited to the installation of new infrastructure for the proposal. Potential threats to the environment will be identified through a risk assessment for each activity. The major construction activities include:

• site preparation including earthworks and vegetation clearance;

• infrastructure construction and installation;

• road work and access requirements on The Putty Road; and

• site rehabilitation and restoration.

A program detailing the schedule of construction activities will also be included. Specific issues such as work hours and site access will be addressed in this section.

16.2.4 Environmental Management Procedures

This section will detail the management procedures and mitigation measures to be undertaken to achieve the environmental objectives for the proposal including:

• potential impacts and safeguards;

• monitoring requirements and programs;

• reporting procedures;

• incident management; and;

• procedures for review and updating of the EMP.

16.3 OUTLINE OF THE OPERATIONAL EMP

An operational EMP will be prepared for the mining activities at the Warkworth Mine site. Figure EIS-52 in Volume 4 diagrammatically indicates the form of the operational phase EMP, which is described in the subsequent section.

16.3.1 Introduction

As for the construction EMP, this section will describe the purpose and background to the project in relation to the environmental commitments made in the EIS and the requirements of subsequent assessments and approvals.

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 237 The environmental management structure will also be described, incorporating such details as the roles, responsibilities and induction and training standards for employees and contractors associated with the mine site.

16.3.2 Operational sites

This section will contain a detailed description of the mine plan and the key environmental characteristics of the site. The mine site layout will be described and indicated on the site plan.

16.3.3 Operational Activities

This section will provide a description of operational activities at Warkworth Mine including mining method, schedules and quantities of coal and overburden removal and an equipment schedule. A risk assessment will be undertaken to identify potential threats to the environment associated with each activity.

16.3.4 Environmental Management

This section will outline the environmental management strategy (EMS) for the operation of the mine. A separate sub-plan will be prepared for each key environmental aspect (ie noise, air quality) associated with the mining operations. Each sub-plan will include the following components:

• environmental aspect – a description of the environmental aspect to which the plan applies and any specific issues in relation to the plan;

• management objective – the specific objective and management outcomes associated with each environmental aspect;

• performance indicators – details the legislative requirements and general parameters that will be used to assess the successfulness of the strategy:

• mitigation measures – the control strategies to be implemented;

• monitoring requirements and programs;

• responsibilities and timing;

• incident management; and

• continual improvements.

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 238 16.4 SUMMARY OF MITIGATION MEASURES

16.4.1 General

A summary of the objectives for key environmental aspects associated with proposed extension of Warkworth Mine together with the proposed mitigation measures to achieve these objectives are detailed in the following sections.

16.4.2 Socioeconomic

Objective

To protect and maintain the existing socioeconomic fabric of the local and regional communities.

Mitigation

In order to minimise the social impacts of the extension to Warkworth Mine effectively, the following management strategies will be implemented:

• throughout the operation of the mine, CNA and Warkworth Mine staff will continue to have a pro-active community information program. The Warkworth Community Consultative Committee will continue to meet with members of SSC, DLWC, DMR, and the EPA to discuss the mine’s progress and compliance with conditions of development consent;

• CNA and Warkworth Mine will continue to provide sponsorship to the local community programs and host visits to the mine.

16.4.3 Land Management

Objective

To maximise the efficient, productive and sustainable landuse practises on non-mining land.

Mitigation

The following land management control programs will continue to be undertaken:

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 239 • ongoing weed management and control on the lease area is continued to be carried out to the satisfaction of the RLPB. Control methods include spraying, wick weeding, cultivation and grazing. Weed management is undertaken on a regular basis;

• a feral animal control program will include ongoing baiting to control the numbers of rabbits, hares, foxes, wild dogs and feral cats. Special myxomatosis will be released on site in conjunction with the RLPB for rabbit control;

• a number of management procedures are used to minimise the potential for bushfire hazard including:

• maintenance of grazing practices in areas other than those in the offsets strategy, to reduce fuel loads and maintain low grass levels in areas of high bushfire potential;

• provision of an adequate level of fire breaks and access trails throughout the Mining Lease;

• regular maintenance and grading of access trails; and

• provision of sufficient on-site fire fighting equipment.

16.4.4 Rehabilitation and Regeneration

Objective

To ensure rehabilitation and revegetation is self sustaining and follow the principles of sustainable development.

Mitigation

Amelioration measures are designed to minimise the direct and indirect impact of the gradual clearance of native vegetation on the subject site and the adjacent study area over 18 years.

It is proposed to establish 50 % of the rehabilitated area of the extension with local native tree and shrub species to increase biodiversity values. These areas will link up with other rehabilitation measures being undertaken on the mine under existing consents and enhance the local connectivity in the final landform by linking habitat north and south of the subject site. Rehabilitation will be undertaken in consultation with the DMR and will be promoted for bio-diversity conservation by:

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 240 • using native endemic seeds (to match those already found on the subject site) where possible, for seeding and replanting programs;

• planting a variety of species as opposed to a monoculture, especially species that flower at different times of the year or that provide foraging resources for affected species;

• creating a diversity of landforms and habitats such as woodland, regrowth and open forest on ridgetops and lower slopes;

• placement of habitat features such as logs, rocks and dams; and

• linkage of areas rehabilitated with trees with adjacent remnant vegetation to promote regional corridors.

16.4.5 Flora and Fauna

Objective

To reduce the impacts of mining on rare and threatened flora and fauna species and to restore the landscape to a state that provides known habitat for populations of threatened species that are currently known to occur on the subject site.

Mitigation

Three types of Green Offset measures have been developed based on the proposed future use of the study area and include:

• NDAs – land that will provide protection of vegetation communities and biodiversity values for the life of the consent;

• HMAs – land that is currently owned by WML or is within a Mining Lease and may eventually be developed; and

• contribution to research or Conservation Trust Fund.

Approximately 461 ha is proposed to be designated as NDAs. The location of the NDAs provides connectivity between the existing woodland areas both on and off the Warkworth Mining Lease. The areas located immediately north and south of the extension area will also provide connectivity to mine rehabilitation areas.

Warkworth Mine is part of a larger patch of woodland in the study area. Some of this woodland is owned by WML and has been identified as a HMA. Development of the HMA land may occur in the future. This land is adjacent

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 241 to areas proposed to be NDAs for the extension and therefore provides connectivity to these areas. As the HMA may be developed in the future it is proposed to manage the land to maintain the existing vegetation communities until the time it is developed.

Full details of the green offsets for the proposal are provided in Chapter 7 of Volume 3. The following management measures will be applied to NDAs and HMA land on the mine site:

• habitat within the NDAs and HMA land will be managed to allow dispersal and colonisation of affected species, especially those affected species that are known to occur on the subject site;

• threatening processes such as grazing and clearing will cease in these areas and they will be allowed to naturally regenerate. In addition, other threatening processes will be controlled, such as feral cats, dogs, foxes, introduced plants and any erosion problems;

• management of the land will commence immediately following consent being received. As the majority of the regrowth is not be cleared for 10 years, this will allow some regeneration to occur prior to significant clearing;

• the following specific measures for some affected species would also be undertaken in selected sites in these areas:

• creation of four dams in NDA land, management of six and three dams in NDA and HMA land respectively. Dams will be strategically located in potential movement corridors across the study area;

• planting of key feeding trees, Allocasuarina for the Glossy Black- cockatoo;

• maintenance of open woodland areas lacking dense understorey for the Brown Treecreeper;

• maintenance of regenerating woodland with tall shrubs for the Grey- crowned Babbler;

• planting of key nectar producing trees for the Swift Parrot and Regent Honeyeater (eg White Box, Spotted Gum, Narrow-leaved Ironbark);

• planting Coastal Banksia and winter-flowering acacias near know habitat for the Squirrel Glider;

• maintenance of some open grassland areas with rocks as potential habitat for the Pink-tailed Worm Lizard; and

• it is proposed that a once off $50,000 contribution be provided to a conservation trust fund or contributed to a conservation management program. Additional discussion is required to be undertaken with planningNSW, NPWS and EA to agree on an appropriate fund or program.

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 242 16.4.6 Water Resources

Objective

To minimise potential off-site environmental impacts and to maximise the use of mine water on-site.

Mitigation Measures

Construction

A Soil and Water Management Plan (SWMP) will be developed for the construction phase of works. The SWMP will be developed in the detailed design phase and will be based on the Department of Housing manual Managing Urban Stormwater - Soils and Construction. The plan will be submitted for approval to the certifying authority prior to any works commencing on-site. Measures that will be included in the plan include:

• stripping and stockpiling of topsoil and installing diversions drains upstream of the stockpile to prevent sediments being mobilised by run-off;

• installation of diversion drains to prevent run-off from upstream areas flowing across areas affected by construction works;

• construction of a stabilised construction access;

• restricting all construction vehicles to the stabilised access;

• protection of buffer zones by ‘paraweb‘ to prevent construction traffic entering these areas;

• staging works to minimise site disturbance;

• temporarily stabilising any areas exposed for more than 20 days;

• construction of the run-off control dams during site establishment and using them as sediment control dams during construction;

• using water collected in the stormwater collection pond for reuse on site in dust suppression and earthworks to minimise off-site discharges;

• provision of bins on site for the collection of construction wastes such as concrete and mortar slurries, packing materials, and paints; and

• regular inspection and maintenance of controls until completion of the works.

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 243 Operation

Future water management will utilise the existing WMS with minor changes and provisions for sharing mine water with Mount Thorley Operations, the MTCL and Hunter Valley Operations. Schematic diagrams of the existing and proposed WMSs is presented in Figure EIS-8 and Figure EIS-20 in Volume 4. Operation of the WMS provides for the following:

• runoff in the lower part of the undisturbed catchment of Sandy Hollow Creek is pumped to the North Pit Transfer Dam via a 200 mm diameter pipeline. Runoff from higher parts of the catchment is diverted to the north-west via a diversion channel and off site via Longford Creek.

• rainfall and groundwater seepage arising from areas north of the North Pity ramp and including the northern benches and pit area, are pumped over the high wall (westward) into a 315 mm diameter pipeline that conveys water to the North Pit Transfer Dam;

• rainfall and seepage to the southern part of the North Pit is pumped up the pit ramp to Swan Lake. This seepage includes leakage from Tailings Dam No. 2 that migrates down the ramp;

• rainfall and seepage to the South Pit is pumped westward up the high wall and conveyed via undisturbed catchment to CD pit sump;

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 244 • rainfall, runoff and tailings decant entering Tailings Dam No. 2 can be collected and pumped via a 315 mm pipeline to Sedimentation Dam No. 2 where it is subsequently conveyed to the Main Water Storage Dam. A component of decant is known to percolate downward through the dam floor and to then migrate in a southward direction, subsequently reporting to CD pit sump;

• accumulated water in the CD pit sump can be pumped to the CPP. Storage in this area includes open water currently estimated at about 800 ML and water stored in spoils and estimated to be about 1,200 ML assuming a drainable porosity of about 20 % for spoils. There is an upper bound to the amount of storage that can be contained in this pit whereby seepage would be initiated through spoils at about RL 0 m AHD in a south easterly direction to the South Pit. This level equates to about 6,000 ML;

• water is pumped from the Main Water Storage Dam for consumption in the CPP. Make up water is drawn from the MTWSS on a needs basis;

• rainfall runoff in the workshop-truck wash and office area is directed to a number of local settling ponds where it is pumped back to the CPP for reuse; and

• to maximise recycling of surplus water, pipeline linkages are to be constructed between Warkworth Mine, Mount Thorley Operations and Hunter Valley Operations. These pipeline linkages will allow the transfer of water in either direction. Warkworth Mine will also have the flexibility to transfer fine rejects to Mount Thorley Operations.

16.4.7 Air Quality

Objectives

To minimise the generation of airborne dust and air emissions from the site to ensure compliance with the relevant performance indicators and regulatory requirements and to minimise unduly effects on the local amenity.

Mitigation Measures

Construction

A number of measures will be implemented to minimise dust generation during construction activities:

• keeping exposed areas to a minimum;

• commencing re-vegetation and landscaping as soon as practical;

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 245 • having well defined construction traffic areas; and

• using water to maintain moisture levels in active working areas, such as roadways and active stockpiles, at a level that minimises dust generation.

Dust levels will be visually monitored on site by the construction contractor and dust suppression techniques, such as water trucks and sprinklers, would be employed if:

• unacceptable levels of dust are observed;

• strong winds and dry conditions result in dust generation; or

• complaints about dust are received.

Operation

The following procedures are proposed for the management of dust emissions from the mine:

• disturbance of the minimum area necessary for mining. Reshape, topsoil and rehabilitate completed overburden emplacement areas as soon as practicable after the completion of overburden tipping;

• maintain coal handling areas in a moist condition using water carts to minimise wind blown and traffic generated dust;

• maintain water sprays on product coal stockpiles and use sprays to reduce the risk of airborne dust;

• all roads and trafficked areas will be watered using water carts to minimise the generation of dust;

• all haul roads will have edges clearly defined with marker posts or equivalent to control their locations, especially when crossing large overburden emplacement areas;

• obsolete roads will be ripped and re-vegetated;

• development of minor roads will be limited and the locations of these will be clearly defined;

• minor roads used regularly for access etc will be watered;

• access tracks used by topsoil stripping equipment during their loading and unloading cycle will be watered;

• long term topsoil stockpiles, not used for over 6 months will be revegetated;

• dust aprons will be lowered during drilling;

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 246 • drills will be equipped with dust extraction cyclones, or water injection systems;

• water injection or dust suppression sprays will be used when high levels of dust are being generated from drilling activities;

• adequate stemming will be used during all blasting operations;

• automatic sprays, or other dust control mechanisms will be used when tipping raw coal that generates excessive dust quantities at the raw coal bins;

• all spillage of material at the CPP will be cleaned up to prevent dust;

• water sprays are/will be fitted at all transfer points within the CPP; and

• mining activities will be adjusted if wind conditions causes visible dust on The Putty Road or on sensitive locations.

It is envisaged that the monitoring program necessary to verify environmental performance will incorporate the following:

• one meteorological station at the existing location;

• two high volume TSP monitors at the existing location;

• one PM10 monitor in the vicinity of The Putty Road;

• four real time dust monitors will be installed to measure PM10 concentrations to the west, south west, east and north west of the mine. Any high levels of dust will trigger appropriate alarms allowing the mine to modify activities;

• 21 deposition gauges at the existing locations; and

• real time monitoring of wind speed and direction will assist in best management practices.

Monitoring of operations will be used to demonstrate compliance with consent conditions. Where non-conformances are detected, additional safeguards will be investigated to satisfy WML’s statutory obligations.

16.4.8 Noise

Objectives

To manage noise emissions throughout the operation of the mine, to ensure compliance with the relevant performance indicators and regulatory requirements and to ensure that noise emissions do not unduly affect the amenity of nearby residences.

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 247 Mitigation Measures

To reduce and minimise noise impacts, WML has investigated the feasibility of noise suppression for their haul truck fleet (Komatsu 830E, 240 tonne Leibherr and 190 tonne CAT) as well as the existing coal conveyor. The truck noise suppression package may include engine and fan shrouding, modified retarders being added to equipment working in exposed areas. Conveyor mitigation will include quieter rollers and shrouding.

Additionally, the existing noise management plan for Warkworth Mine, including a regular monitoring program will be used to reduce impacts further. Features of the noise monitoring program include the following items:

• the need for attended as well as unattended monitoring is specified for given locations and operating conditions. To ensure that suitable data is captured, the types of monitoring equipment for each location are specified. Weather impacts on monitoring are also addressed;

• a qualitative guide for data collection is provided;

• the number of monitoring stations and their locations is nominated over the life of the mine;

• monitoring duration and frequency for each site is specified, depending on the progress of mining operations;

• the monitoring includes sampling such as statistical parameters L1, L10 and L90 as well as descriptors such as Leq and Lmax noise levels;

• two real time noise monitors will be installed to measure noise levels to the north west and south west of the mine. Any high levels will trigger appropriate alarms allowing the mine to moderate its activities; and

• a noise logger will be installed to the east of the mine to assist in managing noise emissions.

16.4.9 Vibration

Objective

To minimise the effect of blasting on the surrounding community, and to ensure that the blasting activities comply with regulatory and safety requirements.

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 248 Mitigation Measures

ANZECC recommend the following limitations to minimise annoyance to blasting (they apply where blasting is audible at noise sensitive locations):

• air blast overpressure should not exceed 115 dB(LinPeak) for more than 5 % of the total number of blasts in a year;

• air blast overpressure should not exceed 120 dB(LinPeak) at anytime;

• peak particle velocity for ground vibration should not exceed 5 mm/s for more than 5 % of the total number of blasts in a year;

• peak particle velocity for ground vibration should not exceed 10 mm/s at any time;

• no blasting on Sundays or public holidays; and

• blasting should be avoided during temperature inversion conditions.

Warkworth Mine’s existing blast management strategy is currently under review and will be used to ensure appropriate charge masses are used for blasting in areas closest to residences or the Mount Thorley Industrial Estate. Such charge masses (or maximum instantaneous charge MIC) are presented in Chapter 11.

16.4.10 Aboriginal Heritage

Objective

To ensure that all sites of Aboriginal Heritage are identified on the site prior to construction activities and that appropriate measures are implemented for their conservation.

Mitigation Measures

On the basis of the archaeological survey and test excavation of the proposed extension area, the following recommendations will be adhered to:

• Due to the loss of the sand sheet adjacent to Sandy Hollow Creek, a salvage excavation could be carried out as a condition of development consent. The aim of the salvage would be to increase the sample size of artefacts recovered during test excavations of the sand sheet by excavating a single pit with an area of approximately 4 m2 to a depth of approximately 1.5 m.

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/5 SEPTEMBER 2002 249 • It should be noted that the above may not be warranted if similar areas of sand sheet are preserved adjacent to this site as part of the mine's proposed Green Offsets Strategy;

• The relocation of the northern axe grinding groove site at PN10, on Longford Creek will be discussed with the local Aboriginal community to determine an appropriate outcome. The possibility of the boulder on which they occur being removed (salvaged) and displayed within a local cultural centre has been raised.

• Sites that are outside the proposed impact area should be managed to ensure they are not inadvertently damaged or destroyed. Access to these areas will be maintained to interested Aboriginal community groups. Measures may include fencing of sites or whole areas to restrict access to these areas, cultural heritage awareness training of relevant CNA staff, establishing a management plan for internal use by CNA and regular inspection of these areas to monitor site condition. Ground disturbance should be avoided in areas potentially retaining buried Aboriginal archaeological material.

In addition to the above UHWC, as the representing Aboriginal body have stated that they would not oppose any application for consent to destroy Aboriginal heritage sites within the extension area if WML agrees to the following:

• That the UHWC be funded to carry out an historical video of the entire Mining Lease prior to mining to add to the UHWC’s historical library. It is their intention that this video is produced by UHWC personnel.

• That an Aboriginal collection and salvage program be drawn up by the UHWC for all the affected Aboriginal sites recorded inside the extension area.

• That representatives of the UHWC be employed to assist in the removal of the northern axe grinding grooves that are to be affected by the extension.

• It is the opinion of the UHWC that once the grinding grooves have been removed then they should be either placed close to the larger set of southern grinding grooves or placed in a cultural heritage centre.

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 250 • That relics recovered by UHWC are to be cleaned and catalogued by the UHWC representatives and that a report, developed by the UHWC, detailing this activity is to be supplied to CNA and NPWS once finished. Care and control of all the Aboriginal relics, salvaged by UHWC, will be applied for by the UHWC. All expenses are to be paid for by CNA.

• That the UHWC be able to fence off the ceremonial site at CNA’s expense.

16.4.11 Visual

Objective

To minimise the visual intrusiveness of Warkworth Mine to the surrounding locality.

Mitigation Measures

Careful mine planning and mitigation will minimise the intrusiveness of the development by ensuring the highest potential visual absorption capacity is maintained throughout the mine extension. Mine planning and mitigation measures include:

• retaining the southern portion of Saddleback Ridge throughout the 18 year extension. Saddleback Ridge is the highest point on the Mining Lease and will provide considerable visual shielding for the village of Bulga;

• retaining Watts Peak to the north of the Mining Lease throughout the 18 year extension to provide visual screening for the village of Warkworth and scattered residents located along Jerry’s Plains Road;

• overburden emplacement areas will be designed to provide visual shielding to active mining operations. The outer slopes of the emplacement areas will be constructed initially, resulting in short term visual impacts associated with movement of machinery associated with emplacement and shaping activities. The outer slopes will be revegetated with pasture and native tree species as soon as possible following construction to provide continued visual shielding of active mining and emplacement activities for the life of the extension;

• the rehabilitation schedule is designed to ensure the maximum possible disturbed area is rehabilitated at any one time, increasing the absorption capacity of the development. The mine plan involves returning a section of the South Pit, which had previously not been mined due to the lower quality of the coal resource in the area. Completion of mining operations in the South Pit by Year 7, will enable the accelerated rehabilitation of the eastern half of the Mining Lease and allow future rehabilitation to progress linearly to the west following the progression of the mine.

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/5 SEPTEMBER 2002 251 • accelerated rehabilitation of the Woodlands Pit and other areas adjacent to The Putty Road has been incorporated into the rehabilitation plan; and

• the worst affected property owners will be individually contacted to discuss the option of off-site treatments such as landscaping works at each location to minimise the visual impacts from affected properties.

16.4.12 Traffic and Transport

Objective

The objectives in relation to traffic and transport are to minimise:

• disruption to traffic on The Putty Road during bridge and conveyor construction works;

• the impacts of construction traffic on the local road network; and

• the impacts of road closures as a result of blasting.

Mitigation Measures

The following safeguards will be implemented to minimise the extent of impacts associated with construction activities and the operation of the mine on traffic and access requirements in the surrounding area:

Construction

• consultation with SSC and the RTA will occur prior to any partial or full road closures;

• a TMP will be prepared for all proposed infrastructure works. The TMP will be prepared prior to construction in accordance with RTA guidelines and approval conditions. The TMP will include as a minimum road closure durations, notifications and the location of any temporary traffic diversions;

• the RTA’s NSW Specification for Control of Traffic at Road and Bridge Works will be adhered to, to ensure safe traffic flow is maintained during construction;

• vehicle movements will be restricted to the minimum necessary to complete the works;

• materials and equipment will be delivered during typical working hours;

• construction vehicles will be required to stay on formed roads or designated laydown areas;

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 252 • vehicle / plant movements will be confined to areas previously cleared of vegetation; and

• materials and equipment will be stored securely on site.

Operation

• a TMP will be prepared for mining operations, providing details of road closures associated with blasting and the use of the by-pass road. The TMP will be prepared in accordance with RTA guidelines and approval conditions.

• the TMP will include as a minimum road closure times, durations, location of any temporary traffic diversions and a specification for appropriate signage and notification. The RTA’s NSW Specification for Control of Traffic at Road and Bridge Works will be followed in providing traffic control to maintain safe traffic flow;

• blasting which requires road closures will be avoided during times of school bus usage.

16.5 MONITORING PROGRAM

Environmental monitoring will be carried out at all stages of the project to provide data that is sufficient to ensure the commitments made in this EIS are followed through both the construction and operation phases of the mine. Detailed monitoring programs will be developed during the preparation of any EMPs. The monitoring program will include:

• the scope of the monitoring program;

• procedures for reporting non-conformances;

• responsibilities for rectifying non-conformances;

• mechanisms to improve the EMPs to prevent future non-conformance; and

• environmental audits of the EMP will be periodically undertaken by accredited auditor(s).

16.6 COMMUNITY CONSULTATION

The EMPs will detail the community liaison strategy for all phases. The objectives of the community consultation strategy are to:

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 253 • minimise the impact on community amenity by keeping them informed about the construction program;

• provide advice regarding local issues to maximise community benefit; and

• consider community concerns in the construction and operation planning and the design of further mitigation measures.

The strategy will include procedures that will facilitate the following actions:

• maintain the CNA environmental contact line to report incidents and complaints;

• maintain a register of complaints including the details of actions taken in response to any complaints received; and

• provide the public with adequate notice, prior to the start of construction, via announcements in the local newspaper.

16.7 REPORTING REQUIREMENTS

Warkworth Mine will report to its regulators and the community as part of its existing reporting requirements during operation. The mine’s environmental performance will also be audited on a regular basis for compliance with regulatory commitments and CNA’s EMS.

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 254 Extension of Warkworth Coal Mine environmental impact statement

CHAPTER 17

Project Alternatives and Justification 17 PROJECT ALTERNATIVES AND JUSTIFICATION

17.1 INTRODUCTION

This chapter provides an overview of the alternatives to the proposed mine plan that have been investigated as part of the EIA process. The reasons for justifying the extension in the manner proposed are subsequently presented, having regard to biophysical, economic and social considerations and the principles of ESD.

17.2 PROJECT ALTERNATIVES

17.2.1 Overview of Project Alternatives

During the EIA process, a number of alternatives to the proposed mine plan were considered. These alternatives are summarised in Table 17.1 and shown in Figure EIS-53 in Volume 4.

Table 17.1 Summary of Project Alternatives

Alternative Overview of Project Alternative Number 1 Alternative 1 is the original mine plan, which involves extending open cut mining operations to the west across the entire width of the Mining Lease, in the area bounded by Jerry’s Plains Road to the north, Wallaby Scrub Road to the west and The Putty Road to the south. 2 Alternative 2 is the preferred option and involves extending open cut mining operations to the west towards Wallaby scrub Road, whilst retaining elevated ridges on the northern and southern boundaries of the site. 3 Alternative 3 involves the implementation of underground mining, west of the existing open cut operations at Warkworth Mine. 4 Alternative 4 presents a revised version of the preferred mine plan, which was aimed at the promotion of biodiversity conservation by retaining the woodland located to the north of the site. This alternative involves extending existing operations to the west in the area bounded by the woodland to the north, Wallaby Scrub Road to the west and The Putty Road to the south. 5 Alternative 5 presents the “do-nothing option” providing no extension to the existing operations at Warkworth Mine. As part of this alternative, mining operations would begin to wind down in April 2003 and subsequently cease as the mine is developed to all existing approval boundaries.

A description of each project alternatives are considered in greater detail in the subsequent sections, including an analysis of the biophysical, economic and social considerations associated with each alternative. A comparison of the potential impacts associated with each project alternative is presented in Table 17.2.

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 255 17.2.2 Project Alternative 1

Project Alternative 1 was the initial mine plan investigated by CNA and was based upon the original plan developed by mine planners of Peabody Resources Limited, prior to CNA becoming the mine managers and operators of Warkworth Mine in 2001.

The original mine plan was aimed at maximising the recovery of coal reserves by extending open cut operations to the west to Wallaby Scrub Road. This alternative involved extending mining across the entire width of the Mining Lease, between The Putty Road and Jerry’s Plains Road. The mine plan included progressing mining operations through the elevated ridges located at the southern and northern boundaries of the site known as Saddleback Ridge and Watts Peaks.

CNA have undertaken a number of technical investigations to determine the feasibility of this alternative. While the mine plan maximises the recovery of coal reserves from within the Mining Lease, it is also subject to a number of environmental and economic constraints including:

• location of significant Aboriginal sites within southern area;

• economic viability of recovery of coal in southern area; and

• location of topographical buffers to mining operations.

Aboriginal archaeological investigations undertaken by AMBS in the proposed extension area identified a number of significant Aboriginal sites in the northern and southern areas of the Mining Lease, east of Wallaby Scrub Road. In particular, significant axe grinding grooves were identified in the southern area in the vicinity of Doctors Creek.

Sub-surface investigations of coal resources in the extension area indicated that while there are good coal resources located under the southern and northern areas of the Mining Lease, high strip ratios (the ratio of overburden to coal) mean that these areas would be only be marginal or uneconomical to mine.

Elevated ridges located near the northern and southern boundaries of the Mining Lease provide considerable physical barriers to mitigate environmental impacts upon the villages of Warkworth and Bulga. Watts Peak provides a buffer to the village of Warkworth and Saddleback Ridge provides a substantial buffer to the village of Bulga and properties located south of the Warkworth Mine site. The ridge areas currently retain considerable habitat value, provide visual screening and act as buffers to assist in the amelioration of noise and dust impacts to surrounding residents. Progressing open cut operations through the highpoints on each ridgeline will result in a considerable increase to the likely impacts upon amenity issues facing the local community.

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 256 Given the location of the grinding grooves and their significance to the local Aboriginal community, the relative uneconomic viability of removing coal and the location of topographical buffers, the original mine plan, or Project Alternative 1, was modified by CNA.

17.2.3 Project Alternative 2

Project Alternative 2 is the preferred option for the extension to Warkworth Mine and forms the basis of the proposal. This alternative is based upon a revision of the original mine plan described in Project Alternative 1.

The amended mine plan retains elevated terrain located near the northern and southern boundaries of the site. The highest point in the lease occurs on the southern part of Saddleback Ridge at 165 m AHD with a secondary ridge reaching a high point at Watts Peak of 142 m AHD near the north western corner of the site. The highpoints on both ridgelines are retained in the 18 year mine plan with the western limit of mining now defined by Wallaby Scrub Road and the elevated ridges.

A detailed description of the preferred alternative is presented in Chapter 3 and a summary of the findings of the EIS presented in Section 17.4.

17.2.4 Project Alternative 3

Projective alternative 3 involves underground mining through the remainder of the extension area and was assessed as a potential alternative method to open cut mining. Underground mining would limit the requirement for vegetation clearance, removal of Aboriginal sites and result in a reduction to impacts upon local amenity, including issues associated with dust, noise and visual amenity.

An investigation was undertaken to determine the potential underground resource available using underground mining techniques. The assessment was undertaken based on the maximum potential coal available and did not take into consideration constraints such as seam splitting or faulting. The assessment included normal constraints imposed on underground mining, including:

• a minimum seam thickness of between 1.5 and 2.0 m;

• a minimum depth of cover of 50 m; and

• a minimum separation of 40 m between working sections.

In general, the assessment concluded that a maximum of 68 Mt of ROM coal would be recoverable using underground mining techniques. This is a maximum of approximately 29 % of the estimated reserve of 238 Mt ROM coal that would be recovered under the proposed mine plan. If further operational

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 257 constraints are factored in, the recovery would realistically more likely be 12 % of estimated open cut reserves.

The recovery of only between 12 and 29 % of the recoverable coal reserves means that underground mining within the extension area is uneconomical. Mining by this method would preclude economic recovery of the resource due to the inability to mine thin seams and the coal lossed due to a lack of adequate cover coupled with the losses inherent in underground mining methods.

In addition, underground mining provides an alternative technique to open cut mining and correspondingly requires an alternative skills base from the workforce. Whilst some activities are common to both open cut and underground mining techniques, an extensive staff redeployment training program together with considerable job losses and staff turnover would be expected under this alternative.

Underground mining also requires specialised equipment to undertake the operations. The initial capital outlay to purchase such equipment and loss in opportunity costs due to the redundancy of the open cut equipment would further limit the economic viability of the option.

17.2.5 Project Alternative 4

Project Alternative 4 was developed to promote biodiversity conservation and determine whether it was economically viable to exclude the woodland in the northern part of the extension area from mining. Flora and fauna investigations found that this woodland provides habitat for a number of threatened species listed under the TSC Act. This alternative retains a large proportion of woodland to assist in the conservation of habitat for threatened species the promotion of biodiversity conservation.

This alternative involves a reduction in the proportion of coal resource within the Mining Lease, which is available for mining. Following consultation with planningNSW and NPWS, this alternative also examined the feasibility of extending mining operations through Saddleback Ridge south to The Putty Road.

Retaining the woodland within the northern part of the proposed extension area, would require changes to the orientation of the pits, particularly where the extension adjoins Wallaby Scrub Road. The pits would be required to be orientated perpendicular to the strike of the coal seam, oriented on an east to west rather than north to south axis.

The strike length of the pit adjacent to Wallaby Scrub Road would preclude the use of dragline operations, restricting mining to truck and shovel operations. Due to the benching required to stabilise the walls of the pit, the long coal haulage required (due to the depth of the pit and the height of the

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 258 overburden emplacements) and the non-continuous operation of a shovel, a truck and shovel operation would be economically unviable.

Aligning the pits on an east west axis and extending operations through Saddleback Ridge in the southern portion of the site is expected create considerably greater impacts upon local amenity from the early stages of the mine plan.

The east west alignment of the pits, will allow views to active mining operations and bench construction along the length of the strip. The buffering affect on noise and dust emissions afforded by the elevated ridges in the western half of the extension area would also be reduced during the early stages of the mine extension.

As previously described, mining through the elevated terrain on Saddleback Ridge is also considered to have limited economic viability. While the southern area contains good coal resources the first economic seam is at depth of 380 m, therefore, the ratio of overburden to coal is too high for the economic recovery of coal.

17.2.6 Project Alternative 5

Alternative 5 presents the “do-nothing option”, considering no extension to the existing operations at Warkworth Mine. As part of this alternative, mining operations would begin to wind down in April 2003 when the mine is expected to reach current approval boundaries. Ultimately, operations would close when the mine is developed to all approval boundaries.

The potential closure of Warkworth Mine may result in both benefits and losses to the surrounding community. It is expected that benefits may stem from a small alleviation in environmental amenity issues such as noise, vibration and dust associated with the operation of Warkworth Mine. The long term social disadvantages to the community would involve loss of revenue and support for the community, social impacts of unemployment, and loss of social networks.

Warkworth Mine is located in an area dominated by the mining industry. Whilst the closure of Warkworth Mine may result in a small reduction in the impacts upon local amenity, the local community would still receive contributions to impacts associated with noise, vibration, air quality and visual amenity, from the continuation of the other local coal mines. If the proposed extension to Warkworth Mine is approved, best practice mitigation measures will be employed to minimise impacts on nearby residents and ensure the extension does not significantly add to the cumulative affect of surrounding mining operations on the local community.

The consequences of not proceeding with the proposed mine extension are described in detail in Section 17.5.

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 259 17.2.7 Overview of Impacts of Project Alternatives

An Option Evaluation Matrix has been developed to allow the comparison of project alternatives as presented in Table 17.2. The matrix is based upon an assessment of the biophysical, economic and social considerations associated with each project alternative. The alternatives have been rated on a scale of 1 to 5 stars for each evaluation criteria, with the higher rating indicating a more beneficial outcome. The assessment is based entirely on a qualitative assessment with ratings assigned for option comparison purposes only. No attempt has been made to quantify the ratings, or assign weightings to the evaluation categories, due to the varied focus and interests of different government and community stakeholders.

Table 17.2 Option Evaluation Matrix

Evaluation Category Project Alternative Number 12345 Recoverable coal resource ★★★★★ ★★★★ ★★ ★★★ ★ Economic viability ★★★★ ★★★★★ ★★ ★★ ★ Stimulus to economy ★★★★ ★★★★★ ★★ ★★★ ★ Social benefits ★★★★★ ★★★★★ ★★★ ★★★ ★ Local employment ★★★★★ ★★★★★ ★★ ★★★ ★ Ecology ★ ★★★ ★★★★ ★★★★ ★★★★ Water resources ★★ ★★★ ★★★★ ★★★ ★★★ Air quality ★★ ★★★ ★★★★ ★★ ★★★★ Noise and vibration ★★ ★★★ ★★★★ ★★ ★★★★ Aboriginal heritage ★ ★★★ ★★★★ ★★ ★★★★ Visual ★ ★★★ ★★★★ ★★ ★★★★ Transport ★★ ★★★ ★★★ ★★★ ★★ AVERAGE 2.83 3.75 2.92 2.67 2.50 TOTAL 3445353230

Within Table 17.2, a star (★) is used to rate the level of benefit for each alternative. A single star indicates a low socioeconomic benefit or a relatively higher degree of environmental impact. Five stars indicates greater socioeconomic benefits to the community or a lower degree of environmental impact.

Project Alternative 2 is the preferred option based upon the options evaluation matrix and has been the subject of this EIS.

17.3 ECOLOGICALLY SUSTAINABLE DEVELOPMENT

17.3.1 Introduction

The broadest meaning of ESD is:

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 260 “using, conserving and enhancing the community’s resources so that the ecological processes, on which life depends, are maintained and the total quality of life, now and in the future, can be increased” (Commonwealth of Australia 1992).

The main thrust behind ESD is that current and future generations should leave a natural environment that functions as well or better than the one inherited. Each of the principles of ESD are considered in the following sections.

17.3.2 Precautionary Principle

Interpretation

According to the Protection of the Environment Administration Act, 1991, the precautionary principle means that if there are threats of serious or irreversible damage, lack of full scientific certainty should not be used as a reason for postponing measures to prevent environmental degradation.

This principle was developed in response to one of the great difficulties of interpreting scientific data. The scientific method produces results based on confidence limits. These are controlled by the scope of data acquisition, interpretation methods and general understanding within a particular scientific discipline of a particular phenomena. This has been used as a way of validating a lack of response to a potential threat of serious or irreversible environmental degradation.

In the application of this principle:

• careful application should always be undertaken to avoid serious or irreversible environmental damage; and

• an assessment of consequences of various options should be undertaken in formulating a proposal.

ESD requires that uncertainty and the associated risk level be considered in decision making.

Justification

The environmental consequences of the proposed extension to Warkworth Mine have been assessed as accurately as possible using appropriate specialists in relevant disciplines where required. The assessment process involved computer modelling, scientific analysis and interpretation of the individual and cumulative environmental impacts of the proposed development. This process has enabled the impacts of the mine to be predicted within a reasonable degree of certainty. All predictions, however, contain a degree of uncertainty, which reflects the variable nature of the environment. Where there has been any uncertainty in the prediction of

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 261 impacts throughout the EIA process, a conservative approach was adopted to ensure the worst case scenario was predicted in the assessment of impacts.

The proposal is consistent with the precautionary principle to the extent that all potential threats to the environment have been identified and appropriate mitigation measures have been developed to minimise such impacts. These mitigation measures will be incorporated in the EMS for Warkworth Mine and are based on the best management practices currently available.

The environmental investigations undertaken during the preparation of this EIS have identified potential impacts with adequate scientific certainty to justify proceeding with the proposed development. The proposal therefore follows the objectives of precautionary principle of ESD.

17.3.3 Social Equity including Intergenerational Equity

Interpretation

Social equity involves value concepts of justice and fairness so that the basic needs of all sectors of society are met and there is a fair distribution of costs and benefits to improve the well-being and welfare of the community, population or society. Social equity does not imply equality but there should be equal access to opportunities for improved welfare, with a bias towards advantaging the least well-off sectors of society.

Social equity includes intergenerational equity, which requires that the present generation should ensure that the health, diversity and productivity of the environment is maintained or enhanced for the benefit of future generations.

Justification

The proposal is consistent with the principles of social equity and intergenerational equity through the efficient use of a resource that provides provides a number of fair and wide ranging benefits to society.

Whilst coal is a finite resource, the proposed extension to Warkworth Mine will ensure resource is utilised in an efficient and sustainable manner and that the existing benefits afforded to the community are maintained or enhanced throughout the 18 year mine extension providing both intra and intergenerational equity. Social and economic benefits to the local community through employment, income and output together with broader economic benefits from local and regional economic development and strength in export markets are detailed in Chapter 6.

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 262 A number of alternatives were investigated in formulating the preferred option such as different methods of mining and alternative mine plans. The environmental consequences of each option were identified and assessed against their associated economic and social benefits in the formulation of the preferred option. The preferred alternative retains elevated terrain located near the southern and northern boundaries of the site. These areas will not be mined due to both the uneconomical strip ratios and the environmental benefits they provide including the avoidance of archaeological sites, visual screening and provision of a buffer to noise and dust impacts for the villages of Bulga and Warkworth.

A comprehensive rehabilitation and green offsets strategy has also been developed as a part of the proposal. Progressive rehabilitation will occur following the mine plan to the west. The shaping of emplacements and rehabilitation will follow the active mining minimising the area of disturbance at any point in time throughout the mine plan.

It is proposed to establish 50 % of the rehabilitated area in the extension area as native habitat. These areas will link up with other rehabilitation measures being undertaken on the mine under existing consents. This will enhance the local connectivity in the final landform by linking habitat north and south of the subject site. The remaining areas are generally rehabilitated to their original land capability or better, contributing further to biodiversity values on the site.

The Green Offsets Strategy contains three types of green offsets that have been developed based on the proposed future use of the study area and will include the reservation of approximately 1,535 ha of land outside the proposed extension area that will provide protection of vegetation communities and biodiversity values, including 461 ha of land designated in NDAs and 1,074 ha of land designated in HMAs.

The rehabilitation strategy and Green Offset measures will provide further assurance that the health, diversity and productivity of the environment is maintained for the benefit of future generations and the principles of intergenerational equity are maintained.

17.3.4 Conservation of Biological Diversity and Maintenance of Ecological Integrity

Interpretation

Biological diversity refers to the diversity of genes, species, populations, communities and ecosystems, and the linkages between them. Biological resources provide food, medicines, fibres and industrial products. They are also responsible for vital ecological services such as maintaining soil fertility and the supply of clean and fresh water. Maintaining biological diversity safeguards life support functions and can be considered a minimal requirement for intergenerational equity.

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 263 Justification

A comprehensive assessment of flora and fauna within the study area has been undertaken as a part of the EIS. The proposal involves the gradual removal of approximately 572 ha of land including cleared area and regrowth woodland. This will result in the eventual loss of known and potential habitat for a number of species of flora and fauna, some of which are known to be regionally significant.

Whilst impacts upon flora and fauna is unavoidable, no flora and fauna species or their habitat or vegetation communities are likely to be lost from the local area as a result of the proposed development. Affected species that occur on the subject site are part of local populations that occur in the wider study area. The proposed Green Offset Strategy will conserve, enhance and manage habitat within the study area, so that local populations can be maintained.

Green Offset measures will also help mitigate against local fragmentation by enhancing habitats and increasing their potential as dispersal and colonisation corridors. Local populations would persist in the study area, and regional dispersal and connectivity corridors in the locality would be maintained throughout the proposed mine extension, ensuring adherence to the principles of conservation of biological diversity and ecological integrity.

17.3.5 Improved Valuation and Pricing of Environmental Resources

Interpretation

This principle is a component of intergenerational equity. The need to determine proper values for services provided by the natural environment, such as the atmosphere’s ability to receive gaseous emissions, cultural values and visual amenity.

Applying standard methods of valuation and pricing to environmental resources is a difficult process. This is largely due to the intangible nature of much of the natural environment. The environment has conventionally been considered a free resource as environmental factors have been excluded from determining the real cost of an activity. Improving valuing and pricing of the environment thus has two effects. Firstly, the real cost to the environment, and subsequently to society, becomes apparent and is thus included in the costs of a project. Secondly, the economic imperative of reducing costs per se will result in ESD. This does not simply mean that monetary values should be applied to the environment so that market forces will protect it. Significant qualitative analysis of particular activities is also feasible.

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 264 Justification

This EIS examined the environmental consequences of the project and has identified a number of amelioration measures for adverse impacts associated with the proposal.

Early mine planning for Warkworth Mine was aimed at maximising the recovery of coal reserves by extending open cut operations over the entire width of the lease area to Wallaby Scrub Road. The preferred alternative involves a revised mine plan which retains the elevated terrain located near the northern and southern boundaries of the site. Whilst these areas will be retained due to both economical and environmental considerations, the revised mine plan demonstrates commitment to the principle of improved valuation and pricing of environmental resources.

The mitigation measures to be adopted as a part of the proposal are summarised in Chapter 16. An indirect indication of the value of these environmental resources would be the cost of the proposed mitigation measures. The costs of these have been factored into CNA’s economic analysis, which indicates that the preferred alternative is economically viable.

17.4 FINDINGS OF EIS

17.4.1 Introduction

The EP&A Regulation requires that an EIS include:

“the reasons for justifying carrying out the development or activity in the matter proposed, having regard to biophysical, economic and social considerations and the principles of ecologically sustainable development.”

The principles of ESD in relation to the proposal have been considered in the preceding section. The following sections provide an overview of the main findings of the EIS having regard to the biophysical, social and economic considerations.

17.4.2 Biophysical Considerations

Ecology

The subject site and study area contains vegetation, habitats and flora and fauna species of local, regional and state and national significance. Potential impacts of the proposed extension include gradual loss of vegetation and habitat over 18 years and a corresponding small, short-term reduction in local and regional connectivity. Impacts would be offset by retention and management of vegetation and habitats in the study area as part of a Green Offset Strategy.

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 265 A SIS has been prepared for all flora and fauna, including threatened woodland birds, mammals, reptiles and amphibians in the state and national context. The SIS concludes that the impacts of the proposed extension are not likely to be significant.

Water Resources

Continued mining at Warkworth Mine will result in ongoing groundwater seepage to the North and West Pits, with an increasing contribution occurring as leakage from the surrounding undisturbed coal measures. Leakage may also occur and increase from shallow alluvial areas associated with Wollombi Brook and the Hunter River.

The water quality will reflect a mixture of coal seams and interburden with a salinity level generally similar to that observed in the current mine water system, ranging from 4,000 to more than 6,500 EC.

Clean water run-off will continue to be segregated from mine water via the maintenance of contour drains, the diversion channel between Sandy Hollow and Longford Creeks and sedimentation and mine water dams. Continued mining will have a negligible impact on local and regional watersheds. Parts of Sandy Hollow, Dights and Doctors Creek catchments previously consumed by mining will be rehabilitated and natural run-off returned to these creeks in eastern and north eastern areas of the Mining Lease.

Modelling indicates the likelihood that surplus water will need to be removed from site. Testing of the mine water system against 100 years of daily rainfall records indicates surpluses can be managed, providing the majority of the HRSTS high and flood flow discharge opportunities are utilised.

17.4.3 Social Considerations

Air Quality

Dust dispersion modelling has shown that the proposed extension will not have a significant impact upon air quality. The study concludes that with the exception of Property Nos. 13 and 26, all private properties surrounding Warkworth Mine will experience dust levels below EPA amenity and health goals for the life of the proposed extension. Property No. 13 is predicted to 3 experience an exceedance of the 24 hour 50 µg/m criterion for PM10 in Years 10, 15 and 18 while Property No. 26 is predicted to experience an exceedance 3 of the annual average cumulative 30 µg/m criterion for PM10 in Year 10 alone.

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 266 Noise

Noise modelling has shown that under SI weather conditions and with the strict implementation of mitigation measures, most private properties will experience noise levels below EPA goals.

Modelling has also shown that under worst case INP derived weather conditions, and with the implementation of mitigation measures noise at all but 10 private residential properties is below or marginally (less than 3 dB) above EPA noise goals. Notwithstanding this, with the exception of one private residential property, noise levels at all these locations are predicted to only increase marginally compared to existing noise levels.

A comparison against possible acquisition limits imposed on similar operations, indicates marginal exceedances at five private residential properties. Again, noise at these locations is predicted to only increase marginally compared to existing levels. CNA will negotiate to purchase these properties in accordance with the predicted conditions of consent.

Vibration

Warkworth Mine’s existing blast management strategy will be used to ensure appropriate charge masses are used for blasting in areas closest to residences or the Mount Thorley Industrial Estate. This will ensure there will be no exceedances above ANZECC guidelines.

Aboriginal Heritage

A number of Aboriginal archaeological sites and associated landform zones will be either partially or completely removed by the proposed extension. The majority of sites are considered of low conservation significance, consisting of open artefact scatters many of which are already in disturbed contexts. The artefacts were of locally derived raw materials and generally did not contain any attributes that make them unique or rare in the Upper Hunter Valley.

However, the overall impact on Aboriginal cultural significance was considered to be substantial given the nature destructive nature of open cut coal mining. There were a small number of sites within the study area that were considered to be of moderate to high conservation significance and of particular concern to the local Aboriginal community, including two grinding groove sites and sand sheet adjacent to Sandy Hollow Creek.

Whilst the in-situ conservation of a number of sites is unfeasible due to the relative positions within the extension area, appropriate management in consultation with the local Aboriginal community including possible salvage operations and exclusion zones will minimise the impacts upon the conservation significance of the area.

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 267 Visual

Warkworth Mine will become increasingly visible to a number of viewer locations throughout the 18 year extension. However, the proposal forms an extension of existing operations at Warkworth Mine and will be visually integrated with surrounding mining operations throughout the locality.

Transport

Vehicle movements associated with infrastructure construction activities are not expected to have a noticeable impact on the surrounding road network. An expected 2.3 % increase in vehicle movements on The Putty Road will be experienced during the peak civil infrastructure construction period of approximately 3 months.

The possible integration of the Warkworth Mine and Mount Thorley Operations workforce, will result in fewer employees travelling to and from the mine sites on a daily basis, during the operation of the two mines. The existing intersection on The Putty Road is considered adequate to cater for vehicle movements entering the site.

Warkworth Mine will continue to be managed under existing operational practises, with a correspondingly minor increase in service vehicle requirements associated with an increase in production.

Social Amenity

Potential impacts upon social amenity such as air quality, noise and vibration have been outlined in the preceding sections. Social benefits to the community will be generated from the continued opportunities that are presented to local residents from CNA and Warkworth Mine’s operations.

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 268 The operations at Warkworth Mine provide local residents with community and family open days, developing the skills of the employees through education and training programs, and donations to the local schools, charity groups and emergency services.

The continuation of social networks, and the unified identity of the area as a coal mining locality will continue to strengthen with the continuing operations of Warkworth Mine. The retention of employment will support the stability of the local population and therefore support the maintenance of services and industry. The consequences of the mine not proceeding are outlined in Section 17.5.

17.4.4 Economic Considerations

The socioeconomic assessment concludes that the proposed 18 year extension to operations at Warkworth Mine will provide significant economic benefits to the local and regional economy.

The proposed mine extension will make a significant economic contribution to the economy at a local, national and international level. It is expected to provide $8.6 billion in additional sales revenue and $340 million in royalties. Based on expenditure over the previous 12 months, Warkworth Mine is expected to inject $163 million into the local economy per annum, which equates to $2.9 billion over the life of the mine.

17.5 CONSEQUENCES OF NOT PROCEEDING WITH THE PROPOSED EXTENSION

There are a number of consequences of not proceeding with the proposed extension. These include:

• the objectives of the proposal outlined in Chapter 1 would not be realised;

• an existing coal mine, which produces approximately 7 Mtpa of processed coal principally for export, will be limited to operating under existing approvals;

• mining operations will be required to be modified and wound back by April 2003 as the mine approaches the existing approval boundaries;

• mining operations will ultimately cease as the mine is developed to existing approval boundaries;

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 269 • the coal resource within the lease will not be fully developed or realised. While it is recognised that there are other project alternatives, such as underground mining, they are currently not economically viable;

• there would be significant job losses at both Warkworth Mine and Mount Thorley Operations as operations decline and ultimately cease. It is estimated that there would be a loss of between 300 and 450 direct jobs in the local area within the next five years and an eventual loss of a further 220 direct job opportunities in the longer term;

• due to flow-on effects, up to an additional 1,350 jobs will be impacted, predominantly in the Hunter Valley, within the next five years and up to additional 2,000 jobs in the longer term;

• there will be a significant opportunity cost to the Australian economy over the next 18 years including a loss of sales revenue of $8.6 billion and $340 million in royalties to the NSW government;

• there will be a significant reduction in expenditure within the local economy once mining operations cease. Based on expenditure into the local economy over the last 12 months, there will be a reduction of $163 million expenditure in the Hunter Valley, including $75 million per annum within the Singleton LGA;

• there will be a reduction in the amount of funds CNA will be able to donate to education schemes, charity organisations and emergency groups within local and regional communities;

• there may be a reduction in population in the surrounding area, and within time, a loss of social services and facilities;

• land committed as NDAs and HMAs, which will be managed to protect and in some areas increase biodiversity values, will not be realised; and

• environmental consequences associated with the proposed extension to Warkworth Mine will not eventuate.

17.6 CONCLUSION

This EIS has presented the findings of an environmental assessment for the proposed extension to Warkworth Mine. Warkworth Mine is an existing open cut coal mine, which has been producing coal principally for export since operations began in 1981.

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 270 The proposal involves extending two pits (known as the North and West Pits) to the west and one pit (Woodlands Pit) to the south. Wallaby Scrub Road will form the extent of the extension of the North and West Pit, while The Putty Road and the lease boundary will form the extent of the extension of the Woodlands Pit.

The EIS was prepared having regard to biophysical, economic and social considerations and the principles of ESD. No significant environmental impacts have been identified during the preparation of the EIS that cannot be mitigated by appropriate safeguards and management strategies. Mitigation measures identified in the EIS form part of the proposal and will be incorporated into the EMPs for construction activities and the operation of the mine.

A comprehensive Green Offsets Strategy has been developed as a part of the proposal to conserve, enhance and manage habitat within the study area. The strategy contains three types of Green Offset measures that are based on the proposed future use of the study area. The strategy includes the management of approximately 1,535 ha of land outside the proposed extension area that will provide protection of vegetation communities and biodiversity values, including 461 ha of land designated in NDAs and 1,074 ha of land designated in HMAs.

It is also proposed to establish 50 % of the rehabilitated area in the extension area as native habitat. These areas will link up with other rehabilitation measures being undertaken on the mine under existing consents and enhance the local connectivity in the final landform by linking habitat north and south of the subject site.

The social and economic benefits afforded by the continued operation of the mine, provide justification for the proposed Warkworth Mine extension.

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 271 Extension of Warkworth Coal Mine environmental impact statement

PART E References, List of Abbreviations and Glossary REFERENCES

Andrefsky, W. (1998) Lithics: Macroscopic Approaches to Analysis. Cambridge University Press.

Australian and New Zealand Environment and Conservation Council (2001) Technical Basis for Guidelines to Minimise Annoyance due to Blasting Overpressure and Ground Vibration.

Australian Bureau of Statistics (2001) Hunter Statistical Division (SD 110) Basic Community Profile.

Australian Bureau of Statistics (2001) New South Wales (STATE 1) Basic Community Profile.

Australian Bureau of Statistics (2001) Singleton (A) (LGA 17000) Basic Community Profile.

Austroads Guidelines (1988). Guide to Traffic Engineering Practice, Part 5 – Intersections at Grade.

Baker, N. (1992) NSW National Parks and Wildlife Service Hunter Valley Aboriginal Sites Assessment Project: Stone Artefact Assessment and Analysis - Recording Techniques and Methodology. Report to NPWS.

Baker, N. (1994) Moffats Swamp Dune: Final report on archaeological site salvage, testing and artefact analysis. Report to RZM Mining.

Baker, N. (1997) Archaeological Test Excavations of Aboriginal Sites at Bettys Creek, Mt Owen Mine, Hunter Valley, NSW. AMBS Consulting. Report to Mt Owen Mine, BHP Coal Australia.

Baker, N.; Clarke, E., and Martin, G. (in prep.) Salt Pan Creek, Mt Thorley Mine Archaeological Salvage Excavations. AMBS Consulting. Report to C&A Pty Ltd.

Barton, H. (2001) Howick Coal Mine Archaeological Salvage Excavations, Hunter Valley, NSW. AMBS Consulting. Report Prepared for Coal & Allied.

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/5 SEPTEMBER 2002 273 Brayshaw, H. (1986) Aborigines of the Hunter Valley: a study of colonial records. Scone, NSW. Scone & Upper Hunter Historical Society.

Brayshaw, H. (1989) Archaeological Survey of Proposed 330kV Transmission Line Deviation near Warkworth, Hunter Valley, NSW. Report to the Electricity of NSW.

Brayshaw, H. (1993) Survey and assessment of Aboriginal sites Mt Thorley Mine Hunter Valley, NSW. Report to Mt Thorley Co-Venture - R.W.Miller & Company Pty Ltd.

Brayshaw, H. and Haglund (1990) Archaeological investigations of proposed 330kV pylon positions at Doctors Creek near Warkworth, Hunter Valley, NSW. Report to the Electricity Commission.

Buonicore A T and Davis W T (1992) Air Pollution Engineering Manual. Air and Waste Management Association, Published by Van Nostrand Reinhold, 115 Fifth Avenue, New York 1003.

Cane, S. (1989) Australian Aboriginal seed grinding and its archaeological record: a case study from the Western Desert. In Foraging and Farming, D. R. Harris and G. C. Hillman (eds.), 99-119. London, Unwin Hyman.

Charman, P.E.V. (1978) Soils of New South Wales – Their Characterisation, Classification and Conservation – Soil Conservation Service of NSW, Technical Handbook No. 1.

Charman, P.E.V. and Murphy B.W. (1991) Soil – Their properties and Management. Soil Conservation Service of NSW. Oxford University Press. Melbourne, Victoria.

Coal & Allied (2001) Annual Environmental Management Report.

Coal & Allied (2001) Annual Report 2001.

Coal & Allied (2001) Social and Environmental Report 2001.

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/5 SEPTEMBER 2002 274 Coal and Allied (2002) Unpublished Data.

Cotterell, Brian and Kamminga, Johan. The formation of flakes. American Antiquity. 1987; 52(4):675-708.

Dean M, Holmes N and Mitchell (1990) Air Pollution from Surface Coal Mining: Community Perception, Measurement and Modelling. Proceedings of International Clean Air Conference, Auckland, NZ, March 25-30.

Dean-Jones, P. and Mitchell, P. (1993) New South Wales National Parks and Wildlife Service Hunter Valley Aboriginal Sites Assessment Project: Environmental Modelling for Archaeological Site Potential in the Central Lowlands of the Hunter Valley. Report to NSW National Parks and Wildlife Service.

Department of Mineral Resources (1987) Hunter Coalfield Regional Geology, 1:100 000 Sheet.

Department of Urban Affairs and Planning (1997) Upper Hunter Cumulative Impact Study and Action Strategy, NSW Government.

Dyall, L. (1979) Warkworth coal tender area - interim and final reports on Aboriginal relics. Report to Warkworth Mining Ltd.

Ebert, J. I. (1992) Distributional Archaeology. Albuquerque, University of New Mexico Press.

Edwards, D. and J. F. O'Connell (1995) Broad spectrum diets in arid Australia. Antiquity, 69: 769-783.

Elliot, G.L. and Veness, R.A. (1981) Selection of Topdressing Material for Rehabilitation of Disturbed Areas in the Hunter Valley. Journal of Soil Conservation. NSW 37 37-40.

Environment Protection Authority (1994) Environmental Noise Control Manual.

Environment Protection Authority (1999) Environmental Criteria for Road Traffic Noise.

Environment Protection Authority (2000) Environment Protection Authority NSW Industrial Noise Policy.

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/5 SEPTEMBER 2002 275 ERM (1999) Ravensworth East Mine Environmental Impact Statement Main Report and Appendices: A-1.

ERM Mitchell McCotter (1995) Extension of Mining at Mount Thorley Operations, Environmental Impact Statement.

ERM Mitchell McCotter (1997) Extension of mining Operations at Ravensworth Mine.

ERM Mitchell McCotter (1998) Hunter Valley South Pit Modifications, Environmental Impact Statement.

ERM Mitchell McCotter (1999) Bulga Operation EIS for continued Mining. For Bulga Coal Management Pty Ltd.

Erskine, W. E. (1991) Alluvial history of archaeological sites on Camberwell coal project, NSW. A report to Archaeological Services.

Fahey, M. E. (1994) Geomorphological Assessment; Archaeological Sites "W6", "W7", "W8", "W9", "W10" and "C" and the Sandy Hollow and Dight's Creek Catchments. Warkworth Mining Limited.

Flenniken, J. and White, J. P. Heat treatment of siliceous rocks and its implications for Australian Prehistory. Australian Aboriginal Studies. 1983; 1:43-48.

Foley, R. (1981) A model of regional archaeological structure. Proceedings of the Prehistoric Society. 47:1-17.

Foskett, W.E. (1975) Geological Survey of NSW. Department of Mines.

Galloway, R. W. (1963) Geomorphology of the Hunter Valley. Storey, R., ed. General Report on the Lands of the Hunter Valley, NSW. Melbourne, CSIRO. pp. 90-102.

Global Soil Systems (2002) Warkworth Coal Mine Extension: Soil and Land Capability Report.

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/5 SEPTEMBER 2002 276 Haglund, L. (1991) Warkworth Mining Limited Proposed expansion of open cut mine EIS: archaeological survey. Volume 1. Report prepared for Envirosciences Pty Ltd on behalf of Warkworth Mining Limited.

Haglund, L. (1999) Warkworth Coal Mine: survey for Aboriginal heritage material. Report to Warkworth Mining Ltd.

Haglund, L. (2001) Archaeological investigations within Warkworth Mining Lease relating to Sullivans and Dights Creeks, NSW. Report to Warkworth Mining Ltd.

Hansen and Consulting (2000) Additional Noise, Air Quality and Water Management Information Requested by the Environment Protection Authority. Prepared for COAL Australia by Hansen Consulting.

Higgs, E. and Vita-Finzi, C. (1972) Prehistoric economies, a territorial approach. Higgs, E. (ed.) Papers in Economic Prehistory. Cambridge, Cambridge University Press, pp. 27-36.

Hiscock, P. (1986) Technological change in the Hunter River Valley and its implications for the interpretation of late Holocene change in Australia. Archaeology in Oceania. 28:65-76.

Hiscock, P. (1993) Bondaian technology in the Hunter Valley, New South Wales. Archaeology in Oceania. 28:65-76.

Hiscock, P. (2001) Looking the other way. A materialist/technological approach to classifying tools and implements, cores and retouched flakes. McPherron, S. and Lindley, J., (eds.) Tools or Cores? The Identification and Study of Alternative Core Technology in Lithic Assemblages. University of Pennsylvania Museum.

Hiscock, P. and Attenbrow, V. (1996) Backed into a corner. Australian Archaeology. 42:64-65

Hiscock, P. and Shawcross, W. (2000) Archaeological Analysis of the Hunter Valley 1 Artefact Assemblage. Report to Robert Paton Archaeological Studies Pty Ltd.

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/5 SEPTEMBER 2002 277 HLA-Envirosciences (1994). Soil Survey for the Proposed Warkworth Mine Expansion.

HLA-Envirosciences (1995). Environmental Impact Statement, Expansion of Warkworth Coal Mine at Mount Thorley.

Holmes Air Sciences (1998) Draft Air Quality Assessment – Donaldson Project. Holmes Air Sciences (2000) Review of air quality data, Bengalla Open Cut Mine, Muswellbrook, Hunter Valley.

Holmes Air Sciences (2000) Air Quality Assessment: Mt. Arthur North. Prepared for Dames & Moore.

Hughes, P. and Shawcross, W. (2001) Archaeological Monitoring on the Sand Dune at NPSW Site No. 37-5- 0166 (Site I), Cheshunt Pit, Hunter Valley Operations, NSW. A Report to Coal and Allied Operations Pty Ltd.

Hughes, P. J. (1981) An archaeological survey of the Bayswater No. 2 Colliery proposed lease extension area, Muswellbrook, the Hunter Valley, NSW. A report to Natural Systems Research Pty Ltd.

Hughes, P. J. (1984) An overview of the archaeology of the Hunter Valley, its environmental setting and the impact of development. Volume 1, NSW National Parks and Wildlife Service Hunter Valley Region Archaeology Project Stage 1.

Hughes, P. J. (1996) A Geomorphological Assessment of the Proposed Carrington Mine Site, Hunter Valley, NSW. A report to ERM Mitchell McCotter Pty Ltd.

Hughes, P. J. (1997) A geomorphological assessment of site 37-5-63, Hunter Valley No.1 mine NSW. A report to ERM Mitchell McCotter Pty Ltd.

Humphreys, G. S. and Mitchell, P. B. (1983) A preliminary assessment of the role of bioturbation and rainwash on sandstone hillslopes in the Sydney Basin. In Young, R. W. and Nanson, G. C. (Eds.) Aspects of Australian sandstone landscapes. Australian and New Zealand Geomorphology Group Special Publication No. 1.

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/5 SEPTEMBER 2002 278 Hunter Valley Research Foundation (2001) Hunter Region Economic Indicators March Quarter 2001.

Hunter Valley Research Foundation (2001) Newcastle and the Hunter Region 2000-2001.

Hunter Valley Research Foundation (2002) Hunter Region Economic Indicators March Quarter 2002.

Intergovernmental Panel on Climate Change (1996) Climate Change 1995 - The Science of Climate Change - Contribution of Working Group 1 to the Second Assessment Report of the Intergovernmental Panel on Climate Change. Edited by Lakeman J A, Cambridge University Press.

Koettig, M. (1986) Test excavations at six locations along the proposed pipeline route between Glennies Creek Dam, Hunter Valley region, NSW. A report to the Public Works Department.

Koettig, M. (1987) Monitoring excavations at three locations along the Singleton to Glennies Creek pipeline route, Hunter Valley, NSW. A report to the Public Works Department.

Koettig, M. (1991) Survey and Test Excavations Bulga Lease Authorisation 219. Report to Saxonvale Coal Pty Ltd.

Koettig, M. (1994) Bulga Lease Authorisation 219 Salvage Excavations. Report to Saxonvale Coal Pty Ltd.

Koettig, M. and Hughes, P. J. (1985) Archaeological investigations at Plashett Dam, Mount Arthur North and Mount Arthur South in the Hunter Valley, New South Wales. A report to the Electricity Commission of New South Wales and Mount Arthur South Coal Pty Ltd.

Kovac, M. and Lawrie, J.W. (1991) Soil Landscapes of the Singleton 1: 250,000 Sheet. Soil Conservation Service of NSW.

Kuskie, P. and Kamminga, J. (2000) Salvage of Aboriginal archaeological sites in relation to the F3 Freeway near Lenegans Drive, Black Hill, New South Wales. Report to the Roads & Traffic Authority, NSW.

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/5 SEPTEMBER 2002 279 Macbeth (1994) Munsell Soil Colour Charts. Revised Edition.

Mackie Environmental Research (2002) Warkworth Coal Mine, Water Management Studies.

McCarthy, F. D. (1943) An analysis of the knapped implements from eight Elouera industry stations on the south coast of New South Wales. Records of the Australian Museum. 21:127-153.

McCarthy, F. D. and Davidson, F. A. (1943) The Elouera industry of Singleton, Hunter River, New South Wales. Records of the Australian Museum. 21(4):210-230.

McCarthy, F.D. (1976) Australian Aboriginal Stone Implements. 2nd edition. Australian Museum Trust, Sydney.

McIlveen, G.R. (1984) Singleton 1:25 000 Geological Sheet 9132-IV-N NSW Geological Survey. Sydney.

Mineral Resources New South Wales (2000) Quantity and Value of major mining products in New South Wales: 1997/98-1999/00 [Online, accessed 4 May 2002]. URL: http://www.minerals.nsw.gov.au/mine/99_00_prod.htm

Mineral Resources New South Wales (2001) Minfact No. 19 March 2001 [Online, accessed 4 May 2002]. URL: http://www.minerals.nsw.gov.au/minfacts

Mineral Resources New South Wales (2002) 2001-2002 New South Wales Minerals Industry Annual. NSW Department of Mineral Resources.

Mineral Resources New South Wales (2002) Coal Industry Profile. NSW Department of Mineral Resources.

Mineral Resources New South Wales (2002) New South Wales minerals industry overview.

Moore, D. R. (1970) Results of an archaeological survey of the Hunter River Valley, New South Wales, Australia. Records of the Australian Museum. 28(2):25-64.

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/5 SEPTEMBER 2002 280 Moore, D. R. (1981) Results of an archaeological survey of the Hunter River Valley, New South Wales, Australia - Part II: Problems of the lower Hunter and contacts with the Hawkesbury Valley. Records of the Australian Museum. 33(9):388-442.

Nanson, G. C. and Young, R. W. (1988) Fluviatile evidence for a period of late Quaternary pluvial climate in coastal southeastern Australia. Palaeogeography, Palaeoclimatology, Palaeoecology. 66:45-61.

Nelson, M. (1991) The study of technological organisation. In Schiffer, M. (ed.) Archaeological Method and Theory. Tuscon, University of Arizona Press. pp. 57-100.

NEPC (1998) Final Impact Statement for the for the Ambient Air Quality National Environment Protection Measure. National Environment Protection Council Service Corporation.

NERDDC (1988) Air pollution from surface coal mining: Volume 2 Emission factors and model refinement. National Energy Research and Demonstration Council, Project 921.

NGGIC (1999) National Greenhouse Gas Inventory 1997 with Methodology Supplements. Available http://www.greenhouse.gov.au/

Northcote, K.H. (1979) A Factual Key for the recognition of Australian Soils. Rellim Technical Publications, Adelaide.

NSW EPA (1998) Action for Air – The NSW Government’s 25-Year Air Quality Management Plan. NSW EPA. NSW EPA (2001A) Approved Metyhods and Guidance For the Modelling and Assessment of Air Pollutants in New South Wales. Available www.epa.nsw.gov.au/air/amgmaap.pdf

NSW Minerals Council (2002) Minerals and Mining in NSW. [Online, accessed 3 July 2002]. URL: http://www.nswmin.com.au/minerals/

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/5 SEPTEMBER 2002 281 NSW Minerals Council (2002) The Use of Rocks and Minerals. [Online, accessed 3 July 2002]. URL: http://nswmin.co.au/minerals/az-minerals.html

Pearson, M. Sullivan, S. (1995) Looking After Heritage Places: The Basics of Heritage Planning for Managers, Landowners and Administrators. Melbourne University Press.

Renfrew, C. and Bahn, P. (1991) Archaeology: Theries, Methods and Practise. Thames & Hudson.

Roads and Traffic Authority (1998) Traffic Volume Data for the Hunter Region, NSW Government.

Roads and Traffic Authority (1998) Unpublished Spot Vehicle Counts – Jerry’s Plains Road.

Rowney, M. and White, J. P. (1997) Detecting heat treatment on silcrete: experiments with methods. Journal of Archaeological Science. 24(7):649-657.

Schiffer, M.B. (1987) Formation Processes of the Archaeological Record. University of Utah Press, Salt Lake City.

Schwartz J, Dockery D W and Neas L M (1996) Is daily mortality associated specifically with fine particles? The Journal of Air and Waste Management, Volume 46, 927-939. Singleton Shire Council (1998) Introduction to Statistical Demographic Profile.

Singleton Shire Council (2001) Coal Mining and Power Generation. [Online, accessed 4 July 2002]. URL: http://www.singleton.nsw.gov.au/visitors/profilemajindcoa.ht ml

Soil Conservation Service of NSW (1986) Aerial Photograph Interpretation for Land Resource Mapping. Technical Handbook No. 8, Sydney.

SPCC (1983) Air Pollution from Coal Mining and Related Developments.

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/5 SEPTEMBER 2002 282 SPCC (1986) Particle size distributions in dust from open cut coal mines in the Hunter Valley. Report Number 10636-002-71, Prepared for the State Pollution Control Commission of NSW. Stapleton and Hallam (1994) Transport Implications of Proposed Expansion of Warkworth Coal Mine.

Stern, N. (1981) Salvage excavation and surface collections at Nine Mile Creek, Saxonvale coal mine, Hunter Valley. A report to the Central Engineering Division, BHP Pty Ltd.

Story, R.; Galloway, R. W.; van de Graaff, R. H. M., and Tweedie, A. D. (1963) General Report on the Lands of the Hunter Valley. Land Research Series No. 8. Commonwealth Scientific and Industrial Research Organisation, Australia.

Sullivan, S. and Bowdler, S. (1984) Site Survey and Significance Assessment in Australian Archaeology. Canberra RSPacS, Australian National University.

Sweller, S. (2002) Vegetational and climatic changes during the last 40,000 years at Burraga Swamp, Barrington Tops, NSW. Quaternary Australasia. 20:38.

Thomas, D. H. (1983) The Archaeology of Monitor Valley 1. Epistemology. Anthropological Papers of the American Museum of Natural History. American Museum of Natural History.

Thorpe, W. W. (1918) AMS9 Letters received. E81918.

Traffic Counting Supplies and Service (1994) Hourly Classification by Day – Putty Road Mount Thorley – in Stapleton and Hallam (1994).

URS (2000) The Mount Arthur North Coal Project Environmental Impact Statement.

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/5 SEPTEMBER 2002 283 US EPA (1985 and updates) Compilation of Air Pollutant Emission Factors, AP-42. Fourth Edition. United States Environmental Protection Agency, Office of Air and Radiation Office of Air Quality Planning and Standards Emissions.

US EPA (1995A) User’s Guide for the Industrial Source Complex (ISC3) Dispersion Models - Volume 1 User’s Instructions. US Environmental Protection Agency, Office of Air Quality Planning and Standards Emissions.

US EPA (1995B) User’s Guide for the Industrial Source Complex (ISC3) Dispersion Models - Volume 2 Description of Model Algorithms. US Environmental Protection Agency, Office of Air Quality Planning and Standards Emissions.

US EPA (1997) EPA’s revised particulate matter standards – facts sheet. United States Environmental Protection Agency Office of Air & Radiation Office of Air Quality Planning & Standards. Utp: http://ttnwww.rtpnc.epa.gov

Walker, P. H. and Coventry, R. J. (1976) Soil profile development in some alluvial deposits of eastern New South Wales. Australian Journal of Soil Research. 14:305-317.

Warkworth Mining Limited (1979) Environmental Impact Statement, Warkworth Mine.

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/5 SEPTEMBER 2002 284 LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS

AADT Annual Average Daily Traffic

ABL Assessment Background Level

ABS Australian Bureau of Statistics

AHD Australian Height Datum

AMBS Australian Museum Business Services

ANU Australian National University

ANZECC Australian and New Zealand Environment and Conservation Council

AS Australian Standard

AS/NZ Australian/New Zealand Standard

CCL Consolidated Coal Lease

CL Coal Lease

CNA Coal and Allied Operations Pty Limited

CO Carbon Monoxide

CPP Coal Preparation Plant

DA Development Application

dB Decibels

DLWC Department of Land and Water Conservation

DMR Department of Mineral Resources

dt Diesel Tonnes

DUAP Department of Urban Affairs and Planning

EA Environment Australia

EIA Environmental Impact Assessment

EIS Environmental Impact Statement

EMP Environmental Management Plan

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/5 SEPTEMBER 2002 285 EMR Environmental Management Report

EMS Environmental Management System

ENCM Environmental Noise Control Manual

EP&A Act Environmental Planning and Assessment Act, 1979

EP&A Environmental Planning and Assessment Regulation, 2000 Regulation

EPA Environment Protection Authority

EPBC Act Environmental Planning and Biodiversity Conservation Act, 1999

EPI Environmental Planning Instrument

ERM Environmental Resources Management Australia Pty Limited

ERM Environmental Resources Management

ESA Effective Survey Area

G Gram

g/m2/month Grams Per Square Metre Per Month

GSS Global Soil Systems

GST Goods and Services Tax

GVM Gross Vehicle Mass

ha Hectare

HAS Holmes Air Sciences

HBOC Hunter Birds Observers Club

HCMT Hunter Catchment Management Trust

HMA Habitat Management Area

HMP Habitat Management Plan

HRSTS Hunter River Salinity Trading Scheme

Huonbrook Huonbrook Environment and Heritage Pty Limited

HVRF Hunter Valley Research Foundation

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/5 SEPTEMBER 2002 286 INP Industrial Noise Policy

kg/ha Kilograms Per Hectare

kg/m3 Kilograms Per Cubic Metre

km Kilometres

km/hr Kilometres Per Hour

km2 Square Kilometres

L Litre

L/m2/day Litres Per Square Metre Per Day

LEP Local Environmental Plan

LGA Local Government Area

LWTC Lower Wonnarua Tribal Council

m Metres

m2 Square Metre

m3 Cubic Metre

MER Mackie Environmental Research

mg/m3 Milligrams Per Cubic Metre

MGJ Million Gigajoules

MIC Maximum Instantaneous Charge

ML Mega Litres

MLpa Million Litres Per Annum

MLpd Million Litres Per Day

mm Millimetres

MNES Matters of National Environmental Significance

MOP Mine Operations Plan

Mt Million Tonnes

MTCL Mount Thorley Coal Loader

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/5 SEPTEMBER 2002 287 Mtpa Million Tonnes Per Annum

MTWSS Mount Thorley Water Supply Scheme

NDA Non Disturbance Area

NES National Environmental Significance

NHMRC National Health and Medical Research Council

NO2 Nitrogen Dioxide

NPWS National Parks and Wildlife Service

OSL Optically Stimulated Luminescence

PFM Planning Focus Meeting

PM Particulate Matter

PM10 Particulate Matter with Aerodynamic Diameters less than 10 Micrograms

pphm Parts Per Hundred Million

ppm Parts Per Million

RBL Rating Background Level

REP Regional Environmental Plan

RIC Rail Infrastructure Corporation

RLPB Rural Lands Protection Board

ROM Run of Mine

RoTAP Rare or Threatened Australian Plant

RTA Roads and Traffic Authority

SD Statistical Division

SEPP State Environmental Planning Policy

SI Still Iso-Thermal

SIS Species Impact Statement

SO2 Sulphur Dioxide

SPCC State Pollution Control Commission

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/5 SEPTEMBER 2002 288 SSC Singleton Shire Council

SWMP Soil and Water Management Plan

t Tonnes

TMP Traffic Management Plan

tph Tonnes Per Hour

TSC Threatened Species Conservation Act, 1995

TSP Total Suspended Particulates

UHWC Upper Hunter Wonnarua Council

WLALC Wanaruah Local Aboriginal Land Council

WML Warkworth Mining Limited

WMS Water Management System

WNAC Wonnarua Nation Aboriginal Corporation

% Per Cent

°C Degrees Celsius

µg/m3 Micrograms Per Cubic Metre

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/5 SEPTEMBER 2002 289 GLOSSARY

A1 Horizon This is the upper most layer of a soil generally referred to as topsoil. It has a high content of organic matter relative to other horizons, a dark colour and maximum biological activity. This is the most useful part of the soil for revegetation and plant growth.

Acid Mine Acid leachate flowing from overburden caused by Drainage oxidisation of pyritic materials to form sulphuric acid.

Alluvium: Sediment deposited by a flowing stream, consisting of unconsolidated material including gravel, clay, silt and sand.

Ambient Sound: The totally encompassing sound in a given situation at a given time, usually composed of sound from all sources near and far.

Apedal: A soil in which little or none of the material occurs in peds or aggregated in the moist state. Apedal soils are without apparent structure and are typically massive or single grained.

Aquifer: A porous soil or geological formation, often lying between impermeable subsurface strata, which holds water and through which water can percolate slowly over long distances to groundwater springs and wells.

Attenuation: The reduction in magnitude of some variable in a transmission system, for example, the reduction of noise with distance as it travels through air.

Base Line: Studies conducted to establish prevailing environmental conditions.

Batter: The excavated or constructed face resulting from earthmoving operations which generally has a uniform gradient.

Bench: A strip of relatively level ground breaking the continuity of a steep slope or stream.

Box-cut: A relatively narrow but deep excavation with steep faces on three sides usually sunk to allow access to underground workings or as the initial excavation in open-cut mines.

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/5 SEPTEMBER 2002 291 Catchment The area from which a river or stream receives its water. Area:

Cation The capacity of the soil to hold and exchange cations such Exchange as calcium, magnesium, potassium and sodium usually Capacity: expressed in centimoles of positive charge per kilogram of soil.

Cation: Ion with a positive charge.

Character: The total of the qualities making up the individuality of the noise. The pitch or shape of a sound’s frequency content (spectrum) dictate a sound’s character.

Coagulation: The destabilisation of colloidal particles brought about by the addition of a chemical reagant known as a coagulant.

Coal Reserves: Those parts of the coal resources which are planned to be mined.

Coal Resources: All of the potential useable coal in a defined area identified by geological data.

Coarse Rejects: Solid material from a coal washery consisting of coarse and fine rock fragments such as carbonaceous shales and up to 30 per cent carbon.

Coking Coals: Low volatile hard coking coal and low ash semi-soft coking coal is used for iron and steel production.

Cross Bank: Short bank of earth built across a vehicular track to divert runoff.

Daytime For the purposes of industrial noise assessment the EPA defines daytime as the period between 7 am and 6 pm.

Decibel (dB): dB or decibel is a unit of relative noise level. Audible sound pressure varies across a range of 107 Pa from the threshold of hearing (20 µPa) to the threshold of pain (200 Pa). In order to express noise with more manageable numbers, a logarithmic scale called decibels is commonly used.

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/5 SEPTEMBER 2002 292 Decibel dB(A): The decibel scale can have a number of weighting filters applied to it, the most common being the A-weighting filter. The purpose of the filter is to apply weighting adjustments over the frequency range of human hearing so that measured levels better match perceived levels. The (A) denotes the use of this filter. The following points give an indication of what the noise levels and differences represent in terms of perception, to an average person:

• 0 dB represents the threshold of human hearing (for a young person with ears in good condition). • 140 dB represents the threshold of pain. • noise level differences of less than 2 dB are generally imperceptible; • differences of around 5 dB are usually significant; and • an increase or decrease of around 10 dB appears to double or halve the loudness of a noise.

dB (LinPeak) Units indicating the peak sound pressure level (not RMS) expressed as decibels with no frequency weighting.

Dip: The direction in which the rock strata is inclined.

Dispersible Sodic soils in which the clay fraction forms a suspension Soils: on wetting, often leading to severe tunnelling and gully erosion.

Dispersion The percentage of clay and fine silt in a soil which Percentage: disperses into suspension.

Duplex Soils: A soil in which there is a sharp change in texture between the A and B horizons.

Dyke: A sheet like body of igneous rock that has intruded across the structure of the adjacent host rocks.

Easement: A ’right of way’ over a strip of land.

Effluent: The liquid waste of sewage and industrial processing.

Electrical The measure of electrical conduction through water or a Conductivity: soil-water suspension generally measured in millisiemens per centimetre or micro-siemens per metre. An approximate measure of soil or water salinity.

Evening: For the purposes of industrial noise assessment the EPA defines Evening as the period between 6 pm and 10 pm.

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/5 SEPTEMBER 2002 293 Final Void: The excavation remaining at the cessation of open-cut mining.

Fine Rejects: Fine residual waste material separated in the coal preparation process.

Flocculation: The process by which destabilised colloidal or very fine clay particles, suspended in water, come together into larger masses which eventually settle out of suspension. Flocculation depends on the balance between exchangeable ions on the clay and those in solution, as well as the overall ionic strength of the solution.

Frequency [Hz]: Sounds have a pitch which is peculiar to the nature of the sound generator. For example, the sound of a tiny bell has a high pitch and the sound of a bass drum has a low pitch. Pitch can be measured on a frequency scale in units of hertz or Hz. The human ear can typically hear frequencies ranging from 20 Hz to 16,000 Hz.

Geophysical A description of geology with respect to its structure, data: composition and development.

Geotechnical: Relating to the form, arrangement and structure of the geology.

Groundwater: Subsurface water which is within the saturated zone and can supply wells and springs. The upper surface of this saturated zone is called the water table.

Habitat: The environment in which a plant or animal lives, and often described in terms of their geography, climate and vegetation.

Hydrogeologic: The relation of hydrological phenomena to the surface geology.

Hydrology: Science that relates to the properties, distribution and circulation of the earth’s water.

Igneous: Rock formed from magma which has cooled and solidified at the earth’s surface (volcanic) or within the earth’s crust (plutonic).

In-Situ: In its original place.

Indigenous: Native to, or originating in, a particular region or country.

Intrusion: The forcing of extraneous matter, like molten rock, into some other formation.

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/5 SEPTEMBER 2002 294 L1 The level of noise exceeded for 1 % of the sample time. L1 is often used when assessment of the effects of intermittent loud noise may be important (eg example in sleep disturbance).

L10 The noise level which is exceeded for 10 % of the time and is approximately the average of the maximum noise levels;

L90 The noise level exceeded for 90 % of the time and is approximately the average of the minimum noise levels. The L90 level is often referred to as the ‘background’ noise level and is commonly used as a basis for determining noise criteria for assessment purposes;

Land Capability: The ability of a parcel of land to be used for a given use sustainably, that is without permanent damage.

Leaching: The process of removing soluble matter(s) from soil or rock by water.

Leq Leq is the continuous sound pressure level that embodies the equivalent sound energy as the fluctuating source measured, over the same time period. Leq noise levels are often quoted with the time averaging period specified (eg Leq,1hr).

Lithology: The physical characteristics of a rock.

Lmax The absolute single maximum noise level in a noise sample.

Loudness: A rise of 10 dB in sound level corresponds approximately to a doubling of subjective loudness. That is, a sound of 85 dB is twice as loud as a sound of 75 dB which is twice as loud as a sound of 65 dB and so on. That is, the sound of 85 dB is four times or 400 % the loudness of a sound of 65 dB.

Lw Sound power level. This is a measure of the total power radiated by a source. The sound power of a source is a fundamental property of the source and is independent of the surrounding environment.

Magnetometer: An instrument used for measuring magnetic intensity. In ground surveys the magnetometer is used for measuring the vertical intensity, while aeromagnetic surveys usually measure the total intensity to determine the extent of geological resources.

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/5 SEPTEMBER 2002 295 Mean: The average value of some characteristics in a set of data.

Median Value: A value above and below which there are equal numbers of data values.

Meteorology: Science dealing with atmospheric phenomena and weather.

Mobile Plant: Construction equipment which can be readily moved around a site (eg bulldozers, scrapers, etc.).

Native: Belong to the natural flora or fauna in a region.

Noise Creep: Where several acceptable background noise sources collectively exceed the acceptable noise limit.

Octave Band Noise related effects including perception and attenuation with distance are dependent on the frequency of the noise (among other factors). Standard frequency bands have been mathematically defined to assist in analysis of the frequency content of sounds. Each band is commonly referred to by its centre frequency value. Since the centre frequency doubles from band to band, the bands are collectively referred to as octave bands.

Out-of-Pit A stockpile of spoil or overburden transported and Emplacement: dumped away from the excavation of an open-cut mine.

Outcrop: Exposed bedrock at the ground surface.

Overburden to Ratio of coal to non coal rock material expressed in cubic Coal Ratio: metres of overburden to tonnes of coal.

Overburden: Rock and soil materials overlying a useful resource material such as coal.

Particulates: Fine solid particles which remain individually dispersed in gases.

Peak Particle The maximum velocity of a particle of the transmission Velocity medium, used in assessment of vibration.

Permeability: The capacity of rock or solid to transmit fluids (through pores, bedding planes or joints).

pH: Scale used to express acidity and alkalinity. Values run from 0-14 with seven representing neutrality. Numbers less than 7 represent acidity.

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/5 SEPTEMBER 2002 296 Piezometer: A small diameter bore lined with a slotted tube used for determining the standing water level of groundwaters.

Reafforestation: The replanting of forest trees.

Recycling: The return of waste materials to the production system so that the need for raw materials is reduced.

Rehabilitation: The process of restoring to a condition of usefulness.

Revegetation: The process of re-establishing a vegetation cover.

Roosting: A place where animals rest or stay.

Saline (Soil): Contains mineral salts sufficient to impair productivity.

Salinity: A measure of the concentration of dissolved solids in water.

Seam: An identifiable discrete coal unit.

Sediment Barriers or other containing structures designed to prevent Control sediment from being washed into streams. Structures:

Sedimentation: A dam built to retard runoff from disturbed areas and allow sediment to settle out before letting clean water discharge.

SEL Sound Exposure Level. The constant sound pressure level that if maintained for one second, would deliver the same total sound energy as the original source. It is usually used to describe discrete noise events. It is similar in function to Leq and can be used to calculate the Leq arising from multiple occurrences of discrete events, over any time period.

Sewage: Waste matter discharged to a sewer.

Sewerage: Works for collecting, treating and disposing of sewage.

Sigma-theta The standard deviation of horizontal wind fluctuation

Sill: Is an igneous intrusion that is emplaced parallel to bedding.

Slurry: A fluid composed of part liquid, part solid which can be pumped.

Socioeconomic: Combination of social and economic factors.

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/5 SEPTEMBER 2002 297 Sodic Soil: Soils containing sufficient exchangeable sodium to adversely affect soil stability.

Spoil: The unconsolidated waste earth and rock excavated from a mine.

Spontaneous Spontaneous ignition of some or all of a combustible Combustion: material.

Subcrop: A unit of material that occurs just below the soil profile.

Temperature A positive temperature gradient. A meteorological Inversion: condition where atmospheric temperature increases with altitude to some height.

Thermal Coal: Medium to high ash, low sulphur thermal coals are used for domestic power generation and cement manufacture, whilst medium to low ash, high energy thermal coals are exported.

Threatened Animals that are in danger of extinction or may now be Species: considered extinct, but have been seen in the wild in the last 50 years.

Time of The time required for all parts of a catchment to Concentration: simultaneously contribute runoff flow to a given outlet point.

Topography: Description of all the physical features of an area of land and their relative positions, either in words or by way of map.

Total Suspended A measure of the total amount of small solid or liquid Particulates: particles suspended in or falling through the atmosphere.

Total Suspended A total of the total amount of undissolved matter in a Solids: volume of water.

Turbidity: A measure of the amount of suspended solids (usually fine clay or silt particles) in water.

Volatile Matter: Matter which is readily transformed to a gaseous state.

Woodland: Land covered by trees which do not form a closed canopy.

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/5 SEPTEMBER 2002 298 Extension of Warkworth Coal Mine environmental impact statement

ANNEXA Director-General Requirements

Extension of Warkworth Coal Mine environmental impact statement

ANNEXB EIS Study Team This EIS has been prepared by ERM in association with a number of specialist companies. These companies have been detailed in Table B.1 of this document. The study team responsible for both inputs to and the preparation of this EIS are as follows.

Table B.1 Study Team

Company / Consultant Area of Responsibility Environmental Resources Management (ERM) David Snashall Project Director Brett McLennan Project Manager and Planning Framework Karl Rosen Project Coordinator, Visual and Transport Alice Spizzo Strategic Advisor Linden Edgell Socioeconomics Genevieve Kelly Socioeconomics David Robertson Ecology Will Introna Ecology Najah Ishac Noise and Vibration Greg Stewart Noise and Vibration Kaite Weeks Noise and Vibration Brett Morrison Transport Gabor Vasarhelyi GIS Derek Mascarenhas Graphics Daren Clark Graphics Alesar Kaddour Administrator Global Soil Systems (GSS) Rod Masters Soils and Land Capability Mackie Environmental Research (MER) Col Mackie Surface and Groundwater Management Holmes Air Sciences (HAS) Nigel Holmes Air Quality Australian Museum Business Services (AMBS) Alison Nightingale Aboriginal Archaeology Neville Baker Aboriginal Archaeology Gavin Martin Aboriginal Archaeology Andrew Collis Aboriginal Archaeology Jenny Allen Aboriginal Archaeology Huonbrook Environment and Heritage Phillip Hughes Aboriginal Archaeology Aboriginal Group Representatives Victor Perry Tracey Skene Barry French John Matthews Barry Anderson John Waters Rodney Matthews Luke Hickey

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AUSTRALIA 8020044RP1/FINAL/30 AUGUST 2002 B1 Extension of Warkworth Coal Mine environmental impact statement

ANNEXC Community Newsletters Extension of Warkworth Coal Mine

Newsletter Number 1 March 2002 Overview of Proposal Introduction the mine will intersect the current Potential Environmental consent boundary in 2003. To ensure Warkworth Mine Limited (WML) is It is proposed to continue the current Issues continuity of the operation, development proposing an extension of their existing development pattern and progress the consent for an extension to the mine As part of the EIS process, a number of operations at Warkworth Mine located at mine gradually to the west, as shown in boundary is required. Figure 2 specialist studies will be undertaken, Mount Thorley. Environmental . Wallaby Scrub Road will form including: Resources Management Australia Location the extent of the proposed extension. (ERM) has been commissioned by Coal Based on studies and exploration ! an assessment of potential noise WML is located in a region dominated by & Allied (CNA) to prepare an drilling, it is envisaged that the proposed and vibration impacts associated coal mining, industry and agriculture. Environmental Impact Statement (EIS) extension will enable open-cut mining at with the proposed extension of Surrounding mining activities include and development application (DA) for WML to continue until approximately WML; South Lemington Mine to the north, the proposed extension. 2020. ! Mount Thorley Coal Loader (MTCL) to an assessment of potential impacts The purpose of this newsletter is to the east, the Mount Thorley Operations The proposal also involves the on air quality associated with the inform the community about the (MTO) and Bulga Mines to the south and construction of: proposal; proposed extension, the planning Wambo Mine to the north west. The ! potentially two new bridges over The ! an assessment of potential impacts process, the issues that will be Mount Thorley industrial area is to the Putty Road. One to enable haulage on flora and fauna within the addressed as part of the EIS process east and to the west lie a number of and processing of coal at MTO and proposed extension area; and the public consultation process. farms. The villages of Bulga and one to allow the transfer of ! an assessment of potential impacts Further editions will be prepared and Warkworth are located to the south west equipment and potentially on existing surface and groundwater distributed during preparation and and north west, respectively. overburden; regimes; exhibition of the EIS. ! The existing mine and associated a by-pass road adjacent to one of ! an assessment of the impact that the Background facilities are located within the eastern the new bridges; and proposed extension will have on the In January 2001, CNA acquired the half of WML's lease area, between ! a conveyor to haul coal between visual character of the area; assets of Peabody Resources Limited, Jerry's Plains Road and Wallaby Scrub WML and MTO. ! an assessment of socio-economic formerly the largest shareholder in WML. Road. The western half of the lease impacts that the proposed extension This makes CNA the largest shareholder area is currently used for agricultural The by-pass road will allow traffic on The will have on the local, regional and and manager of WML. purposes. Putty Road to flow freely when relocating State economies; heavy mining equipment that is unable Under existing development consents, The location of WML can be seen in ! an assessment of potential impacts Figure 1. to cross via the proposed bridges. Traffic will be temporarily directed down the by- on Aboriginal and European pass while the crossing of The Putty heritage; and Road is being undertaken. ! an assessment of potential impacts Wollombi B rook Planning Framework that the proposed bridges and by- pass road will have on traffic utilising The proposed extension of WML will The Putty Road. SOUTH LEMINGTON require development consent under the Community Consultation provisions of the Singleton Local Warkworth Environmental Plan 1996. However, There will be a number of opportunities

Je given the significance of both the for the community to provide input into rrys P la in existing and proposed operations to the the preparation of the EIS. These s Hunter River R o a State, the Minister for Planning will be d opportunities include:

Wallaby Scrub the consent authority. ! public display/information days in The proposed extension is classified as Bulga and Warkworth, where WARKWORTH designated development under the R oad representatives will be available to Mount Thorley provisions of the Environmental Planning industrial area answer questions on the proposed and Assessment Act 1979, and as such, an EIS will be required to accompany extensions and to note any Mount Thorley the DA. concerns; utty Road coal loader e P Th

MT. THORLEY

Bulga Figure 1 Jerrys Plains Road

Wallaby Scrub Hunter River WARKWORTH

R oad Approximate location of proposed conveyor

Year 5 Year 2 Year 15 Year 18 Year 10

Corridor for proposed bridges over The Putty Road

Approximate proposed disturbance boundary Approximate current consent boundary

Road tty Pu e h Figure 2 T

David Snashall ! public exhibition of the EIS (following Project Director its finalisation) where any individual or Brett McLennan Project Manager group is able to make a formal Karl Rosen Assistant Project submission to the Minister on the Manager proposal. Further Information The first information day will be held in the Should you have any queries regarding the Bulga Community Hall on Friday 5 April, proposed extensions and the preparation from 4.30pm to 8.30pm, and Saturday 6 of the EIS, please contact: April, from 8.30am to 12.30pm. The next James Bailey information day will be held in the CNA Warkworth Hall on Thursday 11 April, PO Box 315 from 3.30pm to 8.30pm. SINGLETON NSW 2330 Warkworth Extension EIS Team Phone: 6570 0252 A team specialists have been selected to Emaill: [email protected] work on the EIS for the extension of WML. These include: ! Chris Salisbury General Manager, WML ! James Bailey Manager Environmental Services, Coal & Allied ! Sarah Fish Project Manager, Coal & Allied ! ERM environmental consultants conducting detailed environmental studies and preparation of the EIS. ERM team members include: Extension of Warkworth Coal Mine Environmental Impact Assessment

Newsletter Number 2 June 2002 Introduction

The purpose of this newsletter is to provide the community with an update on the progress of the preparation of the environmental impact statement (EIS) Jerrys Plains Road for the proposed extension of the Warkworth Coal Mine. Wallaby Scrub Hunter River In March 2002 we prepared and WARKWORTH distributed the first newsletter on the

R proposed extension of Warkworth Coal oad Approximate location of proposed conveyor Mine. It provided an introduction on the project including, an overview of the:

Year 5 Year 2 Year 15 ! proposed extension and associated Year 18 Year 10 infrastructure required; ! the environmental approval framework for the proposed Corridor for proposed bridges extension; over The Putty Road ! the issues that will be addressed as Approximate proposed disturbance boundary part of the environmental Approximate current consent boundary investigations; and Road tty Pu e ! h Figure 1 the consultation process that is T being undertaken as part of the preparation of the EIS. Resources Australia (ERM) were on hand at each occasion to discuss the Update On Proposal project. There has been no change or The information days were attended by a modification to the mine plan or area of total of 19 groups of residents. A the proposed extension as shown in number of key issues were identified for Figure 1. assessment in the EIS. These issues However, the proposal has been particularly relate to potential impacts on modified to include the expansion and the quality of life in the local area. The upgrade of the maintenance, mining and major issues of concern included: support facilities at Warkworth. This will ! noise and vibration; Figure 2 also allow operational synergies ! air quality; Community information day at Bulga Community Hall between Warkworth and Mount Thorley ! Operations to be achieved in the future drinking water quality; and may include staff from Warkworth ! visual amenity; and Mount Thorley Operations starting ! property values; and finishing their shifts at Warkworth. ! ecological values; and Community Consultation ! road safety. An initial round of community information Photos of the community information days were held at the Bulga Community days can be seen in Figure 2 and Hall on 5 and 6 April 2002 and at the Figure 3. Warkworth Hall on 11 April 2002. A second round of community The information days provided an information days will be held during the Figure 3 opportunity for the community to obtain first 2 weeks of the exhibition period of information regarding the proposal, view the EIS and SIS. The information days Community information day at Warkworth Hall maps and aerial photographs of the site and EIS exhibition will be advertised in and provide the opportunity for residents the next edition of the newsletter, as well to discuss issues of concern directly with as in the local newspaper. the EIS project team. Representatives from Coal & Allied and Environmental Environmental Approval ! traffic utilisingthe The Putty Road by Framework the construction of the proposed bridges and by-pass road. Preparation of EIS and SIS The SIS will provide an assessment of In addition to the preparation of an EIS, potential impacts on flora and fauna within Coal & Allied have engaged ERM to the proposed extension area prepare a Species Impact Statement (SIS). The SIS will address the potential All of the above studies have been impacts the proposed extension will have commenced and results will be presented on threatened plants and animals and in the EIS and SIS. specific vegetation communities. Warkworth Extension EIS and Extensive flora and fauna surveys have SIS Team been undertaken on the site of the proposed extension as well as Coal & A team of specialists has been selected to Allied land to the west of Wallaby Scrub work on the EIS and SIS for the extension Road. The results of these surveys will be of WML. These include: included in the SIS. The SIS will be ! Chris Salisbury placed on public exhibition with the EIS. General Manager, WML Commonwealth Approval ! James Bailey In April 2002 a referral was made to Manager Environmental Services, Coal Environment Australia to determine & Allied whether the proposed extension requires ! Sarah Fish approval under the Commonwealth Project Manager, Coal & Allied Environment Protection and Biodiversity ! ERM - Environmental Consultants Conservation Act 2000 (EPBC Act). conducting detailed environmental Based on the potential presence of some studies and preparation of the EIS and threatened species on the site, SIS. ERM team members include: Environment Australia has determined that + David Snashall approval is required under this Act. Project Director Accordingly, the proposed extension will + Brett McLennan require approval under both the EPBC Act and the NSW Environmental Planning and Project Manager Assessment Act 1979 (EP&A Act) before it + Karl Rosen can commence. Assistant Project Manager Potential Environmental Issues Further Information

As part of the EIS, a number of specialist Should you have any queries regarding the studies are being undertaken. These proposed extensions and the preparation studies include an assessment of the of the EIS and SIS, or to obtain a copy of potential impacts to: the previous newsletter, please contact: ! noise and vibration associated with James Bailey the proposed extension of WML; CNA ! air quality associated with the PO Box 315 proposal; SINGLETON NSW 2330 ! existing surface and groundwater Phone: 6570 0252 regimes; Email: ! the visual character of the area; [email protected] ! the social and economic impacts that the proposed extension will have on the local, regional and State economies; ! Aboriginal and European heritage; and Extension of Warkworth Coal Mine environmental impact statement

ANNEXD EIS Certificate SUBMISSION OF A DEVELOPMENT APPLICATION prepared under Section 78A(8) of the EP&A Act and Clause 71 of the EP&A Regulation

EIS PREPARED BY Names: David Snashall Brett McLennan Karl Rosen

Qualifications: BEc MEnvPlanning BTP(Hons) BSc BSc(Hons)

Address: Environmental Resources Management Australia Building C, 33 Saunders Street PYRMONT NSW 2009

DEVELOPMENT APPLICATION Applicant name: James Bailey Manager, Environmental Services Coal & Allied

Applicant address: PO Box 315 SINGLETON NSW 2330

Land to be developed: Property description of land to be developed is contained in DA form. A map showing land to be developed is contained in Volume 4 of EIS.

Proposed development: Extension of Warkworth Coal Mine

ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT ; An EIS is attached which addresses all matters listed in Clause 72 and Schedule 2 of the EP&A Regulation.

CERTIFICATE I certify that I have prepared the contents of this EIS and to the best of my knowledge: • it is in accordance with Clauses 72 and 73 of the EP&A Regulation; • it contains all available information that is relevant to the environmental assessment of the development to which the EIS relates; and • it is true in all material particulars and does not, by its presentation or omission of information, materially mislead.

Signature:

Name: David Snashall Brett McLennan Karl Rosen Date: Extension of Warkworth Coal Mine Extension of Warkworth environmental impact statement

Extension of Warkworth Coal Mine environmental impact statement

Telephone 02 8584 8888 Facsimile 02 8584 8800 Web www.erm.com August 2002

ISBN 1-875673-03-2 1